Especificaciones sujetas a modificación sin previo aviso.

ACCES CONTROL SYSTEM

ALCAD diseña y fabrica sus productos con las mejores características posibles, sin embargo los productos fabricados actualmente
pueden incorporar modificaciones para mejorar sus prestaciones y para adaptarse a nuevos componentes. Las nuevas especificaciones
pueden no aparecer en este manual. ALCAD revisará las especificaciones en próximas ediciones de este manual técnico.
ALCAD mantiene una web dónde se pueden consultar los datos de los productos más recientes y las especificaciones actualizadas
de todos los productos.

S Y S T E M S
ACCES CONTROL SYSTEM
D I G I T A L S Y S T E M S

D I G I T A L
1500-11-07

T E C H N I C A L M A N U A L
 INDEX
Pages
4 1. DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS. DIGITAL SYSTEM

46 2. TECHNICAL DATA
46 • Standards
46 • Telephones for houses and flats
47 • Accessories for telephones
48 • Monitors and connection brackets for houses and flats
52 • Accessories for monitors
54 • Tap-offs and splitters
56 • Entrance panels with pushbuttons
73 - Concentrators of calls
74 - Estate-identifying accessories
75 • Entrance panels with keypad
89 • Accessories for entrance panel
94 • Concierge systems
103 • Accessories for concierge systems
104 • Electric locks
106 • Electronic accessories
106 - Call extension units
107 - Switch-selector accessories
109 - Common door accessories
110 - Accessories for digital installations
111 • Modulators for TV door entry installations
113 • Power supply units

117 3. ENTRANCE PANELS: DIMENSIONS AND ACCESSORIES

128 4. MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY

128 • Accessories for entrance panels
134 • Entrance panels with pushbuttons
136 - Concentrator of calls
136 - Estate-identifying accessory
136 • Entrance panels with keypad
144 • Audio units. Video units
145 • Pushbuttons. Numeric keypad
146 • Decorative fittings for entrance panel
147 • Accessories for concierge systems
151 • Concierge systems
164 • Tap-offs and splitters
165 • Accessories for telephones
169 • Telephones for houses and flats
172 • Accessories for monitors
175 • Monitors and connection brackets for houses and flats
179 • Electronic accessories
179 - Call extension units
180 - Switch-selector accessories
180 - Common door accessory
181 • Modulators for TV door entry installations
182 • Power supply units

2
Pages
185 5. CONNECTION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS
185 • Entrance panels with pushbuttons
192 - Concentrator of calls
194 - Estate-identifying accessories
198 • Entrance panels with keypad
211 • Concierge systems
220 • Tap-offs and splitters
224 • Accessories for telephones
225 • Telephones for houses and flats
227 • Accessories for monitors
228 • Monitors and conection brackets for houses and flats
237 • Electronic accessories
237 - Call extension units
238 - Switch-selector accessories
240 - Common door accessories
241 - Accessories for digital installations
245 • Modulators for TV door entry installations
248 • Power supply units

250 6. CONFIGURATION OF ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD AND OF THE

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

264 7. PROGRAMMING THE DEVICES OF THE HOUSE OR FLAT

275 8. DIAGRAMS
275 • General points concerning installations
277 • Digital door entry installations with entrance panel with pushbuttons. Electronic call. Digital system
288 • Digital video door entry installations with entrance panels with pushbuttons. Electronic call. Digital system 4+coaxial
303 • Digital video door entry installations with entrance panels with pushbuttons. Electronic call. Digital system 4+twisted pair
318 • Digital door entry installations with entrance panel with keypad. Electronic call. Digital system
371 • Digital video door entry installations with entrance panel with keypad. Electronic call. Digital system 4+coaxial
428 • Digital video door entry installations with keypad. Electronic call. Digital system 4+twisted pair
477 • Extension of installations
477 - Extensions of the installations with telephones
480 - Extensions of the installations with monitors
488 - Extensions of the installations with call extensions
491 - Door opening using external pushbutton
492 - Opening of a second door from the telephono/monitor of the dwelling
495 - Activating a 12 Vac electric lock
498 - Activating the stairs lighting when the door is opened
500 - Activating the stairs lighting when any key of the entrance panel with keypad is pressed
501 - Activating a light, bell or siren when a call is received in the dwelling
502 - Activating an electric lock from four independent entrance panels
503 • TV door entry system installations

506 9. TROUBLE SHOOTING

506 • Digital door entry installations with entrance panel with pushbuttons. Electronic call. Digital system
509 • Digital video door entry installations with entrance panel with pushbuttons. Electronic call. Digital systeml 4+coaxial
515 • Digital video door entry installations with entrance panels with pushbuttons. Electronic call. Digital system 4+twisted pair
521 • Digital door entry installations with entrance panel with keypad. Electronic call. Digital system
534 • Digital video door entry installations with entrance panel with keypad. Electronic call. Digital system 4+coaxial
548 • Digital video door entry installations with keypad. Electronic call. Digital system 4+twisted pair
562 • TV door entry system installations

3
 DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
1
SYSTEMS. DIGITAL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
Our electronic door entry and video door entry systems provide call to a particular dwelling the visitor must use the numeric key-
security for the home, allowing the user a simple way of controlling pad of the entrance panel to key in the code which has been
the access of outsiders to his or her property. assigned to the telephone or connection bracket of that dwelling
With ALCAD’s digital system, any configuration of electronic door during the programming process.
entry or video door entry system can easily be performed in medium- A defining feature of the entrance panel with keypad is that it
and large-scale installations. Our microprocessor-based technology is possible to use the panel itself to select the values of certain
places control of different points of entry in the entrance panels them- operating parameters (e.g. type of call tone, number of times the
selves, thus eliminating the need for additional control equipment, call tone is repeated, time allowed for answering a call, time
such as selector-changers. This, along with the simplicity of the allowed for conversation, etc.), which can be adapted to the
wiring involved, the overall ease of installation and the numerous specific needs of each installation. Likewise, with this type of
configuration options, makes ALCAD’s digital system one of the most entrance panel it is possible to activate the electric lock directly
user-friendly and technically advanced solutions for this type of ins- by using the keypad to key in a previously defined code. (See
tallation. (For further information, see “General features of the digi- “Configuration options of entrance panels with keypad” on
tal electronic door entry and video door entry system” on page 7.) page 13.)
One of the main characteristics of the digital system is the con- Elements for the distribution of the video signal (in
nection in parallel of the different elements of the installation by video door entry installations)
means of a BUS-type connection. The BUS enables communication Tap-offs and splitters are used to distribute the video signal
between the different elements of the installation as well as the trans- from the video unit to the different dwellings. The tap-offs,
mission of the audio signal in both directions. Communication usually installed on each floor of the building, allow the video
between the elements is digital, so that each element of the installa- signal to be branched to the different monitors of the installation.
tion can generate and interpret digital streams. The BUS-type con- The splitters are used when several up lines or columns of video
nection makes it possible to eliminate the separate call wire for each are required.
dwelling since, in this system, the number of wires in the installation
Telephone or monitor + connection bracket
does not depend on the number of houses or flats. In place of the call
wire, a specific identifying code is assigned to the telephones or Installed in the house or flat, the telephone and the monitor
monitors of each dwelling. Assigning such a code to each device is are the elements allowing a call made from the entrance panel
known as “programming” the various devices. (See “Identifying to be received. They establish communication with the visitor
devices in the house or flat” on page 6.) and, by means of the door-opening button, allow him access to
the property. The connections bracket is used to install and con-
The system consists primarily of the following elements:
nect the monitor in the dwelling.
Entrance panel
Electric lock
Usually installed at the point of entry to the building, this element
The electric lock is an electro-mechanical device which, insta-
houses an audio unit and a series of pushbuttons (an entrance panel
lled at the entry point or door being controlled, allows the door
with pushbuttons) or a numeric keypad (an entrance panel with key-
to be opened when the door-opening button on the telephone or
pad) and is used to call the telephone of monitor of each dwelling.
monitor in the dwelling is pressed, or, in the case of entrance
Thus, we speak of the digital system with pushbutton entrance panels with keypad, when one of the pre-set door-opening codes
panel or of the digital system with keypad entrance panel, depen- is keyed in).
ding on which kind of entrance panel is used. Note, however, that
Power supply units
it is possible to carry our installations combining both types of
entrance panel. Like any other electronic system, digital door entry and video
door entry systems need an external power supply in order to
In video door entry installations, the entrance panel also houses a
function. This is provided by the power supply units which
video unit, whose function is to capture the image of the person
supply the required voltages from the mains. Power supply units
making the call.
are usually located in the hall of the ground floor or in a com-
On the entrance panel with pushbuttons, each pushbutton corres- mon area of the building.
ponds to a given dwelling; consequently, the number of dwellings
Note: For more information on the components or elements
determines the number of pushbuttons. The method of calling a
to use in an installation of digital electronic door entry or video
house or flat is the same as that used in a conventional electronic
door entry systems, see the section entitled “Components” on
door entry or video door entry system, i.e. the caller presses the
page 40.
pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling.
With the keypad entrance panel, on the other hand, to make a
4
LAST BUS
FLOOR

GROUND BUS
FLOOR
TELEPHONE
IN
THE DWELLING LOCK RELEASE
BUTTON

AUDIO UNIT

POWER SUPPLY UNITS PUSH-BUTTONS

OF ENTRANCE PANEL BUS

ENTRANCE PANEL
230 V ++ WITH PUSH-BUTTONS
230 V

AUDIO UNIT
230 V V

230 V ENTRANCE PANEL

1 2 3
1 2 3

ELECTRIC LOCK
4

7
5

8
6

9
4 5 6 KEYPAD
C 0 7 8 9
C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

BUS
LAST
FLOOR
TAP-OFF

BUS
GROUND
FLOOR
CONNECTION TAP-OFF
BRACKETS

MONITOR LOCK RELEASE VIDEO

IN BUTTON COLUMN 1 VIDEO
COLUMN 3
THE DWELLING VIDEO
BUS COLUMN 2 VIDEO UNIT
VIDEO
COLUMN 4 AUDIO UNIT
SPLITTER
POWER SUPPLY UNITS PUSH-BUTTONS
OF ENTRANCE PANEL VIDEO
SIGNAL
AND VIDEO SYSTEM
ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH PUSH-BUTTONS
230 V ++

230 V
VIDEO UNIT

230 V V
AUDIO UNIT
230 V
ENTRANCE PANEL 1 2 3

ELECTRIC LOCK 4

7
5

8
6

C 0
1
4
2
5
3
6 KEYPAD
7 8 9
C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD
5
DIGITAL ELECTRONIC VIDEODOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
IDENTIFYING THE DEVICES IN THE HOUSE OR FLAT
Conventional systems
In ALCAD’s conventional electronic door entry and video door entry systems, the call wire allowed the telephones and monitors in
each dwelling to be identified, so that the call generated in the entrance panel rang only in the desired house or flat.
Digital systems
However, as previously mentioned, in digital electronic door entry and video door entry systems, communication between entran-
ce panels and dwellings is achieved by means of a BUS-type connection. Since there is no longer any call wire, a pre-determined
digital code, different for each dwelling, is assigned to each device to identify it. Assigning such codes is referred to as programming
the device and is carried out from the main entrance panel of the installation. The devices which are programmed are the telephones
and the connections brackets in the dwellings. For information on how to program these devices, see “Programming the devices of
the house or flat” in Chapter 7.
In digital systems, therefore, every time a call is made to a dwelling from the entrance panel, a pre-determined digital code is sent
by the BUS. This code will depend either on which pushbutton has been pressed on the entrance panel (in the case of an entrance
panel with pushbuttons) or on the code entered with the keypad (of an entrance panel with keypad). Since this system has a BUS-type
connection, all the devices in the dwellings will read this code. However, the only device that can receive the call and establish com-
munication with the visitor is the one whose code (assigned during programming) is the same as the digital code sent by the BUS.
Note:
In the case of entrance panels with pushbuttons, a concentrator of calls is used as an intermediary element in generating the digi-
tal code for each of the pushbuttons. The concentrator of calls detects which pushbutton has been pressed by the visitor and transmits
this information to the audio unit so as to generate the digital code which will be sent by the BUS.
As for entrance panels with keypad, the keypad transmits the information regarding the code entered by the visitor to the audio
unit, again so as to generate the digital code which will be sent by the BUS.

Common wires Common wires

Digital code 1 Digital code 1

Telephone programmed Telephone programmed

with digital code 1 with digital code 2
Call

Digital code 1
Concentrator
of calls
OUT IN

Made in Spain

Call wire 1 Call wire 2 BUS

1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16
COL-000
cod. 9730030

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS

CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM DIGITAL SYSTEM

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD

6
GENERAL FEATURES OF THE DIGITAL ELECTRONIC
DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
The technology incorporated in the digital system has allowed the implementation of a series of features and functions whose aim
is to simplify different kinds of installation and their operation by end-users as well as post-installation maintenance work.

• Communication system with BUS-type connection system without connection polarity to the dwellings (see page 7).
• Digital electronic door entry system with 2-wire connection (see page 8).
• Digital electronic video door entry system with 4+coaxial or 4+twisted pair connection (see page 9).
• Direct connection between the entrance panels at the different points of entry (see page10).
• Possibility of installing several devices per dwelling (see page 11).
• System with confidentiality feature and electronic call (see page 12).
• Different installation options (see page 13).
• Configuration options of entrance panels with keypad (see page 13).
• Aids for programming the devices in the dwellings (see page 14).
• Aids in detecting problems (see page 14).
• User and visitor are informed of the status of the system (see page 16).
• Visitor is informed of the status of the call (see page 17).
• Auto switch-on feature in digital electronic video door entry installations (see page 18).
• Possibility of viewing the signal from the video unit (coaxial) on the television in the dwelling: TV door entry installations (see
page 18).

Each of these features and functions is described in the following pages:

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH BUS-TYPE CONNECTION, WITHOUT

CONNECTION POLARITY TO THE DWELLINGS
The digital electronic door entry and video door entry system described in this manual employs a BUS-type connection to com-
municate between the entrance panel and the devices (i.e. the telephones and monitors) in the dwellings.
This is a 2-wire BUS capable of transmitting all the necessary commands and signals, including: calls to dwellings, door-opening
(electric lock), ascending audio (to the loudspeaker of the telephone or monitor), descending audio (from the microphone of the tele-
phone or monitor), auto switch-on (on monitors only), calls to concierge unit (in installations with concierge system), etc.
To simplify the installation process and minimize possible connection errors, this BUS has no connection polarity.

Detail: Connection of the communication BUS

26 26
27 27
28 28
D1 D2 D1 D2
PROG PROG

ON OFF ON OFF
D1 D2 D1 D2

D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit

WITHOUT CONNECTION POLARITY WITHOUT CONNECTION POLARITY

TELEPHONES CONNECTION BRACKETS OF MONITORS

7
DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH 2-WIRE CONNECTION
In the digital electronic door entry system presented in this manual, 2 wires are connected to every telephone in the installation.
These 2 wires correspond to the communication BUS previously described.

WITHOUT CONNECTION POLARITY

D1 D2
PROG

ON OFF

2
LAST
FLOOR
D1 D2
Audio unit

D1 D2
PROG

2 ON OFF

GROUND
FLOOR

TELEPHONE IN
THE DWELLING
D1 D2
Audio unit

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH PUSH- BUTTONS

ENTRANCE PANEL
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD

Number of wires Description

WIRES IN
EACH TELEPHONE 2 Communication BUS

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

8
DIGITAL ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH 4+COAXIAL OR
4+TWISTED PAIR CONNECTION
The digital electronic video door entry system described in this manual adds the following connections to the communication BUS:
a pair of wires to supply power to the monitors of the installation and coaxial cable or twisted pair to transmit the video signal cap-
tured by the video unit to the monitors.
Thus, to each monitor in the installation will be connected 2 wires corresponding to the BUS, plus the 2 wires supplying power to
the monitors, plus the coaxial cable or the twisted pair carrying the video signal.

WITHOUT CONNECTION POLARITY

26
27
28

COAXIAL OR D1 D2
TWISTED PAIR

LAST 2
TAP-OFF
FLOOR 2

CONNECTION D1 D2
BRACKETS Audio unit
MONITOR IN
THE DWELLING
26
27
28
COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR

GROUND 2
TAP-OFF
D1 D2

FLOOR 2

CONNECTION
BRACKETS

MONITOR IN D1 D2
THE DWELLING Audio unit
COAXIAL
2 OR
TWISTED PAIR

POWER SUPPLY

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH PUSHBUTTONS

ENTRANCE PANEL
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD

Number of wires Description

2 Communication BUS
WIRES IN
EACH MONITOR 2 Power supply of the monitor
COAXIAL OR Transmission of the video signal
TWISTED PAIR

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC VIDEODOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

9
DIRECT CONNECTION BETWEEN THE ENTRANCE PANELS AT THE DIFFERENT
POINTS OF ENTRY
In installations with several points of entry or in housing compounds, installation is made easier by the fact that it is the entrance
panels themselves which control the different entry points, thanks to the microprocessor and electronics built into the audio units and
video units. Accordingly, in such installations no additional control devices (such as changers or selectors) are necessary.
In the case of electronic door entry installations, the connection between entrance panels is limited to one 2-wire connection. These
two wires form a communication BUS between panels (hereafter referred to as a ‘panels BUS’); this enables both communication
with dwellings from any of the panels and control of the different points of entry.
In the case of electronic video door entry installations, all that is added to the connections between panels forming the panels
BUS is the coaxial cable or twisted to transmit the video signal from one panel to another.

COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR
2
LAST 2
TAP-OFF
FLOOR 2

COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR
2
GROUND 2
TAP-OFF
FLOOR 2

CONNECTION
TELEPHONE IN BRACKETS OF
THE DWELLING MONITORS
MONITOR IN
THE DWELLING
COAXIAL
2 2 OR
TWISTED PAIR

POWER SUPPLY

COAXIAL
ENTRANCE PANEL OR ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH PUSHBUTTONS TWISTED PAIR WITH PUSHBUTTONS
2
2

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

1 2 3

4 5 6 1 2 3

7 8 9 4 5 6

C 0 7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

WITH KEYPAD WITH KEYPAD

Number Number
of wires Description of wires Description
WIRES BETWEEN
ENTRANCE PANELS Communication BUS Communication BUS
WIRES BETWEEN 2 between entrance panels
1 2 3

2 between entrance panels

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

(several points of entry) ENTRANCE PANELS 1

7
2

8
3

9
(several points of entry)
C 0

COAXIAL OR Transmission
TWISTED PAIR of the video signal

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM DIGITAL ELECTRONIC VIDEODOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
10
POSSIBILITY OF INSTALLING SEVERAL DEVICES PER DWELLING
In each of the dwellings of the installation, you can install telephones, monitors and call extension units in parallel, so that all the
devices receive the call simultaneously.
You can therefore combine devices in any of the ways shown in the table below.

Digital electronic door entry installations

TELEPHONE
+ CALL DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM:
TELEPHONE ACCESSORY AAL-120 EXTENSION DEVICES PER DWELLING

2 2

4
3
2 1

2 1 2

ENTRANCE PANEL
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Digital electronic video door entry installations

TELEPHONE
+ CALL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM:
MONITORS
ACCESSORY AAL-120 EXTENSION DEVICES PER DWELLING

2 2

2 4

POWER SUPPLY 3 1
2 2

1 3
COAXIAL
OR 4
2
TWISTED PAIR
2 1

1 2

1 1 1
2 1

1 2

ENTRANCE PANEL
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

11
 SYSTEM WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE AND ELECTRONIC CALL
CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
In the digital electronic door entry and video door entry systems, the functions of communicating with the entrance panel and of
door-opening are, by default, disabled in all the telephones/monitors of the installation. These functions can be enabled only in the
telephone/monitor which receives the call. It is therefore not possible that the devices in two dwellings are activated at the same
moment. This ensures that the conversation between the dwelling and the person making the call remains completely confidential.

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0 C 0

Call made Dwelling 1 Other dwellings

to dwelling 1

= Functions disabled

ELECTRÓNIC CALL
Once the call is made at the entrance panel and answered by the appropriate telephone/monitor, the audio unit of the panel
generates a signal formed by different frequencies and sends this signal through the communication BUS. The signal reaches the
loudspeaker of the receiver of the requested telephone/monitor, emitting a sound – the electronic call.

LOUDSPEAKER

12
DIFFERENT INSTALLATION OPTIONS
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT
It is possible to complement a digital door entry or video door entry installation
using an entrance panel with keypad with a concierge system. This allows the user
to receive and to control at a single point – the concierge unit – all the calls made to 1

4
2

5
3

6
1

4
2

5
3

the dwellings.
7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Also, it is possible to call the concierge unit from the telephone/monitor of each Entrance panel Concierge
dwelling. The user has the option of recording unanswered calls in the concierge unit with keypad

so that they can be consulted later. As many as 125 calls can be stored in the record
of unanswered calls at a given time.

The system likewise permits you to select the value of certain

parameters from the concierge unit panel itself, e.g. the type of call
tone, the number of times the call tone is repeated, etc. You can
Type of call tone therefore adapt these parameters to the specific requirements of
Concierge panel each installation.
Number of times call tone is
configuration
1

7
2

8
3

9
repeated These values are selected during the configuration process of the
...
C 0

concierge unit panel. You can learn more about configuring the
Concierge panel
concierge unit panel and the range of values permitted for each
parameter by consulting Chapter 6: “Configuration of entrance
panels with keypad and of the concierge unit panel”.

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH BLACK AND WHITE OR COLOUR IMAGE
Digital electronic video door entry installations can be performed with either a black and white (B/W) or a colour video system,
by selecting the appropriate entrance panel video unit and monitor in the dwelling.
In the black and white system, the video unit has built-in infrared LEDs for auxiliary lighting. The light emitted by these LEDs is invi-
sible to the human eye, which means that the visitor can be observed without being aware of it.
In the colour system, on the other hand, the auxiliary lighting of the video unit is provided by means of white LEDs.

CONFIGURATION OPTIONS OF ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD

In those digital door entry or video door entry installations Type of call tone
where an entrance panel with keypad is to be used, you will Number of times call tone is repeated
be able to select the values of certain operating parameters – Entrance panel Time setting to answer call
configuration
the type of call tone, the number of times the call tone is repe- 1

C
2

0
3

9
Maximum time setting for conversation
ated, the length of time allowed to answer a call or for con- Length of time electric lock is activated
Entrance panel ...
versation, etc. – from the entrance panel itself, thereby adap- with keypad
ting them to the specific needs of each installation.

This type of panel likewise allows you to activate the electric

lock directly from the entrance panel itself by entering a pre-
viously defined 5-digit code on the panel keypad. You can defi-
ne four different door-opening codes for each entrance panel.
1 2 3
Complementing this feature, the system has a built-in security
mechanism which prevents the door from being opened from the
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

keypad if a consecutive number of attempts has been made to

Door-opening feature
enter the wrong code. You can choose the number of consecuti-
ve false attempts allowed before the door-opening feature is
disabled.

You both select the values of the different parameters just described and define the door-opening codes during the process of con-
figuring the entrance panel with keypad. You can learn more about configuring the entrance panel with keypad and the range of
values permitted for each parameter by consulting Chapter 6: “Configuration of entrance panels with keypad and of the concierge
unit panel”.
13
AIDS FOR PROGRAMMING THE DEVICES IN THE DWELLINGS
To ensure that the telephones/connection brackets of the installation are programmed correctly, the system employs different tones
(e.g. a continuous tone in the telephone/monitor, a confirmation tone in the entrance panel, etc.) to confirm that each step of the
programming process has been accomplished properly. (See Chapter 7: “Programming the devices of the house or flat”.).

AIDS IN DETECTING PROBLEMS

The digital electronic door entry and video door entry system offers several features which simplify both the start-up and mainte-
nance of the installation. The most important of these are described below.

DETECTION OF A SHORT CIRCUIT IN THE BUS

If a short circuit occurs in the BUS, it is detected by the digital audio unit of the entrance panel. Thus, if the entrance panel is one
with pushbuttons, the red LED on the panel will give warning by starting to flash. As for an entrance panel with keypad, the text “F0”
will start to blink in the entrance panel display.
Once the short circuit has been eliminated, these warning signals will immediately disappear and the system will automatically
restore itself.

Entrance panels with pushbuttons

Dwellings

SHORT CIRCUIT

Comunication BUS
J1 J2

_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3

SHORT CIRCUIT

ENTRANCE PANEL
Next point of entry WITH PUSH-BUTTONS
Panels BUS

Entrance panels with keypad

Dwellings

SHORT CIRCUIT

Comunication BUS

Made in Spain

IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

SHORT CIRCUIT

1 2 3

Next point of entry

4 5 6

7 8 9

Panels BUS
C 0

SHORT CIRCUIT ENTRANCE PANEL

WITH KEYPAD
BUS of housing estate

Exterior entrance
14 Housing estate
DETECTION OF CONNECTION ERRORS

PIP... PIP...PIP
Problems of communication between entrance panel and telephones/monitors
When a call is made, the entrance panel audio unit sends a certain digital code through the BUS;
this code will depend on which pushbutton of the entrance panel has been pressed (on an entran-
ce panel with pushbuttons) or on the code entered on the keypad (for an entrance panel with key-
PIP... PIP...PIP pad). If no answer is obtained from any telephone/connection bracket/monitor, the audio unit inter-
prets this to mean that no device has been programmed with that particular digital code or that there
is some kind of communication problem (i.e. a connection error) with the telephone/connection
1 2 3
bracket/monitor. The audio unit then generates intermittent warning tones.
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Entrance panels with pushbuttons: connection problems with pushbuttons or

with the concentrator of calls
In installations with entrance panels with pushbuttons, the system detects connection problems with
the pushbutton or with the concentrator of calls. In both cases, the audio unit of the panel from which
the call is being made would be unable to detect which pushbutton was being pressed and so the
dwelling would not receive the call. The system simplifies detection of the problem by not emitting
= Functions disabled any tone at all when the affected pushbutton is pressed.

Entrance panels with keypad: connection problems between audio unit and
numeric keypad
In installations with entrance panels with keypad, the system detects a possible connection pro-
blem between the audio unit and the numeric keypad of the entrance panel. In such a case, the text
1

4
2

5
3

6
“F1” flashes as a warning in the entrance panel display.
7 8 9

C 0

DETECTION OF PROGRAMMING ERRORS

PIP... PIP...PIP
When a call is made, the entrance panel audio unit sends a certain digital code through the BUS;
this code will depend on which pushbutton of the entrance panel has been pressed (on an entran-
ce panel with pushbuttons) or on the code entered on the keypad (for an entrance panel with key-
pad). If no answer is obtained from any telephone/connection bracket/monitor, the audio unit inter-
prets this to mean that no device has been programmed with that particular digital code (i.e. there
PIP... PIP...PIP
is a programming error) or that there is some kind of communication problem with the telepho-
ne/connection bracket/monitor. The audio unit then generates intermittent warning tones.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

15
DETECTION OF TELEPHONE/MONITOR WHOSE RECEIVER HAS NOT BEEN REPLACED

The telephones and monitors have a circuit which detects the status of the
PIP... PIP...PIP
receiver, i.e. whether it has been picked up or replaced.
When a call is made to a telephone or monitor whose receiver has not been
replaced, the device informs the audio unit of the entrance panel from which
the call has been made of this situation. The audio unit then generates beeping
PIP... PIP...PIP
tones which inform the visitor that the call to the dwelling has not been made.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Entrance panel

DETECTION OF CONFIGURATION ERRORS

Error in the No entrance panel is

configuration of the configured as the
1

4
2

5
3

6
entrance panel 1

4
2

5
3

6 main panel
7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Entrance panel Concierge

with keypad unit panel

Installations with concierge units: problems in configuring panels

In installations with a concierge unit, incorrect configuration of the entrance panels in the installation or of the concierge unit panel
itself may result in the installation not functioning properly. The system detects various kinds of error and notifies the user of these
errors with appropriate texts in the entrance panel or concierge unit display.

USER AND VISITOR ARE INFORMED OF THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM

USER: SYSTEM ON STANDBY, SYSTEM ACTIVE
The device in the dwelling constantly checks the status of the system. When the receiver of the telephone/monitor is picked up,
different tones are generated, depending on whether at that moment the system is on standby or is active. Thus, the user is informed
of the status of the system. These tones can be:

PIIIIIIIIIP Continuous tone. System on standby

No dwelling is using the system. It is possible to activate additional features, e.g. auto switch-on feature (moni-
tors only), call to concierge unit (in installations with concierge system), etc.

Beeping tones. System active

PIP... PIP...PIP Another dwelling is using the system. The activation of additional features – e.g. auto switch-on feature
(monitors only), call to concierge unit (in installations with concierge system), etc. – is not possible
Note: If, after receiving a call in a dwelling, the receiver of the telephone/monitor is picked up and beeping
tones are heard, one of the following situations may be responsible:
• There may be several telephones/monitors in your dwelling and the call may have been answered by one
of the other devices.
• The visitor may have called your dwelling and then another different dwelling. If so, the visitor will establish
contact with the last dwelling called.

16
USER: ORIGIN OF THE CALL
In installations with several points of entry, the entrance panel of each point can be configured as the main or secondary panel.
This configuration will determine the type of call tone which the audio unit will generate when a call is made. Accordingly, when a
call is received in the dwelling, the type of call tone will allow the user to identify the point of entry from which the call has been
made.

VISITOR: ENTRANCE PANEL DISABLED

In installations with several points of entry, when a call is made from one of the entrance panels, the audio unit of this panel com-
municates with the audio units of the panels at the other points of entry. These panels are then disabled, so that it is no longer pos-
sible to make calls to dwellings from them.
As for housing compounds, when a call has been made
from one of the external points of entry (or gates), both the
entrance panels of the other external points of entry and Entrance panel
the panels of the building which has been called are disa- with
pushbuttons
bled. Other entrance panels
The way in which the visitor is shown that the entrance
panel has been disabled will depend on the type of panel
installed: Entrance panel 1 Entrance panel
• In installations with pushbutton entrance panels, the Call made with keypad
to dwelling 1 1

4
2

5
3

red light on these panels will blink, informing the visitor 7

C
8

0
9
1
Time
3

that another panel is in use. blocked

Other entrance panels
• In installations with keypad entrance panels, the dis- = Functions disabled
play of these panels will tell the visitor how much longer
he must wait before being able to make a call.

VISITOR IS INFORMED OF THE STATUS OF THE CALL

CALL MADE TO THE DWELLING
When a call is received on the telephone/monitor of the dwelling, the
entrance panel from which the call has been made emits several con-
firmation tones for the visitor.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Entrance panel
CALL NOT MADE TO THE DWELLING
The system also informs the visitor if the call has failed to be made to the dwelling. In this case, the entrance panel from which
the call has been made either emits beeping tones or does not emit any tones at all, depending on the cause of the failure.

Beeping tones
PIP... PIP...PIP
The call may not have been made for one of the following reasons:
• The receiver of the telephone/monitor has not been replaced.
1

7
2

8
3

9
• No telephone/connections bracket has been programmed with that pushbutton or code.
C 0

• There may be a communications problem with the telephone/connection bracket (e.g. a connection
error).

Entrance panels with pushbuttons: no tone at all.

The call may not have been made for one of the following reasons:
• Connection problem with the pushbuttons
• Connection problem with the concentrator of calls.

17
= Functions disabled
AUTO SWITCH-ON FEATURE IN DIGITAL ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
INSTALLATIONS
This feature allows you to activate certain functions without
having to receive a call first; the functions include visualisation of
the image, communication with the entrance panel and door-ope-
ning. This feature is enabled in the monitor provided that the
system is not active.
Auto Switch-on can be useful for security purposes, or when, for
some reason, one wishes to establish communication with the
entrance panel.

POSSIBILITY OF SEEING THE SIGNAL FROM THE VIDEO UNIT (COAXIAL) ON

THE TV IN THE DWELLING: TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
With ALCAD’s TV door entry system it is possible, at any
moment, to see the image captured by a video unit with an out-
put for coaxial cable on the television set in the dwelling.
The system is of particular interest in door entry installations,
COAXIAL whether ALCAD’s or those of other manufacturers, where it is
TV HEAD-END
desired that a video unit be installed at the point of entry to the
building to see visitors without having to install a monitor in each
dwelling.
The system can be installed either separately or as part of the
COAXIAL
entrance panel of an electronic door entry installation (ALCAD
TELEVISION installations only).
IN DWELLING
Telephone
of door entry system
in dwelling
230V~ ±10%

MODULATOR
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR

COAXIAL

Entrance panel ALCAD

with video unit for TV door entry system

18
DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS
INSTALLATIONS ALLOWING MANAGEMENT OF THE DIGITAL SYSTEM WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS
ALCAD’s digital system with entrance panel with Up to 96 devices
pushbuttons enormously simplifies the work involved in
medium-sized door entry and video door entry installations.
This system allows you to manage the following kinds of
installation:
• Buildings with a single point of entry and with a maxi-
mum of 96 devices, i.e. telephones or monitors (standard ins-
tallations).
• Buildings with several points of entry and with a maxi-
mum of 96 devices, i.e. telephones or monitors (installations
with several points of entry).
• Medium-sized housing compounds
We may take as an example of this type of installation housing compounds containing several detached or semi-detached hou-
ses.
In this kind of installation, the estate-identifying accessory is used as an intermediary element. This accessory, installed in the main
entrance panel of each dwelling, allows the entrance panel with pushbuttons of the external point of entry to communicate with the
entrance panels of each of the dwellings. A single estate-identifying accessory is required for each dwelling, regardless of the num-
ber of points of entry to the dwelling.

Estate Estate
identifying identifying
accessory accessory
+ +
OUT

OUT

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4 D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT OUT
AIB-000 AIB-000
SW1

SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 16 1 2 8

Note: If the characteristics of your installation are different from those described above, please see the section entitled “Digital
electronic door entry and video door entry system with entrance panel with keypad” on page 24 or consult the manufacturer directly.

19
OPERATION OF THE DIGITAL SYSTEM WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
PUSHBUTTONS

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

There are two operating states: with the system on standby and with the system active.

SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL

The devices (i.e. telephones and monitors) are inactive by default, so that
such functions as communication with the entrance panel, door-opening and
visualization of an image (on monitors) are disabled. The entrance panels
are on standby, their audio system disabled, while waiting for a call to be
made or for a monitor to activate the auto switch-on feature.
= Functions disabled

SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being active when the telephone or monitor in a dwelling receives a call from an
entrance panel or when, in a video door entry system, the auto switch-on feature is activated from one of the monitors.

AUTO SWITCH-ON FEATURE (monitors)

To activate the auto switch-on feature, press the auto switch-on button on the monitor. You will then be able to see the image cap-
tured by the video unit, open the street door, and, by picking up the receiver, establish communication with the main entrance panel
of the installation.
If the receiver is not picked up, the auto switch-on feature will remain enabled for a maximum of 30 seconds.
When the receiver is picked up, the auto switch-on feature remains enabled for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the conversa-
tion ends and the receiver is replaced.
When the period that the auto switch-on feature is active expires, the system returns to being on standby.
Characteristics:
When the auto switch-on is activated, the system does not allow any other monitor to use the auto switch-on function. On pushing
the auto switch-on button on another monitor, the status LED indicator will flash, informing the user that the system is engaged.
The call from the entrance panel has priority over the auto switch-on. If, during the time setting of the auto switch-on, a call is made
from the entrance panel to another dwelling, the auto switch-on time setting finishes automatically, and only the monitor of the house
or flat which has been called remains activated. In this way, the confidentiality of the call is maintained.

PIP... PIP...PIP

Other dwellings

Dwelling 1
Turning on the
auto switch-on system

Dwelling 1

Time limit for auto switch-on function: 30 seconds

= Functions disabled Time limit for auto switch-on function: 60 seconds

20
RECEIVING A CALL IN A DWELLING
When a call is made to a dwelling from the entrance panel, the telephone or monitor in the dwelling emits a warning sound. It
is then also possible to see the image of the visitor on the screen of the monitor. You can open the street door and, by picking up
the receiver, establish communication with the entrance panel.
Once the call has been received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer it. When this period elapses, the system reverts to being on
standby.
Once the receiver has been picked up, 60 seconds are allowed for conversation or until the receiver is replaced. The system warns
the user before the conversation period comes to an end by emitting a series of buzzing sounds, thereby allowing the conversation
time to be extended either from the dwelling, by pressing and releasing the hang-up button on the device, or from the entrance
panel, where the visitor can call again.
When the door-opening button is pressed, the visitor can enter the building. When the user ceases to press this button, the audio
unit of the entrance panel allows the signal to the electric lock to remain activated for several seconds, thus allowing the visitor suf-
ficient time to enter.
Characteristics:
If there is more than one telephone/monitor in the dwelling, all of them receive the call simultaneously. When the receiver of one
of the devices is picked up, communication is established with the visitor. If subsequently the receiver of any of the other devices in
the dwelling is picked up, beeping tones will be heard. These tones indicate that it is not possible to join the conversation.
During the time periods allowed for answering and for conversation, the system does not allow the devices of other dwellings to
join the communication. If the receiver of any such device is picked up, beeping tones will be heard. In video door entry installa-
tions, the auto switch-on feature cannot be used from the monitors either.

PIP... PIP...PIP

PIP... PIP...PIP

Other dwellings

Other monitors/telephones
Call made
to dwelling 1

Dwelling 1

Door
Monitor/telephone that answer the call opening

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds

Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation

= Functions disabled

21
 If the visitor calls one dwelling and then another from the same entrance panel, the call made to the first dwelling will be can-
celled.

1 2

Entrance panel 1
Dwelling 1 Dwelling 2
Call made to dwelling 1
and after to dwelling 2

= Functions disabled

Installations with several points of entry

In buildings with several points of entry, the entrance panel from which the call has been made remains active. The panels
installed at the other points of entry are disabled, so that calls to dwellings cannot be made from them. The red light on these
panels will blink during the time allowed for answering and for conversation, thereby informing a visitor than another panel in
the building is engaged.

Building 1 Building 1
Point of entry 1 Other points of entry
Call made
to dwelling 1

= Functions disabled

Housing compounds
It is possible to establish communication with one of the dwellings from
the external point of entry to the compound and, at the same time, to
establish communication with another dwelling from the internal entrance
panel of this dwelling.
O

Thus, if the call is made from the entrance panel at the external point
BS

of entry or gatehouse: Panel of

dwelling 1
• The internal entrance panel of the dwelling requested is disabled, so
that it is not possible to make calls to dwellings. The red light on this panel
will blink during the time allowed for answering and for conversation,
O

thereby informing the visitor.

• The internal entrance panels of the other dwellings will remain on External point of entry
Call made to dwelling 1
LE

standby while waiting for a call to be made to one of the dwellings.

On the other hand, if the call is made from the internal panel of the
Panels of
dwelling: other dwellings
• The entrance panel at the external point of entry or gatehouse will = Functions disabled
TE

remain on standby.
• The internal entrance panels of the other dwellings will remain on
standby.

22
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

There are two operating states: with the system on standby and with the system active.

SYSTEM ON STANDBY
The video unit is active, so that it is possible to see the image captured by the
video unit on the TV in the house or flat by tuning in the selected TV channel on the
modulator.
The operation and characteristics are the same as those of a digital electronic
door entry system on standby. See “Digital electronic door entry and video door
entry installations” on page 20.
O

SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being active when the telephone in a dwelling receives a call from an entrance
panel.
BS
When a call is made to a house or flat from the entrance panel, the telephone in the dwelling emits a warning sound. It is also
possible to see the image of the visitor on the TV by tuning the television to the TV channel selected in the modulator. The street door
can be opened and, by picking up the receiver, communication can be established with the entrance panel.
The operation and characteristics of the TV door entry system are the same as those of a digital electronic door entry installation
with the system active. See “Digital electronic door entry and video door entry installations” on page 21.
O
LE
Entrance panel Dwelling 1
Call made to dwelling 1
TE

23
DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEMS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD
INSTALLATIONS WHICH ALLOW THE DIGITAL SYSTEM TO BE MANAGED
WITH AN ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD
ALCAD’s digital system with entrance panel with keypad
enormously simplifies the installation process of door entry and
Up to 999 devices
video door entry equipment in medium- and large-scale instal-
lations.
This system handles the following types of installation:
• Standard installations in buildings with a single point of
entry and with a maximum of 999 devices, where a device is
a telephone or monitor.
• Installations in buildings with several points of entry and
with a maximum of 999 devices, where a device is a telephone 1

7
2

8
3

or monitor.
C 0

• Medium- to large-scale housing compounds

As an example of this type of installation, we may take the
case of a housing compound consisting of a number of build-
ings and with, say, 96 devices – where a device is a telephone or monitor – in each of the buildings.
In the building inside the compound, it is possible to use either entrance panels with pushbuttons or entrance panels with keypad.
If entrance panels with pushbuttons are chosen, a estate-identifying accessory is used as an intermediary element. This element,
installed in the main entrance panel of each building, allows the internal entrance panels of each building to communicate with the
entrance panel with keypad at the external point of entry. A single estate-identifying accessory is required for each building, regard-
less of the number of points of entry to the building.

Up to 96 devices Up to 96 devices

1 8

1 8

Estate
identifying
accessory
+
1 2 3

4 5 6
OUT

7 8 9
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000 C 0
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Note: If the characteristics of your installation are different to those described above, please consult the manufacturer.

24
OPERATION OF THE DIGITAL SYSTEM WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

There are two operating states: with the system on standby and with the system active.
Regardless of the operating state, it is possible at all times to activate the electric lock directly from the entrance panel (door-open-
ing function).

DOOR-OPENING FUNCTION
To activate the door-opening function, press the door-opening key on the numeric keypad. Then enter one of the door-open-
ing codes defined during configuration of the entrance panel. Once the code has been entered, the green LED on the panel will light
up and the numeric keypad will activate the electric lock. The signal activating the electric lock will continue to be sent for between
1 and 19 seconds, depending on the value selected for the electric lock activation period during configuration of the entrance panel.
Characteristics
If the complete code which is entered is incorrect, the red LED on the panel will light up. At the same time, the panel will emit a
sound, informing the user that an erroneous code has been entered.

Door-opening
key 1

7
2

8
3

9
1 2 3
C 0

Correct 4 5 6
code
1 2 3
1

4
2

5
3

6
1

4
2

5
3

6
BRR
7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0
Incorrect
code
Door-opening code

1 2 3
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

4 5 6

SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL

The devices (telephones and monitors) are by default inactive, so that such
functions as communication with the entrance panel, door opening, and image
viewing (on monitors) are disabled. The entrance panels are on standby, with
the audio system disabled until a call is made or until the auto switch-on feature 1

7
2

8
3

is activated by a monitor.
C 0

= Functions disabled

25
SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from the standby to the active state when the telephone or monitor in a dwelling receives a call from an
entrance panel or when, in a video door entry system, the auto switch-on feature is activated from one of the monitors.

AUTO SWITCH-ON FUNCTION (monitors only)

To activate the auto switch-on feature, press the auto switch-on button on the monitor. You will be able to view the image captured
by the video unit, to open the street door and, by picking up the receiver, to establish communication with the main entrance panel
of the installation.
If the receiver is not picked up, the auto switch-on feature will remain active for a maximum or 30 or 60 seconds, depending on
the time-setting for answering calls which was selected during configuration of the entrance panel.
When the receiver is picked up, the auto switch-on function remains enabled for a maximum of 30, 60, 90 or 120 seconds,
depending on the time-setting for conversation which was selected during configuration of the entrance panel; or until the conver-
sation is ended by hanging up the receiver.
When the auto switch-on period expires, the system reverts to being on standby.
Characteristics:
When the auto switch-on is activated, the system does no allow any other monitor to use the auto switch-on function. When the
auto switch-on button on another monitor is pressed, the LED status indicator will flash, warning the user that the system is engaged.
A call from the entrance panel has priority over the auto switch-on. If, during the time-setting of the auto switch-on, a call is made
from the entrance panel to another dwelling, the auto switch-on time-setting finishes automatically, and only the monitor in the house
or flat which has been called remains activated. This ensures that the call remains private and confidential.

PIP... PIP...PIP

Other dwellings

Dwelling 1
Turning on the auto switch-on system
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Communication
Dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 with entrance panel

Time limit for auto switch-on function: 30, 60 seconds (1)

Time limit for auto switch-on function: 30, 60, 90, 120 seconds (2)

= Functions disabled

(1) Depending on the value selected in “time limit to answer the call” during configuration of the entrance panel
(2) Depending on the value selected in “time limit for conversation” during configuration of the entrance panel

26
MAKING A CALL FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL
To make a call to a dwelling from the entrance panel, use the numeric keypad of the panel to enter the code which was assigned
to the telephone/connections brackets of the dwelling in question when the devices were programmed. Then press the call key .

Characteristics:
Each number that is entered on the keypad appears in the display of the entrance panel.
If, before pressing the call key, you see that you have made a mistake in the code your are entering, press the delete key C and
enter the code again.

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Press the
Correct call key
code

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

C
8

0
9 7

C
8

0
9
Error occurs
while entering
Entrance panel 1 Enter code the code
Call made to dwelling
(programmed
with code 12) C
1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Press the
delete key

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

RECEIVING THE CALL IN THE DWELLING

When a call is made to a dwelling from the entrance panel, the telephone or monitor in the dwelling emits a warning sound. Also,
it is possible to view the image of the visitor on the screen of the monitor. The street door can be opened and, by picking up the
receiver, communication can be established with the entrance panel.
Once the call has been received, a period of 30 or of 60 seconds is allowed for answering it, depending on the value selected
during configuration of the entrance panel. Once this set period has expired, the system reverts to the standby state.
Once the receiver has been picked up, a period of 30, 60, 90 or 120 seconds is allowed for conversation, depending on the
value selected during configuration of the entrance panel. Conversation is also ended by hanging up the receiver. The system gives
warning that the period allowed for conversation is coming to an end by emitting a series of beeps, thereby making it possible to
extend the conversation time either from the dwelling, by pressing and releasing the hang-up key on the device, or from the entrance
panel, by the visitor pressing the call key again.
Pressing the lock release button allows the visitor to enter the building. When the button is released again, the numeric keypad of
the entrance panel continues to send the signal activating the electric lock for between 1 and 19 seconds, depending on the value
selected during configuration of the entrance panel.
27
 Characteristics:
If there is more than one telephone/monitor in the dwelling which is called, all the devices receive the call simultaneously. When
the receiver of one of the devices is picked up, communication is established with the visitor. If the receiver of any of the other tele-
phones/monitors in the dwelling is subsequently picked up, beeping tones will be heard. These tones indicate that this second device
cannot join the communication.
During the periods set for answering a call and for conversation, the system does not permit the devices of other dwellings to join
the communication. If the receiver of a device in any other dwelling is picked up, beeping tones will be heard. Similarly, in video
door entry installations, auto switch-on from the monitors will not be possible.

PIP... PIP...PIP

PIP... PIP...PIP

Other dwellings
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Other equipments
Call made to dwelling
with equipments
programmed
with code 12

Dwelling with equipments

programmed 1 2 3

with code 12
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Door
Monitor/telephone that answer the call opening

Time limit to answer the call: 30, 60 seconds (1)

Time limit for conversation: 30, 60, 90, 120 seconds (1)

Extending the time limit for conversation:

(1) Depending on the value selected during configuration of the entrance panel

= Functions disabled

If the visitor calls one dwelling and then immediately calls another from the same entrance panel, the call to the first dwelling is
cancelled.

1 1

7
2

8
3

9
1

7
2

8
3

9
1

7
2

8
3

C 0 C 0 C 0

2
Entrance panel 1
Call made to dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 Dwelling 2
and after to dwelling 2

= Functions disabled

28
 Installations with several points of entry
In buildings with several points of entry, the entrance panel
from which the call has been made remains active. The panels
installed at the other points of entry are disabled, so that it is 1

4
2

5
3

6
1

4
2

5
3

6
1 3
Time
7 8 9 7 8 9

not possible to call dwellings from them. The displays on these

C 0 C 0

blocked
Building 1 Building 1
panels tell visitors how long they will have to wait before they Point of entry 1 Other points of entry
can make a call. Call made to dwelling 1

= Functions disabled
Housing compounds or housing estates
It is possible from the external point of entry to the compound to establish communication with the dwellings of one of the build-
ings and, at the same time, to establish communication with the dwellings of another building from the internal entrance panel of the
second building.

Accordingly, if the call is made from the entrance panel at the external point of entry (or gatehouse):
• The internal entrance panel of the building where the dwelling being called is located is disabled, so that it is not possible to
make calls from it.
If the building is equipped with an entrance panel with pushbuttons, the red light on this panel will flash during the periods set for
answering the call and for conversation, thereby warning the visitor. In the case of entrance panels with keypad, the display on these
panels will tell the visitor how long he must wait before he can make a call.
• The internal entrance panels of the other buildings will remain on standby until a call is made to one of the dwellings.
On the other hand, if the call is made from the internal entrance panel of the building:
• The entrance panel at the external point of entry (or gatehouse) remains on standby.
• The internal entrance panels of the other buildings remain on standby.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

1 3
Time blocked
C 0

Building 1

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

External point of entry

Call made to dwelling 1 2 3

programmed
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

with code 20,

located in building 1
Other buildings

= Functions disabled

29
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
CONCIERGE SYSTEM
There are two operating states: with the concierge system deactivated and with the concierge system activated.
Regardless of the operating state, it is possible at all times to activate the electric lock directly from the entrance panel (door-open-
ing function).

DOOR-OPENING FUNCTION
To activate the door-opening function, press the door-opening key on the numeric keypad. Then enter one of the door-open-
ing codes defined during configuration of the entrance panel. Once the code has been entered, the green LED on the panel will light
up and the numeric keypad will activate the electric lock. The signal activating the electric lock will continue to be sent for between
1 and 19 seconds, depending on the value selected for the electric lock activation period during configuration of the entrance panel.
Characteristics
If the complete code which is entered is incorrect, the red LED on the panel will light up. At the same time, the panel will emit a
sound informing the user that an erroneous code has been entered.

Door-opening
key 1

7
2

8
3

9
1 2 3
C 0

Correct 4 5 6
code
1 2 3
1

4
2

5
3

6
1

4
2

5
3

6
BRR
7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0
Incorrect
code
Door-opening code

1 2 3
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

4 5 6

CONCIERGE SYSTEM DEACTIVATED

With the concierge system deactivated, calls made from the entrance panels ring directly in the dwellings: they are not controlled
by the concierge unit. Therefore, as regards operation, the installation behaves like an electronic door entry or video door entry instal-
lation. See “Digital electronic door entry and video door entry installations” on page 25.
It is possible to make a call to the concierge unit from a dwelling (see “Making a call to the concierge unit from a dwelling” on
page 31) provided that the system is not active and that the option “Record of unanswered call always enabled” has been chosen
during the configuration of the concierge unit.
Finding the concierge system deactivated, a call made from a dwelling will not ring on the concierge unit but will be stored imme-
diately in the record of unanswered calls, where it can later be consulted.

Dwelling 1
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Entrance panel 1
Call made to 1 2 3

dwelling 1
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Concierge

30 = Functions disabled
MAKING A CALL TO THE CONCIERGE UNIT FROM A DWELLING
To make a call to the concierge unit, pick up the receiver and check that the system is on standby: if so, a continuous tone is heard
in the receiver of the telephone/monitor. Then press the lock release button. The continuous tone will cease for a few moments, indi-
cating that the call has been stored in
the record of unanswered calls.
PIIIIIIIP PIIIIIIIP PIIIIIIIP
Characteristics: Call stored
The system allows up to 125 calls to in record of
unanswered calls
be stored in the record of unanswered
calls.
Dwelling 1
Call made to concierge

= Functions disabled

CONCIERGE SYSTEM ACTIVATED

There are two operating modes: ‘normal’ mode and ‘dwellings only’ mode.

'Normal' mode
Calls made from the entrance panel ring directly on the concierge unit. It is possible to call the concierge unit from the dwellings
by pressing the lock release button on the telephone/monitor.

Dwellings only' mode

Calls made from the entrance panel ring in the dwelling concerned. It is possible to call the concierge unit from the dwellings by
pressing the lock release button on the telephone/monitor.

Note: Once the concierge unit is activated, the initial operating mode is determined by the value selected in the ‘Operation. Mode’
parameter during configuration of the concierge unit panel.

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9
4 5 6
C 0
7 8 9

C 0

Entrance panel 1
Call made to dwelling 1 Concierge

PIIIIIIIP
'Normal'
mode
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Dwelling 1
Call made to concierge Concierge

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

'Dwellings only'
mode
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Entrance panel 1
Call made to dwelling 1 Dwelling 1

PIIIIIIIP

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

31
Dwelling 1
Call made to concierge Concierge
ACTIVATING THE CONCIERGE SYSTEM
To activate the concierge system, press the C key. Then enter the CONCIERGE code which you have previously defined
during configuration of the concierge unit panel. When the code is entered, the panel will emit several beeps in confirmation and
the green LED on the panel will light up and start to blink, depending on whether the operating mode is set to ‘normal’ mode or
‘dwellings only’ mode.
Characteristics:
It is possible to toggle from ‘normal’ to ‘dwellings only’ mode by holding down the C key until the LED begins to flash. To return
to ‘normal’ mode, press the C key again until the LED stops flashing.
If the code which is entered is not the same as the CONCIERGE code, the red LED on the panel will light up; at the same time the
panel will beep, indicating that the code is erroneous.
If any of the entrance panels is active (i.e. the system is active), the system will not permit the concierge unit to be activated. Once
the CONCIERGE code has been entered, the display on the concierge unit panel will tell the concierge how long he must wait before
he can activate the concierge system.

Time blocked

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C C 0 Green indicator blinking

Red indicator lit up Green indicator lit up 'Dwellings only' mode
Concierge
code System 1 2
busy
4 5

8
1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 1 2 3 1 2 3
C 0
1 2 3
1 2 3 C 0 1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6 4 5 6
4 5 6 4 5 6
4 5 6
'Normal'
7 8 9
7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0
C 0 C 0

mode
BRR
PIP, PIP PIP, PIP

Correct
Incorrect
value
value
Green indicator blinking
'Dwellings only'
mode

1 2 3
1 2 3

4 5 6
4 5 6
7 8 9

C 0

PIP, PIP

SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL

The devices (telephones and monitors) are by default inactive, so that such functions as communication with the entrance panel,
door opening, and image viewing (on monitors) are disabled. The entrance panels and the concierge unit panel are on standby, with
the audio system disabled: until the record of calls is consulted; or until a call is made, either from the entrance panel or from the
concierge unit panel, or from a telephone/monitor to the concierge unit; or until the auto switch-on feature is activated by a moni-
tor.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

= Functions disabled

32
CONSULTING THE RECORD OF UNANSWERED CALLS
When a call is made from a dwelling to the concierge unit and the concierge unit does not answer that call, the information
corresponding to the code of the dwelling is stored in the record of unanswered calls (provided that this option has been enabled
during configuration of the concierge unit panel). The red LED on the concierge unit panel will flash, informing the concierge of the
situation.
With the system on standby, it is possible to consult this record. To do so, press key (1) to access the list of unanswered calls. The
code of the last dwelling to make an unanswered call to the concierge unit will appear in the display. You can move through the
different positions on the list of unanswered calls by using keys (1) and (2).
Note: The system automatically exits from the record of unanswered calls when all the entries are deleted; or when key (1) is
pressed while positioned at the last entry; or when key (2) is pressed while positioned at the first entry; or when any number between
1 and 9 is pressed; or when no key is pressed for more than 5 seconds.

Red indicator
blinking

2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

7
5

8
6

9
5 6 4

7
5

8
6

9
4

7
5

8
6

9
4

7
5

8
6

C 0 C 0 C 0 C 0

Indicating Access the record of Code of the latest Move through

unanswered call unanswered calls dwelling with the record of calls
unanswered call

For each record stored in the record of unanswered calls, it is possible:

• To make a call to the dwelling concerned by picking up the receiver of the telephone/monitor of the concierge unit and press-
ing the key.
Characteristics:
After the conversation with the dwelling, the code of this house or flat is automatically deleted from the record of unanswered calls,
so that the display will show the next code that has been stored.
• To delete the record directly by pressing the C key.
Characteristics:
Once the record has been deleted, the display shows the next code that has been stored.

Comunication between
concierge and dwelling

1 2 3

4 5 6 1 2 3
7 8 9 4 5 6
C 0
7 8 9

C 0

Call made to dwelling Automatically deleted from

with code 26 the record corresponding to
the dwelling with code 26

Time limit to answer the call : 30 seconds Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Extending the time limit for conversation:

Record corresponding
to the dwelling
with code 26
C
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Automatically deleted from 1

4
2

5
3

the record corresponding to 7

C
8

0
9

the dwelling with code 26

33
SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system switches from the standby to the active state when the telephone/monitor of the concierge unit receives a call from one
of the dwellings or from the entrance panel; or when the telephone in a dwelling receives a call from the concierge unit panel or from
an entrance panel (with the concierge system operating in ‘dwellings only’ mode); or when, in the video door entry system, the auto
switch-on feature is activated by one of the monitors.

MAKING A CALL TO THE CONCIERGE UNIT FROM THE DWELLING PIIIIIIIP

To make a call to the concierge unit, pick up the receiver and check that the system is on standby: if it
is, a continuous tone is heard in the receiver of the telephone/monitor. Then press the lock release button.
Several beeps will be heard, confirming that the call is being made.
Dwelling 1
Call made to concierge

RECEIVING ON THE CONCIERGE UNIT A CALL MADE FROM THE DWELLING

When a call is made to the concierge unit from a dwelling, the telephone/monitor of the concierge unit will emit a warning sound.
At the same time, the red LED on the concierge unit panel will light up and the display will show the code attributed to the tele-
phone/monitor which is making the call. The concierge can then establish communication with the dwelling by picking up the receiv-
er of the telephone/monitor and pressing the appropriate key (1).
Once the call has been received, the concierge has 15 seconds to answer. Upon the expiry of this period, the call is stored in the
record of unanswered calls, provided that the ‘Record of unanswered calls’ function has been enabled during configuration of the
concierge unit panel and that enough storage space is available (maximum capacity: 125 calls).
Once the receiver is picked up, a period of 60 seconds is allowed for conversation, or until the receiver is replaced. The system
alerts the user by a series of beeps that the end of this period is approaching.
Characteristics:
During the periods allowed for answering and conversation, the system does not permit devices in the other dwellings to join the
communication. If the receiver of a device is picked up in any other dwelling, beeping tones will be heard. Similarly, in video door
entry installations, the auto switch-on feature cannot be activated by the monitors of other dwellings.
Once the call has been made, the concierge unit panel remains active. With the concierge system operating in ‘normal’ mode,
the entrance panels controlled by the concierge unit are disabled, so that it is not possible to call the dwellings from them. The dis-
play on these panels keeps the visitor informed of how long he must wait before he can make a call.

PIIIIIIIP

1 2 3
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Concierge
Dwelling with code 20
Call made to concierge

Time limit to answer the call : 15 seconds

1 2 3
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Comunication between Concierge

concierge and dwelling

Time limit for conversation : 60 seconds

34
 MAKING A CALL FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL
To make a call to a dwelling from the entrance panel, use the numeric keypad of the panel to enter the code which was assigned
to the telephones/connections brackets of the dwelling when these devices were programmed and then press the call key.
With the concierge system operating in ‘normal’ mode, the call will ring on the concierge unit.
With the concierge system operating in ‘dwellings only’ mode, the call will ring in the dwelling concerned. In this case, as regards
operation, the installation behaves like an electronic door entry or video door entry installation. See “Digital electronic door entry
and video door entry installations”.
Characteristics:
Each number that is entered on the keypad appears in the display of the entrance panel.
If, before pressing the call key, you see that you have made a mistake in the code your are entering, press the delete key and
enter the code again.

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Press the
Correct call key
code

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

C
8

0
9 7

C
8

0
9
Error occurs
while entering
Entrance panel 1 Enter code the code
Call made to dwelling
(programmed
with code 12) C
1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Press the
delete key

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

MAKING A DIRECT CALL FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL TO THE CONCIERGE UNIT
To make a call directly to the concierge unit, press the C key and then the call key .
Characteristics:
It is possible to make a direct call to the concierge unit regardless of the operating mode of the concierge system.
Installations with several points of entry
The concierge unit can be called from any of the entrance panels. C
Housing compounds
A direct call to the concierge unit can be made from the panels at the exter-
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6
7 8 9
7 8 9
C 0
C 0

nal points of entry and from the main entrance panel of each of the buildings Entrance panel 01
inside. Direct call made to
the concierge unit Concierge unit

35
 RECEIVING THE CALL MADE FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL ON THE CONCIERGE UNIT
When a call is made to a dwelling from the entrance panel, with the concierge system operating in ‘normal mode’, the tele-
phone/monitor of the concierge unit emits a warning sound. The red LED on the concierge unit panel lights up and the display on
the concierge unit panel shows the text ‘P00’, ‘P01’, etc., indicating that the call is coming from an entrance panel. It is possible to
establish communication with the visitor by picking up the receiver and pressing the appropriate key (1); to open the street door by
pressing the door-opening key (2); and to put the visitor through to the dwelling by calling the dwelling from the concierge unit and
then, once communication is established with the dwelling, by pressing the ‘transfer call’ key and replacing the receiver of the tele-
phone/monitor of the concierge unit.
Once the call is received, the concierge has a period of 30 or of 60 seconds to answer it, depending on the value selected dur-
ing configuration of the entrance panel being used by the visitor. When this period elapses, the system reverts to being on standby.
Once the receiver of the telephone/monitor of the concierge unit has been picked up and key (1) pressed to establish communi-
cation with the visitor, a period of 30, 60, 90 or 120 seconds is allowed for conversation, depending on the value selected during
configuration of the entrance panel. Conversation is also ended by hanging up the receiver. The system gives warning that the
period allowed for conversation is coming to an end by emitting a series of beeps, thereby making it possible to extend the con-
versation time from the telephone/monitor of the concierge unit by pressing and releasing the hang-up button.
Pressing the lock release key (2) allows the visitor to enter the building. When this key is released again, the numeric keypad of
the entrance panel continues to send the signal activating the electric lock for between 1 and 19 seconds, depending on the value
selected during configuration of the entrance panel.
Characteristics:
During the period of conversation with the visitor, the red LED on the concierge unit panel remains lit while the panel display shows
the code attributed to the telephone/monitor which the visitor is calling.
During the time periods allowed for answering and for conversation, the system does not permit any other device to join the com-
munication. If the receiver of any device is picked up, beeping tones will be heard. Similarly, in video door entry installations, the
auto switch-on feature cannot be activated by the monitors.

PIP... PIP...PIP

Other dwellings

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Entrance panel 01
Call made to dwelling
programmed 1 2 3
with code 20
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0 C 0 C 0

Concierge panel Door opening

'Normal' mode

Length of time electric lock is activated :

1, 2,..,19 seconds (1)
Time limit to answer the call: 30, 60 seconds (1) Time limit for conversation:
30, 60, 90, 120 seconds (1)

Extending the time limit for conversation:

(1) Depending on the value selected during configuration of the entrance panel

= Functions disabled

36
 Installations with several points of entry
In buildings with several points of entry, the entrance
panel from which the call is made remains active. The
panels installed at the other points of entry are disabled, 1

4
2

5
3

6
1

4
2

5
3

6
1 3
Time
7 8 9 7 8 9

so that it is not possible to call the dwellings from them. C 0 C 0

blocked
The displays of these panels keep the visitor informed of Building 1 Building 1
Point of entry 1 Other points of entry
how long he must wait before he can make a call. Call made to dwelling
programmed
with code 20
Housing compounds
A call can be made from the external point of entry to the compound while, at the same time, communication is established with
the dwellings of another building from the internal entrance panel of the building in question. Thus, if the call is made from the
entrance panel at the external point of entry or gatehouse:
• The internal entrance panels of the buildings remain
on standby while waiting for a call to be made to one of
the dwellings. C
On the other hand, if the call is made from the internal 1

4
2

5
3

6
1

4
2

5
3

entrance panel of the building:

7 9
7 8 9
C 0
C 0

• The entrance panel at the external point of entry or External point of entry Buildings
Call made to dwelling
gatehouse will remain on standby. programmed with code 20,
• The internal entrance panels of the other dwellings located in building 1
will remain on standby.
= Functions disabled

TRANSFER A CALL MADE FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL TO A DWELLING

During the time allowed for conversation between the concierge unit panel and the visitor, the call can be transferred from the
concierge unit to any dwelling by calling that dwelling. If the dwelling is the same one that the visitor has called, all that is required
is to press the call key on the concierge unit panel. To make a call to another dwelling, enter the code assigned to the tele-
phone/connection bracket of the dwelling in question and then press the call key.
When the call is received in the dwelling, a period of 30 seconds is allowed to answer it. When this period expires, the concierge
unit re-establishes communication with the visitor.
Once the receiver has been picked up in the dwelling, a period of 60 seconds is allowed for conversation between the concierge
unit and the dwelling (replacing the receiver also ends the conversation). The system warns the user before the conversation period
comes to an end by emitting a series of buzzing sounds, thereby allowing the conversation time to be extended from the concierge
unit panel by pressing the call key .
When communication is established with the dwelling, it is possible:
• To put the dwelling in communication with the visitor by pressing the and replacing the receiver of the telephone/monitor
of the concierge unit.
The time available for conversation between the dwelling and the visitor will be 30, 60, 90 or 120 seconds, depending on the
value selected during configuration of the entrance panel.
• If the occupant of the dwelling does not wish to accept the call, press the key on the concierge unit panel or replace the
receiver of the telephone/monitor in the dwelling. The concierge unit will automatically re-establish communication with the visitor.
Characteristics:
During the periods set for answering a call and for conversation between the concierge unit and the dwelling, the entrance panel
is disabled so that it is not possible to make a call from it. The display of this panel keeps the visitor informed of how long he must
wait before he can make a call.
During the time allowed for conversation between the dwelling and the visitor, the concierge unit panel is disabled. The display
of this panel indicates how long the user must wait.

37
 PIP... PIP...PIP

Other dwellings

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

1 2 3

Concierge
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Call to a dwelling requested

by the visitor Entrance panel 01
(dwelling programmed with
code 20)
1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

Entrance panel 01 Entrance panel 01 1

4
2

5
3

Call made to dwelling Comunication between

1 2 3

1 3
7 8 9
4 5 6

Time
C 0 7 8 9

programmed entrance panel and concierge 0

C

with code 20
1 2 3

Dwelling blocked
Other
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

code entrance panels

Concierge
Call to a different dwelling
requested by the visitor

Dwelling programmed
with code 20

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds

Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

1 2 3

C
5

0
6

9 Extending the time limit for conversation

1 2 3

4 5 6

C
8

0
9

1 3
Time
blocked
Concierge
Put dwelling
in communication 1

4
2

5
3

6
1

4
2

5
3

with entrance panel

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0
C 0

Concierge
Concierge

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Do not put Entrance panel 01

dwelling in communication Comunication between
with entrance panel 1

4
2

5
3

6
entrance panel and dwelling
7 8 9 1 2 3

C 0 4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Concierge
Entrance panel 01
Comunication between
entrance panel and concierge

Time limit for conversation: 30, 60, 90, 120 seconds (1)

Extending the time limit for conversation

= Functions disabled

(1) Depending on the value selected during configuration of the entrance panel
38
 AUTO SWITCH-ON FUNCTION (monitors only)
To activate the auto switch-on feature from one of the dwellings, press the auto switch-on button on the monitor. You will then be
able to view the image captured by the video unit, to open the street door, and, by picking up the receiver, to establish communi-
cation with the main entrance panel of the installation.
If the receiver is not picked up, the auto switch-on function remains enabled for a maximum of 30 or 60 seconds, depending on
the value selected during configuration of the entrance panel.
Once the receiver has been picked up, the auto switch-on function remains enabled for a maximum of 30, 60, 90 or
120 seconds, depending on the value selected during configuration of the entrance panel, or until the conversation is terminated by
replacing the receiver.
When the auto switch-on period expires, the system reverts to being on standby.
Characteristics:
During the auto switch-on period, the system does not allow the devices of the other dwellings to join the communication. If a
receiver is picked up in any of them, beeping tones will be heard. Nor will it be possible to make a call to the concierge unit from
any telephone/monitor or to activate auto switch-on from the other monitors.
Calls from the entrance panel and from the concierge unit take priority over auto switch-on. If, during the auto switch-on period,
a call is made from any of the panels to a dwelling, the auto switch-on period will automatically end and only the telephone/moni-
tor of the dwelling called will remain active.

PIP... PIP...PIP

Other dwellings

Dwelling 1
Turning on the auto switch-on system
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Communication
Dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 with entrance panel

Time limit for auto switch-on function: 30, 60 seconds (1)

Time limit for auto switch-on function: 30, 60, 90, 120 seconds (2)

= Functions disabled

(1) Depending on the value selected in “time limit to answer the call” during configuration of the entrance panel
(2) Depending on the value selected in “time limit for conversation” during configuration of the entrance panel

39
COMPONENTS
We recommend that you consult the diagram corresponding to the installation you intend to perform (in Chapter 8, “Diagrams”)
in order to identify the components you will need.
This chapter provides a general reference guide to the components which can be used for installations performed with digital elec-
tronic door entry or video door entry systems.
For technical information on all components, see “Technical data” in Chapter 2.

HOUSES AND FLATS

DIGITAL TELEPHONES
Located inside each dwelling, these allow the user to receive calls made from the entrance panel, to hold
conversations, and to open the street door. In installations with a concierge system, they also allow calls to
be received from the concierge unit and made to it. They are wall-mounted.
Note: Desktop installation of the telephone
Desktop installation of telephones requires that a desktop support also be installed.

DIGITAL MONITORS
Located inside each dwelling, these allow the user to receive calls made from the entrance panel, to see
the visitor, to hold a conversation, and to open the street door. In installations with concierge system, they
also allow calls to be received from the concierge unit and made to it. They incorporate the auto switch-on
function, useful in situations of surveillance or when, for whatever reason, communication with the entrance
panel is desired.
For their correct functioning, they must be used with the correct connection brackets.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of video unit you wish to install in the entrance panel:
whether black and white (B/W) or colour.
Note: Desktop installation of the monitor
Desktop installation of monitors requires that a desktop support also be installed.
Note: Cover frames
Cover frames can be used in replacements of flush-mounted monitors where the cavity in the wall needs
to be covered or in installations where the wall on which the monitor is to be mounted is uneven or out of
true.

DIGITAL CONNECTION BRACKETS

Elements in which the connections of the digital video door entry system are made in every dwelling in the
installation. They allow the wall-mounting and connection of the monitor to the installation.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of cable you intend to use for transmission of the video
signal: whether coaxial or twisted pair.

40
 CALL EXTENSION UNITS
Elements which reproduce the call tone, notifying the user that a call from the entrance panel is being
received.
It is useful in dwellings where the user wants to be able to take a call at several different locations but
not to install a telephone or monitor at each location.

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
Elements which allow users to activate an external device (a light or bell, for example) at the same time that they receive a call
made from the entrance panel, or to activate a second electric lock from the dwelling, etc.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE VIDEO SIGNAL: VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS

TAP-OFFS
Tap-offs are usually located on each floor of the building. They branch the video input signal to its tap
outputs, where they are connected to the monitors in the dwellings. Connection in series of the tap-offs
allows the distribution of the video signal of the video unit to all the monitors in the installation.
COAXIAL
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of cable which is to be used for transmission of the
video signal: whether coaxial or twisted pair.
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

TWISTED PAIR

SPLITTERS
Elements which generate multiple independent output lines from one video signal input line, maintaining
the same video signal on each one. They allow the distribution of the video signal along several inde-
pendent columns.
COAXIAL
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of cable which is to be used for transmission of the
video signal: whether coaxial or twisted pair.
DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+
V T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

TWISTED PAIR

ACCESS TO THE BUILDING

ENTRANCE PANEL
Generally installed at the entry point of buildings, this panel houses the digital audio unit. To call the tele-
phone or monitor of each dwelling, it is equipped with either a built-in series of pushbuttons, one for each
dwelling, or a numeric keypad. Video door entry systems also have a built-in video unit.
ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH PUSHBUTTONS The dimensions of an entrance panel with pushbuttons will depend on the number of dwellings in the
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
building in which the digital door entry or video door entry system is to be installed. Similarly, depending
on the number of dwellings in the installation itself, more than one entrance panel may be necessary at the
point of entry to the building (these will be entrance panels in parallel).

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH PUSHBUTTONS
VIDEODOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

41
 On the other hand, the dimensions of an entrance panel with numeric keypad are not affected at all by
either the number of dwellings in the building or by the type of installation which is being performed
(whether door entry or video door entry). By placing such panels in parallel, it is possible to inform the vis-
1

4
2

5
3

6
itor of the code which he must key in to make a call to each of the dwellings.
To fix the entrance panel in the desired location, either flush-mounted boxes or surface wall-mounted
7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL
boxes are used. Likewise, in installations where it is necessary to provide the entrance panel with extra pro-
WITH KEYPAD tection against inclement weather, rain shields are employed.
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Note: Cover frames for entrance panel
When an old entrance panel is being replaced and its dimensions are greater than those of the new
entrance panel, or in installations where the wall on which the new panel is to be mounted is uneven or
1

7
2

8
3

9
out of true, cover frames can be used.
C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD
VIDEODOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH DIRECTORY

DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT

This is principal module of the system. It permits calls to be made to the telephone or monitor in a dwelling
AUDIO UNIT and communication to be established both from the entrance panel to the dwelling and from the dwelling
ENTRANCE PANEL to the entrance panel. In video door entry systems, the audio unit also controls activation of the video unit.
WITH PUSH-BUTTONS

AUDIO UNIT
ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD

VIDEO UNIT
This is the module which captures the image of the person calling from the entrance panel. It has
auxiliary lighting for situations when the external light is poor. In black and white systems this lighting is by
means of infrared LEDs whose light is invisible to the human eye. It is therefore possible to identify with
absolute discretion the person who is calling, even in conditions of poor light. With a colour system, on the
other hand, the auxiliary lighting of the video unit is provided by means of white LEDs.
There are different models of video unit. The choice of the right one for a particular installation depends
on the type of cable to be used for transmission of the video signal (whether coaxial or twisted pair) and
on the type of image to be transmitted (whether black and white or colour).

PUSHBUTTONS (Entrance panel with pushbuttons)

Elements housed in the entrance panel which permit each dwelling to be contacted. The number of push-
buttons is determined by the number of houses or flats in the installation. Their use in digital systems means
that a concentrator of calls must be used. This serves as a link between the pushbuttons and the digital
audio unit.

42
 OUT IN CONCENTRATOR OF CALLS (Entrance panel with pushbuttons)
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
COL-000
Made in Spain

9 10 1112 13 14 15 16
The function of this module is to detect which pushbutton of the panel has been pressed and to transmit
this information to the audio unit. The connection in series of concentrators make possible installations of
cod. 9730030

up to 96 dwellings (with 96 pushbuttons).

NUMERIC KEYPAD (Entrance panel with keypad)

1 2 3
4 5 6
This element, housed in the entrance panel, allows each dwelling to be contacted.
7 8 9
C 0 Also it handles such functions as activation of the electric lock (when a code is entered), control of addi-
tional elements, etc.

FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

Element, usually located at the entry to the building, to which the entrance panel is fixed. Since this ele-
ment is embedded in the wall, a cavity to house it must be made in the wall.
The correct choice of model will depend on the dimensions of the entrance panel.

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

Element, usually located at the entry to the building, to which the entrance panel is fixed. It is not
necessary to make a cavity as the box is mounted directly onto the wall.
The correct choice of model will depend on the dimensions of the entrance panel.

RAIN SHIELD
Element which, when placed over the entrance panel, provides extra protection against hostile weather
conditions (rain, snow, etc). Its dimensions are determined by the dimensions of the entrance panel.
The correct choice of model will depend on the dimensions of the entrance panel and on the type of box
used to fix the panel: whether flush-mounted box or surface wall-mounted box.

ELECTRIC LOCK
Electro-mechanical device which allows the entry door to be opened.
The correct choice of model will depend on the how the device functions: whether standard, automatic,
or with manual release.

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
Elements which, for example, allow the user to activate an electric lock from several separate entrance
panels, or to activate a second electric lock from a dwelling, or to activate stair lights when the door is
opened.

43
CONCIERGE SYSTEM
DIGITAL CONCIERGE UNIT TELEPHONE
Telephone which allows the concierge to receive calls made from the entrance panel or from dwellings and
to establish conversation. Wall-mounted.

DIGITAL CONCIERGE UNIT MONITORS

Monitors which allow the concierge to receive calls made from the entrance panel or from dwellings, to
see the visitor, and to establish conversation.
For their correct functioning, they must be used with the correct connections brackets for digital concierge
unit.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of video unit you wish to install in the entrance panel:
whether black and white (B/W) or colour.

CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR DIGITAL CONCIERGE UNIT

Elements which are required for the wall mounting and connection of the monitor to the installation.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of cable which is to be used for transmission of the
video signal: whether coaxial cable or twisted pair.

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

Panel to be placed in parallel with the telephone and with the monitor of the concierge unit. It houses the
digital audio unit and the numeric keypad for concierge unit.
To fix the concierge unit in the desired location, either flush-mounted or surface wall-mounted boxes are
used.
1 2 3
Note: Desktop installation of concierge unit panel and telephone/monitor
4

7
5

8
6

9
A desktop installation of the concierge unit panel as well as the concierge unit telephone or monitor is
C 0
possible. It requires the use of a desktop support.

DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

This is principal module of the system. It permits calls to be made to the telephone or monitor in a dwelling
and communication to be established both from the concierge unit telephone/monitor to the dwelling and
from the concierge unit telephone/monitor to the entrance panel.

44
 NUMERIC KEYPAD FOR CONCIERGE UNIT
Element housed in the concierge unit panel which allows each dwelling to be contacted and the street door
1 2 3
4 5 6
to be opened.
7 8 9 It also enables such functions as control of additional elements.
C 0

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
Element to which the concierge unit panel is fixed. Since this element is embedded in the wall, a cavity to
house it must be made in the wall.
The correct model for the concierge unit panel is the same as the flush-mounted box of 7 or 8 rows, model
CMO-008.

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

Element to which the concierge unit panel is fixed. It is not necessary to make a cavity since the box is
mounted directly onto the wall.
The correct model for the concierge unit panel is the same as the surface wall-mounted box of 7 or 8 rows,
model CSU-214.

POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY UNITS

Elements which convert the mains voltage to the voltages necessary for the digital system to function cor-
230 V V
rectly.
The correct choice of the power supply units is determined by the type of installation to be undertaken as
well as by the consumption of the electric lock to be installed. To identify the power supply unit required by
the installation you intend to perform, see the appropriate diagram in Chapter 8 (“Diagrams”).

230 V ++

ELECTRONIC MODULES

230V~ ±10%
Elements necessary for certain electronic door entry or video door entry installations.
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR

MODULATORS – TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Elements which generate an analogue TV channel from the video signal of the video unit and then dis-
tribute this channel to the TV installation of the dwellings.
The correct choice of model will depend on the channel you wish to generate.
45
 TECHNICAL DATA
2
STANDARDS
The electronic door entry system products detailed in the following pages comply with the following standards:
EN 60065:2002 - Audio and Video Apparatus and Analogical Electronic Apparatus. Safety Requirements.
EN 61000-6-3:2001 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). Part 6: Generic norms. Section 3: Norm of Emission in Residential,
Commercial and Light-Industrial Environments.
EN 61000-6-1:2001 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). Part 6: Generic norms. Section 1: Immunity for Residential,
Commercial and Light-Industrial Environments.
Accordingly, ALCAD electronic door entry system products bear the CE stamp.

TELEPHONES FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

Telephones for wall-mounting, manufactured in ABS plastic. Digital connection system using 2-wire con-
nection BUS, without connection polarity.
Privacy of communication (confidentiality feature). The telephone is on standby until it receives a call;
when it does so, the audio and door-opening functions are enabled by the audio unit for a set period of
1
time.
Electronic call system: when a call is made at the entrance panel or from the concierge unit panel, the
call tone generated by the audio unit is heard in the speaker of the telephone receiver.
The base of the telephone has several points for fixing to the wall (1). The telephone receiver has a
built-in electret-type microphone and a 16 Ω ferrite speaker. The receiver cable is flexible and extensi- 2

ble with telephone-type connectors (2). To ensure correct connection, lift-up connection terminals are also
included.
Note: For desktop installation of telephones, a desktop support must be used (see “Accessories for
telephones” on page 47).

Below are shown the technical data of each of our models of telephone for houses and flats.
84 mm Cód. 9600007 TED-001
DIGITAL TELEPHONE
1
Telephone for digital electronic door entry or video door entry installations, which may or may not include
224 mm

a concierge system.
The telephone has a button on the side for opening the door (1), making it possible to activate the electric
lock without having to pick up the receiver, and a call volume control (2).

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

50.6 mm Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equip-
ment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

CC1 D1 , D2 Communication BUS

9 - 11 V
CC1 Connector call D1 , D2
PROG adapter accessory
10.5 - 14 V
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

D1 D2 ON OFF

46
 Cód. 9600010 TED-002
84 mm
DIGITAL TELEPHONE - 2 PUSHBUTTONS
1 Telephone for digital electronic door entry or video door entry installations, which may or may not include
a concierge system.
224 mm

The telephone has a button on the side for opening the door (1), making it possible to activate the electric
lock without having to pick up the receiver, an auxiliary button (2) for additional functions (e.g. opening a
second door), and a call volume control (3).

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

50.6 mm
Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

CC1 D1 , D2 Communication BUS 9 - 11 V

CC1 Connector call D1 , D2
PROG adapter accessory 1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
10.5 - 14 V
C 0

D1 D2 ON OFF

ACCESSORIES FOR TELEPHONES

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

Cód. 9730018 AAL-120

CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORY
Accessory which extracts the electronic call signal of a digital telephone, thereby making it possible to con-
nect a call repeater in parallel with the telephone or to connect any other device which can be activated using
the electronic call: for example, the ASC-050 selector-switch. Designed to fit into the base of the telephone
itself.

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

CC1 Connector Tone 10.2 Vpp

Call adapter accessory
0V
S2, S5 Electronic call signal 0V
S5, S2
Tone 13.2 Vpp
0V
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

0V

47
DESKTOP SUPPORT
72 mm Cód. 9730029 SST-001
DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR TELEPHONE
Support for the desktop installation of a door entry system telephone.

205 mm
49 mm

13O

MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR

HOUSES AND FLATS
MONITORS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

1 Monitors for wall mounting on a connection bracket (1). Manufactured in 2

ABS plastic.
Privacy of audio and video communication; auto switch-on feature. The
5
monitor is on standby until it receives a call or the auto switch-on feature
becomes active; when either of these happens, the audio, video and door-
opening functions are enabled by the audio unit for a set period of time. 4
6
Electronic call system: when a call is made at the entrance panel or from 3
8
7
8 7 6
the concierge unit panel, the call tone generated by the audio unit is heard
in the speaker of the monitor receiver.
Monitors have a button on the side for opening the door (2), making it
possible to activate the electric lock without having to pick up the receiver,
9
an auto switch-on button (3), and two extra buttons - which are potential-free - for auxiliary functions
(4). The current operating state is shown by a LED (5). There are separate controls for brightness (6)
and contrast (7), as well as an on/off switch for the screen (8). The receiver of the monitor has a built-
in electret-type microphone and a 16 Ω neodine speaker. The receiver cable is flexible and extensible with telephone-type connec-
tors (9).
Note: For desktop installation of monitors, a desktop support must be used (see “Accessories for monitors” on page 52).

Monitors are either black and white (B/W) or colour, depending on the type of video unit which is to be installed in the entrance
panel (i.e. whether B/W or colour).

48
 197 mm
B/W (BLACK AND WHITE) SYSTEM
Cód. 9630006 MVB-002

224 mm
B/W DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY MONITOR
Black and white monitor with a flat 4-inch CRT screen. For use in digital video door entry installations with
coaxial cable or with twisted pair.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55°C

64.3 mm
COLOUR SYSTEM
Cód. 9630008 MVC-002
COLOUR DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY MONITOR
Colour monitor with a 4-inch TFT screen. For use in digital video door entry installations with coaxial cable
or with twisted pair.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55°C

CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

Brackets for wall-mounting of digital video door entry monitors.
Fixing to the wall Fixing to the standard electric box
They include lift-up type connection terminals to ensure correct con-
nections. They have several fixing points, so that they can be fixed
to a wall or to a standard 60mm x 60mm electrical box.

Connection brackets fall into two groups: those for coaxial cable
and those for twisted pair, depending on the type of cable which
is to be used in the installation to transmit the video signal from the
video unit.

49
COAXIAL CABLE
166 mm Cód. 9630004 SCM-030
DIGITAL MONITOR CONNECTION BRACKET. COAXIAL CABLE
Bracket with digital 4+coaxial connection system, consisting of a 2-wire communication BUS without polar-
193 mm

PROG

ON OFF

ity of connection, two wires to supply power to the video system of the monitor, and coaxial cable to trans-
mit the video signal.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55°C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

CC1
TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

CC1 Monitor connector

9 - 11 V
J1
A B
D1 , D2 Communication BUS D1 , D2
V1 , M Signal of video 10.5 - 14 V
1 2 3
PROG 4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

ON OFF
R1
S5 , S2 Electronic call
+,- Power supply voltage V1 , M 0 Vpp 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)
V1
M 24 , 25 Auxiliary pushbutton (P1)
M Tone 10.2 Vpp
V1 26 , 27 Auxiliary pushbutton (P2)
0V
0V
24 Important:
25
The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27
S5, S2
26
are potential-free contacts. Tone 13.2 Vpp
27
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V 0V
1 2 3
4 5 6

S5 7
C
8
0
9

S2 0V

D1 D2 +,- 15 V ±10%

Auxiliary pushbuttons. State of contacts

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 24, 25 PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 26, 27

STATE OF THE CONTACTS STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25 26, 27

50
TWISTED PAIR

166 mm
Cód. 9630005 SCM-040
DIGITAL MONITOR CONNECTION BRACKET. TWISTED PAIR
Bracket with digital 4+twisted pair connection system, consisting of a 2-wire communication BUS without
193 mm

PROG

ON OFF

polarity of connection, two wires to supply power to the video system of the monitor, and twisted pair to trans-
mit the video signal.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55°C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer

CC1
TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

CC1 Monitor connector

9 - 11 V
J1
A B
D1 , D2 Communication BUS D1 , D2
T1+ , T1- Signal of video 10.5 - 14 V
1 2 3
PROG 4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

ON OFF
R1
S5 , S2 Electronic call
T1+ ,
+,- Power supply voltage 0 Vpp 6.5 V ±0.5
T1+
T1 ,
T1- 24 , 25 Auxiliary pushbutton (P1)
T1- Tone 10.2 Vpp
T1+ 26 , 27 Auxiliary pushbutton (P2)
0V
0V
24 Important:
25
The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27 S5, S2
26
are potential-free contacts. Tone 13.2 Vpp
27
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V 0V
1 2 3
4 5 6

S5 7
C
8
0
9

S2 0V

D1 D2 +,- 15 V ±10%

Auxiliary pushbuttons. State of contacts

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 24, 25 PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 26, 27

STATE OF THE CONTACTS STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25 26, 27

51
ACCESSORIES FOR MONITORS
DESKTOP SUPPORTS

Cód. 9730049 SSM-001

170 mm DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR MONITOR
87 mm
1
Support for desktop installation of the digital video door entry system
monitor. CC1

80 mm
2
In addition to the desktop support itself (1), a connections base - with
female SCART connector (2) -is included for wall mounting, as well as a
2-metre multiwire SCART connector cable (3) for linking the connections
170 mm support of the monitor to the base. 25 mm
160 mm

45 O

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

9 - 11 V
D1 , D2 Communication BUS D1 , D2
V1 , M Signal of video (coaxial) 1
4
7
C
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
10.5 - 14 V
T1+ , T1- Signal of video (twisted pair)
T1+ T1- T1- T1+ +15V S2 D1 D2 S5 S5 , S2 Electronic call
V1 , M 0V 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)
V1 M M V1 1 2 3 4 5 24 25
+,- Power supply voltage

24 , 25 Auxiliary pushbutton (P1) T1+ ,

T1 , 0V 6.5 V ±0.5
Important:
The terminals 24 and 25 Tone 10.2 Vpp
are potential-free contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V 0V
0V
S5, S2
Tone 13.2 Vpp
0V
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

0V

+,- 15 V ±10%

Auxiliary pushbuttons. State of contacts

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 24, 25

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25

52
COVER FRAMES FOR MONITORS
2

Frames (1) manufactured in aluminium. Useful when a flush- 1

mounted monitor is replaced and the cavity in the wall needs to 3

be covered (2) so that the new monitor can then be mounted ARRI
BA
UP T
HAU
ARRI
BA
UP T
HAU

(3). These frames also facilitate installation when the wall on

which the monitor is to be located is uneven or out of true,
making it easier to mount the monitor.
Available in three models: two of these have standard dimen-
sions while the third is generic, with dimensions which can be
defined by the user according to the needs of the installation.

Cód. 9730035 MAE-001

COVER FRAME 250x275 mm

250 mm 3mm

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
275 mm

Cód. 9730036 MAE-002

COVER FRAME 300x325 mm

300 mm 3mm

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
325 mm

Cód. 9730034 MAE-900

GENERIC COVER FRAME
3mm

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

Note: See the ALCAD website at www.alcad.net for information on ordering the generic cover frame.
53
TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS
Elements which make it possible to distribute the video signal from the video unit to the different dwellings in the installation.

TAP-OFFS
Elements with several tapped outputs without loss for connection to monitors (1) and with
1 through output for connection to the next tap-off (2) when the desired distribution of the
signal is star-shaped, installing one tap-off for each floor or ramification of the building.
2 1 Tap-offs fall into two groups: those for coaxial cable and those for twisted pair. The
choice of tap-off will depend on which type of cable is to be used in the installation to
transmit the video signal from the video unit.

COAXIAL CABLE
88 mm Cód. 9730031 DIV-024
COAXIAL VIDEO TAP-OFF, 4 OUTPUTS TO MONITORS
57 mm

1
Tap-off with 4 tapped outputs without loss for connection to Screw
terminal
monitors. Connection by means of screw terminals and Clamp
clamps, 75 Ω coaxial cable (1). It incorporates a 75 Ω resis-
24 mm
tor for the closing of the video line (2); this should only be
removed when using the through out-put of the tap-off. The tap-
off only consumes energy when one of the monitors connect- Connection of coaxial cable
Internal
ed to its tap outputs is activated. conductor
2 Mesh
Technical characteristics: 75 Ohm

Outputs 4

Ouput impedance

Connection By means of screw terminals

and clamps

Gain 1

Video input level 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)

Power supply Through monitor (coaxial)

TWISTED PAIR
88 mm Cód. 9730015 DIV-034
TWISTED PAIR VIDEO TAP-OFF, 4 OUTPUTS TO MONITORS
DIV-034
40 mm

cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Tap-off with 4 tapped outputs without loss for connection to monitors.

45

Connection by means of terminal. Incorporates a 120 Ω resistor for the clos- -033 1
00
DIV
d.9
7
co T1
T 1+

21 mm T 1+
T1

ing of the video line (1); this should only be removed when using the through T 1+
T1
T 1+
T1

T1

out-put of the tap-off. The tap-off only consumes energy when one of the mon-
T 1+
T1 T1
T 1+
T1
+
T1
+
T1

itors connected to its tap outputs is activated. +

T1
T1
T1

Technical characteristics: 120 Ohm

1

Outputs 4

Ouput impedance

Connection By means of screw terminals

Video input level 0.5 Vpp ±0.1 (120 Ω)

54
Power supply Through twisted pair
SPLITTERS
Columns of video Columns of video Elements with independent video signal outputs. Of use when the installation requires
several branches or columns of video.
Splitter Splitters fall into two groups: those for coaxial cable and those for twisted pair. The
choice of splitter will depend on which type of cable is to be used in the installation to
transmit the video signal from the video unit.

CABLE COAXIAL
88 mm Cód. 9730032 DIV-124
COAXIAL AMPLIFIED VIDEO SPLITTER, 4 OUTPUTS
57 mm

Splitter with 4 independent video signal outputs. DC (direct 1

2
current) power supply. Has a control for the amplification of Screw
terminal
the video signal (1). Connection by means of screw terminals Clamp
24 mm
and clamps (2).

Technical characteristics: Connection of coaxial cable

Internal
conductor
Outputs 4 Mesh

Ouput impedance 75 Ω

Connection By means of screw terminals

and clamps

Gain 1 .. 1.3

Video input level 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)

Power supply 15 V

TWISTED PAIR
88 mm Cód. 9730016 DIV-134
TWISTED PAIR AMPLIFIED VIDEO SPLITTER, 4 OUTPUTS
DIV-134
40 mm

cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

Splitter with 4 independent video signal outputs. Can be powered by either

AC (alternating current) or DC (direct current). Connection by means of screw
46
-13300
1
DIV
d.9
7 T1
co T 1+

21 mm T 1+
T1

terminal. T 1+
T1
T 1+
T1

T1
15 V T 1+
12 V +
V

Technical characteristics:

Outputs 4

Ouput impedance 120 Ω

Connection By means of screw terminals

Video input level 0.5 Vpp ±0.1 (120 Ω)

Power supply 15V /12V

55
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
The system of entrance panels consists of two modules, each of which
1
comes in various models. These modules constitute the upper (1) and lower
(2) parts of the entrance panel that is to be installed. Any configuration of
entrance panel can be achieved by different combinations of these two
modules. Several entrance panels can be connected side by side to obtain
the desired number of pushbuttons.

2
The choice of the upper and lower modules, as well as the number of
entrance panels required, will determine the final size of the panel and,
consequently, the dimensions and the number of flush-mounted or surface
wall-mounted boxes to be used. (See Chapter 3: “Entrance panels: dimen-
Entrance panel in parallel sions and accessories”).

ENTRANCE PANEL UPPER MODULES

Modules made with an aluminium profile which house the audio unit, the video unit, the card-holder, or different combinations of
these. They are divided into single, double or triple modules, depending on whether a module houses one, two or all three of the
above-mentioned elements.
Two TORX tamper-proof screws are provided with the upper modules. These replace the standard screws of the entrance panel
cover frame and prevent unauthorised persons from tampering with the panel.

Single upper modules Double upper modules Triple upper modules

The following table shows which upper model with audio unit and video unit should be chosen to meet the requirements of
particular installations.

ELECTRONIC CALL
COMPLETE MODULES,
PARTICULAR INSTALLATION
SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE WITH VIDEO UNIT
UPPER MODULE UPPER MODULE UPPER MODULE

DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY Standard installation MMN-470

INSTALLATION Several points of entry MAN-470 MCN-470
Housing estates
MMN-470
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR Standard installation MAN-470
MCN-470 MDT-471 (B/W) MVN-903 (B/W)
ENTRY INSTALLATION Several points of entry MVN-301 (B/W)
MDN-471 (B/W) MDT-472 (COLOUR) MVN-905 (COLOUR)
COAXIAL Housing estates MVN-302 (COLOUR)
MDN-472 (COLOUR)
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR Standard installation MAN-470 MMN-470
ENTRY INSTALLATION Several points of entry MVN-004 (B/W) MCN-470 MDT-474 (B/W) MVN-901 (B/W)
TWISTED PAIR Housing estates MVN-005 (COLOUR) MDN-474 (B/W) MDT-475 (COLOUR) MVN-904 (COLOUR)
MDN-475 (COLOUR)
MMN-470
TV DOOR ENTRY Standard installation MAN-470
MCN-470 MDT-473 (B/W) MVN-902 (B/W)
INSTALLATION MVN-201 (B/W)
MDN-473 (B/W)

56
 A brief description of each entrance panel upper module is given below.

ENTRANCE PANEL SINGLE UPPER MODULES

SINGLE MODULE WITH AUDIO UNIT

128 mm Cód. 9670144 MAN-470

2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

78.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT
1
Module which houses the audio unit, model GRF-208 (1). Fitted
12 mm
with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging
in the flush-mounted box.

SINGLE MODULE WITH VIDEO UNIT

128 mm Cód. 9670009 MVN-301 2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH TCB-011 GENE-

78.5 mm

RIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL 1

Module which houses the generic black and white video unit for
12 mm coaxial cable, model TCB-011(1). Fitted with rubber strips for water-
tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cód. 9670045 MVN-302 2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH TCB-021 GENE-

78.5 mm

RIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL 1

Module which houses the generic colour video unit for coaxial
12 mm
cable, model TCB-021 (1). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tight-
ness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cód. 9670012 MVN-004 2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH TCB-040 GENE-

78.5 mm

RIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR 1

Module which houses the generic black and white video unit for
12 mm
twisted pair, model TCB-040 (1). Fitted with rubber strips for water-
tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm
Cód. 9670157 MVN-005 2
78.5 mm

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH TCB-050 GENE-

RIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR 1

Module which houses the generic colour video unit for twisted
12 mm
pair, model TCB-050 (1). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness
and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

57
 128 mm Cód. 9670101 MVN-201
2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH TCB-210 B/W

78.5 mm

VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR TV DOOR ENTRY 1

SYSTEM
12 mm Module which houses the generic black and white video unit for
coaxial cable, model TCB-210 (1) in TV door entry installations.
Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for
hanging in the flush-mounted box.
SINGLE MODULES WITH CARD-HOLDER

128 mm Cód. 9670018 MTN-000 2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH CARD-HOLDER

78.5 mm

Module which houses an informative card-holder (1) of 76.5mm

x 43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Used in installations,
1
12 mm generally with several entrance panels, when it is necessary to dis-
play information of interest on one of these panels. Fitted with rub-
ber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the
flush-mounted box.

SINGLE BLANK MODULES

128 mm Cód. 9670021 MLN-000

1

BLANK ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE

78.5 mm

Blank module which does not house any element in its interior.
Used in installations, generally with several entrance panels, when
12 mm some of the panels do not contain any elements at all (i.e. no audio
unit, no video unit and no card-holder). Fitted with rubber strips for
water-tightness and with rings (1) for hanging in the flush-mounted
box.

COMPLETE MODULES

128 mm Cód. 9670106 MVN-903 2

COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH TCB-011 GENE-

RIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
147 mm

A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower module)

1
which houses the generic B/W video unit for coaxial cable, model
TCB-011 (1). Used in video door entry installations where the video
12 mm unit is located at a certain distance from the entrance panel. Fitted
with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging
in the flush-mounted box.

Cód. 9670107 MVN-905

128 mm
COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH TCB-021 GENE- 2

RIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL

147 mm

A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower module)

which houses the generic colour video unit for coaxial cable, model 1

TCB-021 (1). Used in video door entry installations where the video
unit is located at a certain distance from the entrance panel. Fitted
12 mm
with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging
in the flush-mounted box.

58 2
 128 mm Cód. 9670013 MVN-901 2

COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH TCB-040 GENE-

RIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
147 mm

A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower module)

1
which houses the generic B/W video unit for twisted pair, model
TCB-040 (1). Used in video door entry installations where the video
12 mm unit is located at a certain distance from the entrance panel. Fitted
with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging
in the flush-mounted box.

Cód. 9670019 MVN-904

128 mm
COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH TCB-050 GENE- 2

RIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR

147 mm

A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower module)

which houses the generic colour video unit for twisted pair, model 1

TCB-050 (1). Used in video door entry installations where the video
unit is located at a certain distance from the entrance panel. Fitted
12 mm
with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging
in the flush-mounted box.

Cód. 9670100 MVN-902 2

128 mm COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH TCB-210 B/W 2

VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR TV DOOR ENTRY

SYSTEM
147 mm

A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower module)

which houses the B/W video unit for coaxial cable, model TCB-210 1

(1), in TV door entry installations. Fitted with rubber strips for water-
12 mm tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

ENTRANCE PANEL DOUBLE UPPER MODULES

UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT AND VIDEO UNIT

128 mm Cód. 9670120 MDN-471 3

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

126.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT AND TCB-011 GENERIC B/W VIDEO 2

UNIT, COAXIAL
Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1), 1
and the generic black and white video unit, model TCB-011 (2), for
12 mm
coaxial cable. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

59
 128 mm Cód. 9670153 MDN-472 3

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

126.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT AND TCB-021 GENERIC COLOUR 2

VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1), 1
and the generic colour video unit, model TCB-021 (2), for coaxial
12 mm
cable. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (3)
for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cód. 9670147 MDN-474 3

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

126.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT AND TCB-040 GENERIC B/W VIDEO 2

UNIT, TWISTED PAIR

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1), 1

12 mm and the generic black and white video unit, model TCB-040 (2), for
twisted pair. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cód. 9670046 MDN-475 3

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

126.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT AND TCB-050 GENERIC COLOUR 2

VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1), 1

12 mm
and the generic colour video unit, model TCB-050 (2), for twisted
pair. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (3)
for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm
Cód. 9670149 MDN-473 3

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

126.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT AND TCB-210 B/W VIDEO UNIT, COA- 2

XIAL, FOR TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1), 1

12 mm and the black and white video unit, model TCB-210 (2), for coaxi-
al cable in TV door entry installations. Fitted with rubber strips for
water-tightness and with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted
box.

60
UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT AND CARD-HOLDER

128 mm Cód. 9670145 MMN-470 3

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

126.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT AND CARD-HOLDER 2

Module which houses the audio unit, model GRF-208 (1) and an
informative card-holder (2) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm manufactured in
polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with 1

12 mm
rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT AND BLANK

128 mm Cód. 9670146 MCN-470

2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

126.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT AND BLANK

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1).
Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for
hanging in the flush-mounted box. 1
12 mm

UPPER MODULES WITH CARD-HOLDER AND BLANK

128 mm Cód. 9670086 MLT-000

2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH CARD-HOLDER

126.5 mm

AND BLANK 1

Module which houses an informative card-holder (1) of 76.5mm

x 43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Used in installations, gener-
ally with several entrance panels, when it is necessary to display
12 mm
information of interest. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness
and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

61
ENTRANCE PANEL TRIPLE UPPER MODULES
UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT, VIDEO UNIT AND CARD-HOLDER

128 mm Cód. 9670121 MDT-471 4

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

AUDIO UNIT, GENERIC B/W TCB-011 VIDEO UNIT, 3
174.5 mm

COAXIAL, AND CARD-HOLDER

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1); 2

the generic black and white video unit, model TCB-011 (2), for
coaxial cable; and an informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 1

12 mm 43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for

water-tightness and with rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted
box.

128 mm
4

Cód. 9670154 MDT-472

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL 3
174.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT, GENERIC COLOUR TCB-021 VIDEO

UNIT, COAXIAL, AND CARD-HOLDER 2

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1);
the generic colour video unit, model TCB-021 (2), for coaxial cable; 1

12 mm and an informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm made

from polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and
with rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm
4

Cód. 9670148 MDT-474

3
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL
174.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT, GENERIC B/W TCB-040 VIDEO UNIT,

TWISTED PAIR, AND CARD-HOLDER 2

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1);
the generic black and white video unit, model TCB-040 (2), for 1

12 mm twisted pair; and an informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x

43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for
water-tightness and with rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted
box.

62
 128 mm Cód. 9670056 MDT-475 4

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL

AUDIO UNIT, GENERIC COLOUR TCB-050 VIDEO 3
174.5 mm

UNIT, TWISTED PAIR, AND CARD-HOLDER

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1); 2

the generic colour video unit, model TCB-050 (2), for twisted pair;
and an informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm made 1

12 mm from polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and

with rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm
Cód. 9670150 MDT-473 4

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-208 DIGITAL 3

174.5 mm

AUDIO UNIT, B/W TCB-210 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL,

FOR TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM, AND CARD-HOLDER 2

Module which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-208 (1);
the black and white video unit, model TCB-210 (2), for coaxial
1
cable in TV door entry installations; and an informative card-hold-
12 mm
er (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Fitted with
rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (4) for hanging in the
flush-mounted box.).

AUDIO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Below are shown the technical data of each of the models of audio unit which can be incorporated in the upper modules of
entrance panels with pushbuttons.

Cód. 9610033 GRF-208

DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT-PUSHBUTTONS
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for digital door entry and video door entry installations where the
2 1
entrance panel to be installed is one with pushbuttons.
Ability to control the entrance panel video unit in video door entry installations; and, in installations with
several points of entry, to directly control the priorities of the different points of entry in the installation,
without the need for audio selectors. 2-wire BUS digital connection system.
Incorporates confidentiality feature and auto switch-on function (in video door entry installations).
Generates electronic call with audio confirmation for the visitor.

63
 The audio unit incorporates: a microphone, a speaker, a pushbutton to illuminate entrance panel card-holders (1), a red status light
to show when the panel is disabled (2), a jumper to activate/deactivate the door-opening tone indicator (3), volume controls for both
the panel (4) and for telephones/monitors (5), a control for the precise adjustment of volume (6), and a jumper for the configuration
of the main panel (7); the main entrance panel determines the panel from which the telephones/connection brackets of the installa-
tion are programmed and the panel which is activated by the auto switch-on function of the monitors.
The unit also includes lift-up type connections to ensure correct connection.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages in digital door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

7 6 4 5 3
, Power supply TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING
D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS
GRF-208
cod. 9610033
, 15 V ± 10%
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
9 , 10 Panel lighting D1 , D2 10 - 12 V
19 Made in Spain

11 , 12 Electric lock
J1 J2
22 , 18 Door opening D3 , D2 10 - 12 V
BUS
15 V SC1 , 18 Auxiliary pushbutton signal
9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 IN 7 D1 D2 D3 22 , 18 15 V ± 10% 0V
7 Common pushbutton terminal
IN Connector for concentrator of calls SC1 , 18 0V 4.5 V ± 10%
J1 Panel-type selector
(Main/Secondary) 7 , 18 5V ± 10%
J2 Door-opening tone selector
(Enabled/Disabled) 9 , 10 0V 15 V ± 10%

12 , 11 0V 15 V ± 10%

Description of terminals and voltages in digital video door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

7 6 4 5 3 , Power supply TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS , 15 V ± 10%

GRF-208 D3 , D2 Panels BUS
cod. 9610033

9 , 10 Panel lighting D1 , D2 10 - 12 V
19 Made in Spain 11 , 12 Electric lock
J1 J2 22 , 18 Door opening D3 , D2 10 - 12 V
BUS SC1 , 18 Auxiliary pushbutton signal
15 V 22 , 18 15 V ± 10% 0V
9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 IN 7 D1 D2 D3 7 Common pushbutton terminal
19 Alimentation (Standard installation) SC1 , 18 0V 4.5 V ± 10%
and video unit control
IN Connector for concentrator of calls 7 , 18 5V ± 10%
J1 Panel-type selector
(Main/Secondary) 9 , 10 0V 15 V ± 10%
J2 Door-opening tone selector
(Enabled/Disabled) 12 , 11 0V 15 V ± 10%

64
VIDEO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Below are shown the technical data of each of the models of video unit which can be incorporated in the upper modules of
entrance panels.

Cód. 9640002 TCB-011

GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL 1
2
Black and white video unit with 1/3” CCD sensor, and output in CCIR
composite video for 75 Ω coaxial cable. Ability to control directly, in
installations with several points of entry, the video signal from the different
points of entry, without the need for video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen,
3
infrared LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic auto-iris, multidi-
rectional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, it includes
plug type connection terminals with lift-up type connections to facilitate and
guarantee correct connection of the coaxial cable (2) and a short length of
cable (3) for connection with the digital audio unit of the entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

+,- Power supply voltage
+,- 15 V (200 mA máx)
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V1 , M Video signal to the monitors

V2 , M Video signal installations 0 Vpp

15V
with several points of entry V1, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
Made in Spain
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
V4 , M Video signal estate external point of entry
TCB-011
cod. 9640002 0 Vpp
19 Video unit control V2, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
(2)
V4, M 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)

(1) In cases of several points of entry, when any entrance panel video unit is activated.
(2) In estates, when the external entrance panel video unit is activated.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Standard CCIR
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT
Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Lighting Infrared

o
Horizontal 70
600 mm Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
o
Orientation 10
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm 65
 Cód. 9640009 TCB-021
GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
Colour video unit with 1/4” CCD sensor, and output in PAL composite video 1
2

for 75 Ω coaxial cable. Ability to control directly, in installations with several

points of entry, the video signal from the different points of entry, without the
need for video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen, white LED
auxiliary lighting for night vision, automatic white balance setting, multidirec- 3

tional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, it includes plug
type connection terminals with lift-up type connections to facilitate and guaran-
tee correct connection of the coaxial cable (2) and a short length of cable (3) for
connection with the digital audio unit of the entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

+,- Power supply voltage
+,- 15 V (225 mA máx)
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V1 , M Video signal to the monitors
V2 , M Video signal installations 0 Vpp
15V with several points of entry V1, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
Made in Spain
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
V4 , M Video signal estate external point of entry
TCB-021
cod. 9640009 0 Vpp
19 Video unit control V2, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
(2)
V4, M 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)

(1) In cases of several points of entry, when any entrance panel video unit is activated.
(2) In estates, when the external entrance panel video unit is activated.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C Standard PAL

Image sensor Colour CCD 1/4"

AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT
Lighting White leds
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
o
Horizontal 70
Angle of vision o
600 mm Vertical 65
o
Orientation 10
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

66
 Cód. 9640007 TCB-040
GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
1
Black and white video unit with 1/3” CCD sensor, and video output for 2

twisted pair. Ability to control directly, in installations with several points of

entry, the video signal from the different points of entry, without the need for
video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen, infrared
LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic auto-iris, and multidirectional 3

control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, it includes plug type
connection terminals with lift-up type connections to facilitate and guarantee cor-
rect connection of the twisted pair (2) and a short length of cable (3) for con-
nection with the digital audio unit of the entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ Power supply Through audio unit
T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry

T4+ , T4- Video signal estate external point of entry

Output impedance 120 Ω
(T1+, T1-)
Made in Spain

19 TCB-040 19 Alimentation and video unit control

cod. 9640007
Video output 0.5 Vpp (120 Ω)
level

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Standard CCIR

Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Lighting Infrared
o
Horizontal 70
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
o

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Orientation 10

600 mm
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

67
 Cód. 9640008 TCB-050
GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
Colour video unit with 1/4” CCD sensor, and video output for twisted pair. 1
2
Ability to control directly, in installations with several points of entry, the
video signal from the different points of entry, without the need for video
selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen, white
LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, automatic white balance setting, and
3
multidirectional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, it
includes plug type connection terminals with lift-up type connections to facil-
itate and guarantee correct connection of the twisted pair (2) and a short
length of cable (3) for connection with the digital audio unit of the entrance
panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ Power supply Through audio unit
T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry
Output impedance 120 Ω
T4+ , T4- Video signal estate external point of entry
(T1+, T1-)
Made in Spain

19 TCB-050
cod. 9640008 19 Alimentation and video unit control
Video output 0.5 Vpp (120 Ω)
level

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Standard PAL

Image sensor Colour CCD 1/4”

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C
Lighting White leds
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT o
Horizontal 70
Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
o
Orientation 10
600 mm
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

68
 Cód. 9640012 TCB-210
B/W VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Black and white video unit with 1/3” CCD sensor, and output in CCIR com- 1

posite video for 75 Ω coaxial cable. For use in standard TV door entry system
installations.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen, infrared
LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic auto-iris, multidirectional con- 2

trol of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). 15Vdc external power supply. In addi-
tion, it includes plug type connection terminals with lift-up type connections to
facilitate and guarantee correct connection of the coaxial cable (2).
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS VALUES

+,- 15 V
V1 M +,- Power supply voltage
V1, M 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
15V V1 , M Video signal to the modulator
Made in Spain

TCB-210
cod. 9640012

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Standard CCIR

Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C Lighting Infrared

o
Horizontal 70
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
o
Orientation 10
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL

600 mm
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

69
ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES
These modules, manufactured in an aluminium profile, contain Important: Bear in mind that the lower modules of entrance
the stainless steel pushbuttons (1) which enable visitors to com- panels must always be used in conjunction with concentrators of
municate with dwellings. They also contain card-holders to iden- calls. For technical data, see “Concentrators of calls” on page
tify each pushbutton (2) and lights to illuminate the card-holders 73.
(3). They are divided into single, double and configurable Moreover, note that in housing compounds, estate-identifying
modules depending on the distribution of the pushbuttons. accessories must be used. For technical data, see “estate-identi-
fying accessories” on page 74.

2 2 2

1 1 1

ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES WITH SINGLE PUSHBUTTONS

128 mm
Modules with pushbuttons arranged in a single column. Fitted with
rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (1) for hanging in the
flush-mounted box.
B mm (depending on the model)

Available with from 1 to 16 levels or rows of pushbuttons, allowing

the configuration of entrance panels with up to 16 call pushbuttons.

Cód. 9660014 MPS-001

Entrance panel module with 1 single
pushbutton. Total No. of pushbuttons: 1
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660015 MPS-002

12 mm Entrance panel module with 2 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 2
1
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660000 MPS-003

Entrance panel module with 3 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 3
Dimensions 128 mm x 116.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660001 MPS-004

Entrance panel module with 4 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 4
Dimensions 128 mm x 116.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660002 MPS-005

Entrance panel module with 5 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 5
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660003 MPS-006

Entrance panel module with 6 single
70 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 6
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm
Cód. 9660004 MPS-007 Cód. 9660009 MPS-012
Entrance panel module with 7 single Entrance panel module with 12 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 7 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 12
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660005 MPS-008 Cód. 9660010 MPS-013

Entrance panel module with 8 single Entrance panel module with 13 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 8 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 13
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660006 MPS-009 Cód. 9660011 MPS-014

Entrance panel module with 9 single Entrance panel module with 14 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 9 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 14
Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660007 MPS-010 Cód. 9660012 MPS-015

Entrance panel module with 10 single Entrance panel module with 15 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 10 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 15
Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660008 MPS-011 Cód. 9660013 MPS-016

Entrance panel module with 11 single Entrance panel module with 16 single
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 11 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 16
Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES WITH DOUBLE PUSHBUTTONS

128 mm Modules with pushbuttons arranged in a double column.

Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (1) for
hanging in the flush-mounted box.
B mm (depending on the model)

Available with from 1 to 16 levels or rows of pushbuttons,

allowing the configuration of entrance panels with up to 32 call
pushbuttons.

Cód. 9660048 MPD-001

Entrance panel module with 1 double
pushbutton. Total No. of pushbuttons: 2
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm

12 mm
Cód. 9660049 MPD-002
1
Entrance panel module with 2 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 4
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660050 MPD-003

Entrance panel module with 3 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 6
Dimensions 128 mm x 116.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660051 MPD-004

Entrance panel module with 4 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 8
Dimensions 128 mm x 116.5 mm x 12 mm
71
 Cód. 9660052 MPD-005 Cód. 9660058 MPD-011
Entrance panel module with 5 double Entrance panel module with 11 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 10 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 22
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660053 MPD-006 Cód. 9660059 MPD-012

Entrance panel module with 6 double Entrance panel module with 12 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 12 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 24
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660054 MPD-007 Cód. 9660060 MPD-013

Entrance panel module with 7 double Entrance panel module with 13 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 14 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 26
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensiones 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660055 MPD-008 Cód. 9660061 MPD-014

Entrance panel module with 8 double Entrance panel module with 14 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 16 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 28
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660056 MPD-009 Cód. 9660062 MPD-015

Entrance panel module with 9 double Entrance panel module with 15 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 18 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 30
Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

Cód. 9660057 MPD-010 Cód. 9660063 MPD-016

Entrance panel module with 10 double Entrance panel module with 16 double
pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 20 pushbuttons. Total No. of pushbuttons: 32
Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

LOWER ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH CONFIGURABLE PUSHBUTTONS

128 mm

Modules with a configurable pushbuttons. The distribution of the pushbuttons is defined by the user
B mm (depending on rows of pushbuttons)

in view of specific requirements of the installation. These modules are extremely useful when the dis-
tribution of flats within a building is not homogeneous. This irregular distribution can be reflected on
the entrance panel. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings for fitting inside the
flush-mounted box.
Note: For information on how to order entrance panel modules with configurable pushbuttons, see
the ALCAD website (www.alcad.net).

Cód. 9660064 MPD-900

Configurable entrance panel module with from
12 mm 1 to 8 levels or rows of pushbuttons.
Dimensions Varies with the number of levels or
rows of pushbuttons.

Cód. 9660065 MPD-901

Configurable entrance panel module with from
9 to 16 levels or rows of pushbuttons.
Dimensions Varies with the number of levels or
rows of pushbuttons.

72
 128 mm Cód. 9660016 MKD-900
Configurable entrance panel module with from 1 to 4 levels or rows of pushbuttons
B mm (depending on the configuration)

and keypad for access control.

Dimensions Varies with the number of levels or rows of pushbuttons.

From 1 to 2 rows of pushbuttons: 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm
From 3 to 4 rows of pushbuttons: 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

12 mm

CONCENTRATORS OF CALLS

Complementary elements for lower entrance panel modules in digital installations with entrance panel with pushbuttons. They serve
as links between the pushbuttons and the digital audio unit.

88 mm Cód. 9730030 COL-000

OUT IN
CONCENTRATOR OF 16 CALLS
40 mm

Made in Spain Concentrator for the connection of up to 16 pushbuttons.

1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16
COL-000
cod. 9730030

Of suitable dimensions for fixing inside the flush-mounted box or surface wall-mounted box of the
21 mm
entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals:

OUT IN
Output conector
Input conector
Made in Spain
1...8 Pushbutton connector
12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
9...16 Pushbutton connector
COL-000
cod. 9730030

73
 Number of concentrators necessary: NUMBER OF PUSHBUTTONS NUMBER OF
ON ENTRANCE PANEL CONCENTRATORS
The number of concentrators necessary will be determined by the number of push-
buttons on the entrance panel which is to be installed. OUT IN

Made in Spain

The following table shows the number of concentrators necessary as determined

1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16
COL-000
cod. 9730030

COL-000
by the number of entrance panel pushbuttons.
Note: In the case of installations where a estate-identifying accessory is neces- From 1 to 16 1
sary, see “Using the estate-identifying accessory in conjunction with concentrators of From 17 to 32 2
calls” on page 75. From 33 to 48 3
From 49 to 64 4
From 65 to 80 5
From 81 to 96 6

ESTATE-IDENTIFYING ACCESSORIES

Complementary elements for entrance panels with pushbuttons in housing compounds or estates with several buildings.

88 mm Cód. 9730014 AIB-000

ESTATE-IDENTIFYING ACCESSORY
40 mm

Accessory which incorporates a concentrator of 4 calls, eliminating the need for the COL-000 con-
OUT

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
centrator of calls in entrance panels with a number of pushbuttons equal to or inferior to 4.
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Of suitable dimensions for fixing inside the flush-mounted box or surface wall-mounted box of the
21 mm
entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equip-
ment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

D1 , D2 9 - 11 V

+,- Power supply voltage 9 - 11 V

D5 , D4
D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS 1
4
2
5
3
6
12 - 14 V
OUT

7 8 9
C 0

D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4 D5 , D4 Estates BUS
OUT D3 , D2 9 - 11 V
AIB-000
SW1

OUT Output connector

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1..4 Connection to pushbuttons

+,- 7.5 - 15 V

1 , D2 0 V 5 V

2 , D2 0 V 5 V

3 , D2 0 V 5 V

4 , D2 0 V 5 V

Number of estate-identifying accessories necessary:

A single estate-identifying accessory is required for each dwelling, regardless of the number of
points of entry to the dwelling. If the building has several points of entry, the accessory is installed in
74 the entrance panel which has been defined as the main entrance panel.
 Using the estate-identifying accessory in con- NUMBER OF PUSHBUTTONS NUMBER OF NUMBER OF ESTATE
junction with concentrators of calls: ON ENTRANCE PANEL CONCENTRATORS IDENTIFYING ACCESSORIES

In installations with more than 4 dwellings, you can use OUT IN

OUT
Made in Spain

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4

the concentrator of 4 calls incorporated in the accessory in

1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 OUT
COL-000
AIB-000

SW1
cod. 9730030
cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

COL-000 AIB-000
combination with the concentrator of 16 calls, model
COL-000, to reach the desired number of calls. This allows From 1 to 4 1
you to keep the number of concentrators necessary to a From 5 to 20 1 1
minimum.
From 21 to 36 2 1
The following table shows the number of concentrators
From 37 to 52 3 1
necessary in such cases, depending on the number of push-
buttons on the entrance panel. From 53 to 68 4 1

From 69 to 84 5 1

From 85 to 96 6 1

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD

The system of entrance panels with keypad consists of
several models. These panels, manufactured with an aluminium
profile, house the audio unit, the numeric keypad and the video
unit.
Entrance panels with keypad can be installed in parallel with
one or several panels with directory in order to inform the visi-
tor of the code which must be entered in order to make a call
to any particular dwelling. 3 3

All the panel models have the same dimensions. Hence, in

3
2 2
6 2 6
1 6 1
5 1 5

all cases the same model of flush-mounted box or surface wall- 4

8
9

4
5

8
9 4
8
9

7 7

mounted box is required, regardless of the model of panel cho- C

0 7

C
0
C
0

sen. (See Chapter 3, “Entrance panels: dimensions and

accessories”.)
Entrance panel with keypad Entrance panel in parallel
with entrance panel with directory

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH DIRECTORY

128 mm
2 Cód. 9800002 PTN-00000

1
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH DIRECTORY
Panel which accommodates four informative cardholders, each 76.5mm x
43.5mm, manufactured in polycarbonate (1). It has built-in auxiliary lighting
of the cardholders, by means of LEDs, for situations when the external light
291 mm

is poor. The panel can be powered with either DC (direct current) or AC

(alternating current). Equipped with water-tight rubber strips and rings for fix-
ing inside the flush-mounted box (2). To make it easy to record the codes of
each dwelling, the panel is supplied with sheets of white, pre-printed cards
to be placed in the card-holders.
12 mm

75
 Description of terminals and voltages

TERMINALS VALUES
+,_ Power supply voltage (DC)
+,_ 15 V
, Power supply voltage (AC)
, 12 V

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

The following table shows which model of entrance panel with keypad should be chosen for different kinds of installation.

ELECTRONIC CALL COMPLETE MODULES,

PARTICULAR INSTALLATION
WITH VIDEO UNIT
BUILDINGS EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY Standard installation PAK-41000

INSTALLATION Several points of entry PTN-00000
Housing estates PAK-41000 PTN-00000
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY Standard installation PAK-42000
INSTALLATION WITH Several points of entry PTN-00000
CONCIERGE SYSTEM
Housing estates PAK-42000 PAK-44000
PTN-00000 PTN-00000
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY Standard installation
INSTALLATION Several points of entry PDK-41300 (B/W)
COAXIAL PDK-41500 (COLOUR) MVN-903 (B/W)
PAK-41000 PDK-41300 (B/W) MVN-905 (COLOUR)
Housing estates PTN-00000 PDK-41500 (COLOUR)
PAK-41000 PTN-00000
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY Standard installation PDK-42300 (B/W)
INSTALLATION Several points of entry PDK-42500 (COLOUR)
WITH CONCIERGE SYSTEM PAK-42000
COAXIAL PTN-00000 MVN-903 (B/W)
PDK-42300 (B/W) PDK-44300 (B/W) MVN-905 (COLOUR)
PDK-42500 (COLOUR) PDK-44500 (COLOUR)
Urbanización
PAK-42000 PAK-44000
PTN-00000 PTN-00000
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY Standard installation
INSTALLATION Several points of entry PDK-41400 (B/W)
TWISTED PAIR PDK-41600 (COLOUR) MVN-901 (B/W)
PAK-41000 PDK-41400 (B/W) MVN-904 (COLOUR)
Housing estates PTN-00000 PDK-41600 (COLOUR)
PAK-41000 PTN-00000
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY Standard installation PDK-42400 (B/W)
INSTALLATION Several points of entry PDK-42600 (COLOUR)
WITH CONCIERGE SYSTEM PAK-42000
TWISTED PAIR PTN-00000 MVN-901 (B/W)
PDK-42400 (B/W) PDK-44400 (B/W) MVN-904 (COLOUR)
PDK-42600 (COLOUR) PDK-44600 (COLOUR)
Housing estates
PAK-42000 PAK-44000
PTN-00000 PTN-00000

76
 Below we describe each entrance panel with keypad in detail. To make it easier for you to find the model you need, we have
divided the panels into two groups: entrance panels with keypad for installations without concierge system; and entrance panels
with keypad for installations with concierge system.

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD FOR INSTALLATIONS WITHOUT CONCIERGE SYSTEM

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD AND AUDIO UNIT

128 mm 3

Cód. 9800033 PAK-41000

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-211 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT
AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-211 (1)
291 mm

and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (2). Fitted with rubber strips for 1

water-tightness and with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

12 mm

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD, AUDIO UNIT AND VIDEO UNIT

128 mm
Cód. 9800034 PDK-41300 4

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-211 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT, 2

TCB-011 GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT (COAXIAL), AND

KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
291 mm

Entrance panel which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-211 (1),
the generic black and white video unit for coaxial cable, model TCB-011
1
1 2 3 (2), and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3). Fitted with rubber strips
4 5 6

7 8 9 for water-tightness and with rings for hanging in the flush-mounted box (4).
C 0

12 mm
Cód. 9800036 PDK-41500
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-211 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT,
TCB-021 GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT (COAXIAL), AND 4

KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD

Entrance panel which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-211 (1),
the generic colour video unit for coaxial cable, model TCB-021 (2), and the
numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tight-
ness and with rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted box (4).

77
 128 mm
Cód. 9800035 PDK-41400 4

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-211 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT, 2

TCB-040 GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT (TWISTED PAIR), AND

KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
291 mm

Entrance panel which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-211 (1),
the generic black and white video unit for twisted pair, model TCB-040 (2), 1

1 2 3 and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3). Fitted with rubber strips for
4 5 6

7 8 9 water-tightness and with rings for hanging in the flush-mounted box (4).
C 0

12 mm
Cód. 9800049 PDK-41600
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-211 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT,
TCB-050 GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT (TWISTED PAIR), 4

AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD

Entrance panel which houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-211 (1),
the generic colour video unit for twisted pair, model TCB-050 (2), and the
numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tight-
ness and with rings for hanging in the flush-mounted box (4).

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE SYSTEM

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD AND AUDIO UNIT

128 mm Cód. 9800037 PAK-42000 3

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-212 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT

AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in standard installations, installations with several
points of entry, and housing compounds (in this last case, only in the inner
291 mm

buildings). 1

1 2 3 The panel houses the digital audio unit, model GRF-212 (1) and the
4 5 6

C
8

0
9
numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (2). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tight-
ness and with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.
2

12 mm

Cód. 9800038 PAK-44000

3
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-214 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT
FOR GATEHOUSE AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in housing compounds: only in gatehouses or at
external points of entry.
The panel houses the digital audio unit for gatehouses in installations with
concierge system, model GRF-214 (1), and the numeric keypad, model
KPD-001 (2). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings for
hanging in the flush-mounted box (3).

78
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD, AUDIO UNIT AND VIDEO UNIT

128 mm Cód. 9800039 PDK-42300 4

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-212 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT,

2

TCB-011 GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT (COAXIAL), AND

KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in standard installations, installations with several
291 mm

points of entry, and housing compounds (in this last case, only in the inner
1

1 2 3
buildings).
The panel houses the digital audio unit for installations with concierge sys-
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

tem, model GRF-212 (1), the generic black and white video unit for coaxial
cable, model TCB-011 (2), and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3). 3

12 mm Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings for hanging in the
flush-mounted box (4).

Cód. 9800041 PDK-42500 4

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-212 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT,

TCB-021 GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT (COAXIAL), AND
KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in standard installations, installations with several
points of entry, and housing compounds (in this last case, only in the inner
buildings).
The panel houses the digital audio unit for installations with concierge sys-
tem, model GRF-212 (1), the generic colour video unit for coaxial cable,
model TCB-021 (2), and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3). Fitted with
rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings for hanging in the flush-mount-
ed box (4).

Cód. 9800043 PDK-42400

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-212 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT,
TCB-040 GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT (TWISTED PAIR), AND
KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in standard installations, installations with several
points of entry, and housing compounds (in this last case, only in the inner
buildings).
The panel houses the digital audio unit for installations with concierge sys-
tem, model GRF-212 (1), the generic black and white video unit for twisted
pair, model TCB-040 (2), and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3).
Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings for hanging in the
flush-mounted box (4).

Cód. 9800046 PDK-42600

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-212 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT,
TCB-050 GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT (TWISTED PAIR),
AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in standard installations, installations with several
points of entry, and housing compounds (in this last case, only in the inner
buildings).
The panel houses the digital audio unit for installations with concierge sys-
tem, model GRF-212 (1), the generic colour video unit for twisted pair,
model TCB-050 (2), and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001 (3). Fitted with
rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings for hanging in the flush-mount- 79
ed box (4).
 128 mm
Cód. 9800040 PDK-44300
4

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-214 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT

FOR GATEHOUSE, TCB-011 GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT 2

(COAXIAL), AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD

Entrance panel for use in housing compounds: only in gatehouses or at
291 mm

external points of entry.

The panel houses the digital audio unit for gatehouses in installations with 1

concierge system, model GRF-214 (1), the generic black and white video
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0 unit for coaxial cable, model TCB-011 (2), and the numeric keypad, model
KPD-001 (3). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (4) 3
for hanging in the flush-mounted box.
12 mm

Cód. 9800042 PDK-44500

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-214 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT 4

FOR GATEHOUSE, TCB-021 GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT

(COAXIAL), AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in housing compounds: only in gatehouses or at
external points of entry.
The panel houses the digital audio unit for gatehouses in installations with
concierge system, model GRF-214 (1), the generic colour video unit for
coaxial cable, model TCB-021 (2), and the numeric keypad, model KPD-001
(3). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (4) for hang-
ing in the flush-mounted box.

Cód. 9800044 PDK-44400

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-214 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT
FOR GATEHOUSE, TCB-040 GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT
(TWISTED PAIR), AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in housing compounds: only in gatehouses or at
external points of entry.
The panel houses the digital audio unit for gatehouses in installations with
concierge system, model GRF-214 (1), the generic black and white video
unit for twisted pair, model TCB-040 (2), and the numeric keypad, model
KPD-001(3). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (4)
for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

Cód. 9800048 PDK-44600

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GRF-214 DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT
FOR GATEHOUSE, TCB-050 GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT
(TWISTED PAIR), AND KPD-001 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Entrance panel for use in housing compounds: only in gatehouses or at
external points of entry.
The panel houses the digital audio unit for gatehouses in installations with
concierge system, model GRF-214 (1), the generic colour video unit for
twisted pair, model TCB-050 (2), and the numeric keypad, model KPD-
001(3). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (4) for
hanging in the flush-mounted box.

80
AUDIO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
The technical data of the different models of audio unit incorporated in entrance panels with keypad are provided below.

Cod. 9610034 GRF-211

DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT WITH NUMERIC DISPLAY
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for digital door entry or video door entry installations where an entry
panel with keypad is to be installed and where the concierge system in not required.

1
Ability to control the entrance panel video unit in video door entry installations and, in installations with
several points of entry, directly to control the priorities of the different points of entry in the installation, i.e.
without need for audio selectors. Digital connection system by means of 2-wire communication BUS.
Incorporates confidentiality feature and auto switch-on function (in video door entry installations). Generates
electronic call with audio confirmation for the visitor.
The audio unit incorporates: a microphone, a speaker, a numeric display (1), volume controls for both the
panel (2) and for telephones/monitors (3), and a control for the precise adjustment of volume (4).
The unit also includes lift-up type connections to ensure correct connection.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages in digital door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals to supply power
to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

2 3

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

19 , Power supply voltage +, - 15 ±10% V

D1 , D2 Telephones BUS D1 , D2 13 - 14 V
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
GRF-211 D5 , D4 Estates BUS D3 , D2 13 - 14 V
cod. 9610034

(1)
Made in Spain
IN Numeric keypad connector D5 , D4 13 - 14 V
IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 (1) Entrance panel defined as the external entrance panel

Description of terminals and voltages in digital video door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals to supply power
to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.
2 3

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

, Power supply voltage +, -

19 15 ±10% V

D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS D1 , D2 13 - 14 V
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D5 , D4 Estates BUS D3 , D2 13 - 14 V
GRF-211
cod. 9610034
19 Alimentation (Standard installation) (1)
and video unit control D5 , D4 13 - 14 V
Made in Spain

IN BUS IN Numeric keypad connector

15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
(1) Entrance panel defined as the external entrance panel 81

4
 Cod. 9610035 GRF-212
DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT WITH NUMERIC DISPLAY FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH CON-
CIERGE SYSTEM
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for digital door entry or video door entry installations where the entry
panel to be installed is an entrance panel with keypad and where it is also desired to install a concierge sys-
1
tem. In housing compounds with a concierge system, this audio unit is used only in the entrance panels of each
of the inner buildings of the compound.
Ability to control the entrance panel video unit in video door entry installations and, in installations with
several points of entry, directly to control the priorities of the different points of entry in the installation, i.e.
without need for audio selectors. Digital connection system by means of 2-wire communication BUS.
Incorporates confidentiality feature and auto switch-on function (in video door entry installations). Generates
electronic call with audio confirmation for the visitor.
The audio unit incorporates: a microphone, a speaker, a numeric display (1), volume controls for both the
panel (2) and for telephones/monitors (3), and a control for the precise adjustment of volume (4).
The unit also includes lift-up type connections to ensure correct connection.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages in digital door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals to supply power
to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

2 3

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

19 +, - 15 ±10% V
, Power supply voltage
D1 , D2 13 - 14 V
D1 , D2 Telephones BUS
D3 , D2 Panels BUS D3 , D2 13 - 14 V
GRF-212 D5 , D4 Estates BUS
cod. 9610035
D5 , D4 (1)
13 - 14 V
Made in Spain
IN Numeric keypad connector
IN BUS
15 V (1) Housing states
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Description of terminals and voltages in digital video door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals to supply power
to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.
2 3

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

, Power supply voltage

19 +, - 15 ±10% V

D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS D1 , D2 13 - 14 V
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D5 , D4 Estates BUS D3 , D2 13 - 14 V
GRF-212
cod. 9610035
19 Alimentation (Standard installation) (1)
and video unit control D5 , D4 13 - 14 V
Made in Spain

IN BUS IN Numeric keypad connector

15 V (1) Housing states
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

82
 Cod. 9610036 GRF-214
DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT WITH NUMERIC DISPLAY FOR GATEHOUSE IN INSTALLATIONS
WITH CONCIERGE SYSTEM
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for digital door entry or video door entry installations in housing com-
pounds, containing several inner buildings, where the entrance panel to be installed is an entrance panel with
1
keypad and where it is also desired to install a concierge system. To be used only in each gatehouse or exter-
nal point of entry to the compound.
Ability to control the entrance panel video unit in video door entry installations and, in installations with
several gatehouses or external points of entry, directly to control the priorities of the different gatehouses or
points of entry in the installation, i.e. without need for audio selectors. Digital connection system by means of
2-wire communication BUS.
Incorporates confidentiality feature and auto switch-on function (in video door entry installations). Generates
electronic call with audio confirmation for the visitor.
The audio unit incorporates: a microphone, a speaker, a numeric display (1), volume controls for both the panel (2) and for tele-
phones/monitors (3), and a control for the precise adjustment of volume (4).
The unit also includes lift-up type connections to ensure correct connection.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages in digital door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals to supply power
to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

2 3

19

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

, Power supply voltage

D5 , D4 Estates BUS
+, - 15 ±10% V
GRF-214
cod. 9610036
IN Numeric keypad connector D5 , D4 13 - 14 V
Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

Description of terminals and voltages in digital video door entry installations:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals to supply power
to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.
2 3

19
, Power supply voltage
TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING
D5 , D4 Estates BUS
+, - 15 ±10% V
GRF-214 19 Video unit control
cod. 9610036
D5 , D4 13 - 14 V
IN Numeric keypad connector
Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

83
 VIDEO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
The technical data of the different models of video unit incorporated in entrance panels with keypad are provided below.

Cód. 9640002 TCB-011

GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
Black and white video unit with 1/3” CCD sensor, and output in CCIR 1

composite video for 75 Ω coaxial cable. Ability to control directly, in 2

installations with several points of entry, the video signal from the differ-
ent points of entry, without the need for video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen,
infrared LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic auto-iris, multi-
directional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, it 3

includes plug type connection terminals with lift-up type connections to

facilitate and guarantee correct connection of the coaxial cable (2) and
a short length of cable (3) for connection with the digital audio unit of the entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

+,- Power supply voltage
+,- 15 V (200 mA máx)
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V1 , M Video signal to the monitors

V2 , M Video signal installations 0 Vpp

15V
with several points of entry V1, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
Made in Spain
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
V4 , M Video signal estate external point of entry
TCB-011
cod. 9640002 0 Vpp
19 Video unit control V2, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
(2)
V4, M 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)

(1) In cases of several points of entry, when any entrance panel video unit is activated.
(2) In estates, when the external entrance panel video unit is activated.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT Standard CCIR

Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL

Lighting Infrared
600 mm
o
Horizontal 70
Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
o
Orientation 10
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

84
 Cód. 9640009 TCB-021
GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
Colour video unit with 1/4” CCD sensor, and output in PAL composite 1

video for 75 Ω coaxial cable. Ability to control directly, in installations 2

with several points of entry, the video signal from the different points of
entry, without the need for video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen,
white LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, automatic white balance
setting, multidirectional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In 3

addition, it includes plug type connection terminals with lift-up type con-
nections to facilitate and guarantee correct connection of the coaxial
cable (2) and a short length of cable (3) for connection with the digital
audio unit of the entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

+,- Power supply voltage
+,- 15 V (225 mA máx)
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V1 , M Video signal to the monitors
V2 , M Video signal installations 0 Vpp
15V with several points of entry V1, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
Made in Spain
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
V4 , M Video signal estate external point of entry
TCB-021
cod. 9640009 0 Vpp
19 Video unit control V2, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
(2)
V4, M 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)

(1) In cases of several points of entry, when any entrance panel video unit is activated.
(2) In estates, when the external entrance panel video unit is activated.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C
Standard PAL

AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT

Image sensor Colour CCD 1/4"

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Lighting White leds

o
Horizontal 70
600 mm Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
o
Orientation 10
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

85
 Cód. 9640007 TCB-040
GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
Black and white video unit with 1/3” CCD sensor, and video output for 1

twisted pair. Ability to control directly, in installations with several points 2

of entry, the video signal from the different points of entry, without the
need for video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen,
infrared LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic auto-iris, and
multidirectional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, 3

it includes plug type connection terminals with lift-up type connections to

facilitate and guarantee correct connection of the twisted pair (2) and a
short length of cable (3) for connection with the digital audio unit of the
entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ Power supply Through audio unit
T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry

T4+ , T4- Video signal estate external point of entry

Output impedance 120 Ω
(T1+, T1-)
Made in Spain

19 TCB-040 19 Alimentation and video unit control

cod. 9640007
Video output 0.5 Vpp (120 Ω)
level

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Standard CCIR
Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C
Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT
Lighting Infrared
o

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Horizontal 70

Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
600 mm o
Orientation 10
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

86
 Cód. 9640008 TCB-050
GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
Colour video unit with 1/4” CCD sensor, and video output for twisted 1

pair. Ability to control directly, in installations with several points of entry, 2

the video signal from the different points of entry, without the need for
video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front screen,
white LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, automatic white balance set-
ting, and multidirectional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In 3

addition, it includes plug type connection terminals with lift-up type con-
nections to facilitate and guarantee correct connection of the twisted pair
(2) and a short length of cable (3) for connection with the digital audio
unit of the entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ Power supply Through audio unit
T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry
Output impedance 120 Ω
T4+ , T4- Video signal estate external point of entry
(T1+, T1-)
Made in Spain

19 TCB-050
cod. 9640008 19 Alimentation and video unit control
Video output 0.5 Vpp (120 Ω)
level

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Standard PAL
Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C
Image sensor Colour CCD 1/4”
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT
Lighting White leds
o

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Horizontal 70

Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
600 mm o
Orientation 10
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

87
NUMERIC KEYPADS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
The technical data of the different models of video unit incorporated in entrance panels with keypad are provided below.

Cod. 9650002 KPD-001

NUMERIC KEYPAD
1 2 3
4 5 6 Has a built-in relay for activating the electric lock as well as two double-contact relays to handle addi-
7 8 9
tional devices. Audio confirmation that a key has been pressed: the volume of this function can be adjusted
C 0
(1).
To ensure correct connection, lift-up connection terminals are also included.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer..
, Power supply voltage (direct current)
1
OUT Audio unit connector

11 , 12 Electric lock
22 , - Door opening
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
Circuit 1
OUT Ctrl1 , - Control TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING
C1 Common
NO1 Normally open contact +, - 15 ±10% V
V
11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 NC1 Normally closed contact
11 , 12 0V 15 ±10% V
Circuit 2
Ctrl2 , - Control
C2 Common
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of Circuits 1 y 2: 1A - 24V /

Activation of circuits 1 and 2. Status of the contacts

CIRCUIT 1
STATUS OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

C1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2

C1, NO1

C1, NC1
Auxiliary pushbutton
on the telephone External pushbutton

CIRCUIT 2
STATUS OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

1 2 3 C2, NO2
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

88 By pressing each key

(with enabled function) C2, NC2
External pushbutton
ACCESSORIES FOR ENTRANCE PANEL
FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES
114 mm 45 mm Flush-mounted boxes are used for fixing the entrance panel in the
1
desired location in such a way that the panel is flush with the wall.
Flush-mounted boxes have protection plugs (1), support axles for
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

tilting the entrance panel (2), and diverse points through which the
cable hoses can be passed (3). They have lateral partitions (4), used
B mm (depending on the model)

when installing several flush-mounted boxes side by side (i.e. for

panels in parallel), in which case CEM-001 separators must be used. 2

Choice of entrance panel

The correct choice of entrance panel is determined by the dimen-
sions of the entrance panel which is to be installed.
In Chapter 3, “Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories”, you 3

will find a table indicating which flush-mounted box to choose,

depending on the size of the entrance panel.

SEPARATOR FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Cód. 9740004 CEM-001

SET OF SEPARATORS FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES
Elements which permit the assembly of several flush-mounted boxes. Used when several
entrance panels are installed in parallel, they ensure the necessary separation between
boxes so that the boxes are aligned correctly. One set of separators is required for each
pair of flush-mounted boxes.
Note: Bear in mind that for each set of separators used, it is necessary to enlarge the
width of the cavity in the wall in which the flush-mounted boxes are to be placed by 15mm.

243 mm 372 mm

15 mm 15 mm 15 mm

114 mm 114 mm 114 mm 114 mm 114 mm 114 mm

15 mm
ARRIBA ARRIBA ARRIBA
ARRIBA ARRIBA UP UP UP
ARRIBA UP UP
UP HAUT HAUT HAUT
HAUT HAUT
HAUT

Width Enlarge for each 2 flush-mounted boxes in parallel 3 flush-mounted boxes in parallel
1flush mounted box set of separators

89
SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES
Surface wall-mounted boxes are used to fix the entrance panel in the desired place by installing the panel onto the surface of the
wall. They are used, for example, when the wall is made of a material that is difficult to work with (e.g. marble or granite).
To install several surface wall-mounted boxes (for panels in parallel), it is recommended that you use CSU-000 separators.
Also available are angular surface wall-mounted boxes: these make it possible to fix the entrance panel at an angle. Angular
models are useful when the place chosen for the installation of the entrance panel is difficult to access (e.g. when it is behind a
fence) or when, in a video door entry installation, a better orientation of the video unit is required.

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES

SINGLE SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES SEPARATOR FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

Cód. 9740172 CSU-000

128 mm 40 mm
SET OF SEPARATORS FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED
BOXES
B mm (depending on the model)

Elements which permit the assembly of several surface wall-mounted

boxes (excluding angular models), making it easy to fix the boxes in the
desired place. One set of separators is required for each pair of sur-
face wall-mounted boxes.

ANGULAR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES

SINGLE ANGULAR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES

128 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

84
mm

90o

Choice of surface wall-mounted box

The correct choice of surface wall-mounted box is determined by the dimensions of the entrance panel which is going to be
installed.
In Chapter 3, “Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories”, you will find a table indicating which surface wall-mounted box to
choose, depending on the size of the entrance panel.

90
RAIN-SHIELDS
A rain-shield provides the entrance panel with additional protection against inclement weather conditions, such as rain, snow, etc.
Two models are available, depending on the element which is going to be used for fixing the entrance panel: rain-shields for flush-
mounted boxes and rain-shields for surface wall-mounted boxes.
These two categories are each subdivided into single , double and triple rain-shields, depending on whether you wish to protect
one entrance panel (single rain-shield), two entrance panels in parallel (double rain-shield), or three entrance panels in parallel (triple
rain-shield).

RAIN-SHIELDS FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES

SINGLE RAIN-SHIELDS

171 mm 60 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

DOUBLE RAIN-SHIELDS

299 mm 60 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

TRIPLE RAIN-SHIELDS

427 mm 60 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

91
 RAIN-SHIELDS FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES

SINGLE RAIN-SHIELDS

156 mm 82 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

DOUBLE RAIN-SHIELDS

284 mm 82 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

TRIPLE RAIN-SHIELDS

412 mm 82 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

Choosing a rain-shield
The correct choice of rain-shield is determined by the dimensions of the entrance panel to be installed.
In Chapter 3, “Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories”, you will find a table indicating which model of rain-shield to choose,
depending on the entrance panel.

92
COVER FRAMES FOR ENTRANCE PANELS
Frames manufactured in aluminium. Used mainly in refurbishing or repair work, when the old entrance panel is being replaced
by one which is smaller. These frames are also useful in facilitating installations where the wall on which the entrance panel is to be
located is uneven or out of true. The frame can be fixed either to the flush-mounted box of the installation or directly to the wall itself.
In the latter case, it is possible to order it ready for attachment to the wall.
They are divided into frames for single panel, for double panel and for triple panel; for fitting either one entrance panel (cover
frame for single panel); or two entrance panels in parallel (cover frame for double panel); or three entrance panels in parallel (cover
frame for triple panel).
The frames do not have standard dimensions. The user must define the exact dimensions according to the requirements of the
installation.
Note: For information on how to order cover frames for entrance panels, see the ALCAD website (at www.alcad.net).

Cód. 9740047 MAR-900

COVER FRAME FOR SINGLE PANEL
3 mm

Cód. 9740016 MAR-901

COVER FRAME FOR DOUBLE PANEL
3 mm

Cód. 9740017 MAR-902

COVER FRAME FOR TRIPLE PANEL
3 mm

93
CONCIERGE SYSTEMS
In installations with concierge system, as well as selecting a specific entrance panel with keypad (see “Entrance panels with key-
pad” on page 75), you will need a concierge unit panel and a telephone or monitor specifically for use with the concierge system.
If you decide to install these elements, you can receive and control all calls made to the houses and flats in the installation.
Note: For desktop installation of the concierge unit panel and of the telephone/monitor of the concierge system, a desktop
support is required. (See “Accessories for concierge systems” on page 103.)

3 3

2 2
6 6
1 1
5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8

7 7
0 0

C C

Concierge unit panel Concierge unit panel

Telephone for concierge system

Monitor for concierge system

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

The panel, manufactured with an aluminium profile, houses the audio unit and the numeric keypad.
The dimensions of the concierge unit panel are the same as those of entrance panels with keypad. Hence, they are used with the
same models of flush-mounted boxes or surface wall-mounted boxes. (See Chapter 3, “Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories.)

128 mm
Cód. 9800012 PAK-03020 3

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL WITH GRF-013 DIGITAL

AUDIO UNIT FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM AND
KPD-003 NUMERIC KEYPAD
Concierge unit panel to be used in digital electronic door entry and
291 mm

video door entry installations (standard installations, installations with 1

4
2

5
3

6
several points of entry, and housing compounds).
The panel houses the digital audio unit for concierge unit, model
7 8 9

C 0

GRF-013 (1), and the numeric keypad for concierge unit, model
KPD-003 (2). Fitted with water-tight rubber strips and rings for 2

12 mm hanging in the flush-mounted box (3).

94
AUDIO UNITS IN CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

The technical data of the different models of audio unit incorporated in the concierge unit panel are provided below.

Cod. 9610020 GRF-013

DIGITAL AUDIO UNIT FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for concierge unit panel.
Digital connection system by means of 2-wire communication BUS.
1
Incorporates confidentiality feature. Generates electronic call with audio confirmation.
The audio unit incorporates: a numeric display (1); volume controls both for reception on the concierge
unit panel itself (2) and for emitting to telephones/monitors and entrance panels (3); and a further control
for the precise adjustment of volume.
The unit also includes lift-up type connection terminals to ensure correct connection.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals to supply power
to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

2 3

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

, Power supply voltage +, - 15 ±10% V

19
E
D
C
B D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS D1 , D2 13 - 14 V
A
CC2 D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D5 , D4 Exterior entrance BUS D3 , D2 13 - 14 V
GRF-013
cod. 9610020
CC2 Concierge unit (1)
telephone/monitor connector D5 , D4 13 - 14 V
Made in Spain

IN BUS IN Numeric keypad connector

15 V (1) Housing estates.
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

95
NUMERIC KEYPADS IN CONCIERGE UNIT PANELS

The technical data of the different models of numeric keypad incorporated in the concierge unit panel are provided below.

Cod. 9650003 KPD-003

1 2 3
NUMERIC KEYPAD FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
4 5 6 Incorporates three double-contact relays for handling additional devices. Audio confirmation that a key
7
C
8
0
9
has been pressed: the volume of this function can be adjusted (1).
To ensure correct connection, lift-up connection terminals are also included.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

, Power supply
1
OUT Audio unit conector

Circuit 1
Ctrl1 , - Control
KPD-003 C1 Common
cod. 9650003 TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING
NO1 Normally open contact
OUT NC1 Normally closed contact
+, - 15 ±10% V
Circuit 2
V V
C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
Ctrl2 , - Control
C2 Common
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Circuit 3
Ctrl3 , - Control
C3 Common
NO3 Normally open contact
NC3 Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of circuits 1, 2 y 3: 1A - 24V /

96
 Activation of circuits 1, 2 and 3. Status of contacts

CIRCUIT 1
STATUS OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

4 5 6

7 8 9 C1, NO1
C 0

(1) C1, NC1

By pressing the indicated key

CIRCUIT 2
STATUS OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

4
2

5
3

6
C2, NO2
7 8 9

C 0

By pressing each key

(with enabled function) C2, NC2

CIRCUIT 3
STATUS OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

5 6

7 8 9
C3, NO3
0

(1) C3, NC3

By pressing the indicated key

(1) Provided that the concierge unit is not in communication with the entrance panel.

97
 TELEPHONES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
Telephone for wall-mounting, manufactured in ABS plastic.
Privacy of communication (confidentiality feature). The telephone is on standby until it receives a call;
when it does so, the audio functions are enabled for a set period of time by the audio unit of the
entrance panel or by that of the concierge unit panel, depending on where the call was made from.
Electronic call system: when a call is made at the entrance panel or from a dwelling, the call tone 1

generated by the audio unit of the entrance panel or by that of the concierge unit panel is heard in the
speaker of the telephone receiver.
The base of the telephone has several points for fixing to the wall (1). The telephone receiver has a
built-in electret-type microphone and a 16 Ω ferrite speaker. The receiver cable is flexible and extensi-
2
ble with telephone-type connectors (2). To ensure correct connection, lift-up connection terminals are
also included.

84 mm Cód. 9680008 TCD-001

TELEPHONE FOR DIGITAL CONCIERGE SYSTEM
1
2
Has two auxiliary pushbuttons (1) for additional functions (e.g. the activation of accessories) and a short
cable (2) for connection with the digital audio unit of the concierge unit panel.
224 mm

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

50.6 mm

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

(A,B,C,D) Terminals of concierge unit A,B 0.7 V 4.9 V

telephone connector
25 , 27 Auxiliary pushbuttons 1.8 V
CC2 of the telephone C,B 0V
Audio max 4 Vpp
A B C D 25 27
D,B 0V Audio max 11 Vpp

Auxiliary pushbuttons. Voltages in terminals

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL 25 PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL 27

VOLTAGE IN TERMINALS VOLTAGE IN TERMINALS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

25, B 0 V 27, B 0 V

98
MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

MONITORS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

Monitors for wall-mounting on connection bracket (1).
1
Manufactured in ABS plastic.
Privacy of communication (confidentiality feature) and auto switch-
on feature. The monitor is on standby until it receives a call or until 3

the auto switch-on feature is activated; when either even occurs, the
audio and video functions are enabled for a set period of time by 2

the audio unit of the entrance panel or by that of the concierge unit 5
4
6
panel, depending on where the call was made from. 6 5 4

Electronic call system: when a call is made at the entrance panel

or from a dwelling, the call tone generated by the audio unit of the
entrance panel or by that of the concierge unit panel is heard in the
speaker of the telephone receiver. 7

Has three buttons (2) for auxiliary functions (e.g. the activation of
accessories). Also equipped with a LED (3) to indicate the operating
status, separate brightness (4) and contrast (5) controls, and a switch
to turn the screen on or off (6). The monitor receiver has a built-in
electret-type microphone and a 16 Ω ferrite speaker. The receiver
cable is flexible and extensible with telephone-type connectors (7).

Monitors fall into two groups: B/W or colour, depending on which type of video unit is going to be installed in the entrance panel
(B/W or colour)..
197 mm

B/W (BLACK AND WHITE) SYSTEM COLOUR SYSTEM

224 mm

Cód. 9680014 MCB-002 Cód. 9680015 MCC-002

B/W MONITOR FOR CONCIER- COLOUR MONITOR FOR CONCIER-
GE SYSTEM GE SYSTEM
Black and white monitor with a flat 4- Colour monitor with a 4-inch TFT screen.
inch CRT screen. For use in digital video For use in digital video door entry installa-
64.3 mm
door entry installations with coaxial cable tions with coaxial cable or with twisted pair.
or with twisted pair.
Operating temperature
Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C
+5 to + 55°C

99
CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
Fixing to the wall Fixing to the standard electric box Brackets for the wall-mounting of the digital concierge sys-
tem monitor. With lift-up connection terminals to ensure correct
connection. They have several fixing points, so that they can
be fixed to a wall or to a standard 60mm x 60mm electrical
box.

Connection brackets fall into two groups: those for coaxial

cable and those for twisted pair, depending on the type of
cable which is to be used in the installation to transmit the
video signal from the video unit.

COAXIAL CABLE

166 mm Cód. 9680016 SCC-030

1

CONNECTION BRACKET FOR MONITOR OF CONCIERGE SYSTEM. COAXIAL

CABLE
193 mm

Bracket for the installation of the digital concierge system monitor in digital video door entry
installations with coaxial cable. Has a short length of cable (1) for connection with the digital audio unit
of the concierge unit panel.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55°C

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are
intended for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units and video units. Do not use the terminals of the
equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

CC1

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

A B J1
A,B 0.7 V 4.9 V
CC1 Monitor connector
1.8 V
R1 (A,B,C,D, E) Terminals of concierge unit C,B 0 V Audio max 4 Vpp
monitor connector

V1 , M Signal of video D,B 0 V Audio max 11 Vpp

V1
M +,- Power supply voltage
M E,B 0 V 1 V
V1 25 / 27 / P2 Auxiliary pushbuttons of the
monitor
0 Vpp
25 V1 , M 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)
27 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω) (1)
P2
+,- 15 ± 10% V
CC2
A B C D E
(1) Depending on the installation

100
 Auxiliary pushbuttons. Voltages in terminals and state of contacts

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL 25

VOLTAGE IN TERMINALS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

25, B 0 V

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL 27

VOLTAGE IN TERMINALS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

27,B 0 V

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL P2

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

P2

TWISTED PAIR

166 mm Cód. 9680017 SCC-040

1

CONNECTION BRACKET FOR MONITOR OF CONCIERGE SYSTEM. TWISTED PAIR

Bracket for the installation of the digital concierge system monitor in digital video door entry installa-
193 mm

tions with twisted pair. Has a short length of cable (1) for connection with the digital audio unit of the
concierge unit panel.

Operating temperature -10 to + 55°C

101
 Description of terminals and voltages:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended for use exclusively with
ALCAD audio units and video units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previ-
ously consulting the manufacturer.

CC1

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

A B J1
A,B 0.7 V 4.9 V
CC1 Monitor connector
1.8 V
R1 (A,B,C,D,E) Terminals of concierge unit C,B 0V Audio max 4 Vpp
monitor connector

T1+ , T1- Signal of video D,B 0V Audio max 11 Vpp

T1+
T1- +,- Power supply voltage
T1- E,B 0V 1 V
T1+ 25 / 27 / P2 Auxiliary push-buttons of the
monitor
T1+ ,
25
T1 , 0V 6.5 V ±0.5
27
P2
+,- 15 ± 10% V

CC2
A B C D E

Auxiliary pushbuttons. Voltages in terminals and state of contacts

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL 25

VOLTAGE IN TERMINALS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

25, B 0 V

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL 27

VOLTAGE IN TERMINALS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

27,B 0 V

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINAL P2

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

P2

102
ACCESSORIES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEMS
FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
114 mm 45 mm The flush-mounted box is used for fixing the concierge unit
panel in the desired location in such a way that the panel is 1

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
flush with the wall.
Flush-mounted boxes have protection plugs (1), support
axles for tilting the concierge unit panel (2), and diverse
275 mm

points through which the cable hoses can be passed (3).

Choosing the flush-mounted box 2

The correct flush-mounted box for the concierge unit panel

is the same as the flush-mounted box for 7 or 8 rows, i.e.
model CMO-008.
3

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

The surface wall-mounted box is used for fixing the concierge unit panel in the desired location by mounting it on the surface of
the wall.

SINGLE SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

40 mm
Choosing the surface wall-mounted box
128 mm
The correct surface wall-mounted box for the concierge unit panel is the same as the surface
wall-mounted box for 7 or 8 rows, i.e. model CSU-214.
291 mm

DESKTOP SUPPORTS FOR CONCIERGE UNITS

377 mm
Cód. 9730054 SSC-001
DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR CONCIERGE UNIT WITH TELEPHONE
Support for the desktop installation of the concierge unit panel and of the telephone for the
digital concierge system.

300 mm
162 mm

25
O

103
 377 mm Cód. 9730056 SSC-002
DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR CONCIERGE UNIT WITH MONITOR
Support for the desktop installation of the concierge unit panel and of the monitor for the
digital concierge system.

300 mm
162 mm

25
O

ACCESSORIES
ELECTRIC LOCKS

31.8 mm 25.2 mm Cód. 9730025 ABR-011

STANDARD DC ELECTRIC LOCK
53 mm

Device which permits the door to be opened when it receives

a voltage of 15 Vdc from the audio unit. It remains activated
while the lock release button of the telephone/monitor in the
159 mm
67 mm

dwelling is being pressed.

39 mm

Power supply: 15 Vdc, 400 mA

3 mm

31.8 mm 25.2 mm Cód. 9730026 ABR-012

STANDARD DC ELECTRIC LOCK WITH MANUAL
53 mm

RELEASE
Has the same characteristics as the standard electric lock,
model ABR-011, but includes a manual release mechanism (1)
159 mm
67 mm

1 which allows visitors to enter the building freely, i.e. without the
lock release button having to be activated from the dwelling.
Useful in offices or other places where there is a constant flow of
39 mm

visitors at certain times of the day.

3 mm
Power supply: 15 Vdc, 400 mA

104
 Cód. 9730007 ABR-013
31.8 mm 25.2 mm
AUTOMATIC DC ELECTRIC LOCK (ACTIVATION BY
ELECTRICAL IMPULSE)
53 mm

Device which permits the door to be opened when it receives

a 15 Vdc voltage from the audio unit. Once the lock release but-
159 mm
67 mm

ton is pressed, it remains active until the visitor opens the door.
The electric lock blocks again once the closure of the door has
been detected.
39 mm

Power supply: 15 Vdc, 400 mA

3 mm

Cód. 9730008 ABR-014

31.8 mm 25.2 mm
AUTOMATIC DC ELECTRIC LOCK (ACTIVATION BY
ELECTRICAL IMPULSE) WITH MANUAL RELEASE
53 mm

Has the same characteristics as the automatic electric lock,

model ABR-013, but includes a manual release mechanism (1)
159 mm
67 mm

1
which allows visitors to enter the building freely, i.e. without the
lock release button having to be activated from the dwelling.
Useful in offices or other places where there is a constant flow of
39 mm

visitors at certain times of the day.

3 mm
Power supply: 15 Vdc, 400 mA

25 mm 3 mm
Cód. 9730033 ESC-010
LARGE SHIELD FOR ELECTRIC LOCK
Device which allows the models of electric lock described
above to be adapted so that they can be used together with a Electric lock
lock with key.
250 mm

Deadbolt lock

Cód. 9730004 CNP-001

DOOR CONTACT
Accessory (1) which, when used with an electric lock (2), makes it possible to open a double door.

1
13.2 mm 20 mm 13.2 mm 8.8 mm Wall Door

Double door 2
62.4 mm

62.4 mm
32 mm

32 mm

1 Electric
lock

4.5 mm 4.5 mm 2

Door contact - Male Door contact - Female

105
Door contact Door contact
(male) (Female)
ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
CALL EXTENSION UNITS
Accessories which reproduce the call tone, thereby notifying the user that a call UP TO 3 DEVICES PER DWELLING
has been received from the entrance panel. WITH THE SAME CALL
They are installed in parallel with another telephone or monitor so that the call
tone can be heard at a different location.
Number of devices per dwelling
In ALCAD installations, it is possible to install up to 3 devices (devices are tele- 1 2
phones, monitors or call extension units) in parallel in each dwelling, so that all 1 1 1
three receive the call at the same time. The following table shows the possible
1 2
combinations.
2 1
2 1

ELECTRONIC CALL

50 mm Cód. 9730019 AAL-200

ELECTRONIC CALL EXTENSION UNIT 30 mm
Repeater which reproduces the electronic call tone. Has an
on/off switch on its side (1) as well as a volume control (2).
75 mm

1
Position Position
when on when off

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

Tone 10.2 Vpp

S5 , S2 Electronic call
S5, S2
Tone 13.2 Vpp
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

S2 S5
2
2 5

106
SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORIES
Elements with which to operate additional devices by means of a control signal.
Available in two models, depending on the type of control signal they require and on the maximum voltages and current they are
capable of handling.

88 mm Cód. 9730023 ASC-001

ASC-001
cod. 9730023
SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORY
40 mm

V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

Control signal: alternating current (4-12 Vac) or direct current (3-15 Vdc).
Maximum voltage and current: 1A - 24 Vac/Vdc.
Has a double-circuit relay and plug-in terminals for the connection of the additional devices to be con-
21 mm trolled.
Applications: opening of a second door, etc.

Description of terminals

V , Power supply
Ctrl , Control signal of circuits 1 and 2

ASC-001 Circuit 1
cod. 9730023
C1 Common
NO1 Normally open contact
V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2
NC1 Normally closed contact

Circuit 2
C2 Común
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of circuits 1 and 2: 1A - 24V /

State of contacts depending on activation signal

STATE OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION BY DIRECT CURRENT (DC) TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

3 - 11 V 11 - 15 V CIRCUIT 1

C1, NO1
V Ctrl V Ctrl

C1, NC1

CIRCUIT 2
15 V
12 V C2, NO2

3 - 11 V 11 - 15 V C2, NC2

STATE OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION BY ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

4-8V 8 - 12 V CIRCUIT 1

C1, NO1
V Ctrl V Ctrl

C1, NC1

CIRCUIT 2
15 V
12 V C2, NO2

4-8V 8 - 12 V C2, NC2 107

 88 mm Cód. 9730021 ASC-050
ASC-050
SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORY
40 mm

cod. 9730021

2
S2
5
S5
6
5A / 250V~

Control signal: electronic call (ALCAD systems), buzzer call (ALCAD systems), alternating current (8-
Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

12 Vac) or direct current (5-15 Vdc).

Maximum voltage and current: 5A - 250 Vac/Vdc.
21 mm Has a single-circuit relay and plug-in terminals for the connection of the additional devices to be con-
trolled.
Applications: activation of devices powered at voltages of up to 250 Vac (bells, alarms, lights, etc.)

Description of terminals

Ctrl1, Control Signal 1

S5, S2 Electronic call (digital door entry system)
ASC-050 Ctrl2, Control Signal 2
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~
Circuit
S2 S5
2 5 6
C Common
Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC
NO Normally open contact
NC Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of the control circuit : 5A-250V

State of contacts depending on activation signal

STATE OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION BY ELECTRONIC CALL TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

S2 S5
2 5 C, NO
Ctrl1

C, NC
Electronic
call

STATE OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION BY DIRECT CURRENT (DC) TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

5 - 10 V 11 - 15 V

S2 S5 S2 S5
C, NO
2 5 2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl1 Ctrl2

C, NC
5 - 10 V 11 - 15 V

STATE OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION BY ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

S2 S5
C, NO
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2

108 C, NC
8 - 12 V
COMMON DOOR ACCESSORIES
Devices which allow the same electric lock to be activated from several entrance panels or system with separate power supplies.
To be used in installations in which the power supplies of the entrance panel audio units or of the systems which activate the com-
mon electric lock are separate.

230 V ++ 230 V ++ 230 V V

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Electric lock signal Electric lock signal

APC-001

Electric lock signal Electric lock signal

cod.9730006

AC DC
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12

Common door
accessory

Electric lock signal

Common electric lock

88 mm
Cód. 9730006 APC-001
COMMON DOOR ACCESSORY
APC-001

Accessory which makes it possible to concentrate the electric lock signal from as many as 4 separate
40 mm

cod.9730006

11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
AC
12
DC
12
entrance panels or systems. Several accessories can be connected to each other, thereby allowing the
signal from a greater number of entrance panels or systems to be concentrated.
21 mm It incorporates an internal adjustment system so that DC electric locks can be activated by AC lock sig-
nals.
Suitable dimensions for fitting in the flush-mounted box or in the surface wall-mounted box of the
entrance panel.

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use
the terminals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the
manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

APC-001
cod.9730006
12 , 11 Electric lock activation signals
12, 11
0 V /0 V 12 V /15 V
12, 11
AC DC
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12

AC 12 , 11 AC electric lock AC12, 11 0 V 12 V

DC 12 , 11 DC electric lock
DC12, 11 0 V 15 V

109
ACCESSORIES FOR DIGITAL INSTALLATION
88 mm Cód. 9730055 AIB-001
ACCESSORY FOR DIGITAL INSTALLATION
40 mm

Complementary element for digital installations in buildings with more than 150 telephones/monitors
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1

AIB-001 or in installations with a large number of dwellings and star-shaped distribution.

SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

21 mm

Description of terminals and voltages:

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

D1, D2
13 - 14 V
I1, I2 Power supply voltage
ALC-070
D1, D2
Entrance Panel BUS 15 V 13 - 14 V
D1, D2
230V~ ++

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1, D2
AIB-001 Telephones/monitors BUS GCI-001
SW1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cod. 9730055
10 - 12 V 13 - 14 V
230V~ I2 I1

ALC-070
13 - 15 V
230V~ ++

I1, I2
GCI-001
10 - 12 V
230V~ I2 I1

Number of accessories for digital installation necessary:

The number of accessories necessary per installation is determined by the number of floors in the building as well as by the distri-
bution of dwellings on each floor. See the diagram corresponding to the installation you wish to perform and identify the accessories
you need in Chapter 8, “Diagrams”.

110
ELECTRONIC MODULES
Elements necessary for certain electronic door entry or video door entry installations.

MODULATORS FOR TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Elements which generate an analogue TV channel from the video signal of the video door entry video unit for coaxial cable and
then distribute this channel to the TV installation of the dwellings. Compatible with the TV standards of several countries.
Equipped with DC outlet to power the B/W video unit (coaxial) for TV door entry system, model TCB-210. Wall-mounting.
Available in two models, depending on the TV channels (i.e. frequencies) they can generate.

111 mm
Cód. 9650007 MDA-300
O

230V~ ±10%
MULTISTANDARD BIII MODULATOR WITH DC OUTPUT TO FEED VIDEO
50-60Hz

UNIT WITH EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

70 mm

DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR

Modulator which can generate any TV channel situated between 174 MHZ and 302MHz from
BS
the video signal of the video unit. Compatible with the following television standards: B CCIR,
B ITALY, D OIRT, D POLAND, I IRELAND and I SOUTH AFRICA.
42 mm Incorporates micro-switches for selecting the TV output channel and TV standard (1) and a level
control for the output channel (2).
O

Description of terminals and characteristics

LE

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

B CCIR
B ITALY
Standard D OIRT
D POLAND
I IRELAND
I SOUTH AFRICA
TE
Video signal input Frequency range 174 - 302 MHz
DC output voltage
1
Video input connection F FEMALE
SW1 TV channel output
2 TV output connection F FEMALE

Video input level 0.7 - 1.4 Vpp (75 Ω)

Modulation DSB

Output level 86 dBµV ± 2.0

Output level adjust 20 dB

Carrier/Noise ratio (C/N) >58 dB

Mains voltage 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

15 V 0.2 A

111
 111 mm Cód. 9650009 MDA-400
MULTISTANDARD UHF MODULATOR WITH DC OUTPUT TO FEED VIDEO
230V~ ±10%
50-60Hz

UNIT WITH EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

70 mm

DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR

Modulator which can generate any TV channel situated between 470 MHZ and 862 MHz
from the video signal of the video unit. Compatible with the following television standards:
G CCIR, G ITALY, K OIRT, K POLAND, I UK, I IRELAND, I SOUTH AFRICA and L FRANCE.
42 mm Incorporates micro-switches for selecting the TV output channel and TV standard (1) and a level
control for the output channel (2).
O

Description of terminals and characteristics

BS

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

G CCIR
G ITALY
K OIRT
K POLAND
Standard I UK
I IRELAND
I SOUTH AFRICA
Video signal input L FRANCE
O
DC output voltage Frequency range 470 - 862 MHz
1

SW1 TV channel output Video input connection F FEMALE

2

TV output connection F FEMALE

LE

Video input level 0.7 - 1.4 Vpp (75 Ω)

Modulation DSB

Output level 86 dBµV ± 2.0

Output level adjust 15 dB

TE
Carrier/Noise ratio (C/N) >58 dB

Mains voltage 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

15 V 0.2 A

112
POWER SUPPLY UNITS
Elements which supply power to the
equipment of the digital electronic
door entry or video door entry
installation.
DIN rail format. Wall or rail mount-
ing.
All power supply units have a ter-
minal cover to protect the connection
terminals (1). The connection termi-
nals are the lift-up type to ensure cor- 1 1

rect connection.
Power supply units are protected
against short circuits.
Wall-mounting Mounting on DIN rail

Choosing power supply units

The correct choice of power supply units is determined by the type of installation (i.e. whether door entry or video door entry instal-
lation) as well as by the type of electric lock which is going to be used.
See the diagram corresponding to the installation you wish to perform and identify the power supply units you need in Chapter 8,
“Diagrams”.

175 mm Cód. 9620014 ALC-070

DC POWER SUPPLY, 15 VDC/3A 230/240 VAC
90 mm

High capacity power supply unit, up to 3A, with DC output (15 Vdc).

230V~ ++
Incorporates a LED indicator of operating status.
DIN 10-element rail format.
1
60 mm
Operating temperature: -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

230 V Mains voltage
230 V 230 V ±15% 50/60 Hz
Earth

, DC Output voltage Earth

230V~ ++
+,- 15 V

Output power 45 W

113
 106 mm Cód. 9620001 ALA-040
AC POWER SUPPLY UNIT, 25 VA 230/240 VAC
High capacity power supply unit with AC output (12 Vac).
90 mm

DIN 6-element rail format.

230 V V

Operating temperature: -10 to + 55 °C

60 mm

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

230 V Mains voltage 230 V 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

V , AC Output voltage V , 12 V
230 V V
Output power 25 VA

106 mm Cód. 9620011 ALM-040

AC/DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT, 25 VA 230/240 VAC
High capacity power supply unit with separate AC (12 Vac) and DC (15 Vdc) outputs.
90 mm

DIN 6-element rail format.

230 V V

Operating temperature: -10 to + 55 °C

60 mm

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

230 V Mains voltage

230 V 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

V , AC Output voltage V , 12 V
, DC Output voltage +,-
230 V V 15 V

Output power 25 VA

114
 175 mm Cód. 9620013 ALM-080
AC/DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT, AC 25 VA + AC/DC 25 VA 230/240 VAC
90 mm

Power supply unit for installations with electric lock with high power consumption (12Vac
and up to 2A).
230 V
Has two separate AC (12Vac) outputs and one DC (15 Vdc) output.
C NC NO Ctrl 11 V

Incorporates a single-circuit relay for activation of the electric lock, with external activation
60 mm by alternating current (8-12Vac) or by direct current (11-15 Vdc).
DIN 10-element rail format.

Operating temperature: -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

230 V Mains voltage

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V , AC Output voltage

, DC Output voltage 230 V 230/240 V ±10% (50/60 Hz)

, 11 AC Output voltage
+, - 15 V
Circuit
230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V V , 12 V
Ctrl, Control signal
C Common
, 11 12 V
NO Normally open contact
NC Normally closed contact
Maximum output power 25 VA

State of contacts depending on activation signal

STATE OF CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

Direct current (DC) Alternating current (AC)

C, NO
C NC NO Ctrl C NC NO Ctrl

C, NC
11 - 15 V 8 - 12 V

115
116
 ENTRANCE PANELS:
3
DIMENSIONS AND ACCESSORIES
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
With the right combination of upper and lower entrance panel modules, you can perform any kind of installation: of one or of
several panels, and for one or for several points of entry.
Depending on the model of lower module with pushbuttons and on the type of upper module (simple, double or triple) chosen, the
height of the entrance panel will vary, although the width will remain constant.
The possible combinations of the different upper and lower panel modules are shown on the following pages. The dimensions of
the mounted panel are shown, as are those of the required flush-mounted or surface wall-mounted box in each case.
Bear in mind that, when combining different entrance panels (i.e. panels in parallel), you will need to have as many flush-
mounted boxes as panels, as well as the appropriate number of flush-mounted box separators. These separators will increase the
stated width of each flush-mounted box by 15 mm. (For more information, see the technical information of the set of separators on
page 89). When using surface wall-mounted boxes, use a single surface wall-mounted box for each entrance panel. If required, use
a set of separators for every two surface wall-mounted boxes. (See the technical information on the set of separators for surface wall-
mounted boxes on page 90.)

Compact module, Flush-mounted box Surface

with video unit wall-mounted box

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

CMO-002
CSU-211

Entrance panel lower module Entrance panel Flush-mounted box Surface

single upper module wall-mounted box

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

CMO-002
MPD-002 CSU-211

Entrance panel lower module Entrance panel Flush-mounted box Surface

double upper module wall-mounted box

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

CMO-004
MPD-002 CSU-212

Entrance panel lower module Entrance panel Flush-mounted box Surface

single upper module wall-mounted box

ARRIBA ARRIBA
UP UP
HAUT HAUT

CMO-002 x 2
MPD-002 MPD-002 + CSU-211 x 2
CEM-001 +
CSU-000

117
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
Compact

CMO-002

147 mm
ARRIBA
UP

131 mm
147 mm
HAUT

MVN-
128 mm

78.5 mm
Single 128 mm
114 mm
module CMO-004
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm 470 301 , 302 000 000 ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

004 , 005, 201

179 mm
195 mm
1-2 storeys

126.5 mm
MPS-001 MPS-002 Double
68.5 mm

module
114 mm
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT- 128 mm
128 mm 471 , 472 470 470 000
128 mm CMO-006
474 , 475, 473
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPD-001 MPD-002

227 mm
174.5 mm

Triple

243 mm
module
MDT-
128 mm 471 , 472
474 , 475, 473 114 mm
128 mm

CMO-004
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
78.5 mm

195 mm
Single

179 mm
module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm 470 301 , 302 000 000
004 , 005
128 mm 114 mm
201
CMO-006
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
3-4 storeys

116.5 mm

126.5 mm

Double

227 mm
243 mm
MPS-003 MPS-004
module
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
128 mm 471 , 472 470 470
128 mm 000
474 , 475
473 128 mm 114 mm
CMO-008
MPD-003 MPD-004
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
174.5 mm

291 mm

Triple
module 275 mm

MDT-
128 mm 471 , 472
474 , 475
473 128 mm 114 mm

CMO-006
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
78.5 mm

243 mm

Single
227 mm

module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm
470 301 , 302 000 000
004 , 005
201
128 mm 114 mm
CMO-008
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
164.5 mm

MPS-005 MPS-006
5-6 storeys

126.5 mm

275 mm

Double
291 mm

module
128 mm
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
128 mm 470 470
471 , 472 000
474 , 475
473 114 mm
128 mm
CMO-010
MPD-005 MPD-006 ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
174.5 mm

Triple
339 mm

323 mm

module

128 mm
MDT-
471 , 472
474 , 475
473
118 128 mm 114 mm
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-111 VIS-121 VIS-131 CSU-211 VIS-211 VIS-221 VIS-231 CSU-311
171.5 mm

140 mm
160 mm
147 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-112 VIS-122 VIS-132 CSU-212
VIS-212 VIS-222 VIS-232
CSU-312
219.5 mm

195 mm

208 mm

188 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-113 VIS-123 VIS-133
CSU-213 VIS-213 VIS-223 VIS-233 CSU-313
267.5 mm

236 mm
256 mm
243 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-112 VIS-122 VIS-132 CSU-212 VIS-212 VIS-222 VIS-232
CSU-312
219.5 mm

195 mm

208 mm

188 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-113 VIS-123 VIS-133 CSU-213
VIS-213 VIS-223 VIS-233
CSU-313
267.5 mm

243 mm

236 mm
256 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm

128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234
CSU-314
315.5 mm

291 mm

284 mm
304 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm 128 mm

156 mm 284 mm 412 mm

VIS-113 VIS-123 VIS-133 CSU-213 VIS-213 VIS-223 VIS-233 CSU-313

267.5 mm

236 mm
243 mm

256 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234 CSU-314
315.5 mm

284 mm
291 mm

304 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-115 VIS-125 VIS-135
CSU-215 VIS-215 VIS-225 VIS-235
CSU-315
363.5 mm

332 mm
352 mm
339 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 119
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
CMO-008
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

78.5 mm

291 mm

275 mm
Single
module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm
470 301 , 302 000 000
004 , 005
201
128 mm 114 mm

CMO-010
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

Double 126.5 mm

339 mm

323 mm
module
7-8 storeys

212.5 mm

MPS-007 MPS-008 MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-

128 mm 471 , 472 470 470 000
474 , 475
473

114 mm
128 mm
128 mm
CMO-012
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
174.5 mm

MPD-007 MPD-008
Triple

387 mm

371 mm
module
MDT-
128 mm
471 , 472
474 , 475
473

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-010
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
78.5 mm

Single
339 mm

323 mm
module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm
470 301 , 302 000 000
004 , 005
201

114 mm
128 mm
CMO-012
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
126.5 mm
9-10 storeys

Double
387 mm

371 mm

module
260.5 mm

MPS-009 MPS-010
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
128 mm 471 , 472 470 470 000
474 , 475
473

128 mm
128 mm 114 mm

CMO-014
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPD-009 MPD-010
174.5 mm

Triple
419 mm

module
435 mm

128 mm
MDT-
471 , 472
474 , 475
473

128 mm 114 mm

120
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234
CSU-314
315.5 mm

291 mm

284 mm
304 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm
128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-115 VIS-125 VIS-135 CSU-215 VIS-215 VIS-225 VIS-235
CSU-315
363.5 mm

332 mm
352 mm
339 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

VIS-116 VIS-126 VIS-136

CSU-216 VIS-216 VIS-226 VIS-236
CSU-316
387 mm
411.5 mm

400 mm

380 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

VIS-115 VIS-125 VIS-135 CSU-215 VIS-215 VIS-225 VIS-235

CSU-315
363.5 mm

332 mm
352 mm
339 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

VIS-116 VIS-126 VIS-136

CSU-216 VIS-216 VIS-226 VIS-236
CSU-316
387 mm
411.5 mm

400 mm

380 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm
VIS-117 VIS-127 VIS-137
CSU-217 VIS-217 VIS-227 VIS-237
CSU-317
459.5 mm

435 mm

448 mm

428 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

121
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
CMO-012
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

78.5 mm
Single

387 mm

371 mm
module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm 470 301 , 302 000 000
004 , 005
201

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-014
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
308.5 mm

126.5 mm
11-12 storeys

MPS-011 MPS-012 Double

419 mm
module

435 mm
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
128 mm 471 , 472 470 470 000
474 , 475
473

128 mm

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-016
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPD-011 MPD-012

467 mm
174.5 mm

Triple
483 mm

module

128 mm
MDT-
471 , 472
474 , 475
473

114 mm
128 mm

122
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-116 VIS-126 VIS-136
CSU-216 VIS-216 VIS-226 VIS-236
CSU-316
411.5 mm

400 mm
387 mm

380 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

VIS-117 VIS-127 VIS-137

CSU-217 VIS-217 VIS-227 VIS-237
CSU-317
459.5 mm

448 mm
435 mm

428 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

VIS-118 VIS-128 VIS-138

CSU-218 VIS-218 VIS-228 VIS-238
CSU-318
507.5 mm

496 mm

476 mm
483 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm

123
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
CMO-014

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

78.5 mm
Single

419 mm
module

435 mm
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm 470 301 , 302 000 000
004 , 005
201

128 mm 114 mm
CMO-016

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
13-14 storeys

419 mm
126.5 mm

483 mm
Double
MPS-013 MPS-014 module
128 mm
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
471 , 472 470 470 000
356.5 mm

474 , 475
473

114 mm
128 mm
CMO-018

128 mm

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPD-013 MPD-014

515 mm
531 mm
174.5 mm

Triple
module

128 mm MDT-
471 , 472
474 , 475
473

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-016

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
419 mm
78.5 mm

483 mm

Single
module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm 470 301 , 302 000 000
004 , 005
201
15-16 storeys

404.5 mm

MPS-015 MPS-016
114 mm
128 mm
CMO-018

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

128 mm
126.5 mm

515 mm
531 mm

Double
module
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
128 mm 471 , 472 470 470 000
474 , 475
473

MPD-015 MPD-016

128 mm 114 mm
124
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-117 VIS-127 VIS-137
CSU-217 VIS-217 VIS-227 VIS-237
CSU-317
459.5 mm

448 mm
435 mm

428 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm
VIS-118 VIS-128 VIS-138
CSU-218 VIS-218 VIS-228 VIS-238
CSU-318
507.5 mm

496 mm

476 mm
483 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm
VIS-119 VIS-129 VIS-139
CSU-219 VIS-219 VIS-229 VIS-239
CSU-319
555.5 mm

524 mm
496 mm
531 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

VIS-118 VIS-128 VIS-138

CSU-218 VIS-218 VIS-228 VIS-238
CSU-318
507.5 mm

496 mm

476 mm
483 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm
VIS-119 VIS-129 VIS-139
CSU-219 VIS-219 VIS-229 VIS-239
CSU-319
555.5 mm

524 mm
496 mm
531 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm
125
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
All models of entrance panels with keypad have the same dimensions.
The dimension of the entrance panels is shown on the following pages, as well as the flush-mounted box, surface wall-mounted
box, or rain-shield necessary in each case.
Bear in mind that, when combining different entrance panels with keypad with entrance panels with directory (i.e. entrance pan-
els in parallel), you will need to have as many flush-mounted boxes as panels, as well as a set of separators for every two flush-
mounted boxes. These separators will increase the stated width of each flush-mounted box by 15 mm. (For more information, see
the technical information of the set of separators on page 89). When using surface wall-mounted boxes, use a single surface wall-
mounted box for each entrance panel. If required, use a set of separators for every two surface wall-mounted boxes. (See the tech-
nical information on the set of separators for surface wall-mounted boxes on page 90.)

Entrance panel with keypad Flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

CMO-008
CSU-214

Entrance panel with keypad

+ Flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box
Entrance panel with directory

ARRIBA ARRIBA
UP UP
HAUT HAUT

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

CMO-008 x 2
+ CSU-214 x 2
CEM-001 +
CSU-000

126
 Entrance panel Flush-mounted box Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
with keypad Single Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234
CMO-008 CSU-314
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

PAK-41000
PAK-42000

315.5 mm

291 mm
1 2 3

275 mm
291 mm
284 mm

304 mm
PAK-44000 4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

114 mm 171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

128 mm 128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm

PDK-41300 VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214

PDK-41400 CMO-008 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234
CSU-314
ARRIBA
UP
PDK-41500 HAUT

PDK-41600
PDK-42300
PDK-42400

315.5 mm

291 mm
275 mm
291 mm
284 mm

PDK-42500

304 mm
1 2 3

PDK-42600 4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

PDK-44300
PDK-44400
PDK-44500 114 mm 171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm
128 mm 128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
PDK-44600

Flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Angular surface

Concierge panel
Single Single wall-mounted box
CSU-214
CMO-008 CSU-314
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

PAK-03020

291 mm
1 2 3

275 mm
291 mm
284 mm

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

114 mm 128 mm
128 mm 128 mm

Entrance panel Flush-mounted box Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
with directory Single Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234
CMO-008 CSU-314
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

PTN-00000

315.5 mm

275 mm
291 mm

291 mm
284 mm

304 mm

114 171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

127
 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY
4
ACCESSORIES FOR ENTRANCE PANELS
FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES

Important:
Some models of flush-mounted boxes have one or several
reinforcements which are useful when positioning the box. Do
not remove these reinforcements until you are installing the om e
en ca
de
to lle
e
m d g th
el ca n

entrance panel.
en p la stalli n
r la in tio
tira r en lla
Rest a la wh nel sta
in ove p a l' in e
nce de e ru
Remtra lorsue d
en er q
ir pla
Ret la
de

BREAKING THE PERFORATED HOLES

The flush-mounted box has several perforated holes to pass
the cables through. Break the tab off the holes you need to use.

ASSEMBLING SEVERAL BOXES

To assemble several boxes together, break off the sections on
the side walls of the box. There are two partitions on each side
of the flush-mounted box (1).
. 1

128
 Assemble the flush-mounted boxes using the set of separa-
tors, model CEM-001.
Note: Use the openings on the sets of separators to pass the
cable between the entrance panels.

PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT

Choose a place for the flush-mounted box so that, when the
entrance panel is fitted, rain, sun rays or strong light sources
do not adversely affect the video unit. In this way you will avoid
certain undesired problems with video door entry systems with
the visualisation of images such as the ghosting effect caused
by strong background light; correct positioning will also pre-
serve the working life of the equipment.

Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before

fitting the flush-mounted box.
Position the flush-mounted box vertically and in the direction Positioning direction ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

indicated by the sticker. In this position the support axles are ARRIBA
UP

oriented correctly, which will later allow the entrance panel to HAUT

be conveniently opened.
Position the box in such a way that the top part is at a height
of 1.7m from floor level. Make sure that the box is perfectly
flush with the surface of the wall.
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

1.7 m

129
SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

BREAKING THE PERFORATED HOLES

Non-angular surface wall-mounted boxes
The surface wall-mounted box has several perforated holes to
pass the cables through .Break the tab off the holes you need to
use.

ASSEMBLING SEVERAL BOXES

Non-angular surface wall-mounted boxes
To assemble several surface wall-mounted boxes, break off
the sections on the side walls of the boxes as required. You will 1
then have 2 openings on the right side and two on the left side
(1).
1

Use the CSU-000 set of separators to guide you when assem-

bling the surface wall-mounted boxes. By doing so, you will
ensure that the boxes are correctly aligned when they are fixed
to the wall.

PLACE AND HEIGHT OF PANEL POSITION

Choose a place for the flush-mounted box so that, when the
entrance panel is fitted, rain, sun rays or strong light sources
do not adversely affect the video unit. In this way you will avoid
certain undesired problems with video door entry systems with
the visualisation of images such as the ghosting effect caused
by strong background light; correct positioning will also pre-
serve the working life of the equipment.

130
 Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before
fitting the surface wall-mounted box.
Fix the box to the wall using the wall-plugs and screws pro-
vided. Place it vertically and in such a way that the top part is
at a height of 1.7m from floor level.

1.7 m

1.7 m

Angular models

RAIN-SHIELDS
RAIN-SHIELDS FOR FLUSH_MOUNTED BOX

FIXING THE RAIN-SHIELD TO THE FLUSH-

MOUNTED BOX
de
nto lle
me ca
mo de the

Fix the rain-shield to the flush-mounted box using the four self-
el ac a ling
en pl tal n
ar la ins tio
tir r en lla
Resta la wh nel sta
in ve pa l'in e
mo e de ru
Retranc lors e de
en er qu
tir pla
Re la
de

screwing screws provided with the product.

131
RAIN-SHIELDS FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

FIXING THE RAIN-SHIELD TO THE SURFACE

WALL-MOUNTED BOX
Slide the axles provided into the upper decorative fitting of
the surface wall-mounted box. Position them in such a way that
the curve of the axle is directed outwards from the surface wall-
mounted box. The surface wall-mounted box is now ready for
the entrance panel to be fixed.

Fix the rainshield to the surface wall-mounted box using the

self-screwing screws provided with the product.

COVER FRAMES

FIXING TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Fix the frame to the flush-mounted box using the four screws
provided with the product.

132
FIXING DIRECTLY TO THE WALL
Insert the supplied nuts in the frame. In this way, the frame is
ready for the entrance panel to be fixed later.

Drill the required holes in the frame and fix it to the wall in
the desired place.

With frames prepared for wall attachment, use the wall-plugs

and screws provided to fix them in place. Use the 2.5 Allen key
provided with the products.

133
ENTRANCE PANELS
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES AND UPPER MODULES

EXPLODED VIEW OF PANEL COMPONENTS

The illustration shows all the different parts of two modular
entrance panels.

ASSEMBLING THE PANELS

Join the upper and lower modules of the entrance panel as
follows. Insert the two tongues of the lower pushbutton module
into the slots of the upper module and press. Make sure that the
intermediate separator is correctly in place.

Connect the commons of the pushbuttons (1) and the illumi-

nating lights (2) of the pushbutton lower module. 7

9 10

134
 If the upper module is an informative card-holder then lift the
cover of the card-holder and insert the card to be displayed.
Close the card-holder cover.

In the lower module of the entrance panel, lever open the

cover of each card-holder and insert the card that identifies the
pushbutton. You may use the pre-printed cards or the blank
cards which are supplied with the lower pushbutton module.

DISASSEMBLING THE PANELS

To separate the entrance panel modules, gently slide the
upper module upwards until it is completely free of the tongues
of the lower module.

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

See “Positioning the entrance panels”, page 138.

135
CONCENTRATOR OF CALLS

FIXING THE CONCENTRATOR OF CALLS TO THE

FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
Fix the concentrator of calls to the flush-mounted box with the
4 screws supplied. Make sure that the chosen place is within
reach of the connector which connects the concentrator of calls
to the audio unit.

50
-0 023
ASC
30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

ESTATE IDENTIFYING ACCESSORY

FIXING THE ESTATE IDENTIFYING ACCESSORY

TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
Fix the accessory to the flush-mounted box with the 4 screws
supplied.
If a built-in concentrator of 4 calls is to be used, make sure
that the chosen place is within reach of the connector which
joins the accessory to the audio unit.
50
-0 023
ASC
30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH DIRECTORY

NOTING THE INFORMATION CONCERNING THE

CALL CODE AND THE HOUSE OR FLAT NAME
DIRECTLY ON THE BLANK CARDS
Several templates in PDF form are available from ALCAD’s
web site (www.alcad.net). Simply go to the site and download
the one which best meets your needs.

www.alcad.net

136
 For each dwelling, fill in the information concerning the
name of the dwelling (1) and the code which the visitor must
enter with the entrance panel keypad to make a call (2).

Print the file on the blank cards sheet (3) provided.

NOTING THE INFORMATION CONCERNING THE

CALL CODE AND THE HOUSE OR FLAT NAME
DIRECTLY ON THE PRE-PRINTED CARDS
For each dwelling, fill in the information concerning the
name of the dwelling (1) and the code which the visitor must
enter with the entrance panel keypad to make a call (2).

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL WITH DIRECTORY

See “Positioning the entrance panels”, page 138.

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

See “Positioning the entrance panels”, page 138

137
POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANELS
POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN A FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX WITH RAIN-SHIELD
POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN A FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX WITH COVER FRAME

Some models of flush-mounted boxes have one or several

reinforcements, which are useful when the box is being fitted to
the wall. If this is the case, remove these reinforcements.

de
to ll e
en ca
om e e
m d g th
el ca n
en p la stalli n
r la in tio
tira r en lla
Rest a la wh nel sta
in ove pa l'in e
e m nce de e ru
R tra lors e d
en rer qu
e ti pla
R la
de

Remove the protective plugs from the flush-mounted box. The

box is now ready for the entrance panel to be fixed in it at a
later stage.

The flush-mounted box has a hinge or support axle on each

of its sides. Extract the two axles according to the direction in
which you wish to open the entrance panel, i.e. from left to
right or right to left or from top to bottom. The unused axles
should be fully inserted in their appropriate slots.

138
 Introduce the rings of the entrance panel on the extracted
fixing pins. In this way the panel will be held in place and all
the connections can be easily made.

Once the connections and adjustments have been made on

the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection and
adjustment instructions of this manual), separate the upper and
lower decorative fittings, loosening the screws holding them in
position.

Close the entrance panel and press it against the flush-mount-

ed box. Fix the panel to the box using the fixing screws.

Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.

139
 If a rain-shield is being added, fit the top cap of the rain-shield.

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN THE Angular models

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX
Once the connections and adjustments have been made on
the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection and
adjustment instructions of this manual), separate the upper and
lower decorative fittings, loosening the screws holding them in
position.

Fix the entrance panel to the surface wall-mounted box with

the clamping screws. Angular models

140
 Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.
Modelos angulares

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN A SUR-

FACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX WITH RAIN-SHIELD
Separate the upper and lower decorative fittings of the
entrance panel (1) and remove the fixing screws (2).

Adjust the upper decorative fitting. The entrance panel is

now ready to be fixed later.
Note: The lower fixing screw will be used later to fix the
entrance panel into position.

141
 Once the electrical connections and adjustments have been
made on the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection
and adjustment instructions of this manual), tilt the entrance
panel slightly, pressing it against the rain-shield.

Push the entrance panel upwards until the axles of the sur-
face wall-mounted box slide into the upper rings of the entrance
panel (1). Press the entrance panel as far as it will go into the
rain shield (2). The entrance panel is now fixed in position by
the axles of the surface wall-mounted box.

Fix the entrance panel to the surface wall-mounted box using

the lower fixing screw.

142
 Adjust the lower decorative fitting.

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN THE

COVER FRAME FIXED DIRECTLY TO THE WALL
Once the connections and adjustments have been made on
the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection and
adjustment instructions of this manual), separate the upper and
lower decorative fittings by loosening the screws holding them
in position.

Fix the entrance panel to the frame using the fixing screws of
the entrance panel (1). Adjust the upper and lower decorative 2
fittings of the entrance panel (2).

143
AUDIO UNITS

ASSEMBLING THE AUDIO UNIT

Position the audio unit and press firmly to fix the audio unit
to the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE AUDIO UNIT

Using a screwdriver, lever the audio unit out from its
anchoring points.

VIDEO UNITS

ASSEMBLING THE VIDEO UNIT

Position the visor of the video unit and press to fix the video
unit to the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE VIDEO UNIT

Using a screwdriver, lever the video unit out from its
anchoring points

144
PUSHBUTTONS

ASSEMBLING THE PUSHBUTTONS

Press firmly to fix the pushbuttons to the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE PUSHBUTTONS

Using a screwdriver, lever the group of pushbuttons out from
its anchoring points.

NUMERIC KEYPAD

ASSEMBLING OF THE NUMERIC KEYPAD

Position the keys of the keypad unit and press to fix the key-
pad to the entrance panel.

DISMOUNTING THE NUMERIC KEYPAD

Using a screwdriver, lever the keypad unit out from its
anchoring points.

145
DECORATIVE FITTINGS FOR ENTRANCE PANEL

REPLACEMENT OF THE FIXING SCREWS OF THE

DECORATIVE FITTINGS WITH TORX-HEAD TAMP-
ER-PROOF SCREWS
Loosen and remove fixing screws of the upper and lower
decorative fittings of the entrance panel.

Using the TORX-head tamper-proof screws provided with

the upper modules of the entrance panel, adjust the upper and
lower decorative fittings. Use a standard TORX T10 tamper-
proof screwdriver.

REPLACING THE DECORATIVE FITTINGS OF

ENTRANCE PANEL
Completely separate the upper and lower decorative fittings
of the entrance panel by loosening the fixing screws.

146
 Separate the upper module from the lower module of the
entrance panel (See “Disassembling the panels”, page 135).
Remove the intermediate separator. Position the new separator
and re-assemble the upper and lower modules of the entrance
panel (see “Assembling the panels”, page 134).

Position the new upper and lower decorative elements of the

entrance panel.

ACCESSORIES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEMS

FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Important:
Some models of flush-mounted boxes have one or several
reinforcements, which are useful when positioning the box. Do
not remove reinforcements until you are installing the entrance
panel. m d
om e
el c a ing
de
to ll e
en ca
the
en p la stall n
r la in tio
tira r en lla
Rest a la wh nel sta
in ove pa l'in e
m ce de ru
Retran lors e de
en rer qu
e ti pla
R la
de

147
BREAKING THE PERFORATED HOLES
The flush-mounted box has several perforated holes to pass
the cables through. Break the tab off the holes you need to use.

PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT IN INSTALLA-

TIONS OF CONCIERGE UNIT WITH TELEPHONE 90 mm
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before

fitting the flush-mounted box.
Position the flush-mounted box vertically and in the direction
1.7 m
indicated by the sticker. In this position the support axles are ori-
ented correctly, which will later allow the entrance panel to be
conveniently opened.
Make sure that the place chosen is at a distance of 90 mm 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

from the place where you will later install the digital telephone C 0

for concierge system.

Position the box in such a way that the top part is at a height Base of the
telephone
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

of 1.7m from floor level. Make sure that the box is perfectly flush
with the surface of the wall.

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

PLACE AND HEIGHT OF POSITION IN INSTALLA-

TIONS OF CONCIERGE UNIT WITH MONITOR 50 mm
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before

fitting the flush-mounted box.
Position the flush-mounted box vertically and in the direction 1.7 m
indicated by the sticker. In this position the support axles are ori-
ented correctly, which will later allow the entrance panel to be
conveniently opened.
Make sure that the place chosen is at a distance of 50 mm 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

from the place where you will later install the connection brack- C 0

Connection
et for digital concierge system. bracket
of the monitor
Position the box in such a way that the top part is at a height ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

of 1.7m from floor level. Make sure that the box is perfectly flush
with the surface of the wall.

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

148
SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

BREAKING THE PERFORATED OPENINGS

Non-angular surface wall-mounted boxes
The surface wall-mounted box has several perforated holes to
pass the cables through. Break the tab off the holes you need
to use.

PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT IN INSTALLA-

TIONS OF CONCIERGE UNIT WITH TELEPHONE 90 mm

Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before

fixing the surface wall-mounted box.
Make sure that the place chosen is at a distance of 90 mm 1,7 m
from the place where you will later install the digital telephone
for concierge unit panel.
Fix the box to the wall using the wall-plugs and screws pro-
1 2 3

vided. 4

7
5

8
6

C 0

Place it vertically and in such a way that the top part is at a

height of 1.7m from floor level. Base of the
telephone

149
PLACE AND HEIGHT OF POSITION IN INSTALLA-
TIONS OF CONCIERGE UNIT WITH MONITOR
50 mm
Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before
fitting the flush-mounted box.
Make sure that the place chosen is at a distance of 50mm
1,7 m
from the place where you will later install the connection brack-
et for digital concierge unit panel.
Fix the box to the wall using the wall-plugs and screws pro-
vided. 1 2 3

4 5 6

Position the box vertically in such a way that the top part is
7 8 9

C 0

Connection bracket
for the monitor
at a height of 1.7m from floor level.

DESKTOP SUPPORTS FOR CONCIERGE UNITS

PREPARING THE DESKTOP SUPPORT

Place the anti-slip feet on the base of the desktop support.
The desktop support is now ready for the attachment and
connection of the telephone (see page 152), of the monitor (see
page 155) and concierge unit panel (see page 159).

150
CONCIERGE SYSTEMS
TELEPHONE FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

DISASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER

Disconnect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

DISASSEMBLING THE COVER FROM THE BASE OF

THE TELEPHONE
Move the cover on the base of the telephone towards the right.

Remove the cover from the base of the telephone.

151
WALL-MOUNTED. PLACE AND POSITIONING
90 mm
HEIGHT
Make sure that the place chosen is at a distance of 90mm
from the place where you will later install the flush-mounted box
or surface wall-mounted box for concierge unit panel.
Position the telephone in such a way that the top part is at a
height of 1.68m from floor level.

1.68 m

Base of the
telephone

WALL-MOUNTED. FIXING THE BASE OF TELE-

PHONE TO THE WALL
Remember to pass the connections cable of the telephone
through the cable hole of the flush-mounted box or of the sur-
face-mounted box (1); also, if necessary, to pass the connection
cables corresponding to the auxiliary pushbuttons through the
1
cable hole in the base of the telephone (2).
The base has numerous fixing points. Using the four most con-
venient points, fix the base of the telephone to the wall with the
wall-plugs and couch screws provided.
2
The telephone is now ready, if required, for the electrical
connections to be made to the auxiliary pushbuttons.
Base of the
Note: The use of the fixing points in the four corners is telephone
recommended.

DESKTOP INSTALLATION. FIXING THE BASE OF

TELEPHONE TO THE DESKTOP SUPPORT
Pass the connections cable of the telephone through the open-
ing on the support (1) and leave it in readiness as shown in the
illustration (2).

2
1

152
 Fix the base of the telephone to the desktop support with the
M4 screws provided with the support.
The telephone is now ready, if required, for the electrical con-
nections to be made to the auxiliary pushbuttons.

ASSEMBLING THE COVER OF THE TELEPHONE

When the appropriate connections, if necessary, have been
made to the auxiliary pushbuttons as shown in the diagrams
and connection and adjustment instructions of this manual,
close the telephone and fix the cover to the base using the
fixing screw.

ASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER

Connect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

153
CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
WALL-MOUNTED. PLACE AND POSITIONING 50 mm
HEIGHT
Choose a place to install the connection bracket where the
wall is flat, even and hard.
Make sure that the place chosen is at a distance of 50mm
from the place where you will later install the flush-mounted box
or the surface wall-mounted box for digital concierge unit
panel.
Position the connection bracket in such a way that the top
part is at a height of 1.66 m above floor level.
Put it far from direct light sources, avoiding nonwhished 1.66 m Connection
effects in picture display (reflections, ...). Same way avoid hard bracket
of the monitor
sources of heat, humidity, steam, that could reduce the opera-
tional life of the equipment.

WALL-MOUNTED. FIXING THE CONNECTION

BRACKET TO THE WALL
Remember to pass the connections cable of the monitor
through the cable hole of the flush-mounted box or surface-
mounted box (1) and to pass the power, video signal, and aux-
iliary pushbutton cables through the cable hole of the connec- 1
tions bracket (2).
Fix the connection bracket to the wall with the screws and
wall-plugs supplied with the product. Position the bracket verti-
cally.
Note: The use of the fixing points in the four corners is rec- 2
ommended.
Connection
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the bracket
diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of this of the monitor

manual.

INSTALLATION ON STANDARD ELECTRICAL BOX.

100 mm
PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT
To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images
(reflections, etc.) and to preserve the working life of the equip-
ment, choose a place that avoids sources of direct light or
intense heat, damp and steam.
Make sure that the place chosen is at a distance of 100mm
from the place where you will later install the flush-mounted box
or surface wall-mounted box for concierge unit panel.
Remember to pass the power, video signal, and auxiliary
pushbutton cables through the cable hole before installing the 1.57 m Standard
standard electrical box. electrical
box
Place the box at a height of 1.57 m above the floor, in this
way the connection bracket will be at a height of 1.66 mts
above the floor. Make sure that the box is perfectly flush with
the surface of the wall.

154
INSTALLATION ON STANDARD ELECTRICAL BOX.
FIXING CONNECTION BRACKET TO THE STAN-
DARD ELECTRICAL BOX
Remember to pass the connections cable of the monitor
through the cable hole of the standard electrical box and flush-
mounted box or surface-mounted box (1) and to pass the
1
power, video signal, and auxiliary pushbutton cables through
the cable hole of the connection bracket (2).
Fix the connection bracket to the standard electrical box.
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the
diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
2 Standard
manual. electrical
box
Connection
bracket
of the monitor

DESKTOP INSTALLATION. FIXING THE CONNEC-

TION BRACKET TO THE DESKTOP SUPPORT
Pass the connection cables of the installation through the
cable-holding ring (1) and leave them in readiness as shown in
the illustration (2).

1 2

Fix the connection bracket to the desktop support with the M4

screws provided with the support.
The connection bracket is now ready for the electrical connec-
tions. Make these connections as shown in the diagrams and
connection and adjustment instructions of this manual.

155
CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL
POSITIONING THE PANEL IN THE FLUSH-
MOUNTED BOX
Some models of flush-mounted boxes have one or several
reinforcements, which are useful when the box is being fitted to
the wall. If this is the case, remove these reinforcements.

de
to ll e
en ca
om e the
m d
el c a ing
en p la stall n
r la in tio
tira r en lla
Rest a la wh nel sta
in ove pa l'in e
m ce de ru
Retran lors e de
en rer qu
ti pla
Re la
de

Remove the protective plugs from the flush-mounted box. The

box is now ready for the entrance panel to be fixed in it at a
later stage.

The flush-mounted box has a hinge or support axle on each

of its sides. Extract the two axles according to the direction in
which you wish to open the panel, e.e. from left to right or right
to left or from top to bottom. The unused axles should be fully
inserted in their appropiate slots.

156
 Introduce the rings of the concierge unit panel on the extract-
ed support axles. In this way the panel will be held in place and
all the connections can be easily made.

Once the connections and adjustments have been made on

the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection and adjust-
ment instructions of this manual), separate the upper and lower
decorative fittings, by loosening the screws holding them in
position.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

Close the concierge panel and press it against the flush-

mounted box. Fix the panel to the box using the fixing screws.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

157
 Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

POSITIONING THE PANEL IN THE SURFACE WALL-

MOUNTED BOX
Once the connections and adjustments have been made on the
concierge unit panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection
and adjustment instructions of this manual), separate the upper
and lower decorative fittings, loosening the screws holding them
in position.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

Fix the concierge unit panel to the surface wall-mounted box

with the fixing screws.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

158
 Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

POSITIONING THE CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL IN

DESKTOP SUPPORT 1

Pass the connection cables of the installation through the

cable-holding ring (1) and leave them in readiness as shown in
the illustration (2).

Once the connections and adjustments have been made on

the concierge panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection
and adjustment instructions of this manual), separate the upper
and lower decorative fittings, loosening the screws holding
them in position.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

159
 Close the panel and press it against the desktop support. Fix
it to this using the fixing screws.

Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.

2
6
1
5
9
4
8

7
0

Remove the protective backing strip from the self-adhesive

clamps (1) and stick them to the inside of the desktop support,
as required. Then use the plastic loops to hold the cables in 2
position (2).
1

160
MONITORS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
FITTING THE MONITOR TO THE CONNECTION
BRACKET
Connect the connector of the monitor to the connection
bracket.

Clip the two top fitting hooks of the bracket into the guides on
the base of the monitor housing (1). To do so, incline the moni-
tor as shown in the picture below. 1 1

Push the monitor downwards (2). While still pushing (2),

apply frontal pressure to the lower part of the monitor (3) until 2
it is in a position parallel to the wall. Then move the monitor
slightly upwards to anchor it to the connections support (4).

4 3

Put the receiver in place and connect the receiver cord.

161
REMOVING THE MONITOR FROM THE CONNEC-
TION BRACKET 2 2
Lightly press the fixing tongue downwards (1) and push the
monitor downwards (2). In this position, separate the lower part
of the monitor from the connection bracket (3). The monitor will
then only be supported on the connection bracket.

1 1
3

Move the monitor upwards until it becomes free of the fixing

tongues of the connection bracket.

Disconnect the connector which joins the monitor to the con-

nection bracket.

162
AUDIO UNITS
ASSEMBLING THE AUDIO UNIT
Position the audio unit and press firmly to fix the audio unit to
the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE AUDIO UNIT

With the use of a screwdriver, lever the audio unit out from its
anchoring points.

NUMERIC KEYPAD
ASSEMBLING THE NUMERIC KEYPAD
Position the keys of the keypad and press to fix the keypad to
the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE NUMERIC KEYPAD

With the use of a screwdriver, lever the keypad out from its
anchoring points.

163
TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS
LOCATION
Tap-offs and splitters should be located in a dry and warm <50m Monitor
place away from harmful agents such as water, damp, etc. Tap-off
DIV-034

Important: cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

In video door entry installations with twisted pair, make sure

that the place chosen for the tap-off is not further than 50 metres
from the place where the monitor will later be placed.

FIXING TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS FOR COAXIAL

CABLE TO THE WALL
Lever off the protective cover of the equipment.

Make the connections of the tap-off or splitter as shown in the

diagrams and connection instructions of this manual. Break
open the cable holes as required in order to pass the cables
through them.

Fix the tap-off or splitter to the wall.

Replace the protective cover.

164
FIXING TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS FOR TWISTED
PAIR TO THE WALL
Fix the tap-off or the splitter to the wall using the wall-plugs
50
-0 023

and screws provided with the product.

ASC
30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

ACCESSORIES FOR TELEPHONES

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORY

DISASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER OF THE TELE-

PHONE
Disconnect the cord between the base of the telephone and
the receiver.

DISASSEMBLING THE COVER FROM THE BASE OF

THE TELEPHONE
Move the base of the telephone towards the right.

165
 Remove the cover from the base of the telephone.

POSITIONING THE CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORY

IN THE BASE OF THE TELEPHONE
Insert the circuit board in the guide hooks inside the base of
the telephone.

Move the tab carefully (1) while inserting the circuit board (2),
until it is fixed to the base of the telephone.

2
1

166
 Join the CC1 connector of the accesory to the telephone con-
nector using the provided strip (3).

Make the connections shown in the diagrams and connection

instructions of this manual.

ASSEMBLING THE COVER TO THE BASE OF THE

TELEPHONE
Close the telephone and fix the cover to the base using the
fixing screw.

167
ASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER
Connect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR TELEPHONES

PREPARING THE SUPPORT PRIOR TO FIXING THE

TELEPHONE
Place the anti-slip feet on the desktop support.

Place the cable-holding ring over the lower opening of the

desktop support (1). Then pass the cable through the front and 3
lower openings (2). The securing loop can be used to hold the
cable to the desktop support in position (3). 1
The telephone is now ready for the electrical connections to be
made.

168
TELEPHONES FOR HOUSES AND FLATS
DISASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER
Disconnect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

DISASSEMBLING THE COVER FROM THE BASE OF

THE TELEPHONE
Move the cover of the base of the telephone towards the right.

Remove the cover from the base of the telephone.

169
WALL-MOUNTED. FIXING THE BASE OF TELE-
PHONE TO THE WALL
Remember to pass the cables through the cable hole before
fixing the base of the telephone to the wall.
The base has numerous fixing points. Using the four most con-
venient points, fix the base of the telephone to the wall with the
screws and wall-plugs provided.
The telephone is now ready for the electrical connections to
be made.
Note: The use of the fixing points in the four corners is
recommended.

DESKTOP INSTALLATION. FIXING THE BASE OF

THE TELEPHONE TO THE DESKTOP SUPPORT
Remember to pass the cables through the cable hole before
fixing the base of the telephone to the desktop support.
Fix the base of the telephone to the desktop support with the
M3 screws provided with the support.
The telephone is now ready for the electrical connections to
be made.

ASSEMBLING THE COVER TO THE BASE OF THE

TELEPHONE
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the
diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
manual.
Programme the telephone as shown in chapter 7
“Programming the devices of the house or flat”.

170
 Close the telephone and fix the cover to the base using the
fixing screw.

ASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER

Connect the cord between the base of the telephone and
the receiver.

171
ACCESSORIES FOR MONITORS
DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR MONITORS

CONNECTION BASE

LOCATION
Make sure that the place chosen is no more than 2 metres (i.e.
the length of the multiwire SCART connector cable) from the
place where the desktop support will later be positioned.
2m

POSITIONING THE CONNECTION BASE

Remove the protective cover.

Fix the connection base to the wall using the wall-plugs and
screws provided with the product.

Once the connections and adjustments have been made as

indicated in the diagrams and connection and adjustment
instructions of this manual, cut the required perforated openings
and fix the protective cover to the base using the fixing screw.

172
DESKTOP SUPPORT

LOCATION
To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images
(reflections, etc.) and to preserve the working life of the equip-
ment, choose a place that avoids sources of direct light or
intense heat, damp and steam.

PREPARATION OF THE DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR

SUBSEQUENT FIXING OF THE CONNECTION
BRACKET
Place the anti-slip feet on the desktop support.
The desktop support is now ready for both the connection
bracket (see page 176) and the monitor (see page 177) to be
fixed and connected.

COVER FRAMES FOR MONITORS

PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT

To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images IBA
ARR
UP

(reflections, etc.) and to preserve the working life of the equip-

UT
HA

ment, choose a place that avoids sources of direct light or

intense heat, damp and steam.
Bear in mind the dimensions of the monitor cover frame itself.
Position the monitor cover frame in such a way that the top part
of the connection bracket to be fixed at a later stage is at a
height of 1.6 metres above floor level (see illustration).

1.6 m

173
FIXING THE COVER FRAME FOR MONITORES TO
Direction of frame position
THE WALL
ARRIBA
Drill the required holes in the frame and fix it to the wall in the UP
HAUT

desired place. Position the frame vertically and in the direction

indicated by the sticker.
The frame is now ready to be fixed and connected to the con-
nection bracket. ARR
UP
HA
IBA

UT

The frame and the connections bracket can also be fixed

directly to the wall without having to make any holes in the
Direction of frame position
frame. Make sure you install the frame in the direction indicated
on the sticker. ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

The joined frame/connections bracket are now ready for the

connections bracket to be connected.
IBA
ARR
UP
UT
HA

174
MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR
HOUSES AND FLATS
CONNECTION BRACKET FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

WALL-MOUNTED. PLACE AND POSITIONING

HEIGHT 197 mm
Choose a place to install the connection bracket where the 15 mm 20 mm
wall is flat, even and hard.
To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images
(reflections, background light, etc.) and to preserve the working

193 mm
224 mm
life of the equipment, choose a place that avoids direct light
sources, intense heat
Bear in mind the dimensions of the monitor which will later be 1.6 m

connected to the connection bracket and that the top part of the 166 mm
connection bracket is at a height of 1.6m from floor level (see Monitor and connection bracket size
illustration).

WALL-MOUNTED. FIXING THE CONNECTION

BRACKET TO THE WALL
Remember to pass the cables through the cable opening
before positioning the bracket.
Fix the connection bracket to the wall with the screws and
wall-plugs supplied with the product.
Position the bracket vertically.
Note: The use of the anchoring points in the four corners is
recommended.
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the dia-
grams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
manual

INSTALLATION ON A STANDARD ELECTRICAL

BOX. PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT
Bear in mind the dimensions of the monitor which will later
be connected to the connections bracket (see illustration).
To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images 197 mm

(reflections, background light, etc.) and to preserve the working 15 mm 20 mm

life of the equipment, choose a place that avoids direct light

sources, intense heat
193 mm

Remember to pass the cables through the cable opening

224 mm

before positioning the standard electrical box.

Make sure that the standard electrical box is vertical and uni- 1.5 m
formly aligned or flush with the wall. Place the box at a height
of 1.5 metres above floor level. The connection bracket will then 166 mm

be at a height of 1.6 metres above the floor. Monitor and connection bracket size

175
INSTALLATION ON A STANDARD ELECTRICAL
BOX. FIXING CONNECTION BRACKET TO THE
STANDARD ELECTRICAL BOX.
Remember to pass the connections cable of the monitor
through the cable hole of the standard electrical box and flush-
mounted box or surface-mounted box (1) and to pass the power,
video signal, and auxiliary pushbutton cables through the cable
hole of the connections bracket (2).
Fix the connection bracket to the standard electrical box.
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the dia-
grams and connection and adjustment instructions of this manu-
al.
Programme the connection bracket as shown in chapter 7
“Programming the devices of the house or flat”.

DESKTOP INSTALLATION. FIXING THE CONNEC-

TION BRACKET TO THE DESKTOP SUPPORT
Fix the connection bracket to the desktop support with the M3
screws provided with the support.
Make the connections and adjustments in the connection
bracket using the multiwire SCART connector cable as indicated
in the diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of
this manual.
Programme the connection bracket as shown in chapter 7
“Programming the devices of the house or flat”.

Connect the multiwire SCART connector cable to the connec-

tion base.

FIXING TO THE COVER FRAME FOR MONITORS

Remember to pass the cables through the cable opening ARR
UP
HA
IBA

UT

before fixing the connection bracket.

Fix the connection bracket to the cover frame using the screws
provided with the frame.
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the dia-
grams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
manual.
Programme the connection bracket as shown in chapter 7
“Programming the devices of the house or flat”.

176
MONITORS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

FITTING THE MONITOR TO THE CONNECTION

BRACKET
Connect the connector of the monitor to the connection brack-
et.

Clip the two top fitting hooks of the bracket into the guides on
the base of the monitor housing (1). To do so, incline the moni-
tor as shown in the picture below. 1 1

Push the monitor downwards (2). While still pushing (2),

2
apply frontal pressure to the lower part of the monitor (3) until it
is in a position parallel to the wall. Then move the monitor slight-
ly upwards to anchor it to the connections support (4).

4 3

Put the receiver in place and connect the receiver cord.

177
REMOVING THE MONITOR FROM THE CONNEC-
TION BRACKET
Lightly press the fixing tongue downwards (1) and push the 2 2
monitor downwards (2). In this position, separate the lower part
of the monitor from the connection bracket (3). The monitor will
then only be supported on the connection bracket.

1 1
3

Move the monitor upwards until it becomes free of the fixing

tongues of the connection bracket.

Disconnect the connector which joins the monitor to the con-

nection bracket.

178
ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
CALL EXTENSION UNITS

FIXING TO THE WALL

Move the lower tab gently and remove the cover from the
base of the call extension unit.

Break off the partitions so as to be able to pass the wires

through. There are two openings at the back (1) and two at the
bottom (2).

Remember to pass the cables through the opening before

attaching the call extension unit. Fix the base of the call exten-
sion unit to the wall using the screws and wallplugs provided.

Once the connections and adjustments have been made as

indicated in the diagrams and connection and adjustment
instructions of this manual, replace the cover.

179
SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORIES

LOCATION
If you use the accessory to handle voltages, choose a place in
which there is no possibility of control voltages accidentally
touching (electrical box, etc.).

FIXING TO THE WALL

The accessory can be fixed to the wall with the wall-plugs and
screws provided with the product.
50
-0 023
ASC
30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

FIXING TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Depending on the model which is being used, the accessory
can be fixed to the flush-mounted box using the screws provid-
ed with the product.

50
-0 023
ASC
30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

COMMON DOOR ACCESSORY

FIXING TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Fix the accessory to the flush-mounted box using the 4 screws
provided.

50
-0 023
ASC
30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

180
ELECTRONIC MODULES
MODULATORS FOR TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

LOCATION
The modulator should be installed in a dry and well-ventilated
place, away from direct sources of heat. This will ensure the
correct functioning of the equipment and preserve its working
life.

PREPARATION OF CONNECTORS
→ 6.5 - 6.8 mm 12 mm → 6.8 - 7.1 mm
6±1mm
To ensure the best possible connection of the coaxial cable,
O
follow steps 1 to 4. Use the male F-type connectors provided.
1 1 6±1mm

2 2
BS
3±1 8±1mm 6±1mm

3 3

4 4
Male type F connector
O

DISASSEMBLING THE COVER

Lever the protective cover off the equipment.
LE
TE

WALL-MOUNTING
The modulator can be fixed to the wall using the wall-plugs
and screws provided.

181
CONNECTIONS, ADJUSTMENT AND ASSEMBLY
OF THE COVER
Make the connections, select the output channel and adjust
the channel level as shown in the diagrams and connection and
adjustment instructions of this manual. Replace the protective
cover.

POWER SUPPLY UNITS

Remember to protect the power supply units of the installation
by complying with the regulations in force governing electrical
installations (keep away from strong magnetic fields, ensure cor-
rect fusing, etc.).

LOCATION
The power supply unit should be installed in a dry and well-
ventilated place, away from direct sources of heat. This will
ensure the correct functioning of the equipment and preserve its
working life.

WALL-MOUNTING
Fix the power supply unit to the wall with the screws supplied
with the product.

MOUNTING ON DIN RAIL

Mount the unit on the rail as shown in the illustration.

182
REMOVING FROM DIN RAIL
To remove the power supply from the DIN rail, simply lever it
off with a screwdriver as shown in the illustration.

CONNECTIONS AND ASSEMBLY OF TERMINAL

COVER
Once the connections have been made as indicated in the
diagrams and connection instructions of this manual, cut the
required perforated openings of the terminal cover. Fix it to the
power supply unit using the fixing screws supplied with the prod-
uct.

183
184
 CONNECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
5
INSTRUCTIONS
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
ENTRANCE PANEL UPPER MODULES
AUDIO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
AUDIO UNIT GRF-208
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
Installation of digital door entry system , Power supply
D1 , D2 Telephones BUS
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
GRF-208
9 , 10 Panel lighting

19 11 , 12 Electric lock
J1 J2 22 , 18 Door opening

SC1 , 18 Auxiliary pushbutton signal of the telephone

BUS
15 V 7 Common pushbutton terminal
9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3
IN Connector for concentrator of calls
J1 Panel-type selector
(Main/Secondary)
J2 Door-opening tone selector
(Enabled/Disabled)

Installation of digital video door entry system

, Power supply

D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
GRF-208
9 , 10 Panel lighting

19 11 , 12 Electric lock
J1 J2 22 , 18 Door opening

SC1 , 18 Auxiliary pushbutton signal of the telephone

BUS
15 V 7 Common pushbutton terminal
9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3
19 Alimentation (Standard installation)
and video unit control
IN Connector for concentrator of calls
J1 Panel-type selector
(Main/Secondary)
J2 Door-opening tone selector
(Enabled/Disabled)

185
Description of connections:
Installation of digital door entry system

GRF-208

19 Audio unit
Power supply J2
Telephones (Several points of entry Installation)
J1
D2,D1 D3,D2
BUS
15 V
9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3

OUT
Concentrator
of calls

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Accessory Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Connection Activation Connection

From the dwelling From the dwelling
BUS 10 111222SC118 IN BUS
10 111222SC118 IN 15 V 15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3 9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

With communication Ctrl , Telephone TED-002

with the entrance panel Switch accessory
ASC-001 With communication
Using external pushbuttons or equivalent with the entrance panel

0 111222SC118 IN

ABR-011

186
 Installation of digital video door entry system
Video unit

GRF-208

19 Audio unit
Power supply J2
Telephones/monitors (Several points of entry Installation)
J1
D2,D1 D3,D2
BUS
15 V
9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3

OUT
Concentrator
of calls

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Accessory Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Connection Activation Connection

From the dwelling From the dwelling
BUS 10 111222SC118 IN BUS
10 111222SC118 IN 15 V 15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3 9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

With communication Ctrl , Telephone TED-002

with the entrance panel Switch accessory
ASC-001 With communication
Using external pushbuttons or equivalent with the entrance panel

0 111222SC118 IN

ABR-011

ADJUSTMENT
Definition of main panel J1 Jumper for main panel selection
It is necessary to define the entrance panel from which the tele-
phones/connection brackets of the installation will be pro-
grammed. In video door entry systems, the main panel also
J1 J1
defines the entrance panel which will be activated when the auto
switch-on function is used from the monitor of the dwelling.
This panel will be the main panel of the system and must have GRF-208 GRF-208

the J1 jumper installed. 19 19

J2 J2
J1 J1

Carry out the following steps: 15 V

BUS
15 V
BUS

9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3 9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3

In standard installations, leave the J1 jumper installed.

In installations with several points of entry, select the main panel Main entrance panel All other entrance panels
and remove the J1 jumper from all the other entrance panels.
In installations in housing estates, you must designate one main
entrance panel for the external points of entry as well as one main entrance panel for each building. Accordingly, designate the
entrance panel of one of the external points of entry as the main panel, extracting the J1 jumper from the panels of the remaining
external points of entry. Likewise, designate for each building one panel as the main entrance panel, extracting (if there
are several points of entry) the J1 jumper from the entrance panels of the other points of entry of each building. 187
Adjusting the volume
The audio units are supplied with the audio system volume Volume control for
level pre-set in the factory. Use the power controls of the audio the entrance panel

unit if the volume needs adjusting for the requirements of the 1 Volume control for
installation (1). the monitors/telephones

If there is acoustic feedback, adjust the feedback control (2). Feedback control

Disabling the door-opening tone

Audio units leave the factory with the door-opening tone J2
enabled, so that the audio unit generates several warning tones GRF-208
when a voltage is sent to the electric lock.
19
If you prefer to eliminate these tones, extract the J2 jumper. J1 J2

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3

VIDEO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

VIDEO UNITS TCB-011, TCB-021
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

+,- Power supply vo

V1 , M Video signal to t
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
V2 , M Video signal inst
15V with several poin
Made in Spain
V4 , M Video signal esta

19 Video unit contro

188
Description of connections:

Video output to the monitors

V1, M

V1 M M V4

For installations with several points of entry, extract Made in Spain

the resistor from the terminals (V2, M) where the

coaxial cable is to be connected (steps 1 and 2). Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)

75 Ohm
V1 M M V4

Made in Spain

V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

15V
V2, M Made in Spain
V2, M
Video unit Video unit
(Installation with several points of entry) (Installation with several points of entry)

Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)

Standard installation Installation with several points of entry or housing estates

V2 M M V2 V2 M M V2
White White
19 15V_ 19 15V_
+ +

Red Black
Red

19
Audio unit 19 +_
Black Audio unit Power supply

ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

189
VIDEO UNITS TCB-040, TCB-050
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry

Made in Spain
T4+ , T4- Video signal estate external point of entry

19 19 Alimentation and video unit control

DIV-034
cod.9730015

Description of connections: T1+ T1 T1

T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Video output to the monitors

T1+, T1-

T1+ T1- T4- T4+

For installations with several points of entry, extract Made in Spain

the resistor from the terminals (T2+,T2_) where the

twisted pair cable is to be connected (steps 1 and 2).
Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)
DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

1 2
220 Ohm

T1+ T1- T4- T4+

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

Made in Spain

Made in Spain

19

DIV-134
cod.9730016

19 12 V

V
15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Audio unit
Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)

T2+, T2- T2+, T2-

Video unit Video unit
(Installation with several points of entry) (Installation with several points of entry)

ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

190
VIDEO UNIT TCB-210
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

V1 M +,- Power supply voltage

15V V1 , M Video signal to the modulator

Made in Spain

TCB-210
cod. 9640012

Description of connections:

V1 M

15V
Made in Spain

TCB-210
cod. 9640012

VIDEO

Modulator
DC OUT

Black Black-White

+ _

ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

191
CONCENTRATOR OF CALLS
CONCENTRATOR OF 16 CALLS COL-000
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
OUT IN
Output conector
Input conector
Made in Spain
1...8 Pushbutton connector
12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
9...16 Pushbutton connector
COL-000
cod. 9730030

Description of connections:

Previous concentrator
IN OUT Next Concentrator
Audio unit

OUT

Made in Spain

12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
COL-000
cod. 9730030

Pushbuttons Pushbuttons

See “Connection of pushbuttons”

Connection of pushbuttons
In digital systems whenever a pushbutton is pressed on the Detection is carried out by means of 2 ribbons each with 8
entrance panel the audio unit sends a digital stream or code wires, numbered from 1 to 8 and from 9 to 16 respectively. Each
through the BUS. This digital code is different according to the one of these wires is connected to a pushbutton on the entrance
pushbutton that is pressed, this allows the devices (tele- panel. The number of the wire which is connected to the push-
phones/monitors) of each dwelling to be identified. button (1,2,3 ….,15,16) determines the digital code which the
The concentrator of calls is a fundamental part of this process audio unit generates every time this pushbutton is pressed (1,2,3
as it is the element which detects which pushbutton has been ….,15,16 respectively). This permits the generation of a different
pressed and sends this information to the audio unit. digital code for each pushbutton, as each pushbutton is connect-
ed to a different number of wire.

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 1

COL
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9
BUS

Made in Spain
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16

192
 BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 2

COL
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9
BUS

Made in Spain
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16

Interconnection of concentrators
Remember that the concentrators of calls can be connected to pressed depends on the number of the wire of the concentrator
each other for entrance panels with more than 16 pushbuttons, to which it is connected as well as the position of the concentra-
permitting installations of up to 96 pushbuttons (6 concentrators). tor in respect to the audio unit.
In this case, the digital code generated when a pushbutton is

Interconnection of concentrators
Audio unit

1 2 6
OUT IN OUT IN
OUT IN

Made in Spain Made in Spain

Made in Spain

12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516

COL-000 COL-000
COL-000
32 96
cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030

16
cod. 9730030

. . .
. . .
. . .
1 17 81
Pushbuttons 1 to 16 Pushbuttons 17 to 32 Pushbuttons 81 to 96

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 1
COL
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9

BUS

Made in Spain Made in Spain

COL-000 COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16

1 2

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 17
COL
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9

BUS

Made in Spain Made in Spain

COL-000 COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16

1 2

Installations with several points of entry

In installations with several points of entry, keep the same order of connection for each point of entry. In this way, whenever a
house or flat is called from any of the points of entry, the same digital code will be generated, allowing communication between the
house or flat and any of the entrance panels.
193
ESTATE-IDENTIFYING ACCESSORIES

ESTATE-IDENTIFYING ACCESSORY AIB-000

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al. Remember that if there are several points of entry, the accessory must be connected in the entrance panel which has been defined
as the main entrance panel.

+,- Power supply voltage

Description of terminals:
D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS
OUT

D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D5 , D4 Estates BUS
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000 OUT Output connector
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1..4 Connection to pushbuttons

Description of connections:

Telephones/Monitors
D1,D2

Audio unit
(Main entrance panel of building) D2
D3
OUT

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Audio unit or Pushbuttons External point of entry with External point of entry with
concentrator of calls entrance panel with keypad entrance panel with pushbuttons
Consult pages 195 and 196

D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 D5 D4 D3
T T

D4 D5 D2 D3

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Audio unit (External point of entry)

194
Installations with 1, 2, 3 or 4 dwellings
Connection of pushbuttons
In digital systems whenever a pushbutton is pressed on the allows up to 4 pushbuttons to be detected. It does so through the
entrance panel the audio unit sends a digital stream or code terminals numbered from 1 to 4. Each of these terminals is con-
through the BUS. This digital code is different according to the nected to a pushbutton on the entrance panel. The number of the
pushbutton that is pressed, this allows the devices (tele- terminal to which the pushbutton is connected (1, 2, 3, 4) will
phones/monitors) of each dwelling to be identified. determine the digital code which the audio unit generates every
The concentrator of calls is a fundamental part of this process time that a particular pushbutton (1, 2, 3 or 4) is pressed. In this
as it is the element which detects which pushbutton has been way a different digital code is generated for each pushbutton
pressed and sends this information to the audio unit. pressed, each pushbutton being connected to a different termi-
nal of the concentrator.
The built-in concentrator in the estate-identifying accessory

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 1

BUS
OUT

18 V 1 2 3 4

000
W1

OUT

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 2

BUS
OUT

18 V 1 2 3 4

000
W1

OUT

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

195
Installations with more than 4 dwellings
Using the estate-identifying accessory in conjunction
with the concentrator of calls:
If the building has more than 4 flats, the concentrator of the the last concentrator of calls. The digital code generated when a
accessory can be used in combination with one or more other pushbutton is pressed depends on the number of the terminal of
concentrators of calls (type COL-000) to obtain the number of the accessory to which it is connected as well as the position of
calls required. In this case, the accessory is always connected to the accessory in respect to the audio unit.

Interconnection of concentrators and estate-identifying accessory

Audio unit

1 2 6
OUT IN
OUT IN

OUT
Made in Spain
Made in Spain
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4

12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 12 34 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 OUT

AIB-000

SW1
COL-000
COL-000 cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

32
cod. 9730030

16
cod. 9730030

. . 81
.
. . .
. .
17 84
1
Pushbuttons 1 to 16 Pushbuttons 17 to 32 Pushbuttons 81 to 84

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 1
COL
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9

BUS
OUT

Made in Spain
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16 D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2

BUS
15 V
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code 17

BUS
OUT

18 V 1 2 3 4

000
W1

OUT

Made in Spain
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16 D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
SW1

cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2

196
ADJUSTMENT
Assigning identification numbers
Assign a different number to accessory in the installation. Each The following tables show the identification number of each
accessory has a switch with 8 micro-switches (SW1) which accessory as determined by the position of the 8 micro-switches.
allows the identification number to be defined. Depending on the Set the micro-switches to the correct positions to obtain the num-
position of the micro-switches, the identification number will be ber which you wish to assign.
between 1 and 99.

ON ON ON ON ON
Number Number Number Number Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 21 41 61 81

2 22 42 62 82

3 23 43 63 83

4 24 44 64 84

5 25 45 65 85

6 26 46 66 86

7 27 47 67 87

8 28 48 68 88

9 29 49 69 89

10 30 50 70 90

11 31 51 71 91

12 32 52 72 92

13 33 53 73 93

14 34 54 74 94

15 35 55 75 95

16 36 56 76 96

17 37 57 77 97

18 38 58 78 98

19 39 59 79 99

20 40 60 80

197
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH DIRECTORY
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH DIRECTORY PTN-00000
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

+,_ Power supply voltage (DC)

, Power supply voltage (AC)

Description of connections:
Connections for keeping the lighting turned on continuously.

Made in Spain

IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Entrance panel Entrance panel with directory

Connections for turning on the lighting by pressing any key on the entrance panel
Note: The length, in seconds, that the lighting remains on is the same that the value selected in “Time that relay 2 is activated”
during the entrance panel configuration (See Chapter 6 “Configuration of entrance panels with keypad and concierge panel”)..

Made in Spain

IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

KPD-001
OUT

V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

Entrance panel Entrance panel with directory

198
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
AUDIO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD

AUDIO UNIT GRF-211

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
Installation of digital door entry system

19 , Power supply voltage

D1 , D2 Telephones BUS
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
GRF-211 D5 , D4 Estates BUS
cod. 9610034

IN Numeric keypad connector

Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Installation of digital video door entry system

, Power supply voltage

19
D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D5 , D4 Estates BUS

GRF-211 19 Alimentation (Standard installation)

cod. 9610034
and video unit control
Made in Spain
IN Numeric keypad connector
IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

199
Description of connections:
Installation of digital door entry system

19

Power supply
+ GRF-211
cod. 9610034

Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Numeric keypad

Standard Installation. Several points of entry Installation Housing estate, several buildings

Telephones
p
D2,D1 p

BUS BUS

D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

D3 D3 D5 D5
Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit
D2 D2 D4 D4

200
 Installation of digital video door entry system

Video unit

19

Power supply
+ GRF-211
cod. 9610034

Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Numeric keypad

Standard Installation. Several points of entry Installation Housing estate, several buildings

Telephones/Monitors
p
D2,D1 p

BUS BUS

D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

D3 D3 D5 D5
Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit
D2 D2 D4 D4

ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of entrance panel
Entrance panels leave the factory pre-configured to function in By configuring the entrance panel, you will also be able to
a standard installation (i.e. buildings with a single point of entry); define codes for the direct opening of the door and to select val-
when programming, it is possible to assign any number between ues for certain parameters of the entrance panel in question: e.g.
1 and 999 to the telephones/connection brackets. time allowed for answering a call, maximum conversation time,
If, however, the installation which you are going to perform is type of call tone, etc.
not a standard installation, it will be necessary, before program- See Chapter 6 “Configuration of entrance panels with keypad
ming the telephones/connection brackets, to configure the and concierge panel”.
entrance panel so that they meet your specific needs.

201
Adjusting the volume
The audio units are supplied with the audio system volume Volume control for
the entrance panel
level pre-set in the factory. Use the power controls of the audio 1
unit if the volume needs adjusting for the requirements of the Volume control for
installation (1). the monitors/telephones

If there is acoustic feedback, adjust the feedback control (2). Feedback control

AUDIO UNIT GRF-212

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
Installation of digital door entry system with concierge unit

19
, Power supply voltage

D1 , D2 Telephones BUS
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
GRF-212 D5 , D4 External entrance BUS
cod. 9610035

Made in Spain IN Numeric keypad connector

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Installation of digital video door entry system with concierge unit

, Power supply voltage

19

D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS
D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D5 , D4 External entrance BUS
GRF-212
cod. 9610035
19 Alimentation (Basic installation)
and video unit control
Made in Spain

IN BUS IN Numeric keypad connector

15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

202
Description of connections:
Installation of digital door entry system with concierge unit

19

Power supply
+ GRF-212
cod. 9610035

Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Numeric keypad

Standard Installation. Several points of entry Installation Housing estate, several buildings
Telephones
p
D2,D1 p

BUS BUS

D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

D3 D3 D5 D5
Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit
D2 D2 D4 D4

203
 Installation of digital video door entry system with concierge unit

Video unit

19

Power supply
+ GRF-212
cod. 9610035

Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Numeric keypad

Standard installation. Several points of entry Installation Housing estate, several buildings
Telephones/Monitors
p
D2,D1 p

BUS BUS

D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

D3 D3 D5 D5
Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit
D2 D2 D4 D4

ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of entrance panel
Entrance panels leave the factory pre-configured to function in By configuring the entrance panel, you will also be able to
a standard installation with concierge unit (i.e. buildings with a define codes for the direct opening of the door and to select val-
single point of entry and concierge unit); when programming, it ues for certain parameters of the entrance panel in question: e.g.
is possible to assign any number between 1 and 999 to the tele- time allowed for answering a call, maximum conversation time,
phones/connection brackets. type of call tone, etc.
If, however, the installation which you are going to perform is See Chapter 6 “Configuration of entrance panels with keypad
not a standard installation, it will be necessary, before program- and concierge panel”.
ming the telephones/connection brackets, to configure the
entrance panel so that they meet your specific needs.

204
Adjusting the volume
The audio units are supplied with the audio system volume Volume control for
1 the entrance panel
level pre-set in the factory. Use the power controls of the audio
unit if the volume needs adjusting for the requirements of the Volume control for
the monitors/telephon
installation (1).

AUDIO UNIT GRF-214

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
Installation of digital door entry system with concierge unit

19

, Power supply voltage

D5 , D4 Estates BUS
GRF-214
cod. 9610036
IN Numeric keypad connector
Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

Installation of digital video door entry system with concierge unit

19
, Power supply voltage

D5 , D4 Estates BUS

GRF-214 19 Video unit control

cod. 9610036
IN Numeric keypad connector
Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

205
Description of connections:
Installation of digital door entry system with concierge unit

19

Power supply
+ GRF-214
cod. 9610036

Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

Numeric keypad
Housing estate, several buildings

BUS

D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

D5 D5
Audio unit Audio unit
D4 D4

D4 D4
Audio unit Audio unit
D5 D5

Installation of digital video door entry system with concierge unit

Video unit

19

Power supply
+ GRF-214
cod. 9610036

Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

Numeric keypad
Housing estate, several buildings

BUS

D5 D4 D4 D5 D5 D4 D4 D5

D5 D5
Audio unit Audio unit
D4 D4
206
D4 D4
Audio unit Audio unit
D5 D5
ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of entrance panel
You must configure the entrance panel, adapting the operating See Chapter 6 “Configuration of entrance panels with keypad
parameters to the specific needs of the installation. and concierge panel”.
By configuring the entrance panel, you will also be able to
define codes for the direct opening of the door and to select val-
ues for certain parameters of the entrance panel in question: e.g.
time allowed for answering a call, maximum conversation time,
type of call tone, etc.

Adjusting the volume

The audio units are supplied with the audio system volume Volume control for
1 the entrance panel
level pre-set in the factory. Use the power controls of the audio
unit if the volume needs adjusting for the requirements of the Volume control for
the monitors/telephones
installation (1).

VIDEO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD

VIDEO UNITS TCB-011, TCB-021

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

+,- Power supply voltage

V1 , M Video signal to the monitors

V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
V2 , M Video signal installations
15V with several points of entry
Made in Spain
V4 , M Video signal estate external point of entry

19 Video unit control

207
Description of connections:

Video output to the monitors

V1, M

V1 M M V4

For installations with several points of entry, extract Made in Spain

the resistor from the terminals (V2, M) where the

coaxial cable is to be connected (steps 1 and 2). Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)

75 Ohm
V1 M M V4

Made in Spain

V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

15V
V2, M Made in Spain
V2, M
Video unit Video unit
(Installation with several points of entry) (Installation with several points of entry)

Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)

Standard installation Installation with several points of entry or housing estates

V2 M M V2 V2 M M V2
White White
19 15V_ 19 15V_
+ +

Red Black
Red

19
Audio unit 19 +_
Black Audio unit Power supply

ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

208
VIDEO UNITS TCB-040, TCB-050
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals::

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry

Made in Spain
T4+ , T4- Video signal estate external point of entry

19 19 Alimentation and video unit control

Description of connections: DIV-034

cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1
T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Video output to the monitors

T1+, T1-

T1+ T1- T4- T4+

For installations with several points of entry, extract Made in Spain

the resistor from the terminals (T2+,T2_) where the

twisted pair cable is to be connected (steps 1 and 2).
Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)
DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

1 2
220 Ohm

T1+ T1- T4- T4+

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

Made in Spain

Made in Spain

19

DIV-134
cod.9730016

19 12 V

V
15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Audio unit
Splitter
(Estate external point of entry)

T2+, T2- T2+, T2-

Video unit Video unit
(Installation with several points of entry) (Installation with several points of entry)

ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

209
NUMERIC KEYPADS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD

NUMERIC KEYPAD KPD-001

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
, Power supply voltage (direct current)

OUT Audio unit connector

11 , 12 Electric lock
22 , - Door opening
KPD-001
cod. 9650002 Circuit 1
OUT Ctrl1 , - Control
C1 Common
NO1 Normally open contact
NC1 Normally closed contact
11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
Circuit 2
Ctrl2 , - Control
C2 Common
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of Circuits 1 y 2: 1A - 24V /
Description of connections:

Audio unit

Power supply KPD-001

cod. 9650002

OUT

V
11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

Electric lock Relay 1 Relay 2

Connection Activation Connection Activation Connection Activation
From the dwelling From the dwelling By pressing each key

11 12 12c C1 NO1 N 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

Telephone
1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9

TED-002
4 5 6

7 8 9 C 0

C 0

With communication With communication

with the entrance panel with the entrance panel
Additional Elements Additional Elements
Using external pushbuttons Using external pushbuttons Using external pushbuttons

NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

ABR-011

210
ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the volume of the tone confirming that a
key has been pressed
Keypads leave the factory with the volume of the tone con-
firming that a key has been pressed pre-set. Use the power con-
trols of the numeric keypad if the volume needs to be adjusted
for the requirements of the installation.

CONCIERGE SYSTEMS

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

AUDIO UNITS IN CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

AUDIO UNIT GRF-013

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

, Power supply voltage

19
E
D
C
B D1 , D2 Telephones/monitors BUS
A
CC2 D3 , D2 Panels BUS
D5 , D4 Estates BUS
GRF-013
cod. 9610020
CC2 Concierge unit
telephone/monitor connector
Made in Spain

IN BUS IN Numeric keypad connector

15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

211
Description of connections:

19
E
Telephone/Monitor D
C
concierge B
A
CC2
Red
GRF-013
Power supply cod. 9610020

+ Made in Spain

IN BUS
15 V
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

Numeric keypad

Standard Installation. Several points of entry Installation Housing estate, several buildings
Telephones/Monitors
p
D2,D1 p

BUS BUS

D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

D3 D3 D5 D5
Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit Audio unit
D2 D2 D4 D4

ADJUSTMENT
Configuring the concierge panel
Concierge panels leave the factory pre-configured to function those just described, you will have to configure the concierge
in a standard installation (i.e. in buildings with a single point of panel so that it meets your specific requirements.
entry) or in an installation in buildings with several points of entry By configuring the concierge panel, you will also be able to
where the telephones/connection brackets have been pro- select values for certain parameters: e.g. type of call tone, etc.
grammed with codes between 1 and 999.
See Chapter 6 “Configuration of entrance panels with keypad
Likewise, they are pre-configured to operate in ‘normal’ mode and concierge panel”.
and with the record of unanswered calls permanently enabled.
If, however, the installation you are going perform differs from

Adjusting the volume

The audio units are supplied with the audio system volume Volume control for
the concierge
1
“reception volume”
level pre-set in the factory. Use the power controls of the audio
unit if the volume needs adjusting for the requirements of the Volume control for
the telephones/monitors and entran
installation (1)(2). “emission volume”

212
 NUMERIC KEYPADS IN CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL
NUMERIC KEYPAD KPD-003
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
, Power supply

OUT Audio unit connector

Circuit 1
Ctrl1 , - Control
KPD-003
cod. 9650003 C1 Common
OUT NO1 Normally open contact
NC1 Normally closed contact

Circuit 2
C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 Ctrl2 , - Control
C2 Common
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Circuit 3
Ctrl3 , - Control
C3 Common
NO3 Normally open contact
NC3 Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of circuits 1, 2 y 3: 1A - 24V /

Description of connections:

Audio unit

Power supply KPD-003

cod. 9650003

OUT

V V
C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

Relay 3 Relay 1 Relay 2

Connection Activation Connection Activation Connection Activation
By pressing the indicated key. By pressing the indicated key. By pressing
When there is When there is any key
no communication no communication
C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 with the entrance panel. C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 with the entrance panel. NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9
1 2 3

0 C 0 4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Additional elements Additional elements Additional elements

213
Adjusting the volume of the tone confirming that a
key has been pressed
Keypads leave the factory with the volume of the tone con-
firming that a key has been pressed pre-set. Use the power con-
trols of the numeric keypad if the volume needs to be adjusted
for the requirements of the installation.

TELEPHONES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

TELEPHONE TCD-001
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:
(A,B,C,D) Terminals of concierge unit
telephone connector

25 , 27 Auxiliary pushbuttons
CC2 of the telephone
A B C D 25 27
Description of connections:

CC2
A B C D 25 27

CC2 Concierge audio unit

Red

Auxiliary pushbutton Auxiliary pushbutton

Connection of the terminal 25 Connection of the terminal 27
Connection Activation Connection Activation
Concierge Concierge From the Concierge Concierge From the
audio unit telephone Switch-selector concierge audio unit telephone Switch-selector concierge
IN accessory IN accessory
15 V 25
ASC-001 15 V 27
ASC-001
+ + + +
CC2 CC2
V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2 V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

Additional Additional
elements elements

Switch-selector Switch-selector
accessory accessory
ASC-050 ASC-050
5A / 250V~ 5A / 250V~

S2 S5 S2 S5
2 5 6 2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional Additional
elements elements

214
MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

COAXIAL CABLE
CONNECTION BRACKET SCC-030
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

CC1

A B J1

CC1 Monitor connector

(A,B,C,D,E) Terminals of concierge unit

R1
monitor connector

V1 , M Signal of video
V1
M +,- Power supply voltage
M
V1 25 / 27 / P2 Auxiliary pushbuttons of the monitor

25
Important:
27
The terminals P2 are potential-free contacts.
P2 Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

CC2
A B C D E

215
Description of connections:

CC1

A B J1

COAXIAL
CABLE
Auxiliary pushbutton
Internal
conductor R1 Connection of the terminals P2
Mesh Connection Activation
V1 Connection bracket From the
M
M Video signal input for concierge system concierge
V1

25
25
27 27
P2
P2
Concierge
CC2 audio unit

A B C D E
Red

Additional
elements
Power supply

Auxiliary pushbutton Auxiliary pushbutton

Connection of the terminal 25 Connection of the terminal 27
Connection Activation Connection Activation
Concierge Connection bracket From the Concierge Connection bracket From the
audio unit for concierge system Switch-selector concierge audio unit for concierge system Switch-selector concierge
IN accessory IN accessory
15 V 25 ASC-001 15 V 25 ASC-001
+ + 27 + + 27
V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2 V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2
P2 P2

Additional Additional
elements elements

Switch-selector Switch-selector
accessory accessory
ASC-050 ASC-050
5A / 250V~ 5A / 250V~

S2 S5 S2 S5
2 5 6 2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional Additional
elements elements

ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of the J1 jumper (supplying the tap-off)
In installations where the distribution of the video signal Switch the J1 jumper to position B if the video signal for the
towards concierge is carried out by means of tap-offs, the tapped house or flat comes from a tap-off. If this is not the case, leave
outputs the corresponding tap-off should be fed through the coax- the J1 jumper in position A.
ial cable so that the monitors can receive the signal captured by
the video unit.
The J1 jumper permits the configuration of the connection
bracket to send the necessary voltage through the coaxial cable
in these cases.

216
Examples
The following examples show the configuration of the J1 jumper and the R1 resistor depending on the type of installation.

Distribution of the video signal via tap-off

B J1

DIV-024
R1
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Distribution of the video signal via splitter

A J1
DIV-124

1 2 3 R1
2 4

7
5

8
6

C 0

Power supply

Direct distribution of the video signal

A J1

4
2

5
3

6
R1
7 8 9

C 0

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

217
TWISTED PAIR
CONNECTION BRACKET SCC-040
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.
CC1

Description of terminals:
A B J1

CC1 Monitor connector

(A,B,C,D,E) Terminals of concierge unit

R1
monitor connector

T1+ , T1- Signal of video

T1+
T1- +,- Power supply voltage
T1-
T1+ 25 / 27 / P2 Auxiliary pushbuttons of the monitor

25
Important:
27
The terminals P2 are potential-free contacts.
Description of connections: P2 Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

CC1 CC2
A B C D E

A B J1

Auxiliary pushbutton
R1 Connection of the terminals P2
Connection Activation
T1+ T1+ Connection bracket
T1- T1- Video signal input From the
for concierge system concierge
T1- T1-
T1+
T1+
25
25
27 27
P2
P2
Concierge
CC2 audio unit
Red
A B C D E

Additional
elements
Power supply

Auxiliary pushbutton Auxiliary pushbutton

Connection of the terminal 25 Connection of the terminal 27
Connection Activation Connection Activation
Concierge Connection bracket From the Concierge Connection bracket From the
audio unit for concierge system Switch-selector concierge audio unit for concierge system Switch-selector concierge
IN accessory IN accessory
15 V 25 ASC-001 15 V 25 ASC-001
+ + 27 + + 27
V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2 V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2
P2 P2

Additional Additional
elements elements

Switch-selector Switch-selector
accessory accessory
ASC-050 ASC-050
5A / 250V~ 5A / 250V~

S2 S5 S2 S5
2 5 6 2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

218
Additional Additional
elements elements
ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of the J1 jumper (activating the tapped
ouput)
In installations where the video signal to the concierge unit is The J1 jumper permits the configuration of the connection
distributed via a tap-off, for the monitor for concierge system to bracket to activate the tapped output in such cases.
be able to receive the signal captured by the video unit the con- Switch the J1 jumper to position B if the video signal for the
nection bracket for concierge system must supply power to the dwelling comes from a tap-off. If this is not the case, leave the J1
tapped output of the corresponding tap-off. jumper in position A.

Examples
The following examples show the configuration of the J1 jumper and the R1 resistor depending on the type of installation.

Distribution of the video signal via tap-off

B J1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Distribution of the video signal via splitter

A J1
DIV-134 DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

1 2 3 R1
2 4

7
5

8
6

C 0

Power supply

Direct distribution of the video signal

A J1

4
2

5
3

6
R1
7 8 9

C 0

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

219
MONITORS FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
MONITORS MCB-002, MCC-002
ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the contrast and brilliance of the image
The monitors leave the factory with the image contrast and
brilliance pre-set. Use the controls of the monitor to re-adjust the
contrast and brilliance if the installation requires it.

CONTRAST BRILLIANCE

Turning the video on and off

If so desired, calls can be received in the dwelling without
the image of the visitor appearing on the screen of the moni-
tor. All that is required is to move the video on/off switch to the
right.
To be able to see visitors once more, move the switch back
to its initial position.
ON OFF
ON/OFF
SWITCH

TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS

TAP-OFFS

COAXIAL CABLE

TAP-OFF DIV-024
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

DIV-024
cod. 9730031

Video signal input

Video output to next tap-off
Video outputs to monitors
M M

220
Description of connections:

Connection of the coaxial cable

→ 6.5 - 6.8 mm 12 mm

1 2
3±1 8±1 mm
DIV-024
cod. 9730031

Next tap-off
3 4
M M

Monitors V1, M V1, M Monitors

V1, M V1, M

Video signal input

For installing tap-offs in cascade,

steps 1 and 2 (except for terminal tap-off).

1 2
75 Ohm

TWISTED PAIR

TAP-OFF DIV-034
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

DIV-034
cod.9730015 Video signal input
T1+ T1-

Video output to next tap-off

T1- T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Video outputs to monitors

T1+ T1-

Description of connections:

DIV-034
cod.9730015

Next tap-off T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

T1+,T1 Monitors

T1+,T1

T1+,T1

T1+,T1
Video signal input

221
SPLITTERS

COAXIAL CABLE

SPLITTER DIV-124
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

DIV-124
cod. 9730032 P1 , Power supply (15 V )

Video signal input

Video outputs
M 15V M

Description of connections:

Connection of the coaxial cable

→ 6.5 - 6.8 mm 12 mm

1 2
3±1 8±1 mm
Video risers DIV-124 Video risers
cod. 9730032 P1

3 4
M 15V M

Power supply

Video signal input

ADJUSTMENT
Amplification of the video signal
Depending on the installation it may be necessary to amplify
the level of the video signal of the outputs of the splitter. Use the
P1 potentiometer until the desired signal level is obtained. The
maximum output level which can be obtained is 1.3.

222
TWISTED PAIR

SPLITTER DIV-134
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

DIV-134 V , Power supply AC (12 V )

cod.9730016

+,- Power supply DC (15 V )

12 V 15 V

V
+ T1 + T1 T1 + T1 T1 + T1 T1 + T1 T1 + T1 Video signal input
T1+ T1-

Video outputs
T1+ T1-

Description of connections:

DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+
V T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
Video risers

AC
Power supply V
(AC or DC)
DC

Video signal input

223
ACCESSORIES FOR TELEPHONES
ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORY AAL-120
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

CC1 Connection to digital telephone

S2, S5 Electronic call signal

Description of connections:

Electronic call repeater

or accessory
Connection Activation Digital telephone
CC1
Switch-selector When a call is
accessory received
Electronic call ASC-050 in the dwelling
repeater 5A / 250V~

AAL-200 2
S2
5
S5
6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

S2 S5
2 5 Additional
Elements
S5 S5
S2 S2

Other device

224
TELEPHONES FOR HOUSES AND FLATS
TELEPHONE TED-001
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

CC1 D1 , D2 Communication BUS

CC1 Connector call
PROG adaptor accessory
D1 D2 ON OFF

Description of connections:
Next telephone Next telephone

CC1 CC1

PROG PROG

D1 D2 ON OFF D1 D2 ON OFF

D1 D2 D1 D2
Audio unit Audio unit

WITHOUT CONNECTION POLARITY

ADJUSTMENT
Controlling call volume
The telephones leave the factory with the call volume pre-set.
Use the potentiometer of the telephone if re-adjustment is
required by your particular installation.

225
TELEPHONE TED-002
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.

Description of terminals:

CC1 D1 , D2 Communication BUS

CC1 Connector call
PROG adaptor accessory
D1 D2 ON OFF

Description of connections:

Next telephone Next telephone

CC1 CC1

PROG PROG

D1 D2 ON OFF D1 D2 ON OFF

D1 D2 D1 D2
Audio unit Audio unit

WITHOUT CONNECTION POLARITY

ADJUSTMENT
Controlling call volume
The telephones leave the factory with the call volume pre-set.
Use the potentiometer of the telephone if re-adjustment is
required by your particular installation.

226
 ACCESSORIES FOR MONITORS
DESKTOP SUPPORTS
DESKTOP SUPPORT SSM-001
CONNECTION BASE
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown.
Description of terminals: D1 , D2 Communication BUS
V1 , M Signal of video (coaxial)

T1+ , T1- Signal of video (twisted pair)

T1+ T1- T1- T1+ +15V S2 D1D2 S5 S5 , S2 Electronic call
V1 M M V1 1 2 3 4 5 24 25
+,- Power supply

24 , 25 Auxiliary pushbutton (P1)

Important:
The terminals 24 and 25
are potential-free contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

T1+ T1- T1- T1+ +15V S2 D1 D2 S5

V1 M M V1 1 2 3 4 5 24 25

Description of connections:

D2 D1
Power supply
Audio unit
(Communication BUS)

COAXIAL TWISTED PAIR

Next monitor Next monitor

T1+ T1- T1- T1+ T1+ T1- T1- T1+

V1 M M V1 V1 M M V1

V1, M T1+, T1_

Video signal input Video signal input

Electronic call extension

Auxiliary push-button
or accessory
Connection Activation Connection Activation
Electronic call When a call is
2 S5
extension received
AAL-200 in the dwelling 5 24 25

S2 S5
2 5

S5 Additional
elements
S2
Switch-selector
accessory
ASC-050
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional
elements 227
S5
S2
MULTIWIRE SCART CONNECTOR CABLE

CONNECTIONS TO SCM-030 CONNECTION BRACKET FOR COAXIAL CABLE

Connect the multiwire SCART connector cable to the connection bracket in accordance with the following colour-coding.

Description of connections:

TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR

Pink 24 Yellow
Brown-white 25 Brown
S2 Purple-white V1 Pink-black
S5 Red M White-black
D1 Black V1 Yellow-black
D2 White M Blue

CONNECTIONS TO SCM-040 CONNECTION BRACKET FOR TWISTED PAIR

Connect the multiwire SCART connector cable to the connection bracket in accordance with the following colour-coding.

Description of connections:

TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR

Pink 24 Yellow
Brown-white 25 Brown
S2 Purple-white T1+ Pink-black
S5 Red T1- White-black
D1 Black T1+ Yellow-black
D2 White T1- Blue

MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR

HOUSES AND FLATS
CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS
COAXIAL CABLE

CONNECTION BRACKET SCM-030

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.
Important:
Use the guides on the bracket to pass the connection cables.

228
 CC1
Description of terminals:

CC1 Monitor connector

J1
A B
D1 , D2 Communication BUS
PROG
V1 , M Signal of video
ON OFF
R1
S5 , S2 Electronic call
+,- Power supply voltage
V1
M 24 , 25 Auxiliary pushbutton (P1)
M
V1 26 , 27 Auxiliary pushbutton (P2)

24 Important:
25
The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27
26
27
are potential-free contacts.
S5 Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
S2

D1 D2

Description of connections:

Next monitor
(Installation in series or in parallel)

CC1
V1, M D2 D1

A B J1
COAXIAL
CABLE PROG

Internal ON OFF
R1
conductor
Mesh

V1
M
M
V1 Video signal input

24
25
26
27
S5
S2

D1 D2

D2 D1
Power supply Audio unit

Electronic call extension

Auxiliary pushbutton 2 Auxiliary pushbutton 1
or switch-selector accessory
Connection Activation Connection Activation Connection Activation
Electronic call When a call is 25
extension received
AAL-200 26 24
S2 S5 in the dwelling
27 25
S5 26

S2 S5
2 5

Additional Additional
elements elements

Switch-selector
accessory
ASC-050 S2 S5
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional 229
elements
ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of the J1 jumper (supplying power to the tap-off)
In installations where the video signal is distributed via tap-offs, for the monitors to be able to receive the signal captured by the
video unit the connection brackets must supply power through the coaxial cable to the tapped output of the corresponding tap-off.
The J1 jumper permits the configuration of the connection bracket to send the necessary voltage through the coaxial cable in such
cases.
Switch the J1 jumper to position B if the video signal for the dwelling comes from a tap-off. If this is not the case, leave the J1
jumper in position A.

Configuration of the 75 Ω end-of-line R1 resistor

To guarantee the best possible image quality, it is important that the video line is loaded with 75 Ω in the last monitor.
For this to be so, proceed as follows:
If distribution of the video signal is performed with tap-offs, leave the 75 Ω resistor in the monitor of each dwelling. If a dwelling
has several monitors installed in parallel, associated to the same call, then leave the 75 Ω resistor only in the monitor at the end of
the line.
In installations with distribution in cascade, cut the 75 Ω resistor in all the monitors except the one at the end of the line.

Examples
The following examples show the configuration of the J1 jumper and the R1 resistor depending on the type of installation.

Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs

DIV-024

DIV-024

B J1
DIV-024 DIV-024

R1
V1
M
M
V1

DIV-024

DIV-024

230
Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

B J1 B J1

R1
R1
V1 V1
M M
M M
V1 V1

DIV-024 DIV-024

Distribution of the video signal in cascade

A J1

R1
V1
M
M
V1

A J1

R1

V1
M
M
V1

Distribution of the video signal in cascade. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

A J1 A J1

R1
R1
V1 V1
M M
M M
V1 V1

231
 Distribution of the video signal in two columns: One column with tap-offs, the other in cascade

DIV-024
A J1
DIV-024

R1
DIV-024 V1
M
M
V1

DIV-024 B J1
DIV-024

R1
V1 A J1
DIV-124 M
M
V1 R1

V1
M
M
DIV-024 V1

DIV-124

Controlling call volume

The telephones leave the factory with the call volume pre-set.
Use the potentiometer of the telephone if re-adjustment is
required by your particular installation.

TWISTED PAIR

CONNECTION BRACKET SCM-040

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this
manual.
Important:
Use the guides on the bracket to pass the connection cables.

232
 CC1

Description of terminals:
CC1 Monitor connector
J1
A B
D1 , D2 Communication BUS
PROG
T1+ , T1- Signal of video
ON OFF
R1
S5 , S2 Electronic call
+,- Power supply voltage
T1+
T1- 24 , 25 Auxiliary pushbutton (P1)
T1-
T1+ 26 , 27 Auxiliary pushbutton (P2)

24 Important:
25
The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27
26
27
are potential-free contacts.
S5 Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
S2

D1 D2

Description of connections:

Next monitor
(Installation in series or in parallel)

CC1
T1-, T1+ D2 D1

A B J1

PROG

ON OFF
R1

T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+ Video signal input

24
25
26
27
S5
S2

D1 D2

D2 D1
Power supply Audio unit

Electronic call extension

Auxiliary pushbutton 2 Auxiliary pushbutton 1
or switch-selector accessory
Connection Activation Connection Activation Connection Activation
Electronic call When a call is 25
extension received
AAL-200 26 24
S2 S5 in the dwelling
27 25
S5 26

S2 S5
2 5

Additional Additional
elements elements

Switch-selector
accessory
ASC-050 S2 S5
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional
elements 233
ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of the J1 jumper (supplying power to the tap-off)
In installations where the video signal is distributed via tap-offs, for the monitors to be able to receive the signal captured by
the video unit the connection brackets must supply power to the tapped output of the corresponding tap-off.
The J1 jumper permits the configuration of the connection bracket to activate the tapped output in such cases.
Switch the J1 jumper to position B if the video signal for the dwelling comes from a tap-off. If this is not the case, leave the J1
jumper in position A.

Configuration of the 120 Ω end-of-line R1 resistor

To guarantee the best possible image quality, it is important that the video line is loaded with 120 Ω in the last monitor.
For this to be so, proceed as follows:
If distribution of the video signal is performed with tap-offs, leave the 120 Ω resistor in the monitor of each dwelling. If a dwelling
has several monitors installed in parallel, associated to the same call, then leave the 120 Ω resistor only in the monitor at the end
of the line.
In installations with distribution in cascade, cut the 120 Ω resistor in all the monitors except the one at the end of the line.

Examples
The following examples show the configuration of the J1 jumper and the R1 resistor depending on the type of installation.

Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015
B J1
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1
T1+
T1
T1
T1+

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

234
Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

B J1 B J1

R1 R1

T1+ T1+
T1 T1
DIV-034 T1 T1
DIV-034
cod.9730015
T1+ T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Distribution of the video signal in cascade

A J1

R1
T1+
T1
T1
T1+

A J1

R1

T1+
T1
T1
T1+

Distribution of the video signal in cascade. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

A J1 A J1

R1 R1

T1+ T1+
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1+ T1+

235
 Distribution of the video signal in two columns: One column with tap-offs, the other in cascade

DIV-034
DIV-034
A J1 DIV-034
cod.9730015

DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1
T1+
T1
T1
T1+
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015
B J1
J1
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034 R1
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1+
T1
T1+ T1
T1 T1+
T1
T1+

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

DIV-134
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

DIV-134
DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

Controlling call volume

The telephones leave the factory with the call volume pre-set.
Use the potentiometer of the telephone if re-adjustment is
required by your particular installation.

MONITORS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

MONITORS MVB-002, MVC-002

ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the contrast and brilliance of the image
The monitors leave the factory with the image contrast and
brilliance pre-set. Use the controls of the monitor to re-adjust the
contrast and brilliance if the installation requires it.

CONTRAST BRILLIANCE

236
Turning the video on and off
If so desired, calls can be received in the dwelling without the
image of the visitor appearing on the screen of the monitor. All
that is required is to move the video on/off switch to the right.
To be able to see visitors once more, move the switch back to
its initial position.

ON OFF
ON/OFF
SWITCH

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
CALL EXTENSION UNITS
AAL-200 CALL EXTENSION UNIT

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown.
S5, S2 Electronic call

Description of terminals:

S2 S5
2 5

Description of connections:

Digital telephones (accessory AAL-120)

Connection Activation
When a call is
Accessory AAL-120 received
in the dwelling

S2 S5
2 5
S2
S5

Digital monitors (connection bracket)

Connection Activation
When a call is
Monitor digital received
connection bracket in the dwelling
26
27
S5 S2
S2 S5

D1 D2 237
ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the call volume
The call extension units leave the factory with the call volume
pre-set. Use the potentiometers of the call extension units if re-
adjustment is required by your particular installation.

Turning the repeater on and off

If so desired, it is possible to deactivate the call extension unit
so that it does not reproduce the call tone. All that is required is
to move the on/off switch downwards. To be able to hear the
call tone again, move the switch back to the “on” position.

Position Position
when ON when OFF

SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORIES
ASC-001 SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORY
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

V , Power supply
Ctrl , Control signal of circuits 1 and 2

ASC-001 Circuit 1
cod. 9730023
C1 Common
NO1 Normally open contact
V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2
NC1 Normally closed contact

Circuit 2
C2 Common
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of circuits 1 and 2: 1A - 24V /
Description of connections:

ASC-001
Power supply cod. 9730023

V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

Control signal

238 Additional elements

Range of values of the control signals
Depending on the value of the control signal, it may be necessary to feed the ASC-001 through the power supply terminals.

Control signal values which require a power supply

Power supply
3 - 11 V 15 V
Ctrl , 4-8V V , 12 V

Control signal values which do not require a power supply

Power supply
11 - 15 V
Ctrl , 8 - 12 V V ,

ASC-050 SWITCH-SELECTOR

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
Ctrl1, Control Signal 1
S5, S2 Electronic call (digital door entry system)
ASC-050
cod. 9730021 Ctrl2, Control Signal 2
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
Circuit
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC
C Common
NO Normally open contact
NC Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of the control circuit : 5A-250V
Description of connections:
ACTIVATING BY ELECTRONIC CALL
Digital telephones (accessory AAL-120)
Connection Activation
When a call is
Accessory AAL-120 received
in the dwelling

ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6
Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC
S2
S5

Digital monitors (connection bracket) Additional elements

Connection Activation

Monitor digital When a call is

connection bracket received
in the dwelling
26
27
S5 S2
S2 S5

D1 D2 239
 ACTIVATING BY EXTERNAL CONTROL SIGNAL

ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6
Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Control signal 1 Ctrl1,

Control signal 2 Ctrl2,

Additional elements

Range of values of the control signals

Ctrl 1, 5 - 10 V

Ctrl 2, 11 - 15 V
8 - 12 V

COMMON DOOR ACCESSORIES

APC-001 COMMON DOOR ACCESSORY

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown.

Description of terminals:

APC-001
cod.9730006
12 , 11 Electric lock activation signals

AC DC
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12

AC 12 , 11 AC electric lock
DC 12 , 11 DC electric lock

Description of connections:

APC-001
cod.9730006

AC DC
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12

DC electric lock

11,12
11,12
11,12
11,12 AC electric lock
Electric lock signals

Note: To activate an AC electric lock, it is necessary that all the electric lock signals be AC.

240
Connection of accessories in parallel
To concentrate the electric lock signal of more than 4 entrance panels or systems, several APC-001 accessories must be connected
in parallel.

APC-001 APC-001
cod.9730006 cod.9730006

AC DC AC DC
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12
12 12

Electric lock signals

Electric lock signals

ACCESSORIES FOR DIGITAL INSTALLATIONS

AIB-001 ACCESSORY FOR DIGITAL INSTALLATIONS

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

I1, I2 Power supply voltage

D1, D2
Entrance Panel BUS

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1, D2
AIB-001 Telephones/monitors BUS
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

241
Description of connections:

Telephones/Monitors Next accessory AIB-001

D1,D2 D2,D1

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D2,D1
Audio unit

2 I1 I2 I1 2 I1 I2 I1

I1,I2

230V~ ++ 230V~ I2 I1

ALC-070 GCI-001
(Electronic door (Electronic video door entry installation or
entry installation) electronic door entry and video door entry installation
with concierge system)
ADJUSTMENT
Assigning identification number
Assign an identification number to the accessory. Each accessory has a switch with 8 micro-switches (SW1) which are used to
define the identification number of the accessory. The identification number will be between 1 and 49.
The following tables show which numbers are assigned as determined by the position of the 8 micro-switches. Set the
micro-switches to the appropriate positions, depending on the installation being performed and on the number you wish to assign.
Note: Bear in mind that the number you assign to the accessory will determine the range of values possible for the programming
codes of the telephones/connection brackets which are connected to this accessory, as shown in the tables.

A- INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 AIB-001
ON ON
Floor Codes Number Floor Codes Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ground floor 1 -99 0 5 501 - 599 5

1 101 - 199 1 6 601 - 699 6

2 201 - 299 2 7 701 - 799 7

3 301 - 399 3 8 801 - 899 8

4 401 - 499 4 9 901 - 999 9

242
 B- INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 AIB-001

ON ON

Floor Codes Number Floor Codes Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ground floor 1 - 19 25 2501 - 2519

1 101 - 119 26 2601 - 2619

2 201 - 219 0 27 2701 - 2719 5

3 301 - 319 28 2801 - 2819

4 401 - 419 29 2901 - 2919

5 501 - 519 30 3001 - 3019

6 601 - 619 31 3101 - 3119

7 701 - 719 1 32 3201 - 3219 6

8 801 - 819 33 3301 - 3319

9 901 - 919 34 3401 - 3419

10 1001 - 1019 35 3501 - 3519

11 1101 - 1119 36 3601 - 3619

12 1201 - 1219 2 37 3701 - 3719 7

13 1301 - 4319 38 3801 - 3819

14 1401 - 1419 39 3901 - 3919

15 1501 - 1519 40 4001 - 4019

16 1601 - 1619 41 4101 - 4119

17 1701 - 1719 3 42 4201 - 4219 8

18 1801 - 1819 43 4301 - 4319

19 1901 - 1919 44 4401 - 4419

20 2001 -2019 45 4501 - 4519

21 2101 - 2119 46 4601 - 4619

22 2201 - 2219 4 47 4701 - 4719 9

23 2301 - 2319 48 4801 - 4819

24 2401 - 2419 49 4901 - 4919

243
 C- INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 AIB-001

ON ON

Floor Codes Number Floor Codes Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ground floor 1 -19 0 25 2501 - 2519 25

1 101 - 119 1 26 2601 - 2619 26

2 201 - 219 2 27 2701 - 2719 27

3 301 - 319 3 28 2801 - 2819 28

4 401 - 419 4 29 2901 - 2919 29

5 501 -519 5 30 3001 - 3019 30

6 601 - 619 6 31 3101 - 3119 31

7 701 - 719 7 32 3201 - 3219 32

8 801 - 819 8 33 3301 - 3319 33

9 901 - 919 9 34 3401 - 3419 34

10 1001 -1019 10 35 3501 - 3519 35

11 1101 - 1119 11 36 3601 - 3619 36

12 1201 - 1219 12 37 3701 - 3719 37

13 1301 - 1319 13 38 3801 - 3819 38

14 1401 - 1419 14 39 3901 - 3919 39

15 1501 - 1519 15 40 4001 - 4019 40

16 1601 - 1619 16 41 4101 - 4119 41

17 1701 - 1719 17 42 4201 - 4219 42

18 1801 - 1819 18 43 4301 - 4319 43

19 1901 - 1919 19 44 4401 - 4419 44

20 2001 - 2019 20 45 4501 - 4519 45

21 2101 - 2119 21 46 4601 - 4619 46

22 2201 - 2219 22 47 4701 - 4719 47

23 2301 - 2319 23 48 4801 - 4819 48

24 2401 - 2419 24 49 4901 - 4919 49

244
ELECTRONIC MODULES
MODULATORS FOR TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
MODULATORS MDA-300, MDA-400

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

Video signal input

O

DC output voltage

SW1 TV channel output

BS

Description of connections:

TV channel output
O
LE
SW1

Black Black-White

+ _
TE

+ _ V1, M
Video unit with external power supply unit
TCB-210

ADJUSTMENT
Selecting the output channel
Select the output channel. All modulators are equipped with
a switch with 10 microswitches which are used to define the
TV standard in use in different countries as well as the desired
output channel.
The following tables show the TV standards and the TV out-
put channels which are defined according to the positions of
the 10 microswitches. Set the microswitches to the appropriate
positions to obtain the required TV standard and output chan-
nel.

245
MDA-300 BIII MODULATOR

Standard B CCIR EUROPE Standard I IRELAND

MDA-300 MDA-300
Standard B CCIR EUROPE Standard I IRELAND
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Channel Channel Channel Channel

STD STD STD STD

5 S12 D S12

6 S13 E S13

7 S14 F S14
O

8 S15 G S15

9 S16 H S16

10 S17 I S17
BS
11 S18 J S18

12 S19 S11

S11 S20

Standard D OIRT Standard B ITALY

MDA-300 MDA-300
O
Standard D OIRT Standard B ITALY
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Channel Channel Channel Channel

STD STD STD STD

LE
6 S12 D S13

7 S13 E S14

8 S14 F S15

9 S15 G S16

10 S16 H S17

11 S17 H1 S18
TE

12 S18 H2 S19

S11 S20 S11 S20

S12

I Standard SOUTH AFRICA Standard D POLAND

MDA-300 MDA-300
Standard I SOUTH AFRICA Standard D POLAND
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Channel Channel Channel Channel

STD STD STD STD

4 12 6 S10

5 S14 7 S11

6 S15 8 S12

7 S16 9 S13

8 S17 10 S14

9 S18 11 S15

10 12 S16

S9 S17

246
MDA-400 UHF MODULATOR

TABLE SHOWING STANDARDS TABLE SHOWING CHANNELS

MDA-400 MDA-400
TABLE SHOWING STANDARDS TABLE SHOWING CHANNELS
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Standard Standard Standard Standard

STD STD STD STD

G CCIR I SOUTH AFRICA 21 46

G ITALY K OIRT 22 47

I UK K POLAND 23 48
O

I IRELAND L FRANCE 24 49

25 50

26 51
BS
27 52

28 53

29 54

30 55

31 56

32 57

33 58
O
34 59

35 60

36 61

37 62
LE

38 63

39 64

40 65

41 66

42 67
TE
43 68

44 69

45

Adjusting the output level of the TV channel

Use the potentiometers of the modulator if re-adjustment of the
channel output level is required by your particular installation.

247
POWER SUPPLY UNITS
ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.
Description of terminals: Description of connections:

,
230V~ ++

ALC-070
cod. 9620014

230V~ ++

230 V

+
Elements requiring power supply Elem

ALA-040 POWER SUPPLY

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.
Description of terminals: Description of connections:

230 V Mains volt ALA-040

cod. 9620001
ALA-040
cod. 9620001
V , Output vo
230 V V
230 V V

230 V ,V Elements requiring power supply

ALM-040 POWER SUPPLY

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.
Description of terminals: Description of connections:

230 V Mains voltage

V , Output voltag ALM-040

ALM-040 cod. 9620011
cod. 9620011

, Output voltag
230 V V 230 V V

230 V

V
248
ALM-080 POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manu-
al.
Description of terminals:

230 V

V ,

,
ALM-080 11

Description of connections:

Elements requiring power supply

+ -
ALM-080
cod. 9620013

230 V~
230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V

,V Elements requiring power supply

Audio unit
11,12 (entrance panel with pushbuttons)

Electric lock Keypad KPD

11,12
(entrance panel with keypad)

Range of values of the control signal

11 - 15 V
Ctrl , 8 - 12 V

249
 CONFIGURATION OF ENTRANCE PANELS WITH
6
KEYPAD AND OF THE CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL
GENERAL POINTS
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
Default value
Entrance panels with keypad leave the factory to function in a standard installation (i.e. buildings with a single point of entry);
when programming, it is possible to assign any number between 1 and 999 to the telephones/connection brackets.
Similarly, entrance panels leave the factory with certain pre-set operating characteristics (see following table).

Changing configuration of entrance panel

If the entrance panel is destined for an installation different from the one described (for example in an installation with several
points of entry, or in a housing estate with several buildings) or if you wish to program the telephones/connection brackets with a
code which does not fall within the range of 1 to 999, you must, before programming the telephones/connection brackets, recon-
figure the entrance panel.
Similarly, if the factory default values of the various operational parameters (type of call tone, time allowed for answering, etc.)
do not coincide with those of the installation you are carrying out, you can reconfigure the entrance panel, changing these values
to meet your specific requirements. In this case, you can make the changes at any time, either before or after programming the tele-
phones/connection brackets.
Note: See how to configure the entrance panel with keypad on page 253.

250
 Standard Programming code: Operating characteristics
Installation 1 - 999
Description Default
value

Type of call tone

1 2 3
(type 2)
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Number of times call tone is repeated

Maximum time setting for conversation (seconds)

Time setting to answer call (seconds)

Length of time electric lock is activated (seconds)

Auxiliary pushbutton on the telephone:Time that relay 1 is activated (seconds)

Time that relay 1 of the keypad remains activated
when the auxiliary pushbutton of digital telephone TED-002 is pressed

Door-opening function:
Number of failed attemps to enter code allowed (Unlimited)

Door-opening function:
Length of time function remains blocked (minutes)

Pressing keys on the keypad: Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)

Time that relay 2 remains activated when any key of the keypad
is pressed

Door-opening code (No factory-set

default code)

Other type Other Other

of installation codes characteristics

CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD

251
CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL
Default value
Concierge panels leave the factory to function in a standard installation (i.e. buildings with a single point of entry) or in an instal-
lation in buildings with several points of entry where the telephones/connection brackets have been programmed with codes
between 1 and 999.
Similarly, concierge panels leave the factory with certain pre-set operating characteristics (see table below).

Changing configuration of concierge panel

If the concierge panel is destined for an installation different from the one described (for example in an housing estate with
several buildings…) or, if the telephones/connection brackets have been programmed with a code which does not fall within the
range of 1 to 999, the concierge unit must be reconfigured.
Similarly, if the factory default values of the various operational parameters (type of call tone, time allowed for answering, etc.)
do not coincide with those of the installation you are carrying out, you can reconfigure the concierge panel, changing these values
to meet your specific requirements.
Note: See how to configure the concierge panel on page 260.

Standard Installation Programming code: Operating characteristics

with concierge 1 - 999
Description
Operating features Default
value

1 2 3 Type of call tone

(type 2)
1 2 3 4 5 6

4 5 6 7 8 9

7 8 9 C 0

C 0

Number of times call tone is repeated

Unanswered calls. Mode (Record of

unanswered calls
always activated)

Operation. Mode
(normal mode)

Concierge code (Code to activate/deactivate the concierge unit)

Other type Other Other

of installation codes characteristics

CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

252
CONFIGURATION OF ENTRANCE PANELS WITH
KEYPAD
To configure the entrance panel, a configuration menu is available,
with 19 positions, each of them corresponding to a certain parame-
ter. This menu is accessed from the keypad of the entrance panel itself
by keying in the MASTER code. Use key (1) to move down the menu
to the next position and key (2) to move up to the previous position.
The panel display will show which menu position is selected at a
given moment as well as the value assigned to the parameter corre-
sponding to this position. 1 2 3

4 5 6

Note: The entrance panel leaves the factory with a pre-set MAS-
7 8 9

C 0

TER code (default MASTER code), which can be changed from within
the configuration menu itself (position 19). To prevent outside persons
from having access to the menu, we recommend that you replace the
default MASTER code by another MASTER code.

STEP-BY-STEP CONFIGURATION
Simultaneously press the keys (1) and (2). The entrance panel will
emit a confirmation tone.
Time setting:
Once this step has been performed, you have 30 seconds to carry
out the following step. Otherwise, you must begin again. 1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Enter the MASTER key:

If this is the first time that you have accessed the configuration menu,
enter the code 12345 (Default MASTER code). If it is not the first time,
enter the MASTER key which you have previously configured.
The entrance panel will emit a beep, indicating that the code is cor-
1 2 3

rect. The display will show the position 1 of the menu. 4

C
5

0
6

If the code is incorrect, the panel will emit a beep indicating that an MASTER code
error has been made and the red led will flash. Begin again at previ-
ous step.

Configure the different positions of the configuration menu in accor-

dance with the installation you are performing, as shown in the tables
on pages 254 to 259. These tables show how to change the values
of the different positions.
Time setting:
If 30 seconds expire without any key being pressed (since the pre-
vious key), you will automatically exit from the configuration menu. If
this happens, start the configuration again from the beginning.

253
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING (WITH OR WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT)
CONFIGURATION OF MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions

Definition of panel as main panel

Panel number

Number of secondary panels in the building

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2)

Number of times call tone is repeated

Press
Maximum time setting for conversation (seconds) , , ,
Select value

Time setting to answer call (seconds)

,

Range of values possible for the codes (1)

of the connection brackets/telephones
Press
Length of time electric lock is activated (seconds)

Auxiliary pushbutton on the telephone:

Time that relay 1 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening function: Unlimited number

Number of failed attemps to enter code allowed
Door-opening function:
Time (in minutes) that the feature will remain blocked
if the number of attempts allowed in position 11
has been exceeded

Pressing keys on the keypad: Do not activate

Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening code
Press

Door-opening code
Key in value 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

Door-opening code

Door-opening code Press

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code

(1) - Numbers from 1 to 999.

- Number “A” + “B”, where “A” can be any number between 0 and 49, and “B” can be any number between 01 and 19.
For example: (A=10, B=09) Then the number is: 1009.
Note: If you wish to use a different range of values, please consult the manufacturer.

254
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY (WITH OR WITHOUT CON-
CIERGE UNIT)
CONFIGURATION OF MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions

Definition of panel as main panel

Panel number

Number of secondary panels in the building (1)

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2)

Number of times call tone is repeated

Press
Maximum time setting for conversation (seconds) , , ,
Select value

Time setting to answer call (seconds)

,

Range of values possible for the codes (2)

of the connection brackets/telephones
Press
Length of time electric lock is activated (seconds)

Auxiliary pushbutton on the telephone:

Time that relay 1 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening function: Unlimited number

Number of failed attemps to enter code allowed
Door-opening function:
Time (in minutes) that the feature will remain blocked
if the number of attempts allowed in position 11
has been exceeded

Pressing keys on the keypad: Do not activate

Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening code
Press

Door-opening code
Key in value 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

Door-opening code

Door-opening code Press

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code

(1) Select the number of secondary entry points (secondary entrance panels) in the installation.
Note: If the number of secondary entry points is greater than 9, please consult the manufacturer.
(2) - Numbers from 1 to 999.
- Number “A” + “B”, where “A” can be any number between 0 and 49, and “B” can be any number between 01 and 19.
For example: (A=10, B=09) Then the number is: 1009.
Note: If you wish to use a different range of values, please consult the manufacturer. 255
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY (WITH OR WITHOUT CON-
CIERGE UNIT)
CONFIGURATION OF SECONDARY ENTRANCE PANEL

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions

Definition of panel as secondary panel

Panel number (1)

Number assigned to the main panel of the building

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2)

Number of times call tone is repeated

Press
Maximum time setting for conversation (seconds) , , ,
Select value

Time setting to answer call (seconds)

,

Range of values possible for the codes (2)

of the connection brackets/telephones
Press
Length of time electric lock is activated (seconds)

Auxiliary pushbutton on the telephone:

Time that relay 1 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening function: Unlimited number

Number of failed attemps to enter code allowed
Door-opening function:
Time (in minutes) that the feature will remain blocked
if the number of attempts allowed in position 11
has been exceeded

Pressing keys on the keypad: Do not activate

Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening code
Press

Door-opening code
Key in value 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

Door-opening code

Door-opening code Press

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code

(1) Assign a different number to each entrance panel in the installation, beginning with S1.
Note: I f t h e n u m b e r o f s e c o n d a r y e n t r a n c e p a n e l s i s g r e a t e r t h a n 9 , p l e a s e c o n s u l t t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r.
(2) - Numbers from 1 to 999.
- Number “A” + “B”, where “A” can be any number between 0 and 49, and “B” can be any number between 01 and 19.
For example: (A=10, B=09) Then the number is: 1009.
256 Note: If you wish to use a different range of values, please consult the manufacturer.
HOUSING ESTATES CONTAINING SEVERAL BUILDINGS WITH EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
(WITH OR WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT)
CONFIGURATION OF MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL OF EACH BUILDING

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions

Definition of panel as main panel

Panel number (1)

Number of secondary panels in the building (2)

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2)

Number of times call tone is repeated

Press
Maximum time setting for conversation (seconds) , , ,
Select value

Time setting to answer call (seconds)

,

Range of values possible for the codes (3)

of the connection brackets/telephones
Press
Length of time electric lock is activated (seconds)

Auxiliary pushbutton on the telephone:

Time that relay 1 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening function: Unlimited number

Number of failed attemps to enter code allowed
Door-opening function:
Time (in minutes) that the feature will remain blocked
if the number of attempts allowed in position 11
has been exceeded

Pressing keys on the keypad: Do not activate

Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening code
Press

Door-opening code
Key in value 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

Door-opening code

Door-opening code Press

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code

(1) Assign a different number to the main entrance panel of each building, beginning with P 1.
Note: If you wish to use different numbers, please consult the manufacturer.
(2) In buildings with a single point of entry, leave the value at S 0. In installations with several points of entry, select the number of
secondary points of entry (secondary entrance panels) in the installation.
Note: If the number of secondary entry points is greater than 9, please consult the manufacturer.
(3) - Numbers from “Panel number (value in position 2) + 001” to “Panel number (value in position 2) + 999”.
For example: Panel number is 17. Then the values possible as codes for connection brackets/telephones are from 17001 to
17999.
HOUSING ESTATES CONTAINING SEVERAL BUILDINGS WITH EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
(WITH OR WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT)
CONFIGURATION OF SECONDARY ENTRANCE PANEL OF EACH BUILDING

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions

Definition of panel as secondary panel

Panel number (1)

Number assigned to the main panel of the building (2)

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2)

Number of times call tone is repeated

Press
Maximum time setting for conversation (seconds) , , ,
Select value

Time setting to answer call (seconds)

,

Range of values possible for the codes (3)

of the connection brackets/telephones
Press
Length of time electric lock is activated (seconds)

Auxiliary pushbutton on the telephone:

Time that relay 1 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening function: Unlimited number

Number of failed attemps to enter code allowed
Door-opening function:
Time (in minutes) that the feature will remain blocked
if the number of attempts allowed in position 11
has been exceeded

Pressing keys on the keypad: Do not activate

Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening code
Press

Door-opening code
Key in value 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

Door-opening code

Door-opening code Press

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code

(1) Assign a different number to each secondary entrance panel of the dwelling, beginning with S1.
Note: If the number of secondary entrance panels is greater than 9, please consult the manufacturer.
(2) Select the value which has been chosen in position 2 of the configuration menu of the main entrance panel of the building.
(3) - Numbers from “Number assigned to the main entrance panel of the building (value selected in position 2 of the main entrance panel)
+ 001 to “Number assigned to the main entrance panel of the building (value selected in position 2 of the main entrance panel) + 999.”
258 For example: The main entrance panel is number 17. Then the values possible as codes for connections brackets/telephones are from
17001 to 17999.
Note: If you wish to use a different range of values, please consult the manufacturer.
HOUSING ESTATES CONTAINING SEVERAL BUILDINGS WITH EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
(WITH OR WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT)
CONFIGURATION OF ENTRANCE PANEL OF EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions

Definition of panel as external entrance panel

Definition of external panel (1)

as main or secondary entrance panel

Number of buildings in the estate

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2)

Number of times call tone is repeated

Press
Maximum time setting for conversation (seconds) , , ,
Select value

Time setting to answer call (seconds)

,

Range of values possible for the codes (2)

of the connection brackets/telephones
Press
Length of time electric lock is activated (seconds)

Auxiliary pushbutton on the telephone:

Time that relay 1 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening function: Unlimited number

Number of failed attemps to enter code allowed
Door-opening function:
Time (in minutes) that the feature will remain blocked
if the number of attempts allowed in position 11
has been exceeded

Pressing keys on the keypad: Do not activate

Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)

Door-opening code
Press

Door-opening code
Key in value 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

Door-opening code

Door-opening code Press

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code

(1) In installations with one external point of entry, leave the value E P. In installations with several external points of entry, select the value E P for
one of them and the value E S for the others.
(2) - Numbers from “Number assigned to the main entrance panel of the building (value selected in position 2 of the main entrance panel) + 001
to “Number assigned to the main entrance panel of the building (value selected in position 2 of the main entrance panel) + 999.”
For example: The main entrance panel is number 17. Then the values possible as codes for connections brackets/telephones are from
17001 to 17999. 259
Note: If you wish to use a different range of values, please consult the manufacturer.
CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL CONFIGURATION
To configure the concierge unit panel, a configuration menu is
available, with 11 positions. This menu is accessed from the keypad
of the concierge panel itself by keying in the MASTER code.
Use key (1) to move down the menu to the next position and key
(2) to move up to the previous position. The panel display will show
which menu position is selected at a given moment as well as the 1 2 3

value assigned to the parameter corresponding to this position.

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Note: The concierge panel leaves the factory with a pre-set MAS-
TER code (default MASTER code), which can be changed from with-
in the configuration menu itself (position 11). To prevent outside per-
sons from having access to the menu, we recommend that you
replace the default MASTER code by another MASTER code.

STEP-BY-STEP CONFIGURATION
Simultaneously press the keys (1) and (2). The concierge panel will
emit a confirmation tone.
Time setting:
Once this step has been performed, you have 30 seconds to carry
out the following step. Otherwise, you must begin again. 1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Enter the MASTER key:

If this is the first time that you have accessed the configuration menu,
enter the code 12345 (Default MASTER code). If it is not the first time,
enter the MASTER key which you have previously configured.
The concierge panel will emit a beep, the code is correct. The dis- 1

4
2

5
3

play will show the position 1 of the menu.

7 8 9

C 0

If the code is incorrect, the concierge unit panel will emit a beep MASTER code
indicating that an error has been made and the red led will flash.
Begin again at previous step.

Configure the different positions of the configuration menu in accor-

dance with the installation you are performing, as shown in the tables
on pages 261 to 263. These tables show how to change the values
of the different positions.
Time setting:
If 30 seconds expire without any key being pressed (since the pre-
vious key), you will automatically exit from the configuration menu. If
this happens, start the configuration again from the beginning.

260
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY WITH ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD
CONCIERGE PANEL CONFIGURATION

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions
Type of installation.
Standard installation or
installation with several points of entry

Not used for the installation

Not used for the installation Press

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2) Select value

Number of times call tone is repeated

(1)
Unanswered calls. Mode
Press

(2)
Operation. Mode

Range of values possible for the codes (3)

of the connection brackets/telephones

CONCIERGE code

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code
Press

(1) - Record of unanswered calls deactivated.

- Record of unanswered calls activated when concierge unit panel is activated. Key in value 1 2 3

- Record of unanswered calls always activated.

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

(2) – Normal mode.

– Dwellings only mode.

(3) Select the same value as that chosen in position 8 of the configuration menu Press
of the entrance panels with keypads in the installation.

261
HOUSING ESTATES CONTAINING SEVERAL BUILDINGS
CONCIERGE PANEL CONFIGURATION

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions
Type of installation.
Installation for estates with several buildings

Not used for the installation

Not used for the installation Press

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2) Select value

Number of times call tone is repeated

(1)
Unanswered calls. Mode
Press

(2)
Operation. Mode

Range of values possible for the codes

of the connection brackets/telephones

CONCIERGE code

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code
Press

(1) - Record of unanswered calls deactivated.

- Record of unanswered calls activated when concierge panel is activated. Key in value 1 2 3

- Record of unanswered calls always activated.

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

(2) – Normal mode.

– Dwellings only mode.
Press

262
 HOUSING ESTATES CONTAINING SEVERAL BUILDINGS WITHOUT ENTRANCE PANEL IN
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
CONCIERGE PANEL CONFIGURATION

Position Description Default Value to be chosen Change value

value of positions
Type of installation.
Installation for estates with several buildings
withou external entrance panel

Not used for the installation

Not used for the installation Press

Type of call tone (type 1 or type 2) Select value

Number of times call tone is repeated

(1)
Unanswered calls. Mode
Press

(2)
Operation. Mode

Range of values possible for the codes

of the connection brackets/telephones

CONCIERGE code

Revert to default values No Yes

MASTER code
Press

(1) - Record of unanswered calls deactivated.

- Record of unanswered calls activated when concierge panel is activated. Key in value 1 2 3

- Record of unanswered calls always activated.

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

(2) – Normal mode.

– Dwellings only mode.
Press

263
 PROGRAMMING THE DEVICES
7
OF THE HOUSE OR FLAT
GENERAL POINTS
Once the connections have been made, and once they have been configured, if necessary, the entrance panels with keypad, each
device of the installation should be programmed. The programming involves assigning a digital code to each telephone and con-
nection bracket of the installation, each digital code is different. This code is stored in the permanent memory so that the tele-
phone/connection bracket maintains the code even in the absence of power supply or when the installation is disconnected. This
allows you, for example, to program the devices in your workshop or office and then later to install the pre-programmed tele-
phones/connection brackets.
The programming of the devices is carried out from the main entrance panel, as the digital audio unit is the element responsable
for sending the digital code to the device. This code will depend on the pushbutton of the entrance panel to which the device is asso-
ciated (entrance panel with pushbuttons) or of the code entered in the keypad (entrance panel with keypad).

Digital code Digital code

Non-flash Non-flash
memory memory

Connection bracket

Telephone Monitor
in the dwelling in the dwelling

Digital code Digital code

J1 J1

19 19

J1 J2 J1 J2

BUS 15 V
BUS
BUS 15 V
BUS

9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3 9 10 111222 SC118 IN 7 D1 D2 D3

Audio unit Audio unit

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

WITH PUSHBUTTONS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Configure the panel as Configure the panel as

MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL the Main entrance panel MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL the Main entrance panel
1 2 3

4 5 6 1 2 3

7 8 9 4 5 6

C 0 7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

WITH KEYPAD WITH KEYPAD

264
Features:
During the programming of a telephone/connection bracket, the system does not allow any other device to intrude on the com-
munication. If the receiver of any other device is picked up, then intermittent tones will be heard. In video door entry systems, the
auto switch-on cannot be used from the monitors.

PIP... PIP...PIP
PIP... PIP...PIP

Main entrance panel

1 2 3 Programming Other dwellings
telephone/connections bracket
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

of dwelling 1

= Functions disabled

Installations with several points of entry

The panels installed at the other points of entry (secondary panels) are disabled, so that it is not possible to make calls to the
dwellings. In installations with pushbutton entrance panels, the red light on these panels will blink; in installations with keypad
entrance panels, the display of these panels will show the visitor how long he must wait before he can make a call.

Entrance panel
with pushbuttons

Secondary panels

Main entrance panel Time

Entrance panel blocked
1 2 3 Programming with keypad
telephone/connection bracket
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0 1 2 3

of dwelling 1
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

1 3
Secondary panels
= Functions disabled

Housing estates
In buildings with several points of entry, the panels installed in the other points of entry of such buildings (secondary panels) are
disabled, so that it is not possible to make calls to the dwellings. In installations with pushbutton entrance panels, the red light on
these panels will blink; in installations with keypad entrance panels, the display of these panels will show the visitor how long he
must wait before he can make a call.
From the external point of entry it is not possible to make a call to the dwellings of the building where the telephone/connection
bracket which is being programmed is located.

Building 1
Entrance panel
Secondary panels
with pushbuttons

Other buildings
and external points of entry

Building 1 Time
1 2 3 Main entrance panel blocked
Programming
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
1 2 3

telephone/connection bracket 4

7
5

8
6

of dwelling 1
C 0

1 3
Building 1
Entrance panel Secondary panels
with keypad

1 2 3

4 5 6

265
7 8 9

C 0

= Functions disabled Other buildings

and external points of entry
ASSIGNING CODES
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
In the entrance panel with pushbuttons, the digital code which is assigned to the telephone/connection bracket of the dwelling
during the programming process will depend on the number of the wire of the concentrator of calls to which the pushbutton of the
entrance panel corresponding to that dwelling is connected.
With this type of entrance panel, the digital code assigned to the telephone/connection bracket will be a number between 1 and
96 (see the connection instructions of the concentrator of calls on page 192).

Digital code
assigned:
1

Telephone in
15 V
BUS the dwelling
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code
COL
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9

BUS

Made in Spain
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16

Concentrator of calls
COL-000 Pushbutton of dwelling

Digital code
assigned:
16

Telephone in
15 V
BUS the dwelling
9 10 111222SC118 IN 7 D1D2 D3

Digital code
Made in Spain

101112131415 16
BUS

Made in Spain
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 78 cod. 9730030 9101112131415 16

Concentrator of calls
COL-000 Pushbutton of dwelling

266
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEYPAD
In the entrance panel with keypad, the digital code which is assigned to the telephone/connection bracket of the dwelling during
the programming process will depend on the number which is entered in the keypad of the entrance panel.

Digital code
assigned:
1

Telephone in
the dwelling

Digital code

BUS

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Digital code
assigned:
999

1 2 3

Telephone in
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
the dwelling

Digital code

BUS

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Although codes can be assigned without following any particular method at all, it is strongly recommended that you decide which
codes you want to assign to the telephones/connection brackets of the installation. Below are several possible methods that may
help you:

267
ASSIGNING CODES WITH RESPECT TO THE SITUATION OF THE DWELLING IN THE BUILDING
This method consists in assigning to each dwelling a code which is composed, for example, of the number of the floor where the
dwelling is located and of the door number of the dwelling.
This method of assigning codes can be used in the following cases:

BUILDINGS WITH UP TO 9 FLOORS AND UP TO 99 FLATS PER FLOOR

In this case, codes could be assigned to the dwellings on each floor as indicated in the following table.
Note:
Make sure that during the entrance panel configuration process (see chapter 6) you have selected the value ‘3’ in position 8 of
the configuration menu. You will then be able to assign any number between 1 and 999 as a code.

Floor Codes Floor Codes Floor Codes

Ground floor 1 -99 4 401 - 499 7 701 - 799

1 101 - 199 5 501 - 599 8 801 - 899

2 201 - 299 6 601 - 699 9 901 - 999

3 301 - 399

Here are a few examples of codes assigned using this method:

Floor Door Codes Floor Door Codes

Ground floor 1 1 6 35 635

1 1 101 9 50 950

4 10 410

BUILDINGS WITH UP TO 49 FLOORS AND UP TO 19 FLATS PER FLOOR

In this case, codes could be assigned to the dwellings on each floor as indicated in the following table.
Note:
Make sure that during the entrance panel configuration process (see chapter 6) you have selected the value ‘4’ in position 8 of
the configuration menu. You will then be able to assign any number between 1 and 4919 as a code.

Floor Codes Floor Codes Floor Codes Floor Codes Floor Codes

Ground floor 1 -19 10 1001 -1019 20 2001 - 2019 30 3001 - 3019 40 4001 - 4019

1 101 - 119 11 1101 - 1119 21 2101 - 2119 31 3101 - 3119 41 4101 - 4119

2 201 - 219 12 1201 - 1219 22 2201 - 2219 32 3201 - 3219 42 4201 - 4219

3 301 - 319 13 1301 - 1319 23 2301 - 2319 33 3301 - 3319 43 4301 - 4319

4 401 - 419 14 1401 - 1419 24 2401 - 2419 34 3401 - 3419 44 4401 - 4419

5 501 -519 15 1501 - 1519 25 2501 - 2519 35 3501 - 3519 45 4501 - 4519

6 601 - 619 16 1601 - 1619 26 2601 - 2619 36 3601 - 3619 46 4601 - 4619

7 701 - 719 17 1701 - 1719 27 2701 - 2719 37 3701 - 3719 47 4701 - 4719

8 801 - 819 18 1801 - 1819 28 2801 - 2819 38 3801 - 3819 48 4801 - 4819

9 901 - 919 19 1901 - 1919 29 2901 - 2919 39 3901 - 3919 49 4901 - 4919

268
 Here are a few examples of codes assigned using this method:

Floor Door Codes Floor Door Codes

Ground floor 1 1 20 1 2001

1 1 101 35 15 3515

4 10 410 49 19 4919

ASSIGNING CONSECUTIVE CODES

This methods consists in assigning consecutive numbers to each of the dwellings, beginning, for example, with the dwellings of the
ground floor and ending with those of the top floor.
You can use the following method of assigning codes in any building, regardless of the number of floors and of the number of
dwellings per floor.
Note:
Make sure that during the entrance panel configuration process (see chapter 6) you have selected the value ‘3’ in position 8 of
the configuration menu. You will then be able to assign any number between 1 and 999 as a code.

Here are a few examples of codes assigned using this method:

Floor Door Codes Floor Door Codes

Ground floor 1 1 1 2 4

Ground floor 2 2 2 1 5

1 1 3

269
PROGRAMMING THE TELEPHONES
Important:
If there are several telephones in the same dwelling, program them all one by one with the same pushbutton of the entrance panel
(in installations with a pushbutton entrance panel) or with the same code (in installations with a keypad entrance panel) all the tele-

BEFORE PROGRAMMING
The telephone has a programming switch (PROG). This
switch and the lock release button are the elements which are Lock release button
involved in the programming process.

PROG
Programming switch
D1 D2 ON OFF

Connect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
handset before starting the programming process. Check that
the PROG switch is in the ON position (to the left). In this posi-
PIIIIIP
tion a continuous tone will be heard from the handset. PROG

ON

STEP-BY-STEP PROGRAMMING
Turn the PROG switch to OFF (to the right). In this position no
tone will be heard from the handset.
PROG

OFF

Turn the PROG switch back to the ON position (to the left).
The continuous tone will be heard again from the handset.
Time setting: PIIIIIP
PROG
You now have 60 seconds to carry out the next step. Once
this time has elapsed, begin the programming process from the ON
previous step.

270
 Push the lock release button of the telephone. The audio
between the telephone and the main entrance panel of the
installation will be activated. Now the telephone is prepared to
receive the digital code from the entrance panel.
Time setting:
In the case of an entrance panel with pushbuttons, once this
step has been performed, you have 60 to carry out the follow-
ing step. In the case of an entrance panel with keypad, you will
have a period of 30, 60, 90 or 120 seconds, depending on
the value selected in the parameter “Maximum time setting for
conversation” during the process of configuring the entrance
panel.
The system warns when the time limit is ending by a series of
beeps, making it possible to extend the time from the telephone
by pressing the lock release button again.

With entrance panel with pushbuttons, press the pushbutton

that you want to assign to the telephone on the entrance panel.
The audio unit will then send the digital code corresponding to
the wire of the concentrator of calls to which the pushbutton is
connected. The entrance panel will emit a confirmation tone to
show that the telephone has been correctly programmed.
TELEPHONE PROGRAMMED
Check the operation of the telephone (reception of call,
audio and door opening). If the telephone does not function
correctly, repeat the programming process.

With an entrance panel with keypad, enter the code which

you wish to assign to the telephone and press the call key (1).
The audio unit will then send the digital code corresponding
to the number entered. The entrance panel will emit a confir-
mation tone to show that the telephone has been correctly pro-
grammed.
Check the operation of the telephone (reception of call,
audio and door opening). If the telephone does not function
correctly, repeat the programming process.
1 2 3 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0
1
Features:
Each number which is keyed in using the keypad will appear Main entrance panel Enter code and
Programming the call keyl
in the entrance panel display. telephone with code 12

If, before pressing the call key, you notice any error in the
code entered, press the C key and enter the code again.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

TELEPHONE
PROGRAMMED

271
PROGRAMMING THE CONNECTION BRACKETS
Important:
If there are several monitors in the same dwelling, program them all one by one with the same pushbutton of the entrance panel
(in installations with a pushbutton entrance panel) or with the same code (in installations with a keypad entrance panel) all the con-
nection brackets.

BEFORE PROGRAMMING
The connection bracket has a programming switch (PROG). Programming switch
CC1
This switch and the lock release button on the monitor are the
elements which are involved in the programming process for
the connection bracket. The same monitor can be used for the A B J1

programming of all the connection brackets of the installation PROG

as the code is stored in the memory of the connection bracket. ON OFF

R1

Lock release button

V1
M

Connection bracket Monitor

Before starting the programming process connect the con-

nector of the monitor on the connection bracket and the cord
between the base of the monitor and the handset.

Check that the PROG switch of the connection bracket is in

the ON position (to the left). In this position a continuous tone PROG

will be heard from the handset of the monitor. PIIIIIP

ON

STEP-BY-STEP PROGRAMMING
Turn the PROG switch to OFF (to the right). In this position no PROG

tone will be heard from the handset of the monitor.

OFF

272
 Turn the PROG switch back to the ON position (to the left).
The continuous tone will be heard again from the handset. PROG

Time setting:
ON PIIIIIP
You now have 60 seconds to carry out the next step. Once
this time has elapsed, begin the programming process from the
previous step.

Push the lock release button of the monitor. The audio

between the monitor and the main entrance panel of the instal-
lation will be activated. Now the connection bracket is pre-
pared to receive the digital code from the entrance panel.
Time setting:
In the case of an entrance panel with pushbuttons, once this
step has been performed, you have 60 to carry out the follow-
ing step. In the case of an entrance panel with keypad, you will
have a period of 30, 60, 90 or 120 seconds, depending on
the value selected in the parameter “Maximum time setting for
conversation” during the process of configuring the entrance
panel.
The system warns when the time limit is ending by a series of
beeps, making it possible to extend the time from the monitor
by pressing the lock release button again.

With entrance panel with pushbuttons, press the pushbutton

that you want to assign to the connection bracket on the
entrance panel. The audio unit will then send the digital code
corresponding to the wire of the concentrator of calls to which
the pushbutton is connected. The entrance panel will emit a
confirmation tone to show that the connection bracket has been
correctly programmed.
Check the operation of the monitor (reception of call, audio CONNECTION BRACKET
PROGRAMMED
and door opening). If the monitor does not function correctly,
repeat the programming process.

273
 With an entrance panel with keypad, enter the code which
you wish to assign to the connection bracket and press the call
key (1). The audio unit will then send the digital code
corresponding to the number entered. The entrance panel will
emit a confirmation tone to show that the connection bracket
has been correctly programmed.
Check the operation of the monitor (reception of call, audio 1 2 3 1 2 3

and door opening). If the monitor does not function correctly,

4 5 6 4 5 6

C
8

0
9 7

C
8

0
9
1
repeat the programming process.
Main entrance panel Enter code and
Features: Programming the call key
connection bracket with
Each number which is keyed in using the keypad will appear code 12
in the entrance panel display.
If, before pressing the call key, you notice any error in the
code entered, press the delete key and enter the code again.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

CONNECTION BRACKET
PROGRAMMED

274
 DIAGRAMS
8
GENERAL POINTS CONCERNING INSTALLATIONS
POWER SUPPLY UNITS
Remember to protect the power supply units of the installation by complying with regulations in force governing electrical insta-
llations (keep away from strong magnetic fields and high temperature locations, ensure correct fusing, etc).
Choose a dry, well-ventilated place away from direct sources of heat. Avoid blocking the ventilation slots.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE VIDEO SIGNAL

In video door entry systems, it is recommended that the video signal be distributed using tap-offs and splitters.
If the installation does not permit distribution to be made with tap-offs, you can join the connection brackets in cascade.

Next tap-off Next monitor

Connection bracket DIV-024 Connection bracket

dwelling 2 dwelling 2

Connection bracket Connection bracket

dwelling 1 dwelling 1

DISTRIBUTION WITH TAP-OFFS DISTRIBUTION IN SERIAL

WIRING
To ensure the correct functioning of the installation, it is essential that the cable used be of the correct section and characteristics.

SECTIONS
One factor which directly affects the section of the cable to be used is the distance between the different elements of the installa-
tion which are to be connected.
In all the diagrams in this chapter, a table shows the smallest sections that can be used, depending on the distance. In any
case, it is recommended that no section greater than 2.5 mm2 be used for the connections corresponding to the communication BUS
(terminals D1, D2, D3, D4, D5).
For distances different to those shown in the diagrams, consult the manufacturer.

275
CHARACTERISTICS OF COAXIAL CABLE
In electronic video door entry installations where the video signal is transmitted via coaxial cable, use coaxial cable with a cha-
racteristic impedance of 75 ohm to obtain a high-quality video signal and to ensure correct functioning.
In addition, remember that the coaxial cable line of the installation should be charged with 75 ohm. The tap-offs and the con-
nection brackets include a 75 ohm end-of-line resistor.

CHARACTERISTICS OF TWISTED PAIR

In electronic video door entry installations where the video signal is transmitted via twisted pair, use twisted pair of category 5e
or of equivalent characteristics to obtain a high-quality video signal and to ensure correct functioning.
In addition, remember that the twisted pair line of the installation should be charged with 120 ohm. The tap-offs and the connec-
tion brackets include a 120 ohm end-of-line resistor.

276
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS.
ELECTRONIC CALL. DIGITAL SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with a maximum of 96 tele-
phones. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the
manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.

Note: The telephone of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number of the
concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2
2 2

TED-001 TED-001
LAST FLOOR

2
2 2
2 2

TED-001 TED-001
GROUND FLOOR

ALC-070 (230 V )
2

230V~ ++
POINT OF ENTRY
MAN-470 SECTION TABLE
2
+ AWG
MPD-004
Up to 100 meters
+
2 COL-000 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+ Up to 25 meters
CMO-004
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
ABR-011
(1)
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
277
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING.
DIGITAL SYSTEM

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Telephones
in dwellings

J1
Point of entry
Main entrance panel

ALC-070
GRF-208

19
J1 J2

230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3

Earth 230 V

COL-000
IN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030

8 7

6 5

4 3

ABR-011
2 1

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

Consulte página 287.

278
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, with a maximum of 96 tele-
phones. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manu-
facturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel. See
Chapter 7.
Note: The telephone of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number of the con-
centrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2
2 2

TED-001 TED-001
LAST FLOOR

SECTION TABLE
2
AWG
2 2
Up to 100 metres
2 2
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

TED-001 TED-001
GROUND FLOOR

2 ALC-070 (230 V )
POINT OF POINT OF NEXT
ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

2 2

2 2 2
2 2
MAN-470 MAN-470
+ +
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +
ABR-011 COL-000 COL-000 ABR-011
(1) + + (1)
CMO-004 CMO-004

279
 INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Telephones
in dwellings

J1 J1
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel

ALC-070

GRF-208 GRF-208

19 19
J1 J2 J1 J2
230V~ ++

_ + IN _ + IN Next
9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 7 D1 D2 D3 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 7 D1 D2 D3 point of entry
Earth
230 V

COL-000 COL-000
IN IN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16

cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030

8 7 8 7

6 5 6 5

4 3 4 3

2 1 2 1

ABR-011 ABR-011

Note: Make the same connections

at all the secondary entrance panels

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

Consulte página 287.

280
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 16 DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE)
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital door entry installations in housing estates with 16 detached houses, each building has a
point of entry, and one external point of entry or gate shared by the 16 detached houses.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the detached houses
In order for communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry and,
at the same time, to establish communication with another dwelling from the entrance panel of this dwelling, one estate identifying
accessory, model AIB-000, is used per dwelling. Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-000 accessories, beginning with the
O
number '1'.

Determining the main entrance panel

Both the entrance panel at the external point of entry and the entrance panel of each detached house are configured as main
BS
panels (J1 jumper inserted).

Programming the telephones of each detached house

The telephone in the detached house is programmed from the entrance panel of the house in question. See Chapter 7.
Note: The pushbutton of each entrance panel is connected to the '1' terminal of the AIB-000 accessory. Consequently, each
telephone will be programmed with the digital code '1'.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
O

DETACHED HOUSE 1 DETACHED HOUSE 2 DETACHED HOUSE 16

LE

2 TED-001 2 TED-001 2 TED-001

ALC-041 (230 V ) ALC-041 (230 V ) ALC-041 (230 V )

TE
230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2

2 KAS-47001 2 KAS-47001 2 KAS-47001

+ + +
2 AIB-000 2 AIB-000 2 AIB-000

ABR-015 ABR-015 ABR-015

(1) (1) (1)
2 2 2

2
ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++

2 MAN-470 SECTION TABLE

+ AWG
MPD-008 Up to 100 metres
2 +
COL-000 x 2 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+ Up to 25 metres
CMO-008
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

ABR-011 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

(1)

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
281
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 16 DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

TE
Detached houses
J1
External point of entry
Main entrance panel
LE
ALC-070
GRF-208
19
J1 J2
230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
O
COL-000
IN IN
BS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

9 10 11121314 15 16 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030
DETACHED HOUSE 16
DETACHED HOUSE 15
DETACHED HOUSE 14
DETACHED HOUSE 13
1234 5 6 7 8
DETACHED HOUSE 12
DETACHED HOUSE 11
DETACHED HOUSE 10
DETACHED HOUSE 9
O
DETACHED HOUSE 8
DETACHED HOUSE 7
DETACHED HOUSE 6
DETACHED HOUSE 5

DIGITAL SYSTEM
DETACHED HOUSE 4
DETACHED HOUSE 3

ENTRY (GATE)
DETACHED HOUSE 2
DETACHED HOUSE 1
ABR-011

282
 283
DETACHED HOUSE 1 DETACHED HOUSE 2 DETACHED HOUSE 16
TE
TED-001 TED-001 TED-001
D1 D2
LE
ALC-041 ALC-041
J1 J1
230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2
230 V KAS-47001 230 V KAS-47001
+ +
Point of entry AIB-000 AIB-000
Main entrance panel
J1
O
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW1

SW1
GRF-200
ABR-015 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ABR-015 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ALC-041
19
J1 J2 Detail of number Detail of number
BS
assigning of the AIB-000 assigning of the AIB-000
(number 2) (number 16)
230 V 1 2 + 9 10 1222SC1 11 87654321 7 D1D2 D3
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE DETACHED HOUSES

230 V
AIB-000
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1

OUT
O
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
DETACHED HOUSE 1 OUT
AIB-000

SW1
cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
ABR-015

SW1
Note: Make the same connections 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
at all the detached houses
Detail of number
assigning of the AIB-000
(number 1)
External point of entry
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 8 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE)
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital door entry installations in housing estates with 8 semi-detached houses, each building has
a point of entry, and one external point of entry or gate shared by the 8 semi-detached houses.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the semi-detached houses
In order for communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry and,
at the same time, to establish communication with another dwelling from the entrance panel of this dwelling, one estate identifying
accessory, model AIB-000, is used per dwelling. Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-000 accessories, beginning with the
O
number '1'.

Determining the main entrance panel

Both the entrance panel at the external point of entry and the entrance panel of each semi-detached house are configured as
main panels (J1 jumper inserted).
BS

Programming the telephones of each semi-detached house

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the semi-detached house. See Chapter 7.

Note: The two pushbuttons of each entrance panel are connected to terminals '1' and '2' of the AIB-000 accessory respecti-
vely. Hence, the telephones are programmed with the digital code '1' or '2'.
O

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 1 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 2 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 8
LE
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 2 TED-001 TED-001 2 TED-001 TED-001 2 TED-001

ALC-041 (230 V ) ALC-041 (230 V ) ALC-041 (230 V )

TE

230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2

2 KAD-47001 2 KAD-47001 2 KAD-47001

+ + +
2 AIB-000 2 AIB-000 2 AIB-000

ABR-015 ABR-015 ABR-015

(1) (1) (1)
2 2 2

2
ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++

2 SECTION TABLE
MAN-470 AWG
+ Up to 100 metres
2 MPD-008
+ 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COL-000 x 2 Up to 25 metres
+
CMO-008 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ABR-011 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
(1)

284 (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 8 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

285
Semi-detached houses
TE
J1
External point of entry
Main entrance panel
ALC-070
LE
GRF-208
19
J1 J2
230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
O
COL-000
IN IN
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16

cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030
BS
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 8 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 7
1
1234 5 6 7 8
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 6 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 5
1
O
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 4
1
DIGITAL SYSTEM 2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 3 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 2 1

ENTRY (GATE)
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 1 1 ABR-011
 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 1 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 2 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 8
TE
TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001
D1 D2 D1 D2
LE
ALC-041 ALC-041
J1 J1
230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2
230 V KAD-47001 230 V KAD-47001
+ +
Point of entry AIB-000 AIB-000
Main entrance panel
J1
O
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW1

SW1
GRF-200
ABR-015 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ABR-015 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ALC-041
BS
19
J1 J2 Detail of number Detail of number
assigning of the AIB-000 assigning of the AIB-000
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES

(number 2) (number 8)
230 V 1 2 + 9 10 1222SC111 87654321 7 D1D2 D3
230 V
AIB-000
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1
O

OUT
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
2 1 OUT
AIB-000

SW1
cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
ABR-015

SW1
Note: Make the same connections 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
at all the semi-detached houses
Detail of number
assigning of the AIB-000
(number 1)
External point of entry

286
CONNECTION OF THE TELEPHONES OF THE DWELLINGS IN BUILDINGS
DIGITAL SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

TED-001 TED-001

D1 D2 D1 D2

LAST FLOOR

TED-001 TED-001

D1 D2 D1 D2

GROUND FLOOR

Entrance panel

287
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS. ELECTRO-
NIC CALL. DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with a maximum of
96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices greater than 50, where all the dis-
tribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the num-
ber of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030
2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030

GROUND FLOOR

ALC-070 (230 V ) COAX

2 2

230V~ ++ POINT OF ENTRY

MDN-471
MDN-472
+ SECTION TABLE
2
MPD-004 AWG
+
Up to 100 metres
COL-000
2 + 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-006
COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ABR-011 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1)
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
288
 289
Dwellings
75 Ohm Point of entry
Main entrance panel
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White 19 +_

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

TCB-011
TCB-011
J1 TCB-021
ALC-070 cod. 9610009
19
J1 J2
Red
GRF-208
_ + IN
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING.

230V~ ++
9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
COL-000
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

IN
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1

Consulte página 302.

ABR-011
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, with three separate risers
or staircases, with a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices gre-
ater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2 2
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR

2 2 2
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030

GROUND FLOOR

2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2

DIV-124

ALC-070 (230 V )

COAX COAX
2 2
230V~ ++
POINT OF ENTRY
MDN-471 SECTION TABLE
MDN-472 AWG
+
MPD-004 Up to 100 metres
2 + 1 mm 2
1.1 mm 17
COL-000
+ COAXIAL 75 Ω
CMO-006 Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ABR-011 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1)
290 (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
 291
Dwellings
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS.

DIV-124
P1

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS IN EACH COLUMN

M 15V M
Point of entry
Main entrance panel
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White 19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-011
J1 TCB-021
ALC-070 cod. 9610009
19
J1 J2
Red
GRF-208
_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

COL-000
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1

Consulte página 302.

ABR-011
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, each equipped with
the video system, with a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices
greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
Configure the entrance panel at one of the entry points as the main panel (J1 jumper inserted). This panel will be the one which
becomes active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor in the dwelling. The panels at the other points of entry
must be configured as secondary panels (with the J1 jumper removed from their audio units).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been designated as the main panel.
See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030
2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030

GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )

2 2
COAX POINT OF NEXT
230 V V
POINT OF 230V~ ++
ENTRY 2
230 V V

POINT OF ENTRY
230 V V 230V~ ++

ENTRY 1 2 2
2 2
COAX COAX

2 2

2 MDN-471 2 MDN-471
MDN-472 MDN-472
+ +
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +
COL-000 COL-000 SECTION TABLE
ABR-011 + ABR-011 +
CMO-006 CMO-006 AWG
(1) (1)
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
292
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
 293
Dwellings
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

75 Ohm Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2

Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 White 19
+
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
19
230 V V~ 230 V V~
White Red 19
19 Next
+_ +_

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

TCB-011 230 V point of entry
230 V TCB-011
TCB-011
White TCB-011
TCB-011
TCB-011
TCB-021
TCB-021
White 19
ALC-070
+ J1 J1
19 19
J1 J2 J1 J2
Red Red
_ GRF-208 GRF-208
19 _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3 230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Red
Earth 230 V
COL-000 COL-000
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

IN IN
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16

cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030
8 7 8 7
6 5 6 5
4 3 4 3
2 1 2 1
ABR-011 ABR-011

Consulte página 302.

Note: Make the same connections
at all the secondary entrance panels
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with two points of entry; one equipped with a video
system, the other with an audio system, with a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with
a number of devices greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
Configure the entrance panel with the video system as the main panel (J1 jumper inserted).
This panel will be the one which becomes active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor in the dwelling. The
panel at the other point of entry must be configured as the secondary panel (with the J1 jumper removed from its audio units).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been designated as the main panel.
See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030
2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2
SECTION TABLE
2 2 2 2
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres
MVB-002 MVB-002 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
SCM-030 SCM-030
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040
(230 V )
2 COAX 2 ALC-070 (230 V )

230 V V
POINT
OF ENTRY 1
230V~ ++ POINT
OF ENTRY 2
2 2 2
2 MAN-470
MDN-471 +
MDN-472 MPD-004
2 2 +
+
MPD-004 COL-000
+ +
COL-000 CMO-004
+
CMO-006
ABR-011 ABR-011
294 (1) (1)
 295
Dwellings
75 Ohm Point of entry 1
Main entrance panel
ALM-040
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:

V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
230 V V~ Point of entry 2
White Secondary entrance panel

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

19
+_ TCB-011
230 V TCB-011
TCB-011
TCB-021
J1
ALC-070
White 19
J1 GRF-208
+
19 19
J1 J2 J1 J2
Red
GRF-208 230V~ ++
19 _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Red
Earth
230 V
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO.

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

COL-000 COL-000
IN
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
8 7 cod. 9730030
8 7
6 5 6 5
4 3 4 3
2 1 2 1

Consulte página 302.

ABR-011
ABR-011
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 16 DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 16 detached houses, with one
entry with video system in each house, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 16 houses. This gate has an audio system
(but not a camera).

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the detached houses
In order for communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry and,
at the same time, to establish communication with another dwelling from the entrance panel of this dwelling, one estate identifying
O
accessory, model AIB-000, is used per dwelling, Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-000 accessories, beginning with the
number '1'.

Determining the main entrance panel

Both the entrance panel at the external point of entry and the entrance panel of each detached house are configured as main
BS

panels (J1 jumper inserted).

Programming the connection brackets of each detached house

The connections bracket in each detached house is programmed from the entrance panel of this detached house. See Chapter 7.

Note: The pushbutton of each entrance panel is connected to terminal '1' of the AIB-000 accessory, so each connections brac-
ket is programmed with the digital code '1'.
O

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
LE
DETACHED HOUSE 1 DETACHED HOUSE 2 DETACHED HOUSE 16

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
COAX COAX COAX
TE
ALC-041 2 2 ALC-041 2 2 ALC-041 2 2
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2

KVS-47101 KVS-47101 KVS-47101

2 KVS-47201 2 KVS-47201 2 KVS-47201
+ + +
2 AIB-000 2 AIB-000 2 AIB-000
2 2 2

ABR-015 ABR-015 ABR-015

(1) (1) (1)
2 2 2

2
ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++

2
MAN-470 SECTION TABLE
+
2 MPD-008 AWG
+ Up to 100 metres
COL-000 x 2
+ 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-008 COAXIAL 75 Ω
ABR-011 Up to 25 metres
(1) 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

296 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

 297
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 16 DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

Detached houses
TE
J1
External point of entry
Main entrance panel
ALC-070
LE
GRF-208
19
J1 J2
230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
O
COL-000
IN IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030

BS
DETACHED HOUSE 16
DETACHED HOUSE 15
DETACHED HOUSE 14
DETACHED HOUSE 13
1234 5 6 7 8
DETACHED HOUSE 12
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

DETACHED HOUSE 11
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

DETACHED HOUSE 10
DETACHED HOUSE 9
O
DETACHED HOUSE 8
DETACHED HOUSE 7
DETACHED HOUSE 6
DETACHED HOUSE 5
DETACHED HOUSE 4
DETACHED HOUSE 3
DETACHED HOUSE 2
DETACHED HOUSE 1
ABR-011
 DETACHED HOUSE 1 DETACHED HOUSE 2 DETACHED HOUSE 16
CC1
TE
A J1
A B J1
R1
R1 MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
V1 SCM-030 SCM-030
M
M
V1
LE
ALC-041 ALC-041
24
25 J1 J1
26
27
S5 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2
S2
D1 D2 230 V 230 V
KVS-47101 KVS-47101
KVS-47201 KVS-47201
+ +
AIB-000 AIB-000
SCM-030
75 Ohm
O
Point of entry
ALC-041 Main entrance panel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW1

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 ABR-015 ABR-015
BS
Detail of number Detail of number
White assigning of the AIB-000 assigning of the AIB-000
230 V 1 2 19 +_ (number 2) (number 16)
TCB-011
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE DETACHED HOUSES

230 V
cod. 9610009
J1
White 19
19
+
Red J1 J2
GRF-200
+ 9 10
O
19
1222SC111 87654321 7 D1D2 D3
Red
AIB-000
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1

OUT
DETACHED HOUSE 1 D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000

SW1
cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
ABR-015 Detail of number

SW1
Note: Make the same connections 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 assigning of the AIB-000
at all the detached houses (number 1) External point of entry

298
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 8 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 8 semi-detached houses, with
one entry with video system in each house, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 8 houses.
This gate has an audio system (but not a camera).

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the semi-detached houses
In order for communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry and,
at the same time, to establish communication with another dwelling from the entrance panel of this dwelling, one estate identifying
accessory, model AIB-000, is used per dwelling. Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-000 accessories, beginning with the
O

number '1'.

Determining the main entrance panel

Both the entrance panel at the external point of entry and the entrance panel of each semi-detached house are configured as main
BS

panels (J1 jumper inserted).

Programming the connection brackets of each semi-detached house

The connections bracket in each semi-detached house is programmed from the entrance panel of this semi-detached house. See
Chapter 7.
Note: The two pushbuttons of each entrance panel are connected to terminals '1' and '2' of the AIB-000 accessory respectively.
Hence, the connection brackets are programmed with the digital code '1' or '2'.
O

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
LE
SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 1 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 2 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 8

2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
TE
COAX COAX COAX
ALC-041 2 2 ALC-041 2 2 ALC-041 2 2
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2

KVD-47101 KVD-47101 KVD-47101

2 KVD-47201 2 KVD-47201 2 KVD-47201
2 + 2 + 2 +
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
2 2 2

ABR-015 ABR-015 ABR-015

(1) (1) (1)
2 2 2

2
ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++

2 SECTION TABLE
MAN-470 AWG
+ Up to 100 metres
2 MPD-008
2
+ 1 mm 1.1 mm 17
COL-000 x 2 COAXIAL 75 Ω
+
CMO-008 Up to 25 metres

ABR-011 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
(1) 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY 299
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 8 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

Semi-detached houses
TE
J1
External point of entry
Main entrance panel
LE
ALC-070
GRF-208
19
J1 J2
230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
O
COL-000
IN IN
BS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030

2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 8 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 7
1
1234 5 6 7 8
2 SEMI-DETACHED 1
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

HOUSE 6
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 5
1
O
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 4
1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 3 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 2 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 1 1 ABR-011

300
 301
SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 1 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 2 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 8
CC1 CC1
A J1 A J1
TE
A B J1 A B J1
MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002
R1
R1 R1
R1 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
V1 V1
M M
M M
V1 V1
24 24
ALC-041 ALC-041
LE
25 25
26 26
27 27
J1 J1
S5 S5
S2 S2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2
D1 D2 D1 D2
230 V 230 V
KVD-47101 KVD-47101
KVD-47201 KVD-47201
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030 AIB-000 AIB-000
O
ALC-041 Point of entry 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
75 Ohm

SW1
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 ABR-015 ABR-015
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES
BS
Detail of number Detail of number
White 19
assigning of the AIB-000 assigning of the AIB-000
230 V 1 2
+_ (number 2) (number 8)
TCB-011
230 V
White 19
J1
+
19
Red J1 J2
GRF-200
19
Red + 9 10 12 22SC111 7 D1D2 D3
O
87654321
AIB-000
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1

OUT
2 1 D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V
OUT
1 2 3 4
AIB-000

SW1
cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Detail of number
ABR-015

SW1
Note: Make the same connections 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
assigning of the AIB-000
at all the semi-detached houses (number 1) External point of entry
 DIV-024
CONNECTION OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS OF THE DWELLINGS IN

B J1 B J1
M M
75 Ohm
V1 V1 M
R1 M R1 M
M M
V1 V1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2
SCM-030 SCM-030
LAST FLOOR
DIV-024
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS

B J1 B J1 M M
M 75 Ohm
V1 V1
R1 M R1 M Extract
M M resistence 75 Ohm
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

V1 V1
CONNECTION
BRACKETS
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2
SCM-030 SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR

BUILDINGS

302
Entrance panel
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS. ELECTRO-
NIC CALL. DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with a maximum of 96
devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices greater than 50, where all the distribution
will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
DIV-034
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED
SCM-040 SCM-040 PAIR
2 2
LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
DIV-034
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-040 SCM-040

GROUND FLOOR

TWISTED
ALC-070 (230 V ) PAIR
2 2

230V~ ++
POINT OF ENTRY
MDN-474
2 MDN-475 SECTION TABLE
+ AWG
MPD-004
+ Up to 100 metres
2 COL-000 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+
CMO-006 UTP CAT 5E
Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ABR-011 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1)
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
303
 Dwellings
220 Ohm Point of entry
Main entrance panel
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

19
19 J1J 1J 1
J1 TCB-040
TCB-050
ALC-070
GRF-108
cod. 9610009
19
J1 J2
GRF-208
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

IN
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1

Consult page 317.

ABR-011

304
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry with three separate risers
or staircases, with a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices gre-
ater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m <50m <50m <50m <50m <50m

DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED + + TWISTED + + TWISTED
SCM-040 SCM-040 PAIR SCM-040 SCM-040 PAIR SCM-040 SCM-040 PAIR
2 2 2 2 2 2
LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m <50m <50m <50m <50m

DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040

GROUND FLOOR
TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR
2 2 2 2 2 2

DIV-134
DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

2
ALC-070 (230 V )

2 2 TWISTED PAIR
230V~ ++
POINT OF ENTRY
MDN-474
2 MDN-475 SECTION TABLE
+ AWG
MPD-004
+ Up to 100 metres
2 COL-000 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+
CMO-006 UTP CAT 5E
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ABR-011 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 305
(1)
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS

Dwellings

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS IN EACH COLUMN

220 Ohm Point of entry DIV-134
Main entrance panel DIV-134
cod.9730016
12V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
19
19 J1J 1J 1
J1 TCB-040
TCB-050
ALC-070
GRF-108
cod. 9610009
19
J1 J2
GRF-208
230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth 230 V
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

IN
COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1

Consult page 317.

ABR-011

306
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations with in buildings with several points of entry, each equipped
with the video system, with a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devi-
ces greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
Configure the entrance panel at one of the entry points as the main panel (J1 jumper inserted). This panel will be the one which
becomes active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor in the dwelling. The panels at the other points of entry
must be configured as secondary panels (with the J1 jumper removed from their audio units).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been designated as the main panel.
See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
DIV-034
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED
SCM-040 SCM-040 PAIR
2 2
LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
DIV-034
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-040 SCM-040

GROUND FLOOR
ALM-040 ALC-070
TWISTED (230 V ) (230 V )
PAIR
2 2
++
NEXT POINT
230 V V 230V~ ++ 230V~

1 POINT OF
ENTRY 2 OF ENTRY
2 2
POINT OF
ENTRY 1 TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR
2 2

MDN-474
2 MDN-475 2
+
MPD-004
+ MDN-474
COL-000 MDN-475
SECTION TABLE
+ +
CMO-006 MPD-004 AWG
ABR-011 ABR-011 + Up to 100 metres
(1) (1) COL-000
+ 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-006 UTP CAT 5E
Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 307
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

 Dwellings
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

220 Ohm Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2

Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
Next
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
entrance panel

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

19 19
19 J1J 1J 1 TCB-040 19 J1J 1J 1 TCB-040
TCB-050 TCB-050
GRF-108
J1
cod. 9610009
ALM-040 ALC-070
cod. 9610009
J1
19 19
J1 J2 230 V V~ 230V~ ++ J1 J2
GRF-208 GRF-208
_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3 230 V Earth 230 V _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

COL-000 COL-000
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

IN IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030
8 7 8 7
6 5 6 5
4 3 4 3
2 1 2 1
ABR-011 ABR-011
Note: Make the same connections
at all the secondary entrance panels

Consult page 317.

308
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with two points of entry; one equipped with a video
system, the other with an audio system, with a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with
a number of devices greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
Configure the entrance panel with the video system as the main panel (J1 jumper inserted). This panel will be the one which beco-
mes active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor in the dwelling. The panel at the other point of entry must
be configured as the secondary panel (with the J1 jumper removed from its audio units).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket in each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been designated as the main panel.
See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
DIV-034
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED
SCM-040 SCM-040 PAIR
2 2
LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m SECTION TABLE

DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

AWG
2 Up to 100 metres
DIV-034
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
UTP CAT 5E
2 2 2 2
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-040 SCM-040

GROUND FLOOR
ALM-040 ALC-070
TWISTED (230 V ) (230 V )
PAIR
2 2
230 V V 230V~ ++

1
2 POINT OF
POINT OF ENTRY 2
ENTRY 1 2
2 MAN-470
+
MDN-474 MPD-004
2 MDN-475 2 +
+ COL-000
MPD-004 +
+ CMO-004
COL-000
+
CMO-006
ABR-011
(1)
ABR-011
(1)
309
 Dwellings
220 Ohm Point of entry 1
Main entrance panel
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

Point of entry 2
ALM-040 ALC-070 Secondary entrance panel

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

19
19 J1J1J 1J 1 J1
TCB-040
TCB-050
GRF-108 GRF-108
cod. 9610009 cod. 9610009
19 230 V V~ 230V~ ++ 19
J1 J2 J1 J2
GRF-208 GRF-208
_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3 230 V Earth
230 V _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

COL-000 COL-000
IN IN
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16

cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030
8 7 8 7
6 5 6 5
4 3 4 3
2 1 2 1
ABR-011 ABR-011

Consult page 317.

310
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 16 DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 16 detached houses, with one
entry with video system in each house, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 16 houses. This gate has an audio system
(but not a camera).

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the detached houses
In order for communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry and,
at the same time, to establish communication with another dwelling from the entrance panel of this dwelling, one estate identifying
O
accessory, model AIB-000, is used per dwelling. Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-000 accessories, beginning with the
number '1'.

Determining the main entrance panel

BS
Both the entrance panel at the external point of entry and the entrance panel of each detached house are configured as main
panels (J1 jumper inserted).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling unifamiliar

The connections bracket in the detached house is programmed from the entrance panel of this detached house. See Chapter 7.
Note: The pushbutton of each entrance panel is connected to terminal '1' of the AIB-000 accessory, so each connections brac-
ket is programmed with the digital code '1'.
O

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

DETACHED HOUSE 1 DETACHED HOUSE 2 DETACHED HOUSE 16

LE

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + +
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR

2 2 2 2 2 2
TE
ALC-041 ALC-041 ALC-041
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2

KVS-47401 KVS-47401 KVS-47401

KVS-47501 KVS-47501 KVS-47501
2 + 2 + 2 +
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
2 2 2

ABR-015 ABR-015 ABR-015

(1) (1) (1)
2 2 2

2
ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++

2
SECTION TABLE
MAN-470
+ AWG
2 MPD-008 Up to 100 metres
+
COL-000 x 2 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+ UTP CAT 5E
CMO-008
Up to 25 metres
ABR-011
(1) 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

311
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 16 DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

Detached houses
TE
J1
External point of entry
Main entrance panel
LE
ALC-070
GRF-208
19
J1 J2
230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
O
COL-000
IN IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
BS
cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

DETACHED HOUSE 16
DETACHED HOUSE 15
DETACHED HOUSE 14
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

DETACHED HOUSE 13
1234 5 6 7 8
DETACHED HOUSE 12
DETACHED HOUSE 11
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

DETACHED HOUSE 10
DETACHED HOUSE 9
O
DETACHED HOUSE 8
DETACHED HOUSE 7
DETACHED HOUSE 6
DETACHED HOUSE 5
DETACHED HOUSE 4
DETACHED HOUSE 3
DETACHED HOUSE 2
DETACHED HOUSE 1
ABR-011

312
 313
DETACHED HOUSE 1 DETACHED HOUSE 2 DETACHED HOUSE 16
CC1
TE
A J1
A B J1
R1 MVB-002 MVB-002
R1
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
T1+
SCM-040 SCM-040
T1-
T1-
T1+
LE
ALC-041 ALC-041
24
25 J1 J1
26
27
S5
230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2
S2
D1 D2 230 V 230 V
KVS-47401 KVS-47401
KVS-47501 KVS-47501
+ +
AIB-000 AIB-000
SCM-040
O
220 Ohm Point of entry
ALC-041 Main entrance panel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW1

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ABR-015 ABR-015
BS
Detail of number Detail of number
assigning of the AIB-000 assigning of the AIB-000
230 V 1 2 (number 2) (number 16)
19
J1J 1J 1
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE DETACHED HOUSES

19 TCB-040
TCB-050
230 V
cod. 9610009 J1
19
J1 J2
GRF-200
+ 9 10 1222SC1 11 87654321 7 D1D2 D3
O
AIB-000
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1

OUT
DETACHED HOUSE 1 D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V
OUT
1 2 3 4
AIB-000

SW1
cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Detail of number
ABR-015 Note: Make the same connections

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 assigning of the AIB-000 External point of entry
at all the detached houses (number 1)
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 8 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 8 semi-detached houses, with
one entry with video system in each house, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 8 houses. This gate has an audio
system (but not a camera).

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the semi-detached houses
In order for communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry and,
at the same time, to establish communication with another dwelling from the entrance panel of this dwelling, one estate identifying
O
accessory, model AIB-000, is used per dwelling. Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-000 accessories, beginning with the
number '1'.

Determining the main entrance panel

BS
Both the entrance panel at the external point of entry and the entrance panel of each semi-detached house are configured as main
panels (J1 jumper inserted).

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling bifamiliar

The connections bracket in each semi-detached house is programmed from the entrance panel of this semi-detached house. See
Chapter 7.
Note: The two pushbuttons of each entrance panel are connected to terminals '1' and '2' of the AIB-000 accessory respectively.
O
Hence, the connection brackets are programmed with the digital code '1' or '2'.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 1 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 2 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 8
LE
2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR
TE
ALC-041 2 2 ALC-041 2 2 ALC-041 2 2
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2

KVD-47401 KVD-47401 KVD-47401

KVD-47501 KVD-47501 KVD-47501
2 + 2 + 2 +
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
2 2 2

ABR-015 ABR-015 ABR-015

(1) (1) (1)
2 2 2

2
ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++

2 SECTION TABLE
AWG
MAN-470
+ Up to 100 metres
2 MPD-008 1 mm 2
1.1 mm 17
+
COL-000 x 2 UTP CAT 5E
+ Up to 25 metres
CMO-008 1.1 mm 17
1 mm 2
ABR-011
(1) 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
314
HOUSING ESTATES WITH 8 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

315
Semi-detached houses
TE
J1
External point of entry
Main entrance panel
ALC-070
GRF-208
LE
19
J1 J2
230V~ ++ _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Earth
230 V
COL-000
O
IN IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030 cod. 9730030
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

2 SEMI-DETACHED 1
BS
HOUSE 8
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 7
1
1234 5 6 7 8
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 6 1
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 5
1
2 SEMI-DETACHED 1
O
HOUSE 4
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 3 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 2 1
2 SEMI-DETACHED
HOUSE 1 1 ABR-011
 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 1 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 2 SEMI-DETACHED HOUSE 8
CC1 CC1
TE
A J1 A J1
A B J1 A B J1
MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
R1 R1 R1 R1
+ + + +
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
T1+ T1+
T1- T1-
T1- T1-
T1+ T1+
LE
24 24
25 25 ALC-041 ALC-041
26 26
27 27
J1 J1
S5 S5
S2 S2 230V~ 1 2 230V~ 1 2
D1 D2 D1 D2
230 V 230 V
KVD-47401 KVD-47401
KVD-47501 KVD-47501
SCM-040 SCM-040 + +
AIB-000 AIB-000
O
ALC-041 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW1

SW1
220 Ohm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ABR-015 ABR-015
BS
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
Detail of number Detail of number
assigning of the AIB-000 assigning of the AIB-000
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE SEMI-DETACHED HOUSES

230 V 1 2 (number 2) (number 8)

19
19 J1J 1J 1 TCB-040
TCB-050
230 V
J1
19
J1 J2
GRF-200
+ 9 10 1222SC111 7 D1D2 D3
O
87654321
AIB-000
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1

OUT
2 1 D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V
OUT
1 2 3 4
AIB-000

SW1
cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Detail of number
ABR-015

SW1
Note: Make the same connections assigning of the AIB-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External point of entry
at all the semi-detached houses (number 1)

316
 317
<50m
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015
CONNECTION OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS OF THE DWELLINGS IN

B J1 B J1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1 R1 T1 <50m 120 Ohm
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2
SCM-040 SCM-040
LAST FLOOR
<50m
DIV-034
DIV-034
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS

cod.9730015
B J1 B J1
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1 R1 T1 <50m
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25 +
T1
T
T1
26 26 T1
+
T1
27 27
28 28
S5 S5
S2 S2
120 Ohm
D1 D2 D1 D2
Extract
SCM-040 SCM-040 resistence 120 Ohm

BUILDINGS
GROUND FLOOR
Entrance panel
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH ENTRAN-
CE PANEL WITH KEYPAD. ELECTRONIC CALL.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with a maximum of 150 tele-
phones. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, see pages 321
to 332, according to the distribution of dwellings in the installation.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Entrance panel configuration
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel. The configuration parameters are shown in
the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building.
Each telephone is programmed with the digital code which is keyed in during the programming process. See Chapter 7.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2
2 2

TED-001 TED-001
LAST FLOOR

SECTION TABLE
2 AWG
2 2 Up to 100 metres
2 2 1 mm 2
1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres
2
1 mm 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

TED-001 TED-001
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

2

POINT OF ENTRY CONCIERGE

230 V V 230V~ ++ 230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2

2 2
1 2 3

4 5 6

2 Only in 2
1 2 3

2 7

C
8

0
9

installations with
4

7
5

8
6

concierge unit
C 0

PAK-03020
ABR-011
(1) TCD-001

Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory

PAK-41000 without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel for installations
PAK-42000 with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
318 CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
 319
Telephones
in the dwellings
Point of entry
ALC-070
Consult connection diagram
19
230V~ ++
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
Earth GRF-211
GRF-212
CONCIERGE
230 V 230 V V 230V~ ++
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
Only in 1 2 3
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING.

installations with
4 5 6
ALM-040 7 8 9
concierge unit C 0
PAK-03020
KPD-001
TCD-001
230 V V~ OUT
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

230 V
Entrance panel configuration
ABR-011
Position 1:
DIGITAL SYSTEM Position 2:
Position 3:
 INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

A B C D 25 27
Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:

Consult page 366.

320
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM
OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can have
up to 450 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 9 floors and with a maximum of 50 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panel configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the telephones can be
programmed with any number between 1 and 999. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more infor-
mation, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

321
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EVERY 3 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001 AIB-001
2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
9 5 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
SW1

cod. 9730055 AIB-001

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 AIB-001

AIB-001 3 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

2
AIB-001

SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

TED-001
AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055

2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
9th FLOOR 230V~ I2

AIB-001
2 AIB-001
3 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
ALC-070 (230 V )
SW1

2
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2
230V~ ++ 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2
230V~ I2

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 1 2
AIB-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
2
1 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

TED-001 AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

230V~ I2
2
1st FLOOR
AIB-001 AIB-001
2
2 0
AIB-001 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

ALC-070 (230 V ) GCI-001 (230 V )

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
SW1

2
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 2
AIB-001
2 2
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

230V~ ++ 230V~ I2

TED-001 ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

GROUND FLOOR
CONCIERGE
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 2 230 V V 230V~ ++

2
POINT OF ENTRY
230 V V 230V~ ++ 2
2
1 2 3

2 Only in 2
4

7
5

8
6

2 installations with C 0

1 2 3
concierge unit
4 5 6

2
PAK-03020
7 8 9

C 0

TCD-001

SECTION TABLE
ABR-011
AWG
(1)
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PAK-41000 without concierge systems
Up to 25 metres

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

Entrance panel for installations
PAK-42000 with concierge systems 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

322
 323
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM

Telephones
in the dwellings
Point of entry
ALC-070
Consult connection diagram
19
230V~ ++
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
Earth GRF-211
GRF-212
CONCIERGE
230 V 230 V V 230V~ ++
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
Only in 1 2 3
installations with
4 5 6
ALM-040 7 8 9
concierge unit C 0
PAK-03020
KPD-001
TCD-001
230 V V~ OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

230 V
OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

Entrance panel configuration

ABR-011
Position 1:
Position 2:

DIGITAL SYSTEM
Position 3:
Position 8:
 INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

A B C D 25 27
Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation

Consulte página 367.

with several points of entry
Position 1:
Position 8:

324
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM
OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can have
up to 490 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 10 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One AIB-001 accessory is installed every five floors, starting with the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories, beginning with the number '0' (the AIB-001 of the ground floor to
the 4th floor) and ending with the number '9' (the AIB-001 of the 45th floor to the 49th floor).

Entrance panel configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the telephones can be
programmed with any number between 1 and 4919. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more infor-
mation, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which has
been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

325
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS FOR EVERY 3 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2 AIB-001
5 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TED-001 2 AIB-001

AIB-001 3 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

2
AIB-001

SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

49th FLOOR 4 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055

2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2 230V~ I2

AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
9 AIB-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
3 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
SW1

ALC-070 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
SW1

2
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

TED-001 AIB-001

SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ ++ 2
AIB-001 230V~ I2

45th FLOOR
2
AIB-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

2 AIB-001

SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
2
1 2
TED-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

230V~ I2
2
2
AIB-001 AIB-001
4th FLOOR 2
0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

ALC-070 (230 V ) GCI-001 (230 V )

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 2
AIB-001 2 2
2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 230V~ ++ 230V~ I2
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TED-001

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

GROUND FLOOR CONCIERGE

230 V V 230V~ ++

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 2 2

POINT OF ENTRY 2
230 V V 230V~ ++

1 2 3

2 Only in 4 5 6

2 2 7 8 9

installations with C 0

2 concierge unit

PAK-03020
1 2 3

4 5 6

2 7 8 9

TCD-001
C 0

SECTION TABLE
ABR-011 AWG
(1)
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PAK-41000 without concierge systems Up to 25 metres
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations
PAK-42000 with concierge systems 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

326
 327
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM

Telephones
in the dwellings
Point of entry
ALC-070
Consult connection diagram
19
230V~ ++
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
Earth
GRF-211
GRF-212
CONCIERGE
230 V 230 V V 230V~ ++
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
Only in 1 2 3
installations with
4 5 6
ALM-040 7 8 9
concierge unit C 0
PAK-03020
KPD-001
TCD-001
230 V V~ OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

230 V
OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

Entrance panel configuration

ABR-011
Position 1:
Position 2:

DIGITAL SYSTEM
Position 3:
Position 8:
 INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

A B C D 25 27
Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Consulte páginas 368 y 369.
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Position 8:

328
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM
OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can have
up to 931 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 19 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories

Entrance panel configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the telephones can be
programmed with any number between 1 and 4919. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more infor-
mation, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

329
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EVERY 10 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001 AIB-001 AIB-001

2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 49 19 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 3 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2
230V~ I2

TED-001 AIB-001 AIB-001

49th FLOOR 10 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
2
2 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 SW1 AIB-001

SW1
ALC-070 (230 V ) GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2 2
230V~ ++ 230V~ I2

2 AIB-001 AIB-001
AIB-001
2 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

1
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

2
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

AIB-001 AIB-001
TED-001 2
0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

1st FLOOR AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1

SW1
ALC-070 (230 V ) GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2 2 2
AIB-001
230V~ ++ 230V~ I2
2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TED-001 ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

GROUND FLOOR
CONCIERGE
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 2 230 V V 230V~ ++

2
POINT OF ENTRY
230 V V 230V~ ++ 2
2
1 2 3

2 Only in 2
4

7
5

8
6

2 installations with C 0

1 2 3
concierge unit
4 5 6

2
PAK-03020
7 8 9

C 0

TCD-001

SECTION TABLE
ABR-011
(1) AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PAK-41000 without concierge systems Up to 25 metres
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations
PAK-42000 with concierge systems 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

330
 331
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM

Telephones
in the dwellings
Point of entry
ALC-070
Consult connection diagram
19
230V~ ++
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
Earth GRF-211
GRF-212
CONCIERGE
230 V 230 V V 230V~ ++
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
Only in 1 2 3
installations with
4 5 6
ALM-040 7 8 9
concierge unit C 0
PAK-03020
KPD-001
TCD-001
230 V V~ OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

230 V
OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

Entrance panel configuration

ABR-011
Position 1:
Position 2:

DIGITAL SYSTEM
Position 3:
Position 8:
 A B C D 25 27
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Position 8:

Consult page 370.

332
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, with a maximum of 150 tele-
phones. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, see pages 336
to 347, according to the distribution of dwellings in the installation.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Entrance panels configuration
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel. The panels of the other points of entry must be configured as
secondary panels. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
Each telephone is programmed with the digital code which is keyed in during the programming process. See Chapter 7.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
2 2 AWG
2 2 Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

TED-001 TED-001
LAST FLOOR
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2
2 2
2
2 2
1 2 3

2 4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

PAK-03020
TCD-001

TED-001 TED-001
GROUND FLOOR
Only in
installations with
concierge unit
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )
2 2
POINT POINT NEXT
OF ENTRY 1 OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
230 V V 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2

2 2

1 2 3
2 1 2 3
2 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

2 C 0 C 0
2 C 0

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)

Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory

PAK-41000 without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel for installations
PAK-42000 with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 333
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
 Consult connection diagram
Telephones ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
in the dwellings CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++
1 2 3
4 5 6
Only in
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

7 8 9
installations with
C 0
concierge unit
TCD-001 PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
ALC-070 ALC-070
230V~ ++ 19 230V~ ++ 19
Next
point of entry
Earth GRF-211 Earth GRF-211
230 V GRF-212 230 V GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
ALM-040 ALM-040
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS

KPD-001 KPD-001
OUT OUT
230 V V~ 230 V V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V 230 V
Note: Make the same connections at
all the secondary entrance panels
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Entrance panel configuration
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 1:
Position 2: ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 2: (2)
Position 3: (1)
Position 3:
(1) Select the number of secondary
entrance panels in the building (2) Assign a different number to each
secondary entrance panel

334
 335
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

A B C D 25 27
Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:

Consult page 366.

INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 9
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building can
have up to 450 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 9 floors and with a maximum of 50 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle telephone programming codes between 1 and 999. The confi-
guration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

336
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EVERY 3 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001 AIB-001 AIB-001

2
9 2 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 2 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

GCI-001 (230 V )
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2
230V~ I2

AIB-001 AIB-001
2
TED-001 1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001
GCI-001 (230 V )

SW1
SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9th FLOOR 2
2
230V~ I2

AIB-001 AIB-001
2
0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

2
AIB-001
ALC-070 (230 V ) AIB-001
GCI-001 (230 V )
SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
AIB-001 2 2
2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 1 230V~ ++ 230V~ I2
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

TED-001
CONCIERGE
1st FLOOR 230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2
AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
0
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3

2 4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

PAK-03020
TED-001
TCD-001
GROUND FLOOR
Only in
installations with
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) concierge unit ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )
2 2
POINT POINT NEXT
OF ENTRY 1 OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
230 V V 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2

2 2

1 2 3
2 1 2 3
2 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

2 C 0 C 0
2 C 0

SECTION TABLE
ABR-011 ABR-011 AWG
(1) (1) Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory Up to 25 metres
PAK-41000 without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations
PAK-42000 with concierge systems
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

337
 Consult connection diagram
Telephones ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
in the dwellings CONCIERGE
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 9

230 V V 230V~ ++
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

1 2 3
4 5 6
Only in 7 8 9
installations with
C 0
concierge unit
TCD-001 PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
ALC-070 ALC-070
230V~ ++ 19 230V~ ++ 19
Next point
of entry
Earth GRF-211 Earth GRF-211
230 V GRF-212 230 V GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS

ALM-040 ALM-040
KPD-001 KPD-001 Note: Make the same
OUT OUT connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
230 V V~ 230 V V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V 230 V
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
Position 8: Position 8:

338
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 339
A B C D 25 27
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Position 8:

Consult page 367.

INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 49
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building can
have up to 490 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 10 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One AIB-001 accessory is installed every five floors, starting with the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories, beginning with the number '0' (the AIB-001 of the ground floor
to the 4th floor) and ending with the number '9' (the AIB-001 of the 45th floor to the 49th floor).

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle telephone programming codes between 1 and 4919. The con-
figuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

340
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS FOR EVERY 3 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001 AIB-001
2
2 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 2 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001
GCI-001 (230 V )

SW1
SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TED-001 2
2
230V~ I2

AIB-001 AIB-001
49th FLOOR 2
1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001
GCI-001 (230 V )

SW1
SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 2
AIB-001 2
2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 230V~ I2

AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001 AIB-001
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TED-001 2
0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
ALC-070 (230 V ) AIB-001
GCI-001 (230 V )
SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2 2
45th FLOOR 230V~ ++ 230V~ I2

TED-001 ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

2 CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++

4th FLOOR
2

2 2
AIB-001
2
0
1 2 3
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
2 4 5 6
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9

C 0

TED-001

PAK-03020
TCD-001
GROUND FLOOR
Only in
installations with
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) concierge unit ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )
2 2
POINT POINT NEXT
OF ENTRY 1 OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
230 V V 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2

2 2

1 2 3
2 1 2 3
2 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

2 C 0 C 0
2 C 0

SECTION TABLE
ABR-011 ABR-011 AWG
(1) (1) Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory Up to 25 metres
PAK-41000 without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations
PAK-42000 with concierge systems 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

341
 Consult connection diagram
Telephones ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
in the dwellings
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 49

CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

1 2 3
4 5 6
Only in 7 8 9
installations with
C 0
concierge unit
TCD-001 PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
ALC-070 ALC-070
230V~ ++ 19 230V~ ++ 19
Next point
of entry
Earth GRF-211 Earth GRF-211
230 V GRF-212 230 V GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
ALM-040 ALM-040
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

KPD-001 KPD-001 Note: Make the same

connections at all the
OUT OUT
secondary entrance panels
230 V V~ 230 V V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
DIGITAL SYSTEM 230 V 230 V
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
Position 8: Position 8:

342
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 343
A B C D 25 27
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
Consult pages 368 and 369.
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Position 8:
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 49
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building can
have up to 931 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 19 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle telephone programming codes between 1 and 4919. The con-
figuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

344
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EVERY 10 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001 AIB-001 AIB-001

2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 49 9 1
AIB-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1
GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2
230V~ I2

TED-001 AIB-001 AIB-001

49th FLOOR 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
2
0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1

SW1
ALC-070 (230 V ) GCI-001 (230 V )
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2 2
230V~ ++ 230V~ I2

2
AIB-001
2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

CONCIERGE
TED-001 230 V V 230V~ ++

1st FLOOR 2
2
2
AIB-001
2
0
1 2 3

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 2 4 5 6

AIB-001 7 8 9
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C 0

PAK-03020
TCD-001
TED-001
GROUND FLOOR
Only in
installations with
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) concierge unit ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )
2 2
POINT POINT NEXT
OF ENTRY 1 OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
230 V V 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2

2 2

1 2 3
2 1 2 3
2 1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

2 C 0 C 0
2 C 0

SECTION TABLE
ABR-011 ABR-011 AWG
(1) (1) Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory Up to 25 metres
PAK-41000 without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel for installations 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
PAK-42000 with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

345
 Consult connection diagram
Telephones ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
in the dwellings
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 49

CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

1 2 3
4 5 6
Only in 7 8 9
installations with
C 0
concierge unit
TCD-001 PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
ALC-070 ALC-070
230V~ ++ 19 230V~ ++ 19
Next point
of entry
Earth GRF-211 Earth GRF-211
230 V GRF-212 230 V GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
ALM-040 ALM-040
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

KPD-001 KPD-001 Note: Make the same

OUT OUT connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
230 V V~ 230 V V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
DIGITAL SYSTEM 230 V 230 V
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
Position 8: Position 8:

346
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 347
A B C D 25 27
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Position 8:

Consult page 370.

HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of entry
and entrance panel with pushbuttons, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings, with entrance panel with key-
pad.
With a maximum of 96 telephones per building. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the dis-
tribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
For communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry while, at the
same time, communication is established with another dwelling from the entrance panel of its building, one estate identifying acces-
sory, model AIB-000, must be used per dwelling. Any number between '1' and '99' can be assigned to an AIB-000 accessory.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel at the external point of entry is configured as the external panel. The entrance panel of each building is con-
figured as the main panel (with the J1 jumper inserted).
The configuration parameters are indicated in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located. See
Chapter 7.
Note: The telephone of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number of the con-
centrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

348
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR
2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
2 2 2

2 2 2
230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

MAN-470 MAN-470 MAN-470

+ + +
MPD-004 MPD-004 MPD-004
+ + +
COL-000 ABR-011 COL-000 ABR-011 COL-000 ABR-011
+ (1) + (1) + (1)
2 2 2
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
+ + +
CMO-004 CMO-004 CMO-004
2 2

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 2

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++

2
230 V V 230V~ ++

2
2
2
2 1 2 3

Only in
4 5 6
2 2
7

C
8

0
9
installations with 1 2 3

concierge unit 4

7
5

8
6

C 0

ABR-011
(1)
TCD-001 PAK-03020

Entrance panel for installations SECTION TABLE

PAK-41000 PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
without concierge systems AWG
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 100 metres
External entrance panel for
PAK-44000 installations with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

349
HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH

Interior buildings
Entrance panel of external point of entry
ALC-070
Consult connection diagram
19
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
230V~ ++
GRF-211 CONCIERGE
GRF-214
230 V V 230V~ ++
Made in Spain
IN
Earth
230 V + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
ALM-040 Only in 1 2 3
installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit C 0
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

KPD-001 PAK-03020
230 V V~
OUT TCD-001
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: ABR-011

DIGITAL SYSTEM
Position 2:
Position 3: (1)
Position 8:

KEYPAD.
(1) Select number of interior buildings

350
 351
Building 1 Building 2 Building 3
Telephones in Telephones in Telephones in
the dwellings the dwellings the dwellings
J1 J1
Point of entry building 1
Main entrance panel Point of entry building 2 Point of entry building 3
Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
J1 ALC-070 ALC-070
GRF-208
ALC-070 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++
19
J1 J2
Earth 230 V Earth 230 V
IN
MAN-470 MAN-470
+ 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 7 D1 D2 D3 + +
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
++
230V~
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +

SW1

SW1
COL-000 COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Earth
230 V
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

+ +
AIB-000 AIB-000
+ Detail of number + Detail of number
COL-000 CMO-004 assigning of the AIB-000 CMO-004 assigning of the AIB-000
IN
(number 2) (number 3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030
8 7
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3
1
4
6 5

OUT
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000

SW1
4 3 cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-000
1 2 3 4
2 1

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note: Make the same connections Detail of number
at all the interior points of entry assigning of the AIB-000
of building (number 1)
ABR-011
External point of entry
 A B C D 25 27
Concierge
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN EACH DWELLING

230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates
with several buildings
Position 1:
Position 8:

See page 366.

352
HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITHOUT ENTRANCE PANEL,
WITH CONCIERGE.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of entry
and entrance panel with pushbuttons, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings with concierge.
With a maximum of 96 telephones per building. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the dis-
tribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
One estate identifying accessory, model AIB-000, is used per dwelling. Any number between '1' and '99' can be assigned to an
AIB-000 accessory.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel of each building is configured as the main panel (with the J1 jumper inserted).

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located. See
Chapter 7.
Note: The telephone of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number of the con-
centrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

353
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR
2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
2 2 2

2 2 2
230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

MAN-470 MAN-470 MAN-470

+ + +
MPD-004 MPD-004 MPD-004
+ ABR-011 + ABR-011 + ABR-011
COL-000 (1) COL-000 (1) COL-000 (1)
+ 2 + 2 + 2
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
+ + +
CMO-004 CMO-004 CMO-004
2 2

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

2
CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++

2
1 2 3

4 5 6

SECTION TABLE 7 8 9

C 0

AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 TCD-001 PAK-03020

Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

354
 355
PUSHBUTTONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITHOUT ENTRANCE

Interior buildings
HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH

INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

A B C D 25 27
Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
PANEL, WITH CONCIERGE.

230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates with several buildings
Without external entrance panels
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Position 1:
Position 8:
 Building 1 Building 2 Building 3
Telephones in Telephones in Telephones in
the dwellings the dwellings the dwellings
J1 J1
Point of entry building 1 Point of entry building 2 Point of entry building 3
Main entrance panel Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
J1 ALC-070 ALC-070
GRF-208
ALC-070 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++
19
J1 J2
Earth 230 V Earth 230 V
IN
MAN-470 MAN-470
+ 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 7 D1 D2 D3 + +
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
++
230V~
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +

SW1

SW1
Earth COL-000 COL-000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
230 V + +
AIB-000 AIB-000
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

+ Detail of number + Detail of number

COL-000 CMO-004 assigning of the AIB-000 CMO-004 assigning of the AIB-000
IN
(number 2) (number 3)

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN THE DWELLINGS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030
8 7
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3
1
4
6 5

OUT
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000

SW1
4 3 cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-000
1 2 3 4
2 1

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note: Make the same connections Detail of number
at all the interior points of entry assigning of the AIB-000
of building (number 1)
ABR-011

Consult page 366.

Concierge

356
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of entry
and entrance panel with keypad, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings and with entrance panel with key-
pad.
With a maximum of 96 telephones per building. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the dis-
tribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
To allow communication to be established with a dwelling from the entrance panel at the external point of entry while, at the same
time, allowing communication to take place with another dwelling from the entrance panel of the building in which it is located, a
different number must be assigned to the entrance panel of each building when the panels are being programmed. Any number bet-
ween '1' and '99' can be assigned to an entrance panel.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel at the external point of entry is configured as the external panel. The entrance panel of each building is con-
figured as the main panel.
The configuration parameters are indicated in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located. See
Chapter 7.
Note: The telephone in each dwelling is programmed with a code number between '1' and '999'.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

357
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR
2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++
2 230V~ ++
2 230V~ ++
2
2 2 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4

7
5

8
6

9
ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4

7
5

8
6

9
ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4

7
5

8
6

C 0 C 0 C 0

230 V V 230 V V 230 V V

2 ABR-011 2 ABR-011 2 ABR-011

(1) 2 2 (1) (1)

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 2

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++

2
230 V V 230V~ ++

2
2
2
2 1 2 3

Only in
4 5 6
2 2
7

C
8

0
9
installations with 1 2 3

concierge unit 4

7
5

8
6

C 0

ABR-011
(1)
TCD-001 PAK-03020

Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory

PAK-41000 without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
External entrance panel for
PAK-44000 installations with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box SECTION TABLE

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows AWG

Up to 100 metres

Points of entry buildings 1, 2 y 3 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

Up to 25 metres
Entrance panel for installations PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PAK-41000 without concierge systems 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel for installations 0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
PAK-42000 with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

358
 359
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.

Interior buildings
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH

Entrance panel of external point of entry

ALC-070
Consult connection diagram
19
ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
230V~ ++
GRF-211 CONCIERGE
GRF-214
230 V V 230V~ ++
Made in Spain
IN
Earth
230 V + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
ALM-040 Only in 1 2 3
installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit C 0
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

KPD-001 PAK-03020
230 V V~
OUT TCD-001
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: ABR-011
Position 2:

DIGITAL SYSTEM
Position 3: (1)
Position 8:
(1) Select number of interior buildings

KEYPAD
 Building 1 Building 2 Building 3
Telephones in Telephones in Telephones in
the dwellings the dwellings the dwellings
ALC-070 ALC-070
Point of entry building 1
Main entrance panel
230V~ ++ 230V~ ++
Point of entry building 2 Point of entry building 3
230 V Main entrance panel 230 V Main entrance panel
ALC-070 Earth Earth
ALM-040 ALM-040
19
1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
230 V V 230 V V
230V~ ++ C 0 C 0
GRF-211
GRF-212
Made in Spain
230 V 230 V
IN
Earth
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

230 V + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
ABR-011 ABR-011
ALM-040
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
KPD-001 Position 1: Position 1:
230 V V~
OUT
Position 2: Position 2:
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V Position 3: Position 3:
Note: Make the same connections
at all the interior points of entry
of building ABR-011
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2:
Position 3:
External point of entry

360
 361
A B C D 25 27
Concierge
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN EACH DWELLING

230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates
with several buildings
Position 1:
Position 8:
Consult page 366.
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITHOUT ENTRANCE PANEL, WITH
CONCIERGE.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of entry
and entrance panel with keypad, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings with concierge.
With a maximum of 96 telephones per building. For installations with a number of telephones greater than 50, where all the dis-
tribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
A different number must be assigned to the entrance panel of each building when the panels are being configured. Any number
between '1' and '999' can be assigned to an entrance panel.

Entrance panel configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring
diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the telephones of each dwelling

The telephone of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located. See
Chapter 7.
Note: The telephone in each dwelling is programmed with a code number between '1' and '999'.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

362
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR
2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++
2 230V~ ++
2 230V~ ++
2
2 2 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4

7
5

8
6

9
ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4

7
5

8
6

9
ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4

7
5

8
6

C 0 C 0 C 0

230 V V 230 V V 230 V V

ABR-011 ABR-011 ABR-011

2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1)
2 2

Points of entry buildings 1, 2 y 3

Entrance panel for installations ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
PAK-42000 with concierge systems 2
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows CONCIERGE
230 V V 230V~ ++

PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory 2

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 2
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 2
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

SECTION TABLE
TCD-001 PAK-03020
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

363
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITHOUT ENTRANCE PANEL, WITH

Interior buildings
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

A B C D 25 27
Concierge
TCD-001
19
D
C
B
A
CC2
ALC-070 GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
KPD-003
ALM-040 cod. 9650003
OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates with several buildings
Without external entrance panels

DIGITAL SYSTEM
Position 1:
Position 8:

CONCIERGE.

364
 365
Building 1 Building 2 Building 3
Telephones in Telephones in Telephones in
the dwellings the dwellings the dwellings
ALC-070 ALC-070
Point of entry building 1
Main entrance panel
230V~ ++ 230V~ ++
Point of entry building 2 Point of entry building 3
230 V Main entrance panel 230 V Main entrance panel
ALC-070 Earth Earth
ALM-040 ALM-040
19
1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
230 V V 230 V V
230V~ ++ C 0 C 0
GRF-212
Made in Spain
230 V 230 V
IN
Earth
230 V + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

ABR-011 ABR-011

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE TELEPHONES IN EACH DWELLING

ALM-040
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
KPD-001 Position 1: Position 1:
230 V V~
OUT
Position 2: Position 2:
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V Position 3: Position 3:
Note: Make the same connections
at all the entrance panels
of the points of entry in buildings ABR-011
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2:

Consult page 366.

Position 3:
Concierge
CONNECTION OF TELEPHONES OF DWELLINGS IN BUILDINGS
DIGITAL SYSTEM
STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM BUILDING

WIRED DIAGRAM

TED-001 TED-001

D1 D2 D1 D2

LAST FLOOR

TED-001 TED-001

D1 D2 D1 D2

GROUND FLOOR

Entrance panel

366
BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EVERY 3 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
AIB-001
D1 D2
See power supply D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 GCI-001
diagram D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
AIB-001
SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
AIB-001

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

With number 5 AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1

With number 3
TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
AIB-001 230 V
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 ALC-070
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001
ON
SW1

With number 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9th FLOOR
cod. 9730055

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 AIB-001
With number 4 230V~ ++
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 230 V AIB-001 ON1 2

SW1
Earth cod. 9730055 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
D1 D2 With number 2
See power supply D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
ON
SW1

diagram cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 230 V
AIB-001
With number 3

TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
AIB-001 AIB-001
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

ON
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1st FLOOR With number 1 AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
With number 2 With number 1
230V~ I2 I1

AIB-001 230 V
D1 D2
See power supply
diagram D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 ALC-070
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
AIB-001
With number 1 230V~ ++ GCI-001
TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 ON1 2
AIB-001
230 V
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 3 4 5 6 7 8
cod. 9730055
ON
Earth
AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AIB-001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

230V~ I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 With number 0
AIB-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

GROUND FLOOR With number 0 AIB-001

ON
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
230 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
With number 0
Entrance panel

367
BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

WIRED DIAGRAM
COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY

FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS

D1 D2

TED-001

49th FLOOR

D1 D2
See power supply
diagram

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
45th FLOOR With number 9

D1 D2

TED-001

4th FLOOR

D1 D2
See power supply
diagram

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
GROUND FLOOR With number 0

Entrance panel

368
 POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 3 AIB-001 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
AIB-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
ON
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
AIB-001

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

With number 5 AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1

With number 3

AIB-001 230 V

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 ALC-070
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 AIB-001
With number 4 230V~ ++
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 230 V AIB-001 ON1 2

SW1

Earth cod. 9730055 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
With number 2
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 230 V
AIB-001
With number 3

AIB-001 AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 AIB-001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

With number 2 With number 1

230V~ I2 I1

AIB-001 230 V

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 ALC-070
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
AIB-001
With number 1 230V~ ++ GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 ON1 2
AIB-001 230 V
SW1

cod. 9730055 3 4 5 6 7 8

Earth 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 With number 0
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
230 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
With number 0

369
BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
(INSTALLATION WITHOUT CONCIERGE) (INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE)
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE ALC-070 POWER SUPPLY UNIT USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EVERY 10 AIB-00 ACCESSORIES FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
AIB-001
D1 D2
See power supply D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 GCI-001
diagram D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
AIB-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
AIB-001

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

With number 19 AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1

With number 3
TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 19th FLOOR
230 V
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3rd FLOOR

ALC-070
AIB-001
49th FLOOR With number 49
AIB-001
GCI-001
AIB-001 230V~ ++ D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001 ON1 2

SW1
cod. 9730055 3 4 5 6 7 8

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 230 V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
Earth AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
AIB-001
With number 2
SW1

D1 D2 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

See power supply 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

diagram AIB-001 230 V

With number 10

10th FLOOR 2nd FLOOR

TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 AIB-001 AIB-001
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
ON
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1st FLOOR With number 1 AIB-001

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001
With number 9 With number 1
230V~ I2 I1

9th FLOOR
230 V
D1 D2
See power supply
diagram 1st FLOOR
ALC-070

AIB-001
GCI-001
TED-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 AIB-001 230V~ ++ D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cod. 9730055
ON

AIB-001 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1 230 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 Earth AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1

AIB-001 AIB-001
ON With number 0
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GROUND FLOOR With number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 230 V
With number 0
GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR
Entrance panel

370
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD. ELECTRONIC CALL.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with a maximum of
150 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices greater than 50, where all the distri-
bution will be star-shaped, consult pages 377 to 394, according to the distribution of dwellings in the installation.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Entrance panel configuration
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring
diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. Each connections bracket is
programmed with the digital code which is keyed in during the programming process. See Chapter 7.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6

371
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030
2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030

GROUND FLOOR SECTION TABLE

AWG
Up to 100 metres
ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 COAX 2
COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres
230 V V ++
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
230V~

POINT OF ENTRY
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
2

2
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

ABR-011
(1)

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

372
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Dwellings

75 Ohm
Point of entry

V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

White
19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-021

Red 19

ALC-070
GRF-211

Made in Spain

IN

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++

Earth
230 V

KPD-001
cod. 9650002

ALM-040 OUT

+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

230 V V~

230 V Entrance panel configuration

Position 1:
ABR-011
Position 2:

Position 3:

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

Consult page 421.

373
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING. WITH
CONCIERGE UNIT. DIGITAL SYSTEM 4 + COAXIAL
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2
DIV-024
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SECTION TABLE
2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2
DIV-024
2 (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030

GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 2 COAX 2 ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070

(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-024

ALM-040 230 V V 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )
POINT 2
COAX OF ENTRY 2
2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V

2
COAX COAX 1 2 3

2 4

7
5

8
6

C 0

2 1 2 3 2 2
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
+
ABR-011 SCC-030
(1)

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

374
 375
Dwellings
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT

M M
M
DIV-024
75 Ohm
Point of entry
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White
White 19
+
19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-021
Consult connection diagram
19
Red ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
Red 19
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
ALC-070 GRF-212 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Made in Spain
IN
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

230V~ ++
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
Earth
230 V
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
MCB-002 PAK-03020
ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT
MCC-002
+
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 SCC-030
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
ABR-011
Position 2:
Position 3:
 Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

A
CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Consult page 421.

376
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can
have up to 450 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 9 floors and with a maximum of 50 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the connection brac-
kets can be programmed with any number between 1 and 999.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

377
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2
DIV-024
2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2
MVB-002
MVC-002 COAX
+ 2
SCM-030
9th FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) 2 COAX 2
SECTION TABLE
AWG
230 V V 230V~ ++

POINT OF ENTRY Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
COAXIAL 75 Ω
2 Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
ABR-011
(1)

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

378
 Dwellings

379
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT

75 Ohm
Point of entry
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

White
19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-021
Red 19
ALC-070
GRF-211
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Earth
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

230 V
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
ALM-040 OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

Consult pages 422 and 423.

230 V V~
230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
ABR-011
Position 2:
Position 3:
Position 8:
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2
DIV-024
2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2
MVB-002
MVC-002 COAX
+ 2
SCM-030
9th FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 2 COAX 2
(230 V ) ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-024

ALM-040 230 V V

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )

230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
POINT
COAX OF ENTRY 2
2
2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V

2
COAX COAX
2 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

2 1

4
2

5
3

6
2 2
7 8 9

C 0

MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
ABR-011 +
(1) SCC-030

SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems AWG
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 100 metres
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

380
 381
Dwellings
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT

M M
M
DIV-024
75 Ohm
Point of entry
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White
White 19 19 +_
+
TCB-011
TCB-021
Consult connection diagram
19
Red ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
19
Red (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
ALC-070 GRF-212 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

230V~ ++
1 2 3
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
Earth
230 V
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
MCB-002 PAK-03020
ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT
MCC-002
+
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 SCC-030
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
ABR-011
Position 2:
Position 3:
Position 8:
 Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult pages 422 and 423. Position 1:
Position 8:

382
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can
have up to 490 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 10 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One AIB-001 accessory is installed every five floors, starting with the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories, beginning with the number '0' (the AIB-001 of the ground floor
to the 4th floor) and ending with the number '9' (the AIB-001 of the 45th floor to the 49th floor).

Entrance panel configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the connection brac-
kets can be programmed with any number between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

383
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2
DIV-024
2 2

MVB-002 2
MVC-002
+
49th FLOOR SCM-030

2
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
COAX
45th FLOOR
230V~ I2

2
DIV-024
2 2

MVB-002 2 2
MVC-002
+
4th FLOOR SCM-030

2
2 2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) 2 COAX 2

230 V V 230V~ ++ SECTION TABLE

POINT OF ENTRY
AWG
2 Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
COAXIAL 75 Ω
2 Up to 25 metres
1

4
2

5
3

6 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
7 8 9

C 0 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

ABR-011 (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

(1)

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
384 PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
 Dwellings

385
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT

75 Ohm
Point of entry
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

White
19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-021
Red 19
ALC-070
GRF-211
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Earth
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

230 V
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
ALM-040 OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

Consult pages 424 and 425.

230 V V~
230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2: ABR-011
Position 3:
Position 8:
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2
DIV-024
2 2

MVB-002 2
MVC-002
+
49th FLOOR SCM-030

2
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
COAX
45th FLOOR
230V~ I2

2
DIV-024
2 2

MVB-002 2 2
MVC-002
+
4th FLOOR SCM-030

2
2 2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
COAX
230V~ I2

GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 2 COAX 2
(230 V ) ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-024

ALM-040 230 V V

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V ) CONCIERGE

POINT
230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++

COAX OF ENTRY 2
2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V
2
2

2 COAX COAX 1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

2 1 2 3 C 0

7
5

8
6

9
2 2
C 0

MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
ABR-011 +
(1) SCC-030

SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems AWG
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 100 metres
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

386 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

 387
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A

Dwellings
MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT

M M
M
DIV-024
75 Ohm
Point of entry
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White
White 19
+
19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-021
Consult connection diagram
19
Red ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
19
Red (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
ALC-070 GRF-212 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

230V~ ++
1 2 3
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
Earth
230 V
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
MCB-002 PAK-03020
ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT
MCC-002
+
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 SCC-030
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
ABR-011
Position 2:
Position 3:
Position 8:
 Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult pages 424 and 425. Position 1:
Position 8:

388
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can
have up to 931 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 19 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the connection brac-
kets can be programmed with any number between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

389
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2
DIV-024
2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
49 49 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2
MVB-002
MVC-002 COAX
+ 2
SCM-030
49th FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 ALC-070 2 COAX 2

(230 V ) (230 V )
SECTION TABLE
AWG
230 V V 230V~ ++

POINT OF ENTRY Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
COAXIAL 75 Ω
2 Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.8 mm 20
1 2 3
0.5 mm 2
4 5 6

C
8

0
9
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

ABR-011
(1)

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

390
 Dwellings

391
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITHOUT CONCIERGE UNIT

75 Ohm
Point of entry
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

White
19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-021
Red 19
ALC-070
GRF-211
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Earth
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

230 V
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
ALM-040 OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

Consult pages 426 and 427.

230 V V~
230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2: ABR-011
Position 3:
Position 8:
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2
DIV-024
2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
49 49 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2
MVB-002
MVC-002 COAX
+ 2
SCM-030
49th FLOOR

2
DIV-024
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 2 COAX 2
(230 V ) ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-024

ALM-040 230 V V

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V ) CONCIERGE

POINT
230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++

COAX OF ENTRY 2
2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V
2
2

2 COAX COAX 1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

2 1 2 3 C 0

7
5

8
6

9
2 2
C 0

MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
ABR-011 +
(1) SCC-030

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory SECTION TABLE
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems AWG
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for Up to 100 metres
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

392
 393
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A

Dwellings
MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT

M M
M
DIV-024
75 Ohm
Point of entry
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White
White 19
+
19 +_
TCB-011
TCB-021
Consult connection diagram
19
Red ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
19
Red (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
ALC-070 GRF-212 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

230V~ ++
1 2 3
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
Earth
230 V
KPD-001
cod. 9650002
MCB-002 PAK-03020
ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT
MCC-002
+
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 SCC-030
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
ABR-011
Position 2:
Position 3:
Position 8:
 Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
Consult pages 426 and 427.
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Position 8:

394
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, with a maximum of
150 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices greater than 50, where all the distri-
bution will be star-shaped, consult pages 377 to 394, according to the distribution of dwellings in the installation.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Entrance panels configuration
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel. The panels of the other points of entry must be configured as
secondary panels. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
Each connections bracket is programmed with the digital code which is keyed in during the programming process. See Chapter 7.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

395
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
2
DIV-024 Up to 100 metres
2 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 2 2 2 COAXIAL 75 Ω
Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0,5 A

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030 ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR
230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
2
2
2
2
DIV-024 COAX
2 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

2 2 2 2 2 C 0

MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
+
SCC-030
MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-030 SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR
Only in
COAX installations with
2 2 concierge unit
DIV-024
COAX
Only in
installations with
concierge unit
ALM-040 ALM-040
(230 V ) (230 V )

COAX 2 ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
ALM-040
POINT OF POINT OF NEXT
230 V V
230 V V

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )

ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
2
230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2
COAX COAX
2
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6 2
1

4
2

5
3

2
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0 2 C 0

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
Entrance panel with B/W video for
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

396
 Dwellings Consult connection diagram

397
ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
Only in 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
installations with
concierge unit
M M
M 1 2 3
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

Only in
4 5 6
DIV-024 7 8 9
installations with
C 0
concierge unit
PAK-03020
75 Ohm Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White 19
+ White
19 19
+_ White +_
TCB-011 White 19 TCB-011
TCB-021 + TCB-021
19
Red
Red 19
19 Red Red 19
ALC-070 Next point
GRF-211 GRF-012 of entry
ALC-070 GRF-212 GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS

230V~ ++
230V~ ++
Earth 230 V
1 2 3
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

4 5 6
7 8 9
Earth
C 0
230 V
KPD-001 KPD-001
cod. 9650002 cod. 9650002
ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration 230 V 230 V Note: Make the same connections at
all the secondary entrance panels
Position 1:
Entrance panel configuration
Position 2: Position 1:
Position 3: (1) Position 2: (2)
(1) Select the number of secondary ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3:
entrance panels in the building
(2) Assign a different number to each
secondary entrance panel
 Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

A
CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Consult page 421.

398
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 9
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building
can have up to 450 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 9 floors and with a maximum of 50 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Configuration of the entrance panels

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle connections bracket programming codes between 1 and 999.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
See chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

399
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001

2 1 GCI-001 (230 V )
DIV-024
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 2
2
AIB-001
2 2 230V~ I2

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
9
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
MVB-002 0 GCI-001 (230 V )
MVC-002
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
COAX
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ 2
2
SCM-030
9th FLOOR 230V~ I2

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070

(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
2
DIV-024
2 2 2 CONCIERGE
AIB-001 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
0 2
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

COAX 1 2 3

MVB-002
4 5 6

7 8 9

MVC-002
C 0

2
+
SCM-030
MCB-002 PAK-03020
GROUND FLOOR MCC-002
+
Only in SCC-030
2 COAX 2 installations with
DIV-024 concierge unit
COAX
Only in
installations with
concierge unit
ALM-040 ALM-040
(230 V ) (230 V )

COAX 2 ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
ALM-040
POINT OF POINT OF NEXT
230 V V
230 V V

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )

ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
2
230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2
COAX COAX
2
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6 2
1

4
2

5
3

2
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0 2 C 0

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)

SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory AWG
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 100 metres
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
COAXIAL 75 Ω
Entrance panel with B/W video for
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

400
 401
Dwellings Consult connection diagram
ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

Only in 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
installations with
concierge unit
M M
M
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

1 2 3
Only in
4 5 6
DIV-024 7 8 9
installations with
C 0
concierge unit
PAK-03020
75 Ohm Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White 19 White
+ 19 19
+_ +_
TCB-011 White 19 White TCB-011
TCB-021 + TCB-021
19
Red
19
Red 19
Red Red
19
ALC-070 Next
GRF-211 GRF-012 point of entry
ALC-070 GRF-212 GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
230V~ ++
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Earth 230 V
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

Earth
C 0
230 V
KPD-001 KPD-001
ALM-040 ALM-040
cod. 9650002
ALM-040 ALM-040
cod. 9650002
Note: Make the same
OUT OUT
connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration 230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 8: Position 8:
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult pages 422 and 423. Position 1:
Position 8:

402
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building
can have up to 490 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 10 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One AIB-001 accessory is installed every five floors, starting with the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories, beginning with the number '0' (the AIB-001 of the ground floor
to the 4th floor) and ending with the number '9' (the AIB-001 of the 45th floor to the 49th floor).

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle connections bracket programming codes between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
See chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

403
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

2
DIV-024
2 2

2 2

MVB-002 2
MVC-002
+
49th FLOOR SCM-030

2
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
2 COAX 2
45th FLOOR
230V~ I2

2
DIV-024
2 2

2 2

MVB-002 2
MVC-002
+
4th FLOOR SCM-030

2
2
2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001
SW1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GROUND FLOOR
230V~ I2

2 2
ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
COAX (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

CONCIERGE
230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++

2
2
2

COAX 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

MCB-002 PAK-03020
Only in MCC-002
installations with +
concierge unit SCC-030
DIV-024
COAX
Only in
installations with
concierge unit
ALM-040 ALM-040
(230 V ) (230 V )

COAX 2 ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
ALM-040
POINT OF POINT OF NEXT
230 V V
230 V V

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )

ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
2
230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2
COAX COAX
2
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6 2
1

4
2

5
3

2
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0 2 C 0

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)

SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory AWG
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems Up to 100 metres
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box COAXIAL 75 Ω
Entrance panel with B/W video for Up to 25 metres
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
404 PDK-42500
Entrance panel with colour video for
installations with concierge systems
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

 Dwellings

405
Consult connection diagram
UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070

(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
Only in 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
installations with
concierge unit
M M
M 1 2 3
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

Only in
4 5 6
DIV-024 7 8 9
installations with
C 0
concierge unit
PAK-03020
75 Ohm Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White 19
White
+ 19 19
+_ +_
TCB-011 White 19 White TCB-011
TCB-021 + TCB-021
19
Red 19
19 19
Red Red
Red
ALC-070 Next
GRF-211 GRF-012 point of entry
ALC-070 GRF-212 GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
230V~ ++
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Earth 230 V
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
Earth 230 V
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

KPD-001 KPD-001
cod. 9650002 cod. 9650002
ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT
Note: Make the same
connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration 230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 8: Position 8:
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS
Consult pages 424 and 425.

INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

Concierge
B J1

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C

27
B
A
CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020

Made in Spain

IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

SCC-030
Earth 230 V

Entrance panel

ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003

cod. 9650003

OUT

V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~

230 V 230 V

Concierge panel configuration

Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry

Position 1:

Position 8:

406
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building
can have up to 931 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 19 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle connections bracket programming codes between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
See chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

407
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001

2 49 GCI-001 (230 V )
DIV-024
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 2
2
AIB-001
2 2 230V~ I2

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
49
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
MVB-002 0 GCI-001 (230 V )
MVC-002
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
COAX
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ 2
2
SCM-030
49th FLOOR 230V~ I2

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070

2 (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-024
2 2 2
CONCIERGE
AIB-001 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
0 2
SW1

2
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MVB-002 COAX 1

4
2

5
3

MVC-002 7 8 9

+
C 0

2
SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
Only in +
2 COAX 2 installations with SCC-030
DIV-024 concierge unit
COAX Only in
installations with
concierge unit
ALM-040 ALM-040
(230 V ) (230 V )

COAX 2 ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
ALM-040
POINT OF POINT OF
V

NEXT
230 V
230 V V

ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )

ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
2
230 V V 230V~ ++

2 2
230V~ ++ 230 V V

2 2
COAX COAX
2
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6 2
1

4
2

5
3

2
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0 2 C 0

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)

SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory AWG
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 100 metres
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
COAXIAL 75 Ω
Entrance panel with B/W video for
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

408
 409
Consult connection diagram
UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

Dwellings
ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
CONCIERGE
Only in 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++
installations with
concierge unit
M M
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

1 2 3
M 4 5 6
Only in
7 8 9
DIV-024 C 0
installations with
concierge unit
PAK-03020
75 Ohm Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White 19 White
+ 19 19
+_ +_
TCB-011 White White
19 TCB-011
TCB-021 + TCB-021
19
Red
19
19 19
Red Red
Red
ALC-070 Next
GRF-211 GRF-012 point of entry
ALC-070 GRF-212 GRF-212
Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
230V~ ++
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Earth 230 V
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

Earth
C 0
230 V
KPD-001 KPD-001
cod. 9650002 cod. 9650002 Note: Make the same
ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT ALM-040 ALM-040 OUT connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration 230 V 230 V Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 8: Position 8:
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult page 426 and 427. Position 1:
Position 8:

410
HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of
entry and entrance panel with pushbuttons, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings with entrance panel with
keypad. With a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors) per building. For buildings with a number of devi-
ces greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
For communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry while, at the
same time, communication is established with another dwelling from the entrance panel of its building, one estate identifying acces-
sory, model AIB-000, must be used per dwelling. Any number between '1' and '99' can be assigned to an AIB-000 accessory.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel at the external point of entry is configured as the external panel. The entrance panel of each building is con-
figured as the main panel (with the J1 jumper inserted).
The configuration parameters are indicated in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connection bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located.
See chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

411
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

2 2 2
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

2 2 2
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR

2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

POINT OF ENTRY POINT OF ENTRY POINT OF ENTRY

230 V V
BUILDING 1 230 V V
BUILDING 2 230 V V
BUILDING 3

2 2 2
ALC-070 (230 V ) 2 ALC-070 (230 V ) 2 ALC-070 (230 V ) 2

MDN-471 MDN-471 MDN-471

230V~ ++ MDN-472 230V~ ++ MDN-472 230V~ ++ MDN-472
2 + 2 + 2 +
MPD-004 MPD-004 MPD-004
+ + +
COL-000 ABR-011 COL-000 ABR-011 COL-000 ABR-011
+ (1) + (1) + (1)
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
2 + 2 + 2 +
CMO-006 CMO-006 CMO-006
2 2

COAX 2 COAX COAX

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070

DIV-124 (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

ALC-070 ALM-040 ALM-040

(230 V ) (230 V ) 2 EXTERNAL
(230 V )
2 POINT OF 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
ENTRY 2
V 230 V V
2
++
2
230V~ 230 V

2
COAX COAX
2 Only in
2 installations with 1 2 3

2 concierge unit 2 4

7
5

8
6

9
1 2 3

2
C 0
4 5 6

C
8

0
9
2

PAK-03020
MCB-002
ABR-011 MCC-002
(1) +
SCC-030

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems SECTION TABLE
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows AWG
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems Up to 100 metres
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
External entrance panel with B/W video for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
PDK-44300 installations with concierge systems COAXIAL 75 Ω
External entrance panel with colour video for Up to 25 metres
PDK-44500 installations with concierge systems 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

412 CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

 Interior buildings

413
HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH

Consult connection diagram

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
Only in
P1 installations with
concierge unit
230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
M 15V M DIV-124
Only in 1
4

2
5

3
6
installations with 7
C

8
0

9
concierge unit
Entrance panel of external point of entry
75 Ohm MCB-002 PAK-03020
White 19 MCC-002
+ V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 +
SCC-030
White 19
+_
19 TCB-011
TCB-021
Red
Red 19
ALC-070 GRF-211
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

GRF-214
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

230 V
ALM-040
KPD-001
OUT
230 V V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
ALM-040
Position 1:
Position 2:

KEYPAD.
230 V V~
ABR-011
Position 3: (1)
230 V Position 8:
(1) Select the number of interior buildings
 WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

Building 1 Building 2 Building 3

Dwellings Dwellings Dwellings

Point of entry Point of entry

building 2 building 3
COAX Main COAX Main
ALM-040 entrance panel ALM-040 entrance panel
J1 J1
230 V V 230 V V

230 V 230 V
ALC-070 ALC-070

230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

Earth 230 V 1 2 3 4 Earth 230 V 1 2 3 4

MDN-471 MDN-471
MDN-472 MDN-472
SW1

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ +
MPD-004 MPD-004
ALM-040 + +
75 Ohm Point of entry building 1 COL-000 Detail of number COL-000 Detail of number
Main entrance panel + assigning of the + assigning of the
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
+ (number 2) + (number 3)
230 V V~
CMO-006 CMO-006
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
230 V White 19 +_
White 19
+ TCB-011
TCB-021

19
cod. 9610009
J1
Red Red 19
P1
J1 J2
ALC-070
GRF-208
IN
+ 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 7 D1 D2 D3

230V~ ++

Earth AIB-000
230 V
D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1
IN
OUT

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
SW1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

cod. 9730030

8 7
COL-000 1 2 3 4
SW1

6 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 3
Detail of number
assigning of the AIB-000
2 1 (number 1)

Note: Make the same connections

at all the interior points of entry
of building

ABR-011

External point of entry

414
 415
Concierge
A J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2 Red
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN EACH DWELLING

GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates
with several buildings
Position 1:
Position 8:
Consult page 421.
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of
entry and entrance panel with keypad, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings with entrance panel with key-
pad. With a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors) per building. For buildings with a number of devices
greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
To allow communication to be established with a dwelling from the entrance panel at the external point of entry while, at the same
time, allowing communication to take place with another dwelling from the entrance panel of the building in which it is located, a
different number must be assigned to the entrance panel of each building when the panels are being programmed. Any number bet-
ween '1' and '99' can be assigned to an entrance panel.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel at the external point of entry is configured as the external panel. The entrance panel of each building is con-
figured as the main panel. The configuration parameters are indicated in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connection bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located.
See Chapter 7.
Note: The connection bracket in each dwelling is programmed with a code number between '1' and '999'.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6..

416
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
2 2 2
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2 2 COAX 2
LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

2 2 2
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALM-040

(230 V ) COAX (230 V ) COAX (230 V ) COAX
2 2 2 2 2 2

230 V V
POINT OF ENTRY 230 V V
POINT OF ENTRY 230 V V
POINT OF ENTRY
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
ALM-040 ALM-040 ALM-040
(230 V ) 2 (230 V ) 2 (230 V ) 2

2 2 2
230 V V 230 V V 230 V V
2 2 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

2 4

7
5

8
6

9
2 4

7
5

8
6

9
2 4

7
5

8
6

ALC-070 (230 V ) C 0
ALC-070 (230 V ) C 0
ALC-070 (230 V ) C 0

230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

2 ABR-011 2 ABR-011 2 ABR-011

(1) (1) (1)
2 2

COAX 2 COAX COAX

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070

DIV-124 (230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )

ALC-070 ALM-040 ALM-040

(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V ) 2 EXTERNAL
2 POINT OF 230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
ENTRY
2
V 230 V V
2
++
2
230V~ 230 V

2
COAX COAX
2 Only in
2 installations with 1 2 3

2 concierge unit 2 4

7
5

8
6

9
1 2 3

2
C 0
4 5 6

C
8

0
9
2

PAK-03020
MCB-002
ABR-011 MCC-002
(1) +
SCC-030

Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box SECTION TABLE
External entrance panel with B/W video for AWG
PDK-44300 installations with concierge systems Up to 100 metres
External entrance panel with colour video for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
PDK-44500 installations with concierge systems
COAXIAL 75 Ω
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Points of entry buildings 1, 2 y 3 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Entrance panel with B/W video for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41300 installations without concierge systems (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-41500 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
Entrance panel with B/W video for
PDK-42300 installations with concierge systems 417
Entrance panel with colour video for
PDK-42500 installations with concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
 Interior buildings
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.

Consult connection diagram

ALM-040 ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V ) (230 V )
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH

Only in
P1 installations with
concierge unit
230 V V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
M 15V M DIV-124
Only in 1
4

2
5

3
6
installations with 7
C

8
0

9
concierge unit
Entrance panel of external point of entry
75 Ohm MCB-002 PAK-03020
White 19 MCC-002
+ V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 +
SCC-030
White 19
+_
19 TCB-011
TCB-021
Red
Red 19
ALC-070
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

GRF-211
GRF-214
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

Earth
230 V
ALM-040
KPD-001
OUT
230 V V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
ALM-040
Position 1:
Position 2:

KEYPAD.
230 V V~
ABR-011
Position 3: (1)
230 V Position 8:

418
(1) Select the number of interior buildings
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

Building 1 Building 2 Building 3

Dwellings Dwellings Dwellings

ALM-040 COAX ALM-040 COAX

Point of entry building 2 Point of entry building 3

Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
230 V V 230 V V

ALM-040 ALM-040

230 V V 230 V V

1 2 3 1 2 3

ALC-070 4

7
5

8
6

9
ALC-070 4

7
5

8
6

C 0 C 0

230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

230 V 230 V
Earth Earth

ABR-011 ABR-011

Point of entry building 1

Main entrance panel
75 Ohm

White 19 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 Entrance panel Entrance panel

+ configuration configuration
White
19
+_ Position 1: Position 1:
TCB-011
TCB-021
19
Position 2: Position 2:
Red

Position 3: Position 3:
Red 19

ALC-070
GRF-211
GRF-212
Made in Spain

IN

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++

Earth
230 V
ALM-040

KPD-001
OUT

230 V V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

230 V

Note: Make the same connections

ALM-040 at all the interior points of entry
of building

Entrance panel configuration

Position 1:
230 V V~

Position 2:
ABR-011
230 V
Position 3:

External point of entry

419
 Concierge
A J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
V1
M
M
V1
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2 Red
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN EACH DWELLING

GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-030
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry
ALM-040 ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates
with several buildings
Position 1:
Position 8:

Consult page 421

420
CONNECTION OF CONNECTION BRACKETS OF DWELLINGS IN BUILDINGS
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

BUILDING. STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM

WIRED DIAGRAM

DIV-024

B J1 B J1
M M
75 Ohm
V1 V1 M
R1 M R1 M
M M
V1 V1

CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030

LAST FLOOR

DIV-024

B J1 B J1 M M

M 75 Ohm
V1 V1
R1 M R1 M Extract
M M resistence 75 Ohm
V1 V1
CONNECTION
BRACKETS
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030

GROUND FLOOR

Entrance panel

421
BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

WIRED DIAGRAM

DIV-024

B J1 B J1
M M
75 Ohm
V1 V1 M
R1 M R1 M
M M
V1 V1

CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27
See power supply
S5 S5
diagram
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
9th FLOOR With number 9

DIV-024

B J1 B J1 M M

M 75 Ohm
V1 V1
R1 M R1 M Extract
M M resistence 75 Ohm
V1 V1
CONNECTION
BRACKETS
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
See power supply
S5 S5
diagram
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
GROUND FLOOR With number 0

Entrance panel

422
 POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM

USE ONE GCI-001

FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 9

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 1

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 0

230 V

423
BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
WIRED DIAGRAM
DIV-024

B J1 B J1
M M
75 Ohm
V1 V1 M
R1 M R1 M
M M
V1 V1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030

49th FLOOR

DIV-024

B J1 B J1 M M

M 75 Ohm
V1 V1
R1 M R1 M Extract
M M
CONNECTION resistence 75 Ohm
V1 V1
BRACKETS
See power supply
24 24
25 25
diagram
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SCM-030 SCM-030
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
With number 9
45th FLOOR

DIV-024

B J1 B J1 M M

M 75 Ohm
V1 V1
R1
M
R1
M Extract
M M resistence 75 Ohm
V1 V1
CONNECTION
BRACKETS
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030

4th FLOOR

DIV-024

B J1 B J1 M M

M 75 Ohm
V1 V1
R1 M R1 M Extract
M M CONNECTION resistence 75 Ohm
V1 V1
BRACKETS
See power supply
24 24
25 25
diagram
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SCM-030 SCM-030
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
GROUND FLOOR With number 0

424
Entrance panel
 POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM

USE ONE GCI-001

FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 9

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 1

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 0

230 V

425
BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
WIRED DIAGRAM

DIV-024

B J1 B J1
M M
75 Ohm
V1 V1 M
R1 M R1 M
M M
V1 V1

CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27
See power supply
S5 S5
diagram
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
49th FLOOR With number 49

DIV-024

B J1 B J1 M M

M 75 Ohm
V1 V1
R1 M R1 M Extract
M M resistence 75 Ohm
V1 V1
CONNECTION
BRACKETS
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
See power supply
S5 S5
diagram
S2 S2

D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-030 SCM-030 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
GROUND FLOOR With number 0

Entrance panel

426
 POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM

USE ONE GCI-001

FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 49

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 1

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 0

230 V

427
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD. ELECTRONIC CALL.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with a maximum of
150 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices greater than 50, where all the distri-
bution will be star-shaped, consult pages 432 to 443, according to the distribution of dwellings in the installation.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Entrance panel configuration
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring
diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. Each connections bracket is
programmed with the digital code which is keyed in during the programming process. See Chapter 7.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

428
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2
2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED
PAIR
SCM-040 SCM-040
2 2
LAST FLOOR
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
<50m <50m
UTP CAT 5E
DIV-034

Up to 25 metres
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
DIV-034
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2
2 2 2 2
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-040 SCM-040
GROUND FLOOR

TWISTED
PAIR Only in
2 2
installations with ALM-040 ALC-070
concierge unit (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR 2
POINT
230 V V 230V~ ++ OF ENTRY 2
2
2
TWISTED PAIR 1 2 3

2 Only in 4

7
5

8
6

installations with C 0

2 2
2 concierge unit
1 2 3

MCB-002 PAK-03020
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
MCC-002
+
ABR-011 SCC-040
(1)

Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

429
 Dwellings
Only in
DIV-034 installations with
DIV-034 cod.9730015
concierge unit
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
220 Ohm
Point of entry
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
19 TCB-040
TCB-050
Consult connection diagram
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

19
230V~ ++ ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
GRF-211
GRF-212
Earth CONCIERGE
230 V
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

230 V V 230V~ ++
Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Only in 1 2 3
ALM-040 installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit
C 0
KPD-001 MCB-002 PAK-03020
OUT MCC-002
230 V V~ +
SCC-040
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2: ABR-011
Position 3:

430
 431
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

A
CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Position 1:
Consult page 470.
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can
have up to 450 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 9 floors and with a maximum of 50 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the connection brac-
kets can be programmed with any number between 1 and 999.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

432
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002 TWISTED
+ 2 PAIR
SCM-040
9th FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-040
GROUND FLOOR

2 TWISTED 2 Only in
PAIR ALM-040 ALC-070
installations with (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-034 concierge unit
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR 2
POINT OF
230 V V 230V~ ++ ENTRY 2
2
2
TWISTED PAIR 1 2 3

2 Only in 4

7
5

8
6

installations with C 0

2 2
2 concierge unit
1 2 3

MCB-002 PAK-03020
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
MCC-002
+
ABR-011 SCC-040
(1)
SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems AWG
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 100 metres
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
UTP CAT 5E
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems Up to 25 metres

Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems 0.8 mm 20
0.5 mm 2
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

433
 Dwellings
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS AND WITH A

Only in
DIV-034
installations with
DIV-034 cod.9730015
concierge unit
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
220 Ohm
Point of entry
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
19 TCB-040
TCB-050
Consult connection diagram
MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

19
230V~ ++ ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
GRF-211
Earth GRF-212
230 V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Made in Spain
IN
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Only in 1 2 3
ALM-040 installations with 4
7

5
8

6
9
concierge unit C 0
KPD-001 MCB-002 PAK-03020
OUT MCC-002
230 V V~ +
SCC-040
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2:
ABR-011
Position 3:

434
Position 8:
 435
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult pages 471 and 472.
Position 1:
Position 8:
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can
have up to 490 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 10 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One AIB-001 accessory is installed every five floors, starting with the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories, beginning with the number '0' (the AIB-001 of the ground floor
to the 4th floor) and ending with the number '9' (the AIB-001 of the 45th floor to the 49th floor).

Entrance panel configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the connection brac-
kets can be programmed with any number between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

436
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2

2 2

MVB-002
MVC-002 2
+
SCM-040
49th FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
2
2 2 AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

45th FLOOR
230V~ I2

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2

2 2

MVB-002
MVC-002 2
+
SCM-040
4th FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2
2 2 AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
TWISTED
2 PAIR 2
GROUND FLOOR 230V~ I2

Only in
installations with ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-034 concierge unit
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR 2
POINT OF
230 V V 230V~ ++ ENTRY 2
2
2
TWISTED PAIR 1 2 3

2 Only in 4

7
5

8
6

installations with C 0

2 2
2 concierge unit
1 2 3

MCB-002 PAK-03020
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
MCC-002
+
ABR-011 SCC-040
(1)

Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory SECTION TABLE
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems AWG
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for Up to 100 metres
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for UTP CAT 5E
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems
Up to 25 metres
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
437
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A

Dwellings
Only in
DIV-034
installations with
DIV-034 cod.9730015
concierge unit
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
220 Ohm
Point of entry
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
19 TCB-040
TCB-050
Consult connection diagram
MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

19
230V~ ++ ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
GRF-211
Earth GRF-212
230 V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Made in Spain
IN
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Only in 1 2 3
ALM-040 installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit
C 0
KPD-001 MCB-002 PAK-03020
OUT MCC-002
230 V V~ +
SCC-040
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2:
ABR-011
Position 3:

438
Position 8:
 439
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult pages 473 and 474.
Position 1:
Position 8:
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A
MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, where the building can
have up to 931 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 19 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panel configuration

The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main entrance panel and in such a way that the connection brac-
kets can be programmed with any number between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building. See Chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the telephones on each floor depends on the number which
has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

440
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 49 49 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002 TWISTED
+ 2 PAIR
SCM-040
49th FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2 2
AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
230V~ I2

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-040
GROUND FLOOR

2 TWISTED 2 Only in
PAIR ALM-040 ALC-070
installations with (230 V ) (230 V )
DIV-034 concierge unit
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR 2
POINT OF
230 V V 230V~ ++ ENTRY 2
2
2
TWISTED PAIR 1 2 3

2 Only in 4

7
5

8
6

installations with C 0

2 2
2 concierge unit
1 2 3

MCB-002 PAK-03020
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0
MCC-002
+
ABR-011 SCC-040
(1)
SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory AWG
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows Up to 100 metres
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
UTP CAT 5E
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

441
 Dwellings
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A

Only in
DIV-034
installations with
DIV-034 cod.9730015
concierge unit
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
220 Ohm
Point of entry
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
19 TCB-040
TCB-050
Consult connection diagram
MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

19
230V~ ++ ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
GRF-211
Earth GRF-212
230 V 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Made in Spain
IN
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

Only in 1 2 3
ALM-040 installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit
C 0
KPD-001 MCB-002 PAK-03020
OUT MCC-002
230 V V~ +
SCC-040
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Entrance panel configuration
Position 1:
Position 2:
ABR-011
Position 3:
Position 8:

442
 443
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult pages 475 and 476.
Position 1:
Position 8:
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

Standard wiring diagram for digital video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, with a maximum of
150 devices (devices are telephones and monitors). For installations with a number of devices greater than 50, where all the distri-
bution will be star-shaped, consult pages 448 to 459, according to the distribution of dwellings in the installation.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Entrance panels configuration
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel. The panels of the other points of entry must be configured as
secondary panels. The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
Each connections bracket is programmed with the digital code which is keyed in during the programming process. See Chapter 7.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

444
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015
SECTION TABLE
AWG
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034 Up to 100 metres

2 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 2 2 2 UTP CAT 5E
Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED
PAIR
SCM-040 SCM-040
2 2 ALM-040 ALC-070
LAST FLOOR (230 V ) (230 V )

230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

<50m <50m 2
DIV-034
cod.9730015 2
2
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 TWISTED PAIR 1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

2 2 2 2 C 0

MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
+
SCC-040
MVB-002 MVB-002
MVC-002 MVC-002
+ +
SCM-040 SCM-040
GROUND FLOOR

TWISTED Only in
2
PAIR
2
installations with
concierge unit
DIV-034 TWISTED
ALM-040 DIV-034
cod.9730015

PAIR ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
Only in ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )
2 installations with
TWISTED concierge unit
PAIR NEXT
POINT OF POINT OF
230 V V 230V~ ++ ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 230V~ ++ 230 V V POINT OF ENTRY

2 2

2 TWISTED 2
TWISTED
PAIR PAIR
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

2 7

C
8

0
9 7

C
8

0
9
2 7

C
8

0
9

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)

Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

445
 Dwellings Consult connection diagram
ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Only in
installations with
DIV-034
concierge unit
DIV-034 cod.9730015
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 Only in 1 2 3
installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

concierge unit
C 0
PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
220 Ohm
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
TCB-040
19 TCB-040 19 TCB-050
ALC-070 TCB-050
230V~ ++
19 19 Next point
Earth of entry
230V~ ++ 230 V
GRF-211 GRF-211
Earth GRF-212 GRF-212
230 V Made in Spain Made in Spain
IN IN
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
ALM-040
ALM-040
KPD-001 KPD-001
OUT OUT
230 V V~ + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
230 V
Entrance panel configuration Note: Make the same connections at
all the secondary entrance panels
Position 1:
Entrance panel configuration
Position 2: Position 1:
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3: (1) Position 2: (2)
(1) Select the number of secondary Position 3:
entrance panels in the building

446
(2) Assign a different number to each
secondary entrance panel
 447
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

A
CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
with several points of entry
Consult page 470. Position 1:
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 9
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building
can have up to 450 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 9 floors and with a maximum of 50 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle connections bracket programming codes between 1 and 999.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
See chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

448
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015
AIB-001
9
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
2 DIV-034
AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 2 2
AIB-001 230V~ I2

2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
9
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
MVB-002 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
MVC-002 TWISTED AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ 2 PAIR 2
SCM-040
230V~ I2

9th FLOOR

<50m <50m
ALM-040 ALC-070
DIV-034
cod.9730015
(230 V ) (230 V )
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2 2 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
AIB-001 2
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 2
AIB-001
SW1

2
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TWISTED PAIR 1 2 3

4 5 6

MVB-002 7 8 9

MVC-002
C 0

2
+
SCM-040
MCB-002 PAK-03020
GROUND FLOOR MCC-002
+
TWISTED Only in SCC-040
2 PAIR 2 installations with
concierge unit
DIV-034 TWISTED
ALM-040 DIV-034
cod.9730015

PAIR ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
Only in ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )
2 installations with
TWISTED concierge unit
PAIR NEXT
POINT OF POINT OF
230 V V 230V~ ++ ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 230V~ ++ 230 V V POINT OF ENTRY

2 2

2 2 TWISTED
TWISTED
PAIR PAIR
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

2 7

C
8

0
9 7

C
8

0
9
2 7

C
8

0
9

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)
SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory AWG
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems Up to 100 metres
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
UTP CAT 5E
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems
Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

449
 Dwellings Consult connection diagram
ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 9

230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

Only in
installations with
DIV-034
DIV-034 cod.9730015 concierge unit
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 Only in 1 2 3

installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit
C 0
PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
220 Ohm
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
TCB-040
19 TCB-040 19 TCB-050
ALC-070 TCB-050
230V~ ++
19 19 Next
Earth
230V~ ++
230 V point of entry
GRF-211 GRF-211
Earth GRF-212 GRF-212
230 V
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

Made in Spain Made in Spain

IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
ALM-040
ALM-040
KPD-001 KPD-001 Note: Make the same
OUT OUT connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
230 V V~ + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
Position 8: Position 8:

450
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 451
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
Consult pages 471 and 472.

with several points of entry

Position 1:
Position 8:
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.
UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+ TWISTED PAIR
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building
can have up to 490 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 10 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One AIB-001 accessory is installed every five floors, starting with the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories, beginning with the number '0' (the AIB-001 of the ground floor
to the 4th floor) and ending with the number '9' (the AIB-001 of the 45th floor to the 49th floor).

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle connections bracket programming codes between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
See chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

452
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY
INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
FOR EVERY 5 FLOORS FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2

2 2

MVB-002
MVC-002 2
+
SCM-040
49th FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
2
2 2 AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 9 9 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001

SW1
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

45th FLOOR
230V~ I2

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2
DIV-034
2 2

2 2

MVB-002
MVC-002 2
+
SCM-040
4th FLOOR

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2
2 2 AIB-001 AIB-001
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
AIB-001 AIB-001
SW1

SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GROUND FLOOR 230V~ I2

ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )

230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

2

2
2

TWISTED TWISTED PAIR

2 PAIR 2 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

C 0

MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
Only in +
installations with SCC-040
concierge unit
DIV-034 TWISTED
ALM-040 DIV-034
PAIR
ALM-040
cod.9730015

(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Only in ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )
installations with
TWISTED 2
concierge unit
PAIR NEXT
POINT OF POINT OF
230 V V 230V~ ++
ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 230V~ ++ 230 V V POINT OF ENTRY

2 2

2 TWISTED 2
TWISTED
PAIR PAIR
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

2 7

C
8

0
9 7

C
8

0
9
2 7

C
8

0
9

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)

Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory SECTION TABLE
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems AWG
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for Up to 100 metres
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems
UTP CAT 5E
Up to 25 metres
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems 1 mm 2
0.5 mm 2
1.1 mm
0.8 mm
17
20
453
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A
 Dwellings Consult connection diagram
ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 49

230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE

Only in
installations with
DIV-034
DIV-034 cod.9730015 concierge unit
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 Only in 1 2 3

installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit
C 0
PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
220 Ohm
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
TCB-040
19 TCB-040 19 TCB-050
ALC-070 TCB-050
230V~ ++
19 19 Next
Earth point of entry
230V~ ++
230 V
GRF-211 GRF-211
Earth GRF-212 GRF-212
230 V Made in Spain Made in Spain
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
ALM-040
ALM-040
KPD-001 KPD-001 Note: Make the same
OUT OUT connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
230 V V~ + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
Position 8: Position 8:

454
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 455
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
Consult pages 473 and 474.

with several points of entry

Position 1:
Position 8:
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. UP TO 49
FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, where the building
can have up to 931 dwellings distributed on a maximum of 49 floors and with a maximum of 19 dwellings per floor.

Remarks
Number of accessories for digital installations, model AIB-001
One accessory, model AIB-001, is installed on every floor, including the ground floor.
Consecutive numbers, beginning with the number '0', are assigned to the AIB-001 accessories.

Entrance panels configuration

Configure the entrance panel at one of the points of entry as the main panel. The panels at the other points of entry must be con-
figured as secondary panels. All the panels must be able to handle connections bracket programming codes between 1 and 4919.
The configuration parameters are shown in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
See chapter 7.
Note: The range of values possible for the programming codes of the connection brackets on each floor depends on the number
which has been assigned to the AIB-001 accessory on each floor.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

456
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COMMUNICATION BUS CONNECTION POWER SUPPLY OF AIB-001 ACCESSORY

INSTALL ONE AIB-001 ACCESSORY USE ONE GCI-001
PER FLOOR FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

<50m <50m
DIV-034
cod.9730015
AIB-001
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 49 GCI-001 (230 V )
DIV-034 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 2
2
AIB-001
2 2 230V~ I2

D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
49
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
MVB-002 0 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 GCI-001 (230 V )
MVC-002 TWISTED AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+ 2 PAIR 2
SCM-040
230V~ I2

49th FLOOR

<50m <50m
ALM-040 ALC-070
DIV-034
cod.9730015
(230 V ) (230 V )
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034
2 2 2 230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
AIB-001 2
2 2
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1 0 2
AIB-001
SW1

2
cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TWISTED PAIR 1 2 3

4 5 6

MVB-002 7 8 9

MVC-002
C 0

2
+
SCM-040
MCB-002 PAK-03020
GROUND FLOOR MCC-002
+
TWISTED
Only in SCC-040
2 PAIR 2 installations with
concierge unit
DIV-034 TWISTED
ALM-040 DIV-034
cod.9730015

PAIR ALM-040
(230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
Only in ALC-070 (230 V ) (230 V )
2 installations with
TWISTED concierge unit
PAIR NEXT
POINT OF POINT OF
230 V V 230V~ ++ ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 230V~ ++ 230 V V POINT OF ENTRY

2 2

2 2
TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR
1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

6
2 1

4
2

5
3

2 7

C
8

0
9 7

C
8

0
9
2 7

C
8

0
9

ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1)
SECTION TABLE
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory AWG
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems
Up to 100 metres
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems
17
CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
UTP CAT 5E
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-42600 installations with concierge systems 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

457
 Dwellings Consult connection diagram
ALM-040 ALC-070
UP TO 49 FLOORS AND WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR

(230 V ) (230 V )
230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
Only in
installations with
DIV-034
DIV-034 cod.9730015 concierge unit
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 Only in 1 2 3
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

installations with
4 5 6
7 8 9
concierge unit
C 0
PAK-03020
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
220 Ohm
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALC-070
TCB-040
19 TCB-040 19 TCB-050
ALC-070 TCB-050
230V~ ++
19 19 Next
Earth point of entry
230V~ ++
230 V
GRF-211 GRF-211
Earth GRF-212 GRF-212
230 V Made in Spain Made in Spain
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

IN IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0
ALM-040
ALM-040
KPD-001 KPD-001 Note: Make the same
OUT OUT connections at all the
secondary entrance panels
230 V V~ + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V 230 V
Entrance panel configuration Entrance panel configuration
Position 1: Position 1:
Position 2: Position 2: (2)
ABR-011 ABR-011
Position 3: (1) Position 3:
Position 8: Position 8:

458
(1) Select the number of secondary (2) Assign a different number to each
entrance panels in the building secondary entrance panel
 459
Concierge
B J1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

R1
T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN THE DWELLINGS

P2 Red GRF-013
cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Standard installation or installation
Consult pages 475 and 476.

with several points of entry

Position 1:
Position 8:
HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR
Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of
entry and entrance panel with pushbuttons, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings with entrance panel with
keypad. With a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors) per building. For buildings with a number of devi-
ces greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
For communication to be established with one of the dwellings from the entrance panel at the external point of entry while, at the
same time, communication is established with another dwelling from the entrance panel of its building, one estate identifying acces-
sory, model AIB-000, must be used per dwelling. Any number between '1' and '99' can be assigned to an AIB-000 accessory.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel at the external point of entry is configured as the external panel. The entrance panel of each building is con-
figured as the main panel (with the J1 jumper inserted).
The configuration parameters are indicated in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connection bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located.
See Chapter 7.
Note: The connections bracket of each dwelling is programmed with a digital code from '1' to '96', depending on the number
of the concentrator wire and the concentrator number to which the pushbutton corresponding to the dwelling is connected.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

460
SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
<50m <50m <50m <50m <50m <50m
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED + + TWISTED + + TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
2 2 2 2 2 2
LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m <50m <50m <50m <50m

DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR
2 TWISTED 2 2 TWISTED 2 2 TWISTED 2
ALM-040 (230 V ) PAIR ALM-040 (230 V ) PAIR ALM-040 (230 V ) PAIR

POINT OF ENTRY POINT OF ENTRY POINT OF ENTRY

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
230 V V 230 V V 230 V V

1 1 1
ALC-070 (230 V ) 2 ALC-070 (230 V ) 2 ALC-070 (230 V ) 2

MDN-474 MDN-474 MDN-474

230V~ ++ MDN-475 230V~ ++ MDN-475 230V~ ++ MDN-475
+ + +
MPD-004 MPD-004 MPD-004
2 + 2 + 2 +
COL-000 ABR-011 COL-000 ABR-011 COL-000 ABR-011
+ (1) + (1) + (1)
AIB-000 AIB-000 AIB-000
+ + +
CMO-006 CMO-006 CMO-006
2 2 2 2 2

TWISTED 2 TWISTED TWISTED

PAIR PAIR PAIR

TWISTED PAIR
DIV-134
DIV-134
cod.9730016
ALM-040 ALC-070
12 V

V
15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
2 (230 V ) (230 V )

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) EXTERNAL

POINT OF ENTRY TWISTED
230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
2
PAIR 2
230 V V ++
2
230V~

2
2 2
TWISTED PAIR
2
1 2 3

1 2 3
Only in 4

7
5

8
6

2
4 5 6

7 8 9
installations with C 0

C 0
2 2
concierge unit

MCB-002 PAK-03020
ABR-011 MCC-002
(1) +
SCC-040

Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems SECTION TABLE
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows AWG
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box Up to 100 metres

External entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
PDK-44400 installations with concierge systems UTP CAT 5E
External entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for Up to 25 metres
PDK-44600 installations with concierge systems
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

461
 Internal buildings
Consult connection diagram
PUSHBUTTONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE

ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
Only in
DIV-134 installations with
cod.9730016
concierge unit
HOUSING ESTATE OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH

230 V V 230V~ ++
CONCIERGE
DIV-134 12V 15 V
+
V T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
Only in 1
4

2
5

3
6
installations with 7
C

8
0

9
Entrance panel of concierge unit
220 Ohm
external point of entry
MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ +
SCC-030
TCB-040
19 TCB-050
19
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

ALC-070 GRF-211
GRF-214
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

Made in Spain
IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
ALM-040
KPD-001
PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
OUT
230 V V~ + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Configuration of entrance panel
Position 1:
Position 2:
Position 3: (1) ABR-011

462
Position 8:
(1) Select number of interior buildings
 WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

Building 1 Building 2 Building 3

Dwellings Dwellings Dwellings

Point of entry Point of entry

ALM-040 building 2 ALM-040 building 3
Main Main
entrance panel entrance panel
230 V V 230 V V

J1 J1
230 V 230 V
ALC-070 ALC-070

230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

Earth 230 V Earth 230 V

MDN-471 1 2 3 4 MDN-471 1 2 3 4

MDN-472 MDN-472

SW1

SW1
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +
COL-000 COL-000
+ Detail of number + Detail of number
AIB-000 assigning of the AIB-000 assigning of the
+ AIB-000 + AIB-000
CMO-006 (number 2) CMO-006 (number 3)
Point of entry building 1
220 Ohm Main entrance panel

ALM-040

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

230 V V~
19
19 J1J 1J 1 TCB-040
TCB-050
230 V
cod. 9610009
J1
ALC-070 19
P1
J1 J2

GRF-208
IN
+ 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18 7 D1 D2 D3
230V~ ++

Earth 230 V
AIB-000

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V~ 1 2 3 4
1
OUT

IN

D1 D2 D5 D4 D3 D2 18 V 1 2 3 4
OUT
AIB-000
SW1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16 cod. 9730014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

cod. 9730030

8 7
COL-000 1 2 3 4
SW1

6 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 3
Detail of number
assigning of the AIB-000
2 1 (number 1)

Note: Make the same connections

at all the interior points of entry
of building

ABR-011

External point of entry

463
 Concierge
A J1
R1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN EACH DWELLING

cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates
with several buildings
Position 1:
Position 8:
Consult page 470.

464
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

Standard wiring diagram for digital electronic video door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, with one point of
entry and entrance panel with keypad, and an external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings with entrance panel with key-
pad. With a maximum of 96 devices (devices are telephones and monitors) per building. For buildings with a number of devices
greater than 50, where all the distribution will be star-shaped, consult the manufacturer.
If you have any doubts, consult the manufacturer.

Remarks
Identifying the entrance panels of the buildings
To allow communication to be established with a dwelling from the entrance panel at the external point of entry while, at the same
time, allowing communication to take place with another dwelling from the entrance panel of the building in which it is located, a
different number must be assigned to the entrance panel of each building when the panels are being programmed. Any number bet-
ween '1' and '99' can be assigned to an entrance panel.

Entrance panels configuration

The entrance panel at the external point of entry is configured as the external panel. The entrance panel of each building is con-
figured as the main panel. The configuration parameters are indicated in the wiring diagram. For more information, see Chapter 6.

Programming the connection brackets of each dwelling

The connection bracket of each dwelling is programmed from the entrance panel of the building in which the dwelling is located.
See Chapter 7.
Note: The connection bracket in each dwelling is programmed with a code number between '1' and '999'.

Installation with concierge unit: concierge panel configuration

See the configuration parameters in the wiring diagram of the concierge unit panel. For more information, see Chapter 6.

465
 SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
<50m <50m <50m <50m <50m <50m
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + TWISTED + + TWISTED + + TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
2 2 2 2 2 2
LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m <50m <50m <50m <50m

DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034 2 DIV-034

2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002 MVB-002

MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002 MVC-002
+ + + + + +
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR
2 TWISTED 2 2 TWISTED 2 2 TWISTED 2
PAIR PAIR PAIR
ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )
POINT OF ENTRY POINT OF ENTRY POINT OF ENTRY
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
230V~ ++ 230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

2 2 2

ALM-040 (230 V ) 1 2 3 2 ALM-040 (230 V ) 1 2 3 2 ALM-040 (230 V ) 1 2 3 2

2 4

7
5

8
6

9
2 4

7
5

8
6

9
2 4

7
5

8
6

C 0 C 0 C 0

230 V V 230 V V 230 V V

2 2 2
ABR-011 ABR-011 ABR-011
(1) (1) (1)
2 2

TWISTED 2 TWISTED TWISTED

PAIR PAIR PAIR

TWISTED PAIR
DIV-134
DIV-134
cod.9730016
ALM-040 ALC-070
12 V

V
15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
2 (230 V ) (230 V )

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V ) EXTERNAL

POINT OF ENTRY TWISTED
230 V V 230V~ ++ CONCIERGE
2
PAIR 2
230 V V ++
2
230V~

2
2 2
TWISTED PAIR
2
1 2 3

1 2 3
Only in 4

7
5

8
6

2
4 5 6

7 8 9
installations with C 0

C 0
2 2
concierge unit

MCB-002 PAK-03020
ABR-011 MCC-002
(1) +
SCC-040

Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box
External entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for
PDK-44400 installations with concierge systems
External entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
PDK-44600 installations with concierge systems
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows SECTION TABLE
AWG
Points of entry buildings 1, 2 y 3 Up to 100 metres

Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for PTN-00000 Entrance panel with directory 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
PDK-41400 installations without concierge systems
UTP CAT 5E
CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for Up to 25 metres
PDK-41600 installations without concierge systems CEM-001 Separators for flush-mounted box 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Entrance panel with B/W video twisted pair for 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
PDK-42400 installations with concierge systems
466 PDK-42600
Entrance panel with colour video twisted pair for
installations with concierge systems
(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

CMO-008 Flush-mounted box 7-8 rows

 467
HOUSING ESTATES OF 3 BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.

Internal buildings
Consult connection diagram
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH

ALM-040 ALC-070
(230 V ) (230 V )
Only in
DIV-134 installations with
cod.9730016
concierge unit 230 V V 230V~ ++
CONCIERGE
DIV-134 12V 15 V
+
V T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
Only in 1
4

2
5

3
6
installations with 7
C

8
0

9
Entrance panel of concierge unit
220 Ohm
external point of entry
MCB-002 PAK-03020
MCC-002
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ +
SCC-030
TCB-040
19 TCB-050
19
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

ALC-070 GRF-211
GRF-214
Made in Spain
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
230V~ ++
Earth
230 V
ALM-040
KPD-001
OUT
230 V V~ + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V
Configuration of entrance panel
Position 1:
Position 2:
Position 3: (1) ABR-011

KEYPAD.
Position 8:
(1) Select number of interior buildings
 WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE ENTRANCE PANELS IN THE BUILDINGS

Building 1 Building 2 Building 3

Dwellings Dwellings Dwellings

ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++ Point of entry 230V~ ++ Point of entry

building 2 building 3
Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
230 V 230 V
Earth Earth

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

1 2 3 1 2 3
230 V V 4 5 6 230 V V 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9

C 0 C 0

230 V 230 V

ABR-011 ABR-011

220 Ohm Point of entry building 1

Main entrance panel

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

ALC-070 Entrance panel Entrance panel

19 TCB-040 configuration configuration
TCB-050

Position 1: Position 1:

230V~ ++ 19 Position 2: Position 2:

Position 3: Position 3:
GRF-211
GRF-212
Earth
230 V Made in Spain

IN

+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

ALM-040

KPD-001
OUT

230 V V~ + 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

230 V
Note: Make the same connections
at all the interior points of entry
of building
Entrance panel configuration

Position 1:

Position 2: ABR-011

Position 3: External point of entry

468
 469
Concierge
A J1
R1
INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT: WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONCIERGE PANEL

T1+
T1-
T1-
T1+
19
ALC-070 25
E
D
C
27
B
A
CC2
P2 Red GRF-013
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE CONNECTION BRACKETS IN EACH DWELLING

cod. 9610020
Made in Spain
IN
230V~ ++
A B C D E + + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5
SCC-040
Earth 230 V
Entrance panel
External point of entry
ALM-040 KPD-003
cod. 9650003
OUT
V~ V~
+ + C3 NO3 NC3 C1 NO1 NC1 Ctrl3 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
230 V V~
230 V
Concierge panel configuration
Housing estates
with several buildings
Position 1:
Consult page 470. Position 8:
CONNECTION OF CONNECTION BRACKETS OF DWELLINGS IN BUILDINGS
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

BUILDING. STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM

WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1 R1 T1 <50m 120 Ohm

T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-040 SCM-040

LAST FLOOR

<50m
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1 R1 T1 <50m
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25 +
T1
T

T1
26 26 T1
+
T1

27 27
28 28
S5 S5
S2 S2
120 Ohm
D1 D2 D1 D2
Extract
SCM-040 SCM-040 resistence 120 Ohm

GROUND FLOOR

Entrance panel

470
BUILDING OF UP TO 9 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 50 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1 R1 T1 <50m 120 Ohm

T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27 See power supply
28 28 diagram
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-040 SCM-040 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
9th FLOOR With number 9

<50m T1
+
T1
Extract
T1
+
T1
resistence 120 Ohm
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 120 Ohm T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

<50m DIV-034
R1 T1 R1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27 See power supply
28 28 diagram
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-040 SCM-040 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
GROUND FLOOR With number 0

Entrance panel

471
 POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM

USE ONE GCI-001

FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 9

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 1

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 0

230 V

472
BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 10 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
WIRED DIAGRAM
<50m
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1 R1 T1 <50m 120 Ohm

T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27 See power supply
28 28 diagram
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-040 SCM-040 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
With number 49
49th FLOOR

<50m T1
+
T1
Extract
resistence 120 Ohm
T1
+
T1

DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 120 Ohm T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

<50m DIV-034
R1 T1 R1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27 See power supply
28 28 diagram
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-040 SCM-040 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
With number 0
GROUND FLOOR

Entrance panel

473
 POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM

USE ONE GCI-001

FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 9

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 1

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 0

230 V

474
BUILDING OF UP TO 49 FLOORS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 19 DWELLINGS PER FLOOR
WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1 R1 T1 <50m 120 Ohm

T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27 See power supply
28 28 diagram
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-040 SCM-040 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001

SW1
cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
With number 49
49th FLOOR

<50m T1
+
T1
Extract
T1
+
T1
resistence 120 Ohm
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1 B J1 120 Ohm T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

<50m DIV-034
R1 T1 R1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1 T1
CONNECTION
24 24 BRACKETS
25 25
26 26
27 27 See power supply
28 28 diagram
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

SCM-040 SCM-040 D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIB-001
With number 0
GROUND FLOOR

Entrance panel

475
 POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM

USE ONE GCI-001

FOR EACH AIB-001 ACCESSORY

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1
ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 49

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 1

230 V

AIB-001
GCI-001
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I1
D1 D2 D1 D2 I1 I2 I2 I1

ON
AIB-001
SW1

cod. 9730055 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIB-001 230V~ I2 I1
With number 0

230 V

476
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATIONS
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH TELEPHONES

DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding telephones, to a maximum of 4 telephones. Each telephone will be
able to receive calls, communicate with the entrance panel and open the street door.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by all the telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical manual, it is possi-
ble to install up to 4 telephones.
All the telephones receive the call simultaneously.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2

TED-001

477
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding telephones, to a maximum of 4 devices per dwelling (devices are
telephones and monitors). Each telephone will be able to receive calls, communicate with the entrance panel and open the street
door.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by all the monitors and telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical manual,
it is possible to install up to 4 devices (devices are telephones and monitors).
All the devices receive the call simultaneously.

DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω

COAXIAL

2
2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 MVB-002

MVC-002
+
SCM-030
WIRED DIAGRAM

CC1
SECTION TABLE A B J1

AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
R1
COAXIAL 75 Ω MVB-002 SCM-030 V1
MVC-002 M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
S5
S2
D1 D2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

478
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

UTP CAT 5E

TWISTED PAIR

2
2 2 2 2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001 MVB-002

MVC-002
+
SCM-040
WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
CC1
A B J1
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

R1
UTP CAT 5E

MVB-002 SCM-040 T1+

MVC-002 T1-
T1-
T1+

24
25
26
27
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
S5
S2
D1 D2

TED-001 TED-001 TED-001

479
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH MONITORS

Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding more monitors, to a maximum of 4. Each monitor will have the same
features as the original monitor: auto switch-on, reception of calls, showing of image on screen, communication with the entrance
panel, and door-opening.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by all the monitors. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical manual, it is possible
to install up to 4 monitors.
All the monitors receive the call simultaneously.

EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH 1 MONITOR

DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Second monitor First monitor Second monitor First monitor
DIV-024
COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL

2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2

ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

2 2
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

480
WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF

Second monitor First monitor

A B
CC1
J1
B J1 A B
CC1
J1
B J1
75 Ohm

R1 SCM-030 R1 SCM-030
V1 V1
M M
M M
M M M

V1 V1 DIV-024

24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

ALC-070

230V~ ++

Earth
230 V

75 Ohm

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

TCB-011
TCB-021
TCB-011
A J1 A J1
GRF-208

R1 R1 J2

_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
SCM-030 SCM-030

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

ENTRANCE PANEL COAXIAL 75 Ω

481
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED
DIV-034
PAIR PAIR DIV-034
cod.9730015
PAIR PAIR
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2

ALC-070 (230 V ) ALC-070 (230 V )

230V~ ++ 230V~ ++

2 1 2 3 2
4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

UTP CAT 5E

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

482
WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF

Second First
monitor monitor

CC1 CC1
A B J1 B J1 A B J1 B J1

DIV-034
R1 SCM-040 R1 SCM-040
DIV-034
cod.9730015
T1+ T1+
T1- T1-
T1- T1- T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

T1+ T1+

24 24
25 25 120 Ohm
26 26
27 27
S5 S5
S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2

ALC-070

230V~ ++

Earth
230 V
220 Ohm

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

19
J1J 1J 1 TCB-040
TCB-050

A J1 A GRF-208
J1

J2

R1 R1
_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3

SCM-040 SCM-040

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ENTRANCE PANEL UTP CAT 5E

483
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH 3 MONITORS
Remarks
The power supply unit which is shown in the diagrams of this manual feeding the video system of the monitors can feed up to 2
monitors per dwelling. If 3 or 4 monitors are installed in a dwelling, an additional ALM-040 power supply unit will be required.

DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF
Fourth monitor Third monitor Second monitor First monitor
DIV-024
COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL

2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2

ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230V~ ++ 230 V V

2
2

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Fourth monitor Third monitor Second monitor First monitor
COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL

2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2

ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230V~ ++ 230 V V

2
2

SECTION TABLE 1

4
2

5
3

7 8 9

AWG C 0

Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω

ENTRANCE PANEL
484
 485
INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF
Fourth monitor Third monitor Second monitor First monitor
A B

CC1
J1
B J1 A B

CC1
J1
B J1 A B

CC1
J1
B J1 A B

CC1
J1
B J1
75 Ohm
R1 SCM-030 R1 SCM-030 R1 SCM-030 R1 SCM-030
V1 V1 V1 V1
M M
M M M M
M M M M M
V1 V1 V1 V1 DIV-024
24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
S5 S5 S5 S5
S2 S2 S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
ALC-070 ALM-040
INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF
230V~ ++ 230 V V~
Earth 230 V
A J1 230 V
A J1 A J1 A J1
75 Ohm
R1
R1 R1 R1
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030 SCM-030
TCB-011
TCB-021
TCB-011
WIRED DIAGRAM GRF-208
J2
SECTION TABLE
AWG _ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Up to 100 metres
ENTRANCE PANEL 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF

Fourth monitor TWISTED Third monitor TWISTED Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED DIV-034
PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2

ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230V~ ++ 230 V V

1 2
2

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

ENTRANCE PANEL

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Fourth monitor TWISTED Third monitor TWISTED Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR

2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2

ALC-070 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230V~ ++ 230 V V

1 2
2
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

SECTION TABLE C 0

AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

UTP CAT 5E

ENTRANCE PANEL
486
 487
INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF
Fourth Third Second First
monitor monitor monitor monitor
CC1 CC1 CC1 CC1
A B J1 B J1 A B J1 B J1 A B J1 B J1 A B J1 B J1
DIV-034
R1 SCM-040 R1 SCM-040 R1 SCM-040 R1 SCM-040
DIV-034
cod.9730015
T1+ T1+ T1+ T1+
T1- T1- T1- T1-
T1- T1- T1- T1- T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
T1+ T1+ T1+ T1+
24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 120 Ohm
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
S5 S5 S5 S5
S2 S2 S2 S2
D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
ALC-070 ALM-040
INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF
230V~ ++ 230 V V~
A J1 A A A Earth 230 V
J1 J1 J1 230 V
R1 R1 R1 R1
220 Ohm
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040 SCM-040
19
J1J 1J 1 TCB-040
TCB-050
WIRED DIAGRAM GRF-208
J2
SECTION TABLE
AWG
_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
Up to 100 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ENTRANCE PANEL
UTP CAT 5E
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH CALL EXTENSIONS

DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding call extensions, to a maximum of 3 devices per dwelling (where
devices are call extensions and telephones). Each call extension will be able to receive calls.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by the call extensions and telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical
manual, it is possible to install up to 3 devices (where devices are telephones and call extensions).
All the devices receive the call simultaneously.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 2
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

AAL-200

TED-001
+
AAL-120

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG TED-001 TED-001
D1 D2
Up to 100 metres +
S2 S5 AAL-120
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

AAL-200
S5 AAL-120
S2

488
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding call extensions, to a maximum of 3 devices per dwelling (where
devices are call extensions, monitors and telephones). Each call extension will be able to receive calls.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by the call extensions, monitors and telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this tech-
nical manual, it is possible to install up to 3 devices (where devices are call extensions, monitors and telephones).
All the devices receive the call simultaneously.

DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COAXIAL
SECTION TABLE
2
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 2
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω
AAL-200

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-030
WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
CC1 AWG
A B J1
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
COAXIAL 75 Ω
R1

MVB-002 SCM-030 V1
MVC-002 M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
S2 S5 S5
S2
D1 D2
AAL-200

489
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

TWISTED PAIR
SECTION TABLE
AWG
2
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 2
UTP CAT 5E
AAL-200

MVB-002
MVC-002
+
SCM-040

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
CC1
A B J1 AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

UTP CAT 5E
R1

MVB-002 SCM-040 T1+

MVC-002 T1-
T1-
T1+

24
25
26
27
S2 S5 S5
S2
D1 D2
AAL-200

490
DOOR OPENING USING EXTERNAL PUSHBUTTON

Use
When the entry door does not have a door handle, a pushbutton is required to activate the electric lock so that the door can be
opened from the interior. The door can be opened while the electric lock is activated.
It is advisable to install the pushbutton near the entry door in such a way that it is possible to open the door while pressing
the pushbutton. If this is not possible, then an automatic electric lock, model ABR-013, can be installed. This lock remains active until
the door is opened.

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS

WIRED DIAGRAM
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
J1 J2
Up to 25 metres
GRF-208
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3

Door-opening push-button

MAN-470

MDN-471 (Coaxial - B/W)

MDN-472 (Coaxial - Colour)
MDN-474 (Twisted pair - B/W) ABR-011
MDN-475 (Twisted pair - Colour) (1)

(1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0,5 A

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

Door-opening push-button KPD-001

OUT

+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

PAK-41000
1

4
2

5
3

6
PAK-42000 - With concierge
did 8_200b
7 8 9

C 0

PDK-41300 (Coaxial - B/W)

PDK-41500 (Coaxial - Colour)
PDK-42300 (Coaxial - B/W) - With concierge
PDK-42500 (Coaxial - Colour) - With concierge
PDK-41400 (Twisted pair - B/W)
1

4
2

5
3

6
PDK-41600 (Twisted pair - Colour)
PDK-42400 (Twisted pair - B/W) - With concierge
7 8 9

C 0

PDK-42600 (Twisted pair - Colour) - With concierge

(1) Máx. 15 Vdc, 0,5 A

ABR-011
(1) 491
OPENING OF A SECOND DOOR FROM THE TELEPHONE/MONITOR OF THE
DWELLING

OPENING OF A SECOND DOOR FROM THE TELEPHONE OF THE DWELLING

Use
In addition to the electric lock controlled by the audio unit of the entrance panel, it is possible - using the auxiliary pushbutton of
the telephone - to activate a second electric lock.

Operation
When the auxiliary pushbutton of the telephone is pressed, the telephone - via the communication BUS (terminals D1, D2) - tells the
audio unit to generate a control signal. The audio unit then sends a direct voltage (terminals SC1 and 18), which is detected by the
ASC-001 (terminals: , Ctrl). The contacts of circuits 1 and 2 of the ASC-001 change status (terminals C1, NO1 and C2 , NO2).
The voltage from the power supply unit can then reach the electric lock and the street door can be opened.

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS

WIRED DIAGRAM

ASC-001
ASC-001
cod. 9730023
D1 D2
V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

TED-002

ALM-040

220V~ V~

19
J1 J2 230 V ABR-011

11 12 SC1 18 D1 D2 D3
ASC-001
DC ASC-001
ELECTRIC LOCK cod. 9730023

V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

AC
ELECTRIC LOCK

ALM-040

SECTION TABLE 220V~ V~

AWG
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20 230 V

ABR-001

492
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD
WIRED DIAGRAM

D1 D2

TED-002

Made in Spain

IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5 ALM-040

220V~ V~

230 V

KPD-001

OUT

+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2

did 8_200b DC
ELECTRIC LOCK

ABR-011

ALA-020
AC
ELECTRIC LOCK

220V~ V~

230 V

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

ABR-001

493
OPENING OF A SECOND DOOR FROM THE MONITOR OF THE DWELLING
Use
In addition to the electric lock controlled by the audio unit of the entrance panel, it is possible - using the auxiliary pushbutton of
the monitor in the dwelling - to activate a second electric lock.
The solution shown here is suitable for all ALCAD video door entry installations (entrance panel with pushbuttons, entrance panel
with keypad, coaxial cable, twisted pair).

Operation
When the auxiliary pushbutton of the monitor is pressed, the potential-free contacts associated to the pushbutton (terminals 24, 25)
allow the ASC-001 to detect ( terminal) the positive of the voltage feeding the monitors (+ terminal). The ASC-001 then detects (ter-
minals: , Ctrl) the control signal of 15Vdc ± 10%. The contacts of circuits 1 and 2 of the ASC-001 change status (terminals C1,
NO1 and C2 , NO2). The voltage from the power supply unit can then reach the electric lock and the street door can be opened.

WIRED DIAGRAM

ASC-001
ASC-001
24 cod. 9730023

25
26
27 V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

S5
MVB-002 S2
MVC-002
D1 D2

SCM-030
SCM-040
ALM-040

Power supply unit

of video system of monitors
(Depending on installation) 220V~ V~

230 V ABR-011

220V~ ASC-001
DC ASC-001
ELECTRIC LOCK cod. 9730023

230 V V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

AC
ELECTRIC LOCK

ALA-020

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
220V~ V~
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres
230 V
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
ABR-001

494
ACTIVATING A 12VAC ELECTRIC LOCK

Use
With the power supply unit shown in the diagrams of this manual, it is possible to activate a 15Vdc electric lock with power con-
sumption not greater than 500mA.
To activate a 12Vac electric lock, additional material must be used. The material and its installation will depend on the power con-
sumption of the electric lock to be activated.
Note:
To avoid audio problems produced by possible induction between the wires powering the electric lock and the other wires of the
electronic door entry or video door entry system, it is recommended that a separate cable hose be used for the wires powering the
electric lock.

ACTIVATING A 12VAC ELECTRIC LOCK AND WITH POWER CONSUMPTION UP TO 800 mA

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Operation WIRED DIAGRAM

When the lock release button of the telephone or monitor
is pressed, the device - via the communication BUS (terminals ALC-070
GRF-208
D1, D2) - instructs the audio unit to open the door. The elec-
19
tric lock relay closes. The alternating voltage from the power J1 J2

supply unit (terminals: , V~) can then reach the electric 230V~ ++
+ 9 10 111222SC118 7 D1D2 D3
lock, allowing the street door to be opened.
230 V
Earth

ALA-040

230 V V~

230 V

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

ABR-001
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD (1) Max. 12 Vac, 0.8 A (1)

Operation
When the lock release button of the telephone or monitor WIRED DIAGRAM
is pressed, the device - via the communication BUS (terminals
D1, D2) - instructs the audio unit to open the door. The audio
unit transmits this instruction to the numeric keypad (OUT con-
nector). The relay of the electric lock is closed. The alterna- KPD-001
cod. 9650002

ting voltage from the power supply unit (terminals: , V~) OUT

can then reach the electric lock and the street door can be V~
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
opened.

ALA-020

220V~ V~

230 V

ABR-001
495
ACTIVATING TWO 12VAC ELECTRIC LOCKS AND WITH POWER CONSUMPTION
UP TO 800 mA EAH ONE SIMULTANEOUSLY
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS
Operation
When the lock release button of the telephone or WIRED DIAGRAM
monitor is pressed, the device - via the communi-
cation BUS (terminals D1, D2) - instructs the audio
ALM-080
unit to open the doors. The audio unit then sends a
direct voltage (terminals 11, 12) to the ALM-080 GRF-208
cod. 9610033

power supply unit (terminals: , Ctrl). The contacts 19

of the circuit of the ALM-080 change status (termi- J1 J2

nals C, NO). The power supply unit then sends an 230 V

230V~
C NC NO Ctrl
+ V~
11 + 9 10 111222SC118 7 D1D2 D3
alternating voltage (terminals 11, NO) to the two
electric locks, and the two street doors can be ope-
ned.
230 V

ABR-001 ABR-001

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

Operation
When the lock release button of the telephone WIRED DIAGRAM
or monitor is pressed, the device - via the commu-
nication BUS (terminals D1, D2) - instructs the
audio unit to open the door. The audio unit trans- ALM-080
mits this instruction to the numeric keypad (OUT
connector). The relay of the electric lock is closed. KPD-001
cod. 9650002

The alternating voltage (terminals: , V~) from the OUT

ALM-080 can then be sent to the terminals ( , 230V~ + V~ V~

230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
Ctrl) of the ALM-080 itself. The contacts of the cir-
cuit of the ALM-080 change status (terminals C,
NO). The power supply unit then sends an alter-
nating voltage (terminals 11, NO) to the two elec- 230 V
tric locks, and the two street doors can be opened.

ABR-001 ABR-001

496
ACTIVATING A 12VAC ELECTRIC LOCK AND WITH POWER CONSUMPTION UP TO 2 A

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Operation
When the lock release button of the telephone or WIRED DIAGRAM
monitor is pressed, the device - via the communi-
cation BUS (terminals D1, D2) - instructs the audio
unit to open the door. The audio unit then sends a
ALM-080
direct voltage (terminals 11, 12) to the ALM-080
power supply unit (terminals: , Ctrl). The contacts GRF-208
cod. 9610033

of the circuit of the ALM-080 change status (termi- 19

J1 J2
nals C, NO). The power supply unit then sends an
230V~ + V~
alternating voltage (terminals 11, NO) to the elec- 230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 + 9 10 111222SC118 7 D1D2 D3

tric lock, and the street door can be opened.

230 V

(1) Max. 12 Vac, 2 A (1)

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

Operation
When the lock release button of the telephone WIRED DIAGRAM
or monitor is pressed, the device - via the commu-
nication BUS (terminals D1, D2) - instructs the
audio unit to open the door. The audio unit trans-
mits this instruction to the numeric keypad (OUT ALM-080
connector). The relay of the electric lock is closed.
The alternating voltage (terminals: , V~) from the KPD-001
cod. 9650002

ALM-080 can then be sent to the terminals ( , OUT

Ctrl) of the ALM-080 itself. The contacts of the cir- 230V~ + V~ V~

230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V
+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2
cuit of the ALM-080 change status (terminals C,
NO). The power supply unit then sends an alter-
nating voltage (terminals 11, NO) to the electric
lock, and the street door can be opened. 230 V

(1) Max. 12 Vac, 2 A (1)

497
ACTIVATING THE STAIRS LIGHTING WHEN THE DOOR IS OPENED

Use
It is possible to activate the stairs lighting of the building at the same time that an alternating voltage is sent to the electric lock. This
can be useful when, for safety reasons, it is desirable to light up the hall or doorway of the building once the visitor has been allo-
wed to enter.

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Operation
When the lock release button of the telephone or monitor is pressed, the device - via the communication BUS (terminals D1, D2) -
instructs the audio unit to open the door. The audio unit then sends a direct voltage (terminals 11, 12) both to the electric lock, allo-
wing the door to be opened, and to the ASC-050 accessory (terminals: , Ctrl2), closing the circuit of the stairs lighting.

WIRED DIAGRAM

D1 D2

TED-001

ASC-050
ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

19
J1 J2
LIGHT
IN STAIRS
11 12 D1 D2 D3

Max. 250 Vac/5A

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

ABR-011

498
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD
Operation
When the lock release button of the telephone or monitor is pressed, the device - via the communication BUS (terminals D1, D2) -
instructs the audio unit to open the door. The audio unit transmits this instruction to the numeric keypad (OUT connector). The nume-
ric keypad then sends a direct voltage (terminals 11, 12) both to the electric lock, allowing the door to be opened, and to the ASC-
050 accessory (terminals: , Ctrl2), closing the circuit of the stairs lighting.

WIRED DIAGRAM

D1 D2

TED-001

Made in Spain

IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

KPD-001 ASC-050
OUT ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

did 8_200b LIGHT

IN STAIRS

Max. 250 Vac/5A

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20
ABR-011

499
ACTIVATING THE STAIRS LIGHTING WHEN ANY KEY OF THE ENTRANCE PANEL
WITH KEYPAD IS PRESSED

Use
It is possible to activate the stair lighting of the building when the visitor presses any key on the numeric keypad of the entrance
panel. This can be useful when, for the safety of the users in the dwellings, it is desirable to light up the hall or doorway of the buil-
ding before the visitor has been allowed to enter the building.

Operation
When any key on the numeric keypad of the entrance panel is pressed, the contacts of the circuit of relay 2 change status (termi-
nals C2, NO2). The power supply voltage can then reach the ASC-050 (terminals: , Ctrl2). The contacts of the circuit of the ASC-
050 change status (terminals C, NO), allowing the stair lights circuit to be closed.

Remarks
The length of time that the activation signal of the stairs lighting is maintained depends on the value selected in parameter 13
“Pressing keys on the keypad: Time that relay 2 is activated (seconds)”, during configuration of the entrance panel.

WIRED DIAGRAM

D1 D2

TED-002

Made in Spain

IN
+ + D1 D2 D3 D2 D2 D3 D5 D4 D4 D5

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20

KPD-001 ASC-050
OUT ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

+ 11 12 12c C1 NO1 NC1 22 Ctrl1 C2 NO2 NC2 Ctrl2 Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

did 8_200b LIGHT

IN STAIRS

Max. 250 Vac/5A

500
ACTIVATING A LIGHT, BELL OR SIREN WHEN A CALL IS RECEIVED IN THE
DWELLING

Use
It is possible to activate a light, bell or siren (up to 250Vac and 5A) when a call is received in the dwelling. This can be useful in
dwellings where, for example, the user has hearing problems, or in installations in noisy environments, such as factories.

ACTIVATING A LIGHT, BELL OR SIREN WHEN A CALL IS RECEIVED IN THE TELEPHONE OF

THE DWELLING
Operation
When a call is made to a dwelling, the electronic signal generated by the audio unit travels via the call communication BUS to
the telephone (terminals D1, D2). The AAL-120 accessory extracts this signal from the BUS and sends it (terminals S5, S2) to the
ASC-050 (terminals S5, S2). The contacts of the circuit of the ASC-050 change status (terminals C, NO). The power supply voltage
can then reach the lighting device, bell or siren to activate it at the same time that the speaker of the telephone receiver emits a
sound, both devices informing the dwelling that the call has been received.

WIRED DIAGRAM ASC-050

ASC-050
cod. 9730021

S2 S5
5A / 250V~
LIGHTS
2 5 6
PROG
C NO NC
D1 D2 ON OFF
Ctrl1 Ctrl2

TED-001

S5
TED-001 S2 BELL/SIREN
+
AAL-120 AAL-120
Max. 250 Vac/5A

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

0.25 mm2 0.6 mm 22

ACTIVATING A LIGHT, BELL OR SIREN WHEN A CALL IS RECEIVED IN THE MONITOR OF THE
DWELLING
Operation
When a call is made to a dwelling, the electronic signal generated by the audio unit travels via the call communication BUS to
the connections bracket (terminals D1, D2). The connections bracket extracts this signal from the BUS and sends it (terminals S5, S2)
to the ASC-050 (terminals S5, S2). The contacts of the circuit of the ASC-050 change status (terminals C, NO). The power supply
voltage can then reach the lighting device, bell or siren to activate it at the same time that the speaker of the receiver of the moni-
tor emits a sound, both devices informing the dwelling that the call has been received.
WIRED DIAGRAM
ASC-050
ASC-050
cod. 9730021

S2 S5
5A / 250V~
LIGHTS
24 2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC
25
26
27
S5
S2
BELL/SIREN
D1 D2
MVB-002 Max. 250 Vac/5A
MVC-002 SCM-030
SCM-040

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
501
0.25 mm2 0.6 mm 22
ACTIVATING AN ELECTRIC LOCK FROM FOUR INDEPENDENT
ENTRANCE PANELS

Use
When an electric lock can be activated from several entrance panels, each of which is equipped with an audio unit and a sepa-
rate power supply, it is necessary to incorporate in the system a means of isolating the electric lock terminals of each of the audio
units.

Operation
The lock release signal sent by any of the entrance panels is detected by the APC-001 (terminals 11, 12).
If this signal is DC, the APC-001 sends this voltage to the DC electric lock (terminals 11, DC 12), allowing the street door to be
opened.
If the signal is AC, then one of the following situations arises:
1) If the electric lock is AC
In this case, the APC-001 sends the voltage to the AC electric lock (terminals 11, AC 12), allowing the street door to be
opened.
2) If the electric lock is DC
In this case, the APC-001 rectifies the voltage and sends a DC voltage to the DC electric lock (terminals 11, DC 12), allowing
the street door to be opened.

WIRED DIAGRAM

Electric lock signal Electric lock signal Electric lock signal Electric lock signal
Entrance panel 1 Entrance panel 2 Entrance panel 3 Entrance panel 4

12 11 AC
12
DC
12

APC-001
cod.9730006

- +
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 AC
12
DC
12

ABR-011
(1)

AC DC
12 11 12 12

SECTION TABLE ABR-001

AWG (2)
Up to 25 metres (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 500 mA
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20 (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

502
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
STANDARD INSTALLATION
TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

Standard wiring diagram for TV door entry installations.

Operation
The camera is switched on, capturing an image and sending the video signal (terminals V1, M) to the modulator. The modulator
receives the video signal ('VIDEO' F-type connector) and modulates it, generating and sending a TV channel ('RF OUT' F-type con-
nector) to the TV head-end.
This channel can be tuned into on the TV in the dwelling.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
O
BS

COAX
TV HEAD-END TV

COAX
230V~ ±10%
O
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V

2
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR SECTION TABLE
AWG
MVN-902 Up to 100 metres
MDA-300 (BIII)
MDA-400 (UHF) + COAXIAL 75 Ω
COAX CMO-002
Up to 25 metres
LE
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

STANDARD INSTALLATION
TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
TE

WIRED DIAGRAM

TV HEAD-END V1 M
Video unit
15V _
MDA-300 (BIII) +
MDA-400 (UHF) TCB-210
cod. 9640012
SW1

Black

503
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN A STANDARD DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY
INSTALLATION WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS
DIGITAL SYSTEM+ TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for TV door entry installations in digital door entry installations in buildings with one point of entry, with
entrance panel with pushbuttons.

Operation
SYSTEM ON STANDBY
On a functional level, the system for visualising the image of the visitor on the TV is the same as that in a standard TV door
entry installation. See “Standard Installation” on page 503.
O
On a functional level, the digital door entry installation is the same as that a standard digital door entry installations in buil-
ding. See page 277.
SYSTEM ACTIVE. RECEIVING A CALL
On a functional level, the system for visualising the image of the visitor on the TV is the same as that in a standard TV door
entry installation. See “Standard Installation” on page 503.
BS

On a functional level, the electronic door entry installation is the same as that of a standard electronic door entry installation
with confidentiality feature.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
O

COAX
LE
TV HEAD-END
TV

TED-001
TE

TV

ALC-070 (230 V )

2
230V~ ++

2
MDN-473
+
COAX MPD-004 SECTION TABLE
230V~ ±10%
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V
+ AWG
2 COL-000
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR
Up to 100 metres
+
2 CMO-006 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MDA-300 (BIII) COAXIAL 75 Ω
MDA-400 (UHF) Up to 25 metres
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
COAX

ABR-011 (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 0.5 A

(1)

504
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN A STANDARD DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY
INSTALLATION WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS
DIGITAL SYSTEM+ TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

WIRED DIAGRAM
O

Telephones
TV Head-end in dwellings
BS
MDA-300 (BIII)
MDA-400 (UHF)
O
SW1

V1 M

15V _
+
LE

TCB-210
Black
ALC-070
GRF-208

19
J1 J2

_ + 9 10 11 12 22 SC1 18
IN
7 D1 D2 D3
230V~ ++
TE

Earth
230 V
COL-000
IN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COL-000 9 10 11121314 15 16
cod. 9730030

8 7

6 5

4 3

ABR-011
2 1

505
 TROUBLE SHOOTING
9
Check that the connections of the different elements are the same as that shown in the corresponding diagrams. Check voltages in
all terminals are the same with indicated in the chapter 2 " Technical data". In order to help in the location of the problem, there
are some situations could be found.

DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH

ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS.
ELECTRONIC CALL. DIGITAL SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

To program the telephones, check that the J1 jumper is fitted to When a call is made, the telephones ring but con-
the audio unit (entrance panel defined as the main one). Make firmation of the call cannot be heard on the entran-
sure you have communication with the entrance panel before ce panel.
pressing the push-button that you want to associate to the tele- Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If
phone. Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
the telephone has received the code (telephone programmed). If the unit.
the telephone cannot be programmed: Check the connection bet-
If the red indicator light flash continuosly.
ween 7 in the audio unit and the push-buttons, the connection
between the push-buttons and the concentrator of calls and the Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1,
connection between the concentrator of calls and the audio unit. D2 from the audio unit to all the telephones. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
Nothing works.
panel when a call is made.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that
The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: Check that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check
the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
that the voltage between – and + of the power supply is 15 ±10%
switch of the telephone is in ON position. Check connections
Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify this. If the
D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the telephones. If you can-
breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply – and + ter-
not find the fault, the telephone, the audio unit may have bro-
minals, and check that the voltage between – and + is 15
ken down.
±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the power supply. No telephone can be heard from the entrance
panel.
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
Check that the voltage between + and - in the audio unit is 15
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit. One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
panel.
The card holders do not light up.
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
whether the lamp is burnt out.
thing wrong with the telephone.
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel
You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
when a call is made.
phone.
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
Check the volume control on the telephones (on the panel). If
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
the audio unit.
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
ne.
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
506 base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- The electric lock doesn’t work.
thing wrong with the telephone. Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
The sound produces feedback. is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the audio wrong with the electric lock.
unit.
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
To program the telephones, check that you are located on the If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
main entrance panel (the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit). panel when a call is made.
Make sure you have communication with the main entrance The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: Check that
panel before pressing the push-button that you want to associate the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
to the telephone. Remember that the panel emits a confirmation switch of the telephone is in ON position. Check connections
tone once the telephone has received the code (telephone pro- D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check
grammed). If the telephone cannot be programmed: Check the connections D3, D2 of the equipments in the installation. If you
connection between 7 in the audio unit and the push-buttons, the cannot find the fault, the telephone, the audio unit may have
connection between the push-buttons and the concentrator of broken down.
calls and the connection between the concentrator of calls and
No telephone can be heard from the entrance
the audio unit.
panel.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
Nothing works. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check panel.
that the voltage between – and + of the power supply is 15
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
this. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply
the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
– and + terminals, and check that the voltage between – and +
thing wrong with the telephone.
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
thing wrong with the power supply. You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
phone.
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up.
Check the volume control on the telephones (on the panel). If
Check that the voltage between + and - in the audio unit is 15
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
the audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
The card holders do not light up.
ne.
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
whether the lamp is burnt out.
the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel thing wrong with the telephone.
when a call is made.
The sound produces feedback.
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
audio unit.
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. The electric lock doesn’t work.
When a call is made, the telephones ring but con- Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
firmation of the call cannot be heard on the entrance is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
panel. and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the electric lock.
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the Calling on one of the entrance panels does not
audio unit. deactivate the other panels of the system.
If the red indicator light flash continuosly. Check connections D3, D2 between the different panels of
the system. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2
wrong with the audio unit.
from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check connections D3, 507
D2 of the equipments in the installation. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
HOUSING ESTATES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

Programming the telephones of each dwelling must be carried If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
out from the entrance panel of the dwelling. Check that the J1 panel when a call is made.
jumper is fitted to the audio unit (entrance panel defined as the The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: Check that
main one). Make sure you have communication with the main the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
entrance panel of the dwelling before pressing the push-button switch of the telephone is in ON position. Check connections
that you want to associate to the telephone. Remember that the D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check
panel emits a confirmation tone once the telephone has received connections D3, D2 and D5, D4 of the equipment in the insta-
the code (telephone programmed). If the telephone cannot be llation. If you cannot find the fault, the telephone, the audio unit
programmed: Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit or some equipment in the installation may have broken down.
and the push-buttons, the connection between the push-buttons
No telephone can be heard from the entrance
and the concentrator of calls and the connection between the
panel.
concentrator of calls and the audio unit.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Nothing works.
One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that panel.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
that the voltage between – and + of the power supply is 15
base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
this. If ithe breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply
thing wrong with the telephone.
– and + terminals, and check that the voltage between – and +
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
thing wrong with the power supply. phone.

The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. Check the volume control on the telephones (on the panel). If
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Check that the voltage between + and - in the audio unit is 15
the audio unit.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit. You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
ne.
The card holders do not light up.
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
whether the lamp is burnt out.
thing wrong with the telephone.
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel
The sound produces feedback.
when a call is made.
Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
audio unit.
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be The electric lock doesn’t work.
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
When a call is made, the telephones ring but con- is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
firmation of the call cannot be heard on the entrance and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
panel. wrong with the electric lock.

Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If Making a call from one of the external entrance
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the panels does not disable the entrance panels of the
audio unit. building which is being called.

If the red indicator light flash continuosly. Check connections D3, D2 from the audio unit to the estate
identifying accessory. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2
something wrong with the audio unit or the estate identifying
from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check connections D3,
accessory.
D2 and D5, D4 of the equipment in the installation. If you can-
not find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio
unit.

508
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS. ELECTRONIC
CALL. DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL

STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

To program the connection brackets/telephones, check that the If the red indicator light flash continuosly.
J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit (entrance panel defined as the Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1,
main one). Make sure you have communication with the main D2 from the audio unit to all the connection brackets/telepho-
entrance panel before pressing the push-button that you want to nes. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
associate to the connection bracket/telephone. Remember that with the audio unit.
the panel emits a confirmation tone once the monitor/telephone
If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
has received the code (connection bracket/telephone program-
panel when a call is made.
med). If the connection brackets/telephones cannot be program-
med: Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
push-buttons , the connection between the push-buttons and the Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
concentrator of calls and the connection between the concentra- gramming switch of the device is in ON position. Check con-
tor of calls and the audio unit. nections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the connection
brackets/telephones. If you cannot find the fault, the connec-
tion bracket/telephone, the audio unit or some other equipment
Nothing works. in the installation may have broken down.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check entrance panel.
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
this. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and – One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- entrance panel.
thing wrong with the power supply. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15
there may be something wrong with the telephone.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit. You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
tor/telephone.
The card holders do not light up.
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones (on the
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
panel). If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
wrong with the audio unit.
whether the lamp is burnt out.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel
tor/telephone.
when a call is made.
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. The sound produces feedback.

When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
entrance panel. audio unit.

Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If

you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the
audio unit.

509
 The electric lock doesn’t work. Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit is Check that the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit (entrance
15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22 and panel defined as the main one). If you cannot find the fault
18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong there may be something wrong with the audio unit of the main
with the electric lock. entrance panel.
The video system does not work in any monitor: Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
ving a call,.. flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between + bracket or the monitor.
and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- Blank screen on all the monitors.
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and
Check the connection between the video and the audio units.
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the + and
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. Check
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – conexions
the connections of the coaxial cable from the video unit to the
of the video unit and check that voltage is 15 ± 10%. If it's not
connection brackets. If failure is not detected, there may be
correct, there may be something wrong with the power supply.
something wrong with the audio unit, video unit or any splitter.
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto
Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a
call,.. Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
nection brackets. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position.
tion brackets to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection
distribution, check that the voltage between + and – of the split-
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the
ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15%
be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong
of the building.
with the monitor.
Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted
dwelling.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the connection between the connection bracket and
Check the connection + and – of the video unit and check that
the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc.
monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be there may be something wrong with the connection bracket,
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in monitor or tap-off of that floor.
series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets,
but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences
of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2, M. Check
coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connec-
tion brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you can-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the moni-
tor.

510
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY

To program the connection brackets/telephones, check that If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
you are located on the main entrance panel (the J1 jumper is fit- panel when a call is made.
ted to the audio unit). Make sure you have communication with The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: Check that
the main entrance panel before pressing the push-button that you the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
want to associate to the connection bracket/telephone. switch of the device is in ON position. Check connections D1
Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the and D2 from the audio unit to all the devices. Check connec-
monitor/telephone has received the code (device programmed). tions D3, D2 of the equipments in the installation. If you cannot
If the monitor/telephone cannot be programmed: Check the con- find the fault, the connection bracket/telephone, the audio unit
nection between 7 in the audio unit and the push-buttons , the or some other equipment in the installation may have broken
connection between the push-buttons and the concentrator of down.
calls and the connection between the concentrator of calls and
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
the audio unit.
entrance panel.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
Nothing works. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check entrance panel.
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
this. If ithe breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply
the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and –
be something wrong with the telephone.
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
thing wrong with the power supply. You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
tor/telephone.
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up.
Check the volume control on the devices (on the panel). If
Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
the audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
The card holders do not light up.
tor/telephone.
Check that the voltage between + and – of the power supply
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
that supplies the audio unit is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check that the vol-
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
tage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit, with the lighting push-
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check whether the lamp is
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
burnt out.
The sound produces feedback.
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel
when a call is made. Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
audio unit.
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls The electric lock doesn’t work.
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the wrong with the electric lock.
entrance panel. Calling on one of the entrance panels does not
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If deactivate the other panels of the system.
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the Check connections D3 and D2 between the different panels
audio unit. of the system. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
If the red indicator light flash continuosly. thing wrong with the audio unit.

Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2

from the audio unit to all the devices. Check connections D3, D2
of the equipments in the installation. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
511
 The video system does not work in any monitor: Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
ving a call,.. flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
monitors. Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that bracket or the monitor.
feeds the video unit. Check that the voltage of the power supply Blank screen on all the monitors.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short cir-
Check the connection between the video and the audio unit.
cuit and rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1
Check connections V2, M of the video units of the installation.
minute and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. Check
that voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the con-
the connections of the coaxial cable from the video unit to the
nection + and – of the video unit and check that the voltage is 15
connection bracket. If failure is not detected, there may be
±10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may be something wrong with
something wrong with the audio unit, video unit or any splitter.
the power supply.
Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
call,.. nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position.
distribution, check that the voltage between + and – of the split-
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection
ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the
be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15%
of the building.
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong
with the monitor. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
dwelling.
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Check the connection between the connection bracket and
the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the
monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
main one (the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit). Check the con-
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
nection + and – of the video units and check that the voltage is
in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
15 ±10% Vdc.
connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- there may be something wrong with the connection bracket,
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. monitor or tap-off of that floor.
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs
have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in
series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets,
but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences
of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2, M. Check
coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connec-
tion brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you can-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the moni-
tor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that one entrance panel has been defined as the main
one (the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit). If you cannot find
the fault there may be something wrong with the audio unit of the
main entrance panel.

512
HOUSING ESTATES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

Programming the connection brackets/telephones of each If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
dwelling must be carried out from the entrance panel of the dwe- panel when a call is made.
lling. Check that the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio units (entran- The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
ce panels defined as the main one). Make sure you have com- Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
munication with the main entrance panel of the dwelling before gramming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is in ON
pressing the push-button that you want to associate to the con- position. Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to
nection bracket/telephone. Remember that the panel emits a con- all the connection brackets/telephones. Check connections D3,
firmation tone once the connection bracket/telephone has recei- D2 and D5, D4 of the equipments in the installation. If you can-
ved the code (connection bracket/telephone programmed). If the not find the fault, the connection bracket/telephone, the audio
connection brackets/telephones cannot be programmed: Check unit or some other equipment in the installation may have bro-
the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the push-buttons, ken down.
the connection between the push-buttons and the concentrator of
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
calls and the connection between the concentrator of calls and
entrance panel.
the audio unit.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Nothing works.
One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that entrance panel.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
this. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and –
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
thing wrong with the power supply. tor/telephone.

The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones (on the
panel). If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15
wrong with the audio unit.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit. You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
tor/telephone.
The card holders do not light up.
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
whether the lamp is burnt out.
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel
The sound produces feedback.
when a call is made.
Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
audio unit.
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be The electric lock doesn’t work.
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
entrance panel. wrong with the electric lock.

Check the volume control of the entrance panel. If you cannot Making a call from one of the external entrance
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. panels does not disable the entrance panels of the
building which is being called.
If the red indicator light flash continuosly.
Check connections D3 and D2 from the entrance panel to the
Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2
identifying accessories of the building. If the fault cannot be
from the audio unit to all the connection brackets/telephones.
found, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or
Check connections D3, D2 and D5, D4 of the equipments in the
the estate identifying accessory.
installation. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit.
513
 The video system does not work in any monitor: Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
ving a call,.. been defined as the main panel. Check connections D3 and
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the D2 between different entrance panels. If you cannot find the
monitors. Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that fault there may be something wrong with the audio unit of the
feeds the video unit. Check that the voltage of the power supply main entrance panel.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short cir- Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
cuit and rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
minute and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect
flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check
the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
that voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the con-
bracket or the monitor.
nection + and – of the video unit and check that the voltage is 15
±10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may be something wrong with Blank screen on all the monitors.
the power supply. Check the connection between the video and the audio unit.
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Check connections V2, M and V4, M of the video units of the
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a installation. If splitters have been used in the distribution, check
call,.. that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15%
Vdc. Check the connections of the coaxial cable from the video
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position.
unit to the connection bracket. If failure is not detected, there
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection
may be something wrong with the audio unit, video unit or any
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the
splitter.
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15%
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
with the monitor. Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
distribution, check that the voltage between + and – of the split-
Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
been defined as the main panel. Check the connection + and –
be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
of the video units and check that the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc.
of the building.
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc.
dwelling.
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs
Check the connection between the connection bracket and
have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be
the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in
monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets,
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences
in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2, M. Check
connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
there may be something wrong with the connection bracket,
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
monitor or tap-off of the floor.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, lost of synchronisation.
Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connec-
tion brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you can-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the moni-
tor.

514
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS. ELECTRONIC
CALL. DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

To program the connection brackets/telephones, check that the If the red indicator light flash continuosly.
J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit (entrance panel defined as the Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1,
main one). Make sure you have communication with the main D2 from the audio unit to all the devices. If you cannot find the
entrance panel before pressing the push-button that you want to fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
associate to the connection bracket/telephone. Remember that
If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
the panel emits a confirmation tone once the connection brac-
panel when a call is made.
ket/telephone has received the code (connection brackets/tele-
phones programmed). If the connection brackets/telephones can- The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
not be programmed: Check the connection between 7 in the Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
audio unit and the push-buttons , the connection between the gramming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is in ON
push-buttons and the concentrator of calls and the connection bet- position. Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to
ween the concentrator of calls and the audio unit. all the connection brackets/telephones. If you cannot find the
fault, the connection bracket/telephone, the audio unit or some
other equipment in the installation may have broken down.
Nothing works.
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that entrance panel.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
this. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and – entrance panel.
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
thing wrong with the power supply. base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
wrong with the audio unit. tor/telephone.

The card holders do not light up. Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones (on the
panel). If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
wrong with the audio unit.
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
whether the lamp is burnt out. You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
tor/telephone.
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel
when a call is made. Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be The sound produces feedback.
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring persists, adjust the volume using the volume controls of the
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the audio unit.
entrance panel. The electric lock doesn’t work.
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
audio unit. and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the electric lock.

515
 The video system does not work in any monitor: Blank screen in all the monitors
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
ving a call,.. T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the connection
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the between the video and the audio units. If splitters have been
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between + used in the distribution, check that the voltage between + and
and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc. Check the connections of the
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and twisted pair from the video unit to the connection brackets. If
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the + and failure is not detected, there may be something wrong with the
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage video unit, video unit or any splitter.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
be something wrong with the power supply.
Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
call,.. Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection building.
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15%
Check the connection between the connection bracket and
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong
the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
with the monitor.
monitor's connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted from the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. detected there may be something wrong with the connection
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. bracket, monitor or tap-off of the floor.
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc. Check that
twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been
connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed
from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the
120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the
one at the end of the line. Check twisted pair connection in split-
ters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
thing wrong with the video unit.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection brac-
kets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong
with the monitor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit (entrance
panel defined as the main one). If you cannot find the fault there
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led flash.
Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the connection bracket or
the monitor.

516
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY

To program the connection brackets/telephones, check that If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
you are located on the main entrance panel (the J1 jumper is fit- panel when a call is made.
ted to the audio unit). Make sure you have communication with The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
the main entrance panel before pressing the push-button that you Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
want to associate to the connection bracket/telephone. gramming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is in ON
Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the con- position. Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to
nection bracket/telephone has received the code (connection all the connection brackets/telephones. Check connections D3,
bracket/telephone programmed). If the connection bracket/tele- D2 of the equipments in the installation. If you cannot find the
phone cannot be programmed: Check the connection between 7 fault, the monitor/telephone, the audio unit or some other
in the audio unit and the push-buttons , the connection between equipment in the installation may have broken down.
the push-buttons and the concentrator of calls and the connection
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
between the concentrator of calls and the audio unit.
entrance panel.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
Nothing works. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check entrance panel.
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
this. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and –
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
thing wrong with the power supply. You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
tor/telephone.
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up.
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones (on the
Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15
panel). If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
The card holders do not light up.
tor/telephone.
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
whether the lamp is burnt out.
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
when a call is made.
The sound produces feedback.
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
persists, adjust the volume using the volume controls of the
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
audio unit.
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. The electric lock doesn’t work.

When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
entrance panel. and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the electric lock.
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the Calling on one of the entrance panels does not
audio unit. deactivate the other panels of the system.

If the red indicator light flash continuosly. Check connections D3 and D2 between the different panels
of the system. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2
thing wrong with the audio unit.
from the audio unit to all the connection brackets/telephones.
Check connections D3, D2 of the equipments in the installation.
If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
the audio unit.

517
 The video system does not work in any monitor: Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
ving a call,.. flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between + bracket or the monitor.
and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- Blank screen in all the monitors.
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and
Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the + and
T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the T2+, T2–
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage
connections of the twisted pair between the different video
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may
units. Check the connection between the video and the audio
be something wrong with the power supply.
units. If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Check the connections of the twisted pair from the video unit to
call,.. the monitors. If failure is not detected, there may be something
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. wrong with the video unit, any tap-off or any splitter.
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the
Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15%
to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong
check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
with the monitor.
Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. building.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the dwelling.
main one. Check the connection between the connection bracket and
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc. Check that monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed in the connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection from
from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detec-
120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the ted there may be something wrong with the connection brac-
one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences of 220 ohms ket, monitor or tap-off of the floor.
are connected in the unused terminals T2+, T2–. Check twisted
pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection brac-
kets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong
with the monitor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the
main one (the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit). Check con-
nections D3 and D2 between different entrance panels. If you
cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
audio unit.

518
HOUSING ESTATES. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

Programming the connection brackets/telephones of each If the red indicator light flash continuosly.
dwelling must be carried out from the entrance panel of the dwe- Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1,
lling. Check that the J1 jumper is fitted to the audio unit (entran- D2 from the audio unit to all the connection brackets/telepho-
ce panel defined as the main one). Make sure you have com- nes. Check connections D3, D2 and D5, D4 of the equipments
munication with the main entrance panel of the dwelling before in the installation. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
pressing the push-button that you want to associate to the con- something wrong with the audio unit.
nection bracket/telephone. Remember that the panel emits a con-
If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
firmation tone once the connection bracket/telephone has recei-
panel when a call is made.
ved the code (connection bracket/telephone programmed). If the
connection bracket/telephone cannot be programmed: Check The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the push-buttons, Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
the connection between the push-buttons and the concentrator of gramming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is in ON
calls and the connection between the concentrator of calls and position. Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to
the audio unit. all the connection brackets/telephones. Check connections D3,
D2 and D5, D4 of the equipments in the installation. If you can-
not find the fault, the connection bracket/telephone, the audio
Nothing works. unit or some other equipment in the installation may have bro-
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that ken down.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15 entrance panel.
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
this. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and –
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
thing wrong with the power supply. entrance panel.

The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
there may be something wrong with the telephone.
wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
The card holders do not light up.
tor/telephone.
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit,
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones (on the
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check
panel). If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
whether the lamp is burnt out.
wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel
You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
when a call is made.
tor/telephone.
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of
base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls
the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit.
The sound produces feedback.
When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
entrance panel. persists, adjust the volume using the volume controls of the
audio unit.
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the The electric lock doesn’t work.
audio unit. Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the electric lock.

519
 Making a call from one of the external entrance Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
panels does not disable the entrance panels of the Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
building which is being called. been defined as the main panel. Check connections D3 and
Check connections D3 and D2 from the entrance panel to the D2 between different entrance panels. If you cannot find the
estate identifying accessories of the building. If the fault cannot fault there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
be found, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
the identifying accessory.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
The video system does not work in any monitor: flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
ving a call,.. bracket or the monitor.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the Blank screen in all the monitors.
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between +
Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec-
T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the T2+, T2–
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and
and T4+, T4– connections of the twisted pair between the dif-
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the + and
ferent video units. Check the connection between the video and
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage
the audio units. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may
check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
be something wrong with the power supply.
±15% Vdc. Check the connections of the twisted pair from the
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto video unit to the monitors. If failure is not detected, there may
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a be something wrong with the video unit, any tap-off or any
call,.. splitter.
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection
Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the
to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15%
check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong
Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
with the monitor.
thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted building.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. dwelling.
Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has Check the connection between the connection bracket and
been defined as the main panel. the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
tage between + and – of the splitters is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check that distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been in the connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection from
connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detec-
from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the ted there may be something wrong with the connection brac-
120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the ket, monitor or tap-off of the floor.
one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences of 220 ohms
are connected in the unused terminals T2+, T2–. Check twisted
pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection brac-
kets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong
with the monitor.

520
DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD. ELECTRONIC CALL.
DIGITAL SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
ENTRANCE PANELS
Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly In the display the key which has been pressed
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- does not appear
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres-
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit
If required, ensure that the AIB-001 accessories are correctly is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
configured. To do so, make sure that the configuration is the audio unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection bet-
same as that shown in the corresponding diagram and on pages ween the keypad and the audio unit.
242 to 244, depending on the installation which is being per- In the display appear "88888"
formed.
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is
To program the telephones, ensure that the entrance panel is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be some-
configured as the main panel (value ‘P’ in position 1 of the con- thing wrong with the audio unit.
figuration menu). Before keying the telephone code into the main
The text “F0” flashes in the display
entrance panel, check that you have communication with the
panel. With AIB-001, check connections I2, I1 of the accessory Check if there is a short circuit in the connections from the
to the device supplying power to it. Check the connection of audio unit to the telephones, D1 and D2. If no fault is detected,
there may be something wrong with the audio unit, or if requi-
I1 to I1 in the accessory. Remember that the audio unit emits
red, the AIB-001 accessory.
confirmation tones when the telephone has received the code
(programmed telephone). If you are unable to program the tele- The text “F1” flashes in the display
phone: check the connection between the keypad and the audio Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
unit. audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.

Nothing works The text “F2” flashes in the display

Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect when a call is made
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: check that
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. switch of the telephone is in the ON position (on the left).
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- Check the connections D1 and D2 between devices. In insta-
tory do not light up llations with AIB-001, make sure that the codes assigned to the
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power telephones of each of the floors is one of the values shown on
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of pages 242 to 244, depending on the installation. If no fault is
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong with the telephone,
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with the audio unit or if required, the AIB-001 accessory.
directory. No telephone can be heard from the entrance
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been panel
pressed Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key- One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the panel
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If
be something wrong with the keypad. you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
the telephone.
521
 You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele- telephone.
phone The sound produces feedback
Check the volume control on the telephones on the entrance Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio
panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong unit.
with the audio unit.
The electric lock does not work
You cannot hear the entrance panel on one tele-
Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
phone
electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12
Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault,
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the there may be something wrong with the electric lock.
CONCIERGE PANEL
Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown The text “F3” flashes in the display.
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6.
Ensure that the entrance panel connected to the concierge unit
panel is configured as the main panel. Check the BUS connec-
Nothing works tion between the concierge unit panel and the entrance panel. If
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make sure the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the main entrance
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± panel.
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. If the concierge telephone emits intermittent tones
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and when a call is made.
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone of the dwe-
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage lling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on the
thing wrong with the power supply unit. left). If necessary, Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been unit to the telephones. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
pressed. something wrong with the telephone, or the audio unit.
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± No telephone and no entrance panel can be heard
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numeric key- from the concierge unit panel.
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
something wrong with the numeric keypad. base of the concierge telephone. Check the reception volume
In the display the key which has been pressed does control in the concierge unit panel. If you cannot find the fault,
not appear. there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the tele-
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- phone.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit concierge panel.
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
ric keypad and the audio unit. base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
In the display appear "88888". something wrong with the telephone.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something telephone or on any entrance panel.
wrong with the audio unit. Check the emission volume control in the concierge unit panel.
The text “F0” flashes in the display If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D3, D2 connections of the audio unit.
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the Concierge panel cannot be heard from one tele-
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in phone
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the telephones. If you Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
audio unit. something wrong with the telephone.
The text “F1” flashes in the display. It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the ge unit
Ensure that the receiver of the telephone of the concierge unit
522 has been picked up.
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY

ENTRANCE PANELS
Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those audio unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection bet-
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. ween the keypad and the audio unit.
If required, ensure that the AIB-001 accessories are correctly In the display appear "88888".
configured. To do so, make sure that the configuration of these Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is
devices is the same as that shown in the corresponding diagram 15 ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be some-
and on pages 242 to 244, depending on the installation which thing wrong with the audio unit.
is being performed.
The text “F0” flashes in the display.
To program the telephones, ensure that the entrance panel is
Check if there is a short circuit in the connections from the
configured as the main panel (value ‘P’ in position 1 of the con-
audio unit to the telephones, D1 and D2. Check connections
figuration menu). Before keying the telephone code into the main
D3, D2 of the equipments in the installation. If no fault is detec-
entrance panel, check that you have communication with the
ted, there may be something wrong with the audio unit, or if
main entrance panel. With AIB-001, check connections I2, I1 of
required, the AIB-001 accessory.
the accessory to the device supplying power to it. Check the con-
nection of I1 to I1 in the accessory. Remember that the audio The text “F1” flashes in the display.
unit emits confirmation tones when the telephone has received Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
the code (programmed telephone). If you are unable to program audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
the telephone: check the connection between the keypad and the wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
audio unit. The text “F2” flashes in the display.
Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
Nothing works entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones when a call is
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, made
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: check that
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check switch of the telephone is in the ON position (on the left).
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, Check the connections D1, D2 and D3, D2 between devices.
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. In installations with AIB-001, make sure that the codes assigned
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- to the telephones of each of the floors is one of the values
tory do not light up. shown on pages 242 to 244, depending on the installation. If
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power no fault is detected, there may be something wrong with the
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of telephone, the audio unit or if required, the AIB-001 accessory.
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is No telephone can be heard from the entrance
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with panel.
directory. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
pressed. One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance panel
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key- you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the the telephone.
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may
You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
be something wrong with the keypad.
phone.
In the display the key which has been pressed does
Check the volume control on the telephones on the entrance
not appear.
panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- wrong with the audio unit.

523
 You cannot hear the entrance panel on one tele- unit.
phone. The electric lock does not work.
Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12
telephone. of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault,
The sound produces feedback. there may be something wrong with the electric lock.
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio

CONCIERGE PANEL
Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those The text “F3” flashes in the display.
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6.
Ensure that one of the entrance panels connected to the con-
cierge unit panel is configured as the main panel. Check the
Nothing works BUS connection between the concierge unit panel and the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
sure that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the main entrance
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, panel.
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 If the concierge telephone emits intermittent tones
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect when a call is made.
all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone of the dwe-
that the voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, lling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been left). If necessary, Check connections D1 and D2 from the
pressed. audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± may be something wrong with the telephone, or the audio unit.
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numeric key- No telephone and no entrance panel can be heard
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may from the concierge panel.
be something wrong with the numeric keypad. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
In the display the key which has been pressed does base of the concierge telephone. Check the reception volume
not appear. control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- may be something wrong with the audio unit or the telephone.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is One telephone cannot be heard from the concier-
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio ge panel.
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
numeric keypad and the audio unit. base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
In the display appear "88888". be something wrong with the telephone.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something telephone or on any entrance panel.
wrong with the audio unit. Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
The text “F0” flashes in the display. you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D3, D2 connections the audio unit.
of the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment Concierge panel cannot be heard from one tele-
of the installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short cir- phone.
cuit in the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the telepho- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
nes. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS have the base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there may be be something wrong with the telephone.
something wrong with the audio unit.
It is not possible to call dwellings from the con-
The text “F1” flashes in the display. cierge unit.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the Ensure that the receiver of the telephone of the concierge unit
has been picked up.
524
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD

Ensure that the external entrance panel of the installation is panel, check that you have communication with the main
correctly configured. To do so, check that the values selected in entrance panel of the dwelling.
the different positions of the configuration menu are the same as Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
those shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. telephone has received the code (telephone programmed). If
Programming the telephones of each dwelling must be carried the telephone cannot be programmed: Check the connection
out from the entrance panel of the dwelling. Check that the J1 between 7 in the audio unit and the push-buttons, the connec-
jumper of the audio unit of the entrance panel of each building tion between the push-buttons and the concentrator of calls and
is inserted (panel configured as the main panel). the connection between the concentrator of calls and the audio
Before keying the telephone code into the main entrance unit.

ENTRANCE PANELS
BUILDINGS

Nothing works. If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance

Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that panel when a call is made.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: Check that
that the voltage between – and + of the power supply is 15 the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify switch of the telephone is in ON position. Check connections
this. If ithe breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check
– and + terminals, and check that the voltage between – and + connections D3, D2 of the equipment in the installation. If you
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- cannot find the fault, the telephone, the audio unit may have
thing wrong with the power supply. broken down.
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. No telephone can be heard from the entrance
Check that the voltage between + and - in the audio unit is 15 panel.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
wrong with the audio unit. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The card holders do not light up. One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit, panel.
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
whether the lamp is burnt out. base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
when a call is made. thing wrong with the telephone.

Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of phone.
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls Check the volume control on the telephones (on the panel). If
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. the audio unit.
When a call is made, the telephones ring but con- You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
firmation of the call cannot be heard on the entrance ne.
panel. Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
audio unit. thing wrong with the telephone.
If the red indicator light flash continuosly. The sound produces feedback.
Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2 Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check connections D3, persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
D2 and D5, D4 of the equipment in the installation. If you can- audio unit.
not find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio
unit.
525
 The electric lock doesn’t work. Making a call from one of the external entrance
Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit is panels does not disable the entrance panels of the
15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22 and building which is being called.
18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong Check connections D3, D2 from the audio unit to the estate
with the electric lock. identifying accessory. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
something wrong with the audio unit or the estate identifying
accessory.

EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

Nothing works with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.

Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that The text “F2” flashes in the display.
the green led of the power supply to the audo unit is lit. Make Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect
If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check
when a call is made.
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not,
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: check that
the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc-
switch of the telephone is in the ON position (on the left).
tory do not light up.
Check the connections D4, D5; D3, D2 and D1, D2 between
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power devices. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of with the telephone or the audio unit.
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is
No telephone can be heard from the entrance
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with
panel.
directory.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
pressed.
One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has
panel.
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key-
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
be something wrong with the keypad. the telephone.

In the display the key which has been pressed does You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
not appear. phone.

Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- Check the volume control on the telephones on the entrance
sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the audio wrong with the audio unit.
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the You cannot hear the entrance panel on one tele-
keypad and the audio unit. phone.
In the display appear "88888". Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is 15 you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something the telephone.
wrong with the audio unit. The sound produces feedback.
The text “F0” flashes in the display. Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio
Check if there is a short circuit in the connections D4, D5; D3, unit.
D2 and D1, D2 between devices. If no fault is detected, there The electric lock does not work.
may be something wrong with the audio unit. Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
The text “F1” flashes in the display. electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault,
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong there may be something wrong with the electric lock.

526
CONCIERGE PANEL

Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly The text “F3” flashes in the display.
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different Ensure that the external entrance panel connected to the con-
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown cierge unit panel is configured as the main panel. Check the
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. BUS connection between the concierge unit panel and the exter-
nal entrance panel which has been configured as the main
Nothing works panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the main
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that
entrance panel.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± If the concierge telephone emits intermittent tones
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. when a call is made.
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone of the dwe-
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and lling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on the
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- left). If necessary, Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio
thing wrong with the power supply unit. unit to the telephones. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been something wrong with the telephone, or the audio unit.
pressed. No telephone and no entrance panel can be heard
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± from the concierge panel.
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numerical key- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be base of the concierge telephone. Check the reception volume
something wrong with the numerical keypad. control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the fault, there
In the display the key which has been pressed does may be something wrong with the audio unit or the telephone.
not appear. One telephone cannot be heard from the concierge
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- panel.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- something wrong with the telephone.
rical keypad and the audio unit. The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
In the display appear "88888". telephone or on any entrance panel.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
wrong with the audio unit. the audio unit.
The text “F0” flashes in the display. Concierge panel cannot be heard from one tele-
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections of phone.
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the telephones. Ensure something wrong with the telephone.
that the other panels connected to the BUS have the correct power It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
supply. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong ge unit.
with the audio unit.
Ensure that the receiver of the telephone of the concierge unit
The text “F1” flashes in the display. has been picked up.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.

527
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITHOUT ENTRANCE PANEL,
WITH CONCIERGE
Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly (value ‘P’ in position 1 of the configuration menu).
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- Before keying the telephone code into the main entrance
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those panel, check that you have communication with the main
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. entrance panel.
Programming the telephones of each dwelling must be carried Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
out from the entrance panel of the dwelling. Ensure that the telephone has received the code (telephone programmed). If
entrance panel of each dwelling is configured as the main panel the telephone cannot be programmed, check the connection
between the keypad and the audio unit.
ENTRANCE PANELS
BUILDINGS
Nothing works panel when a call is made.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: Check that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
that the voltage between – and + of the power supply is 15 switch of the telephone is in ON position. Check connections
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check
this. If ithe breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply connections D3, D2 of the equipment in the installation. If you
– and + terminals, and check that the voltage between – and + cannot find the fault, the telephone, the audio unit may have
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- broken down.
thing wrong with the power supply. No telephone can be heard from the entrance
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. panel.
Check that the voltage between + and - in the audio unit is 15 Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit. One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
The card holders do not light up. panel.
Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit, Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
whether the lamp is burnt out. the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel thing wrong with the telephone.
when a call is made. You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the phone.
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of Check the volume control on the telephones (on the panel). If
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be the audio unit.
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
When a call is made, the telephones ring but con- ne.
firmation of the call cannot be heard on the entrance Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
panel. base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the thing wrong with the telephone.
audio unit. The sound produces feedback.
If the red indicator light flash continuosly. Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2 persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
from the audio unit to all the telephones. Check connections D3, audio unit.
D2 and D5, D4 of the equipment in the installation. If you can- The electric lock doesn’t work.
not find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio
Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit
unit.
is 15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22
If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance and 18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the electric lock.
528
 Making a call from one of the external entrance identifying accessory. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
panels does not disable the entrance panels of the something wrong with the audio unit or the estate identifying
building which is being called. accessory.
Check connections D3, D2 from the audio unit to the estate

CONCIERGE PANEL
Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly The text “F1” flashes in the display.
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
Ensure that the AIB-001 accessories are correctly configured. To The text “F3” flashes in the display.
do so, make sure that the configuration of these devices is the
Check configuration of concierge panel. Check the voltage
same as that shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 5.
between D5, D4 terminals of the audio unit of concierge unit
panel. Check the BUS connection between the concierge unit
Nothing works panel and the entrance panels of buildings. If you cannot find
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit of
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make sure the concierge panel.
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± If the concierge telephone emits intermittent tones
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. when a call is made.
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone of the dwe-
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and lling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on the
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- left). If necessary, Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio
thing wrong with the power supply unit. unit to the telephones. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been something wrong with the telephone, or the audio unit.
pressed. No telephone can be heard from the concierge
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± panel.
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numeric key- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be base of the concierge telephone. Check the reception volume
something wrong with the numeric keypad. control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the fault, there
In the display the key which has been pressed does may be something wrong with the audio unit or the telephone.
not appear. One telephone cannot be heard from the concierge
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- panel.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- something wrong with the telephone.
ric keypad and the audio unit.
The concierge panel cannot be heard on any tele-
In the display appear "88888". phone.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
wrong with the audio unit. the audio unit.
The text “F0” flashes in the display. Concierge panel cannot be heard from one tele-
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections of phone.
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the telephones. Ensure something wrong with the telephone.
that the other panels connected to the BUS have the correct power
It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
supply. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
ge unit.
with the audio unit.
Ensure that the receiver of the telephone of the concierge unit
has been picked up.

529
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD
Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly Before keying the telephone code into the main entrance
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- panel, check that you have communication with the main
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those entrance panel.
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
Programming the telephones of each dwelling must be carried telephone has received the code (telephone programmed). If
out from the entrance panel of the dwelling. Ensure that the the telephone cannot be programmed, check the connection
entrance panel of each dwelling is configured as the main panel between the keypad and the audio unit.
(value ‘P’ in position 1 of the configuration menu).

ENTRANCE PANELS
BUILDINGS/ EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)
Nothing works D2 and D1, D2 between devices. If no fault is detected, there
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that may be something wrong with the audio unit.
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make The text “F1” flashes in the display
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect
The text “F2” flashes in the display
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc-
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
tory do not light up.
If the panel emits intermittent tones when a call is
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power
made
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: check that
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
directory. switch of the telephone is in the ON position (on the left).
Check the connections D4, D5; D3, D2 and D1, D2 between
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been
devices. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
pressed.
with the telephone or the audio unit.
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has
No telephone can be heard from the entrance
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key-
panel
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
be something wrong with the keypad. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.

In the display the key which has been pressed does One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
not appear. panel

Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If
sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the audio the telephone.
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
keypad and the audio unit. phone
In the display appear "88888". Check the volume control on the telephones on the entrance
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is 15 panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit. You cannot hear the entrance panel on one tele-
The text “F0” flashes in the display phone

Check if there is a short circuit in the connections D4, D5; D3, Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If

530
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the The electric lock does not work
telephone. Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
The sound produces feedback electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault,
unit. there may be something wrong with the electric lock.

CONCIERGE PANEL
Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- The text “F3” flashes in the display.
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those
Ensure that the external entrance panel connected to the con-
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6.
cierge unit panel is configured as the main panel. Check the
BUS connection between the concierge unit panel and the
Nothing works external entrance panel which has been configured as the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that main panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make thing wrong with the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the
sure that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit main entrance panel.
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, If the concierge telephone emits intermittent tones
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 when a call is made.
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone of the dwe-
all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check lling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the
that the voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on the
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. left). If necessary, Check connections D1 and D2 from the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot find the fault, there
pressed. may be something wrong with the telephone, or the audio unit.
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± No telephone and no entrance panel can be heard
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numeric key- from the concierge panel.
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
be something wrong with the numeric keypad. base of the concierge telephone. Check the reception volume
In the display the key which has been pressed does control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the fault, there
not appear. may be something wrong with the audio unit or the telephone.
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- One telephone cannot be heard from the concier-
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is ge panel.
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
numeric keypad and the audio unit. be something wrong with the telephone.
In the display appear "88888". The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 telephone or on any entrance panel.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
wrong with the audio unit. you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
The text “F0” flashes in the display. the audio unit.
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections Concierge panel cannot be heard from one tele-
of the audio unit and check the connections with the equipments phone.
of the installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short cir- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
cuit in the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the telepho- base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
nes. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS have the be something wrong with the telephone.
correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
It is not possible to call dwellings from the con-
something wrong with the audio unit.
cierge unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Ensure that the receiver of the telephone of the concierge unit
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the has been picked up.
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong

531
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITHOUT ENTRANCE PANEL,
WITH CONCIERGE

ENTRANCE PANELS

Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly Before keying the telephone code into the main entrance
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- panel, check that you have communication with the main
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those entrance panel.
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
Programming the telephones of each dwelling must be carried telephone has received the code (telephone programmed). If
out from the entrance panel of the dwelling. Ensure that the the telephone cannot be programmed, check the connection
entrance panel of each dwelling is configured as the main panel between the keypad and the audio unit.
(value ‘P’ in position 1 of the configuration menu).

BUILDINGS
Nothing works Check if there is a short circuit in the connections D4, D5;
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that D3, D2 and D1, D2 between devices. If no fault is detected,
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit The text “F1” flashes in the display.
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check
The text “F2” flashes in the display.
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not,
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc-
cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
tory do not light up.
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power
If the panel emits intermittent tones when a call is
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of
made.
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: check that
directory. the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
switch of the telephone is in the ON position (on the left).
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been
Check the connections D4, D5; D3, D2 and D1, D2 between
pressed.
devices. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has with the telephone or the audio unit.
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key-
No telephone can be heard from the entrance
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
panel.
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may
be something wrong with the keypad. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
In the display the key which has been pressed does
not appear. One telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
panel.
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres-
sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the audio you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the the telephone.
keypad and the audio unit. You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
In the display appear "88888". phone.

Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is 15 Check the volume control on the telephones on the entrance
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the audio unit. wrong with the audio unit.

The text “F0” flashes in the display. You cannot hear the entrance panel on one tele-
phone.
532
 Check the hanging-up button on the base of the telephone. If unit.
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the The electric lock does not work
telephone.
Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
The sound produces feedback. electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the electric lock.

CONCIERGE PANEL
Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly con- The text “F3” flashes in the display.
figured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different Check configuration of concierge panel. Check the voltage
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown between D5, D4 terminals of the audio unit of concierge panel.
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. Check the BUS connection between the concierge panel and the
entrance panels of buildings. If you cannot find the fault, there
Nothing works may be something wrong with the audio unit of the concierge
panel or of the main entrance panel.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure If the concierge telephone emits intermittent tones
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± when a call is made.
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone of the dwe-
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and lling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on the
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage left). If necessary, check connections D1 and D2 from the audio
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- unit to the telephones. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
thing wrong with the power supply unit. something wrong with the telephone, or the audio unit.
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been No telephone can be heard from the concierge unit
pressed. panel.
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numeric keypad base of the concierge telephone. Check the reception volume
to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be some- control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the fault, there
thing wrong with the numeric keypad. may be something wrong with the audio unit or the telephone.
In the display the key which has been pressed does One telephone cannot be heard from the concierge
not appear. panel.
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pressed. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 ± base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit to something wrong with the telephone.
the power supply unit. Check the connection between the numeric The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
keypad and the audio unit. telephone.
In the display appear "88888". Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit. Concierge panel cannot be heard from one tele-
The text “F0” flashes in the display. phone.
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections of Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipments of base of the telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
the installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit something wrong with the telephone.
in the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the telephones. It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS have the correct ge unit.
power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Ensure that the receiver of the telephone of the concierge unit
wrong with the audio unit.
has been picked up.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
533
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD. ELECTRONIC CALL.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+COAXIAL
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

ENTRANCE PANELS
Ensure that the entrance panel of the installation is correctly numerical keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detec-
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- ted, there may be something wrong with the numerical keypad.
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those In the display the key which has been pressed
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. does not appear.
If required, ensure that the AIB-001 accessories are correctly Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres-
configured. To do so, make sure that the configuration of these sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit
devices is the same as that shown in the corresponding diagram is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
and on pages 242 to 244, depending on the installation which audio unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection bet-
is being performed. ween the numerical keypad and the audio unit.
To program the connection brackets/telephones, ensure that In the display appear "88888".
the entrance panel is configured as the main panel (value ‘P’ in
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is
position 1 of the configuration menu). Before keying the connec-
15 ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be some-
tion bracket/telephone code into the main entrance panel, check
thing wrong with the audio unit.
that you have communication with the panel. With AIB-001,
check connections I2, I1 of the accessory to the device supplying The text “F0” flashes in the display.
power to it. Check the connection of I1 to I1 in the acces- Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections from
sory. Remember that the audio unit emits confirmation tones the audio unit to all the devices, D1 and D2. If no fault is detec-
when the connection bracket/telephone has received the code ted, there may be something wrong with the audio unit, or if
(programmed connection bracket/telephone). If you are unable required, the AIB-001 accessory
to program the connection bracket/telephone: check the con- The text “F1” flashes in the display.
nection between the keypad and the audio unit. Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
Nothing works wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that The text “F2” flashes in the display.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check when a call is made.
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not,
The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit.
Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
tory do not light up. Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power devices. In installations with AIB-001, make sure that the codes
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of assigned to the connection brackets/telephones of each of the
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is floors is one of the values shown on pages 242 to 244, depen-
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with ding on the installation. If you cannot find the fault, there may
directory. be something wrong with the connection bracket/telephone
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been with the audio unit, or if required, the AIB-001 accessory.
pressed. No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has entrance panel.
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key- Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.

534
 One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be
entrance panel. removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in
Check the hanging-up button on the base of the monitor/tele- series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brac-
phone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something kets, but from the one at the end of the line; c) Check that resis-
wrong with the monitor/telephone. tences of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2,
M. Check coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you
You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the
tor/telephone.
video unit.
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones on the
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
thing wrong with the audio unit.
Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni-
monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the con-
tor/telephone.
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you
Check the hanging-up button on the base of the monitor/tele- cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
phone. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something monitor.
wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
The sound produces feedback.
Check that the entrance panel is defined as the main one. If
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with
unit. the audio unit.
The electric lock does not work. Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check the connections of the numeric keypad. Check that Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
when the electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
and 12 of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
fault, there may be something wrong with the electric lock. bracket or the monitor.
The video system does not work in any monitor: Blank screen on all the monitors.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
Check the connection between the video and the audio units.
ving a call,..
Check that the coaxial cable to the monitors is connected to the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the V1 and M terminals of the video unit. If splitters have been used
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supplies between in the distribution, check that the voltage between - and + of the
- and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. Check the connections of the coaxial
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and cable from the video unit to the monitors. If failure is not detec-
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the - and ted, there may be something wrong with the audio unit, video
+ terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage unit or any splitter.
between - and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the conexion between
Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
the power supply and the audio unit. If it's not correct, there may
be something wrong with the power supply. Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto
tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a
distribution, check that the voltage between - and + of the split-
call,..
ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
(on the left). Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check of he flat.
the connection between the connection bracket and the monitor.
Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
Check that the voltage between - and + of the connection brac-
ket is 14 ± 10% Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be Check the connection between the connection bracket and
something wrong with the monitor. the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
monitor's connection bracket. f splitters have been used in the
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
Check the connection + and – of the video unit and check that connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc. If splitters have been used in the dis- there may be something wrong with the tap-off, connection
tribution, check that the voltage between - and + of the splitters bracket or monitor.
is 14 ± 15% Vdc.
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs

535
CONCIERGE PANEL
Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly The text “F3” flashes in the display
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different Ensure that the entrance panel connected to the concierge
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown panel is configured as the main panel. Check the BUS connec-
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. tion between the concierge panel and the entrance panel which
has been configured as the main panel. If you cannot find the
Nothing works fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit of the
concierge panel or of the main entrance panel.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± tent tones when a call is made.
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and the programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage the left). If necessary, Check connections D1 and D2 from the
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- audio unit to the connection brackets/telephones. If you cannot
thing wrong with the power supply unit. find the fault, there may be something wrong with the moni-
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been tor/telephone, or the audio unit.
pressed. No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has be heard from the concierge panel.
been pressed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the key- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
numerical keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, volume control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the
there may be something wrong with the numerical keypad. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
In the display the key which has been pressed does monitor/telephone.
not appear. One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- concierge panel.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
rical keypad and the audio unit. The concierge panel cannot be heard on any moni-
In the display appear "88888". tor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 Check the emission volume control in the concierge unit panel.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
wrong with the audio unit. the audio unit.
The text “F0” flashes in the display. Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D3, D2 connections of tor/telephone.
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipments of Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
the installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
in the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there ge unit.
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
The text “F1” flashes in the display. cierge unit has been picked up.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.

536
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY

ENTRANCE PANELS

Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly In the display the key which has been pressed
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- does not appear.
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres-
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit
If required, ensure that the AIB-001 accessories are correctly is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
configured. To do so, make sure that the configuration of these audio unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection bet-
devices is the same as that shown in the corresponding diagram ween the keypad and the audio unit.
and on pages 242 to 244, depending on the installation which In the display appear "88888".
is being performed.
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is
To program the connection brackets/telephones, ensure that 15 ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be some-
the entrance panel is configured as the main panel (value ‘P’ in thing wrong with the audio unit.
position 1 of the configuration menu). Before keying the connec-
The text “F0” flashes in the display.
tion bracket/telephone code into the main entrance panel, check
that you have communication with the panel. With AIB-001, Check if there is a short circuit in the connections D1 and D2
check connections I2, I1 of the accessory to the device supplying between devices. Check connections D3 and D2 of devices in
power to it. Check the connection of I1 to I1 in the acces- installation. If no fault is detected, there may be something
sory. Remember that the audio unit emits confirmation tones wrong with the audio unit, or if required, the AIB-001 acces-
when the connection bracket/telephone has received the code sory
(programmed connection bracket/telephone). If you are unable The text “F1” flashes in the display.
to program the connection bracket/telephone: check the con- Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
nection between the keypad and the audio unit. audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
Nothing works The text “F2” flashes in the display.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
the green led of the power supply to the audo unit is lit. Make entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect when a call is made.
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- Check connections D1, D2 and D3, D2 between devices. In
tory do not light up. installations with AIB-001, make sure that the codes assigned
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power to the connection brackets/telephones of each of the floors is
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of one of the values shown on pages 242 to 244, depending on
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is the installation. If no fault is detected, there may be something
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with wrong with the connection bracket/telephone, the audio unit or
directory. if required, the AIB-001 accessory.
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
pressed. entrance panel.
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key- fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may entrance panel.
be something wrong with the keypad. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the

537
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2, M.
may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone. Check coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot
You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni- find the fault, there may be something wrong with the video
tor/telephone. unit.

Check the cable connections between the receiver and the Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone. Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
The sound produces feedback. monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio
cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
unit.
monitor.
The electric lock does not work.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
Check that one entrance panel has been defined as the main
electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12 of
one. Check connections D3 and D2 of devices in installation.
the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there
If you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with
may be something wrong with the electric lock.
the audio unit of the main entrance panel.
The video system does not work in any monitor:
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
ving a call,.. Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the
the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
monitors. Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that
bracket or the monitor.
feeds the video unit. Check that the voltage of the power supply
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short cir- Blank screen on all the monitors.
cuit and rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 Check the connection between the video and the audio unit.
minute and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect Check connections V2, M of the video units of the installation.
all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
that voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the con- tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. Check
nection + and – of the video unit and check that the voltage is 15 the connections of the coaxial cable from the video unit to the
±10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may be something wrong with connection bracket. If failure is not detected, there may be
the power supply. something wrong with the audio unit, video unit or any splitter.
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
call,.. nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection distribution, check that the voltage between + and – of the split-
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15% be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong of the building.
with the monitor. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted Check the connection between the connection bracket and
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
main one. Check the connection + and – of the video units and distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
check that the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc. in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. there may be something wrong with the connection bracket,
monitor or tap-off of that floor.
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs
have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in
series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets,
but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences

538
CONCIERGE PANEL
Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different of the concierge panel or of the main entrance panel.
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. tent tones when a call is made.
The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
Nothing works dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that the programming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure in ON position (on the left). If necessary, Check connections D1
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± and D2 from the audio unit to the connection brackets/telepho-
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. nes. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and with the monitor/telephone, or the audio unit.
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage be heard from the concierge unit panel.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
thing wrong with the power supply unit. base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been volume control in the concierge unit panel. If you cannot find the
pressed. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± monitor/telephone.
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numerical key- One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be concierge panel.
something wrong with the numerical keypad. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
In the display the key which has been pressed does base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
not appear. may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is monitor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit Check the emission volume control in the concierge unit panel.
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
rical keypad and the audio unit. the audio unit.
In the display appear "88888". Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 tor/telephone.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
wrong with the audio unit. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
The text “F0” flashes in the display. may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D3, D2 connections of It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the ge unit.
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- cierge unit has been picked up.
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The text “F3” flashes in the display.
Ensure that one of the entrance panels connected to the con-
cierge unit panel is configured as the main panel. Check the BUS
connection between the concierge unit panel and the entrance
panel which has been configured as the main panel. If you cannot

539
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD
Programming the connection brackets/telephone of each dwe- Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
lling must be carried out from the entrance panel of the dwelling. connection bracket/telephone has received the code (device
Check that the J1 jumper of the audio unit of the entrance panel programmed). If the connection bracket/telephone cannot be
of each building is inserted (panel configured as the main programmed: Check the connection between 7 in the audio
panel).. Make sure you have communication with the main unit and the push-buttons, the connection between the push-but-
entrance panel of the dwelling before pressing the push-button tons and the concentrator of calls and the connection between
that you want to associate to the connection brackets/telephone. the concentrator of calls and the audio unit.

ENTRANCE PANELS
BUILDINGS

Nothing works find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that unit.
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Check If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15 panel when a call is made.
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify The call tone cannot be heard on the telephone: Check that
this. If ithe breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply the handset is not off the hook. Check that the programming
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and – switch of the device is in ON position. Check connections D1
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- and D2 from the audio unit to all the connection brackets/tele-
thing wrong with the power supply. phones. Check connections D3, D2 of the equipments in the
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. installation. If you cannot find the fault, the connection brac-
Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15 ket/telephone, the audio unit or some other equipment in the
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something installation may have broken down.
wrong with the audio unit. No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
The card holders do not light up. entrance panel.

Check that the voltage between + and – of the power supply Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
that supplies the audio unit is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check that the vol- fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
tage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit, with the lighting push- One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check whether the lamp is entrance panel.
burnt out. Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
when a call is made. the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls tor/telephone.
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones (on the
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. panel). If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring wrong with the audio unit.
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
entrance panel. tor/telephone.
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
audio unit. the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
If the red indicator light flash continuosly. there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2 The sound produces feedback.
from the audio unit to all the devices. Check connections D3, D2 Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
and D5, D4 of the equipments in the installation. If you cannot persists, lower the volume using the volume controls of the
audio unit.

540
 The electric lock doesn’t work. Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit is ture, ghost images, lost of synchronisation.
15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22 and Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the con-
with the electric lock. nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you
Making a call from one of the external entrance cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
panels does not disable the entrance panels of the monitor.
building which is being called. Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check connections D3 and D2 from the entrance panel to the Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
identifying accessories of the building. If the fault cannot be been defined as the main panel. Check connections D3 and
found, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the D2 between different entrance panels. If you cannot find the
estate identifying accessory. fault there may be something wrong with the audio unit of the
The video system does not work in any monitor: main entrance panel.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
ving a call,.. Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
monitors. Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
feeds the video unit. Check that the voltage of the power supply bracket or the monitor.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short cir- Blank screen on all the monitors.
cuit and rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1
Check the connection between the video and the audio unit.
minute and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect
Check connections V2, M and V4, M of the video units of the
all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check
installation. If splitters have been used in the distribution, check
that voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the con-
that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15%
nection + and – of the video unit and check that the voltage is 15
Vdc. Check the connections of the coaxial cable from the video
±10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may be something wrong with
unit to the connection bracket. If failure is not detected, there
the power supply.
may be something wrong with the audio unit, video unit or any
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto splitter.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a
Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
call,..
Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position.
nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection
tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the
distribution, check that the voltage between + and – of the split-
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15%
ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong
be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
with the monitor.
of the building.
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted
Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the connection between the connection bracket and
Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
been defined as the main panel. Check the connection + and –
monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
of the video units and check that the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc.
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs there may be something wrong with the connection bracket,
have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be monitor or tap-off of the floor.
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in
series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets,
but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences
of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2, M. Check
coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.

541
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

Nothing works If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones

Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that when a call is made.
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 Check connections D1, D2; D3, D2 and D4, D5 between devi-
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect ces. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong with
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check the connection bracket/telephone or the audio unit.
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. entrance panel.
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
tory do not light up. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of entrance panel.
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is
Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
directory.
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been
You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
pressed.
tor/telephone.
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones on the
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key-
entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
thing wrong with the audio unit.
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may
be something wrong with the keypad. You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni-
tor/telephone.
In the display the key which has been pressed does
not appear. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres-
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the audio The sound produces feedback.
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio
keypad and the audio unit. unit.
In the display appear "88888". The electric lock does not work.
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is 15 Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12
wrong with the audio unit. of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault,
The text “F0” flashes in the display. there may be something wrong with the electric lock.

Check if there is a short circuit in the connections D4,D5 ; The video system does not work in any monitor:
D3,D2 and D2,D1 between devices. If no fault is detected, there auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
may be something wrong with the audio unit, or if required, the ving a call,..
AIB-001 accessory Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds
The text “F1” flashes in the display. the monitors. Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit
that feeds the video unit. Check that the voltage of the power
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
supply between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
short circuit and rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
for 1 minute and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, dis-
The text “F2” flashes in the display. connect all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit
Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the entran- and check that voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc.
ce panel contains a value that is possible for the particular Check the connection + and – of the video unit and check that
model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find the fault, the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may be
there may be something wrong with the audio unit. something wrong with the power supply.

542
 Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
call,.. nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection distribution, check that the voltage between + and – of the split-
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15% be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong of the building.
with the monitor. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted Check the connection between the connection bracket and
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
main one. Check the connection + and – of the video units and distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
check that the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc. in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. there may be something wrong with the connection bracket,
monitor or tap-off of that floor.
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs
have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in
series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets,
but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences
of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2, M. Check
coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connec-
tion brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you can-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the moni-
tor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that one entrance panel has been defined as the main
one. Check connections D3 and D2 of devices in installation. If
you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
audio unit of the main entrance panel.
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led flash.
Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the connection bracket or
the monitor.
Blank screen on all the monitors.
Check the connection between the video and the audio unit.
Check connections V1, M; V2, M and V4, M of the video units
of the installation. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±
15% Vdc. Check the connections of the coaxial cable from the
video unit to the connection bracket. If failure is not detected,
there may be something wrong with the audio unit, video unit or
any splitter.

543
CONCIERGE PANEL

Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly con- panel and the entrance panel which has been configured as the
figured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different main panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown wrong with the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the main
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. entrance panel.
If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
Nothing works tent tones when a call is made.

Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± the programming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. in ON position (on the left). If necessary, Check connections D1
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and and D2 from the audio unit to the connection brackets/telepho-
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and nes. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage with the telephone, or the audio unit.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
thing wrong with the power supply unit. be heard from the concierge panel.
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
pressed. base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± volume control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numeric keypad fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be some- monitor/telephone.
thing wrong with the numeric keypad. One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
In the display the key which has been pressed does concierge panel.
not appear. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pressed. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 ± may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit to The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
the power supply unit. Check the connection between the numeric monitor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
keypad and the audio unit. Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
In the display appear "88888". you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 audio unit.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
wrong with the audio unit. tor/telephone.
The text “F0” flashes in the display. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections of base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- ge unit.
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there cierge unit has been picked up.
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The text “F3” flashes in the display.
Ensure that the entrance panel of the external point of entry con-
nected to the concierge panel is configured as the main external
panel. Check the BUS connection between the concierge unit

544
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD
Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly Before keying the connection bracket/telephone code into
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- the main entrance panel, check that you have communication
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those with the main entrance panel of the building.
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
Programming the connection brackets/telephones of each connection bracket/telephone has received the code (connec-
dwelling must be carried out from the entrance panel of the dwe- tion bracket/telephone programmed). If the connection brac-
lling. Ensure that the entrance panel of each dwelling is configu- ket/telephone cannot be programmed, check the connection
red as the main panel (value ‘P’ in position 1 of the configuration between the keypad and the audio unit.
menu).

ENTRANCE PANELS
BUILDINGS/ EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)
Nothing works ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that wrong with the audio unit.
the green led of the power supply to the audo unit is lit. Make The text “F0” flashes in the display.
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit Check connections D1, D2; D3, D2 and D4, D5 between
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, devices. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 with the audio unit.
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc-
tory do not light up. The text “F2” flashes in the display.

Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
directory. If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been when a call is made.
pressed. The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key- gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the Check connections D1, D2; D3, D2 and D4, D5 between devi-
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may ces. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong with
be something wrong with the keypad. the connection bracket/telephone or the audio unit.

In the display the key which has been pressed does No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
not appear. entrance panel.

Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the audio One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the entrance panel.
keypad and the audio unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
In the display appear "88888". base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is 15 there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.

545
 You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni- series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the connection brac-
tor/telephone. kets, but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resis-
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones on the tences of 75 ohms are connected in the unused terminals V2,
entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- M. Check coaxial connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you
thing wrong with the audio unit. cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the
video unit.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni-
tor/telephone. Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone. monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you
The sound produces feedback.
cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio monitor.
unit.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
The electric lock does not work.
Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the been defined as the main panel. Check connections D3 and
electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12 of D2 of devices in installation. If you cannot find the fault there
the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit of the main
may be something wrong with the electric lock. entrance panel.
The video system does not work in any monitor: Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
ving a call,..
flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
monitors. Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that bracket or the monitor.
feeds the video unit. Check that the voltage of the power supply
Blank screen on all the monitors.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short cir-
cuit and rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 Check the connection between the video and the audio unit.
minute and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect Check connections V1, M; V2, M and V4, M of the video units
all the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check of the installation. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
that voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the con- check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±
nection + and – of the video unit and check that the voltage is 15 15% Vdc. Check the connections of the coaxial cable from the
±10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may be something wrong with video unit to the connection bracket. If failure is not detected,
the power supply. there may be something wrong with the audio unit, video unit
or any splitter.
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
call,.. Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the distribution, check that the voltage between + and – of the split-
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15% ters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong be something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter
with the monitor. of the building.

Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Check the connection between the connection bracket and
Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
been defined as the main panel. Check the connection + and – monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
of the video units and check that the voltage is 15 ±10% Vdc. distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc.
there may be something wrong with the connection bracket,
Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs monitor or tap-off of that floor.
have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resistance must be
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in

546
CONCIERGE PANEL

Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the main entrance
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown panel.
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
tent tones when a call is made.
Nothing works The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure the programming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± in ON position (on the left). If necessary, Check connections D1
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. and D2 from the audio unit to the connection brackets/telepho-
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and nes. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and with the connection bracket/telephone, or the audio unit.
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- be heard from the concierge unit panel.
thing wrong with the power supply unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
pressed. volume control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numerical key- monitor/telephone.
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
something wrong with the numerical keypad. concierge panel.
In the display the key which has been pressed does Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
not appear. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is The concierge panel cannot be heard on any moni-
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit tor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
rical keypad and the audio unit. you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
In the display appear "88888". the audio unit.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something tor/telephone.
wrong with the audio unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
The text “F0” flashes in the display. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections of may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in ge unit.
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS cierge unit has been picked up.
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The text “F3” flashes in the display.
Ensure the external entrance panel connected to the concierge
unit panel is configured as the main external panel. Check the BUS
connection between the concierge unit panel and the external
entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel. If

547
DIGITAL VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD. ELECTRONIC CALL.
DIGITAL SYSTEM 4+TWISTED PAIR

STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

ENTRANCE PANELS
Ensure that the entrance panel of the installation is correctly been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those the keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected,
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. there may be something wrong with the keypad.
If required, ensure that the AIB-001 accessories are correctly In the display the key which has been pressed
configured. To do so, make sure that the configuration of these does not appear.
devices is the same as that shown in the corresponding diagram Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres-
and on pages 242 to 244, depending on the installation which sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit
is being performed. is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
To program the connection brackets/telephones, ensure that audio unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection bet-
the entrance panel is configured as the main panel (value ‘P’ in ween the keypad and the audio unit.
position 1 of the configuration menu). Before keying the connec- In the display appear "88888".
tion bracket/telephone code into the main entrance panel, check
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is
that you have communication with the panel. With AIB-001,
15 ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be some-
check connections I2, I1 of the accessory to the device supplying
thing wrong with the audio unit.
power to it. Check the connection of I1 to I1 in the acces-
sory. Remember that the audio unit emits confirmation tones The text “F0” flashes in the display.
when the connection bracket/telephone has received the code Check if there is a short circuit in the connections from the
(programmed connection bracket/telephone). If you are unable audio unit to the monitors/telephones, D1 and D2. If no fault is
to program the connection bracket/telephone: check the con- detected, there may be something wrong with the audio unit,
nection between the keypad and the audio unit. or if required the AIB-001 accessory.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Nothing works Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
the green led of the power supply to the audo unit is lit. Make wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit The text “F2” flashes in the display.
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. when a call is made.
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
tory do not light up. Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of Check connections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is devices. In installations with AIB-001, make sure that the codes
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with assigned to the connection brackets/telephones of each of the
directory. floors is one of the values shown on pages 242 to 244, depen-
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been ding on the installation. If you cannot find the fault, there may
pressed. be something wrong with the connection bracket/telephone,
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has the audio unit, or if required the AIB-001 accessory.

548
 No monitor/telephone can be heard from the entrance panel defined as the main one. If splitters have been
entrance panel. used in the distribution, check that the voltage between - and +
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. Check that twisted pair line
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been connected in
series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed from all the
One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the 120
entrance panel.
Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the
Check the cable connections between the receiver and the one at the end of the line. Check twisted pair connection in
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone. something wrong with the video unit.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni- Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
tor/telephone. ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones on the Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: iwith
thing wrong with the audio unit.
monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni- nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
tor/telephone. the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection
Check the cable connections between the receiver and the brackets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there wrong with the monitor.
may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone. Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
The sound produces feedback. Check that the entrance panel is defined as the main one. If
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with
unit. the audio unit.
The electric lock does not work. Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12 of flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
may be something wrong with the electric lock. bracket or the monitor.
The video system does not work in any monitor: Blank screen in all the monitors.
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
ving a call,.. T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the connection
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the between the video and the audio units. If splitters have been
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between - used in the distribution, check that the voltage between - and +
and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. Check the connections of the
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and twisted pair from the video unit to the connection brackets. If
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the - and failure is not detected, there may be something wrong with the
+ terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage video unit, any tap-off or any splitter.
between - and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
be something wrong with the power supply.
Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
call,.. Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
(on the left). Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check building.
the connection between the connection bracket and the monitor. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
Check that the voltage between - and + of the connection brac-
Check the connection between the connection bracket and
ket is 14 ± 15% Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be
the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
something wrong with the monitor.
monitor's connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted from the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. detected there may be something wrong with the connection
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. bracket, monitor or tap-off of that floor.
In multiple access installation, check that you have only one

549
CONCIERGE PANEL

Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly configured as the main panel. If you cannot find the fault, there
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different may be something wrong with the audio unit of the concierge
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown panel or of the main entrance panel.
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
tent tones when a call is made.
Nothing works The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure the programming switch of the telephone is in ON position (on
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± the left). If necessary, Check connections D1 and D2 from the
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. audio unit to the connection brackets/telephones. If you cannot
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and find the fault, there may be something wrong with the moni-
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and tor/telephone, or the audio unit.
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- be heard from the concierge panel.
thing wrong with the power supply unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
pressed. volume control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
been pressed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the key- monitor/telephone.
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
numerical keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, concierge panel.
there may be something wrong with the numerical keypad. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
In the display the key which has been pressed does base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
not appear. may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- The concierge panel cannot be heard on any moni-
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is tor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit Check the emission volume control in the concierge unit panel.
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
rical keypad and the audio unit. the audio unit.
In the display appear "88888". Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 tor/telephone.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
wrong with the audio unit. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
The text “F0” flashes in the display. may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D3, D2 connections of It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipments of ge unit.
the installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
in the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- cierge unit has been picked up.
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The text “F3” flashes in the display.
Ensure that the entrance panel connected to the concierge panel
is configured as the main panel. Check the BUS connection bet-
ween the concierge panel and the entrance panel which has been

550
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
ENTRANCE PANELS
Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly In the display the key which has been pressed
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- does not appear.
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres-
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit
If required, ensure that the AIB-001 accessories are correctly is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the
configured. To do so, make sure that the configuration of these audio unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection bet-
devices is the same as that shown in the corresponding diagram ween the keypad and the audio unit.
and on pages 242 to 244, depending on the installation which In the display appear "88888".
is being performed.
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is
To program the connection brackets/telephones, ensure that 15 ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be some-
the entrance panel of one point of entry is configured as the main thing wrong with the audio unit.
panel (value ‘P’ in position 1 of the configuration menu). Before
The text “F0” flashes in the display.
keying the connection bracket/telephone code into the main
entrance panel, check that you have communication with the Check if there is a short circuit in the connections D1 and D2
panel. With AIB-001, check connections I2, I1 of the accessory between devices. Check connections D3 and D2 of devices in
to the device supplying power to it. Check the connection of installation. If no fault is detected, there may be something
I1 to I1 in the accessory. Remember that the audio unit emits wrong with the audio unit, or if required, the AIB-001 acces-
confirmation tones when the connection bracket/telephone has sory
received the code (programmed connection bracket/telephone). The text “F1” flashes in the display.
If you are unable to program the connection bracket/telephone: Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
check the connection between the keypad and the audio unit. audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
Nothing works The text “F2” flashes in the display.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
the green led of the power supply to the audo unit is lit. Make entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect when a call is made.
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- Check connections D1, D2 and D3, D2 between devices. In
tory do not light up. installations with AIB-001, make sure that the codes assigned
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power to the connection brackets/telephones of each of the floors is
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of one of the values shown on pages 242 to 244, depending on
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is the installation. If no fault is detected, there may be something
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with wrong with the connection bracket/telephone, the audio unit or
directory. if required, the AIB-001 accessory.
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
pressed. entrance panel.
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key- fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may entrance panel.
be something wrong with the keypad. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.

551
 You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni- are connected in the unused terminals T2+, T2–. Check twisted
tor/telephone. pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones on the fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
thing wrong with the audio unit. ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni- Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
tor/telephone. Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
Check the cable connections between the receiver and the monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone. the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection
The sound produces feedback. brackets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something
wrong with the monitor.
Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio
unit. Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.

The electric lock does not work. Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the
main one. Check connections D3 and D2 between different
Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
entrance panels. If you cannot find the fault there may be some-
electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12 of
thing wrong with the audio unit.
the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the electric lock. Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.

The video system does not work in any monitor: Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
ving a call,.. the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
bracket or the monitor.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between + Blank screen in all the monitors.
and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the T2+, T2–
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the + and connections of the twisted pair between the different video
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage units. Check the connection between the video and the audio
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may units. If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that
be something wrong with the power supply. the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc.
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Check the connections of the twisted pair from the video unit to
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a the connection brackets. If failure is not detected, there may be
call,.. something wrong with the video unit, any tap-off or any splitter.

Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15% check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
with the monitor. thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted building.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. dwelling.

Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the Check the connection between the connection bracket and
main one. the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc. Check that
in the connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection from
twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been
the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detec-
connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed
ted there may be something wrong with the connection brac-
from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the
ket, monitor or tap-off of the floor.
120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the
one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences of 220 ohms

552
CONCIERGE PANEL

Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different of the concierge panel or of the main entrance panel.
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. tent tones when a call is made.
The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
Nothing works dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that the programming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure in ON position (on the left). If necessary, Check connections D1
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± and D2 from the audio unit to the connection brackets/telepho-
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. nes. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and with the monitor/telephone, or the audio unit.
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage be heard from the concierge unit panel.
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
thing wrong with the power supply unit. base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been volume control in the concierge unit panel. If you cannot find the
pressed. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± monitor/telephone.
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numerical key- One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be concierge panel.
something wrong with the numerical keypad. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
In the display the key which has been pressed does base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
not appear. may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is monitor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit Check the emission volume control in the concierge unit panel.
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
rical keypad and the audio unit. the audio unit.
In the display appear "88888". Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 tor/telephone.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
wrong with the audio unit. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
The text “F0” flashes in the display. may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D3, D2 connections of It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the ge unit.
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- cierge unit has been picked up.
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The text “F3” flashes in the display.
Ensure that one of the entrance panels connected to the con-
cierge unit panel is configured as the main panel. Check the BUS
connection between the concierge unit panel and the entrance
panel which has been configured as the main panel. If you cannot

553
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUT-
TONS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH
KEYPAD
Programming the connection brackets/telephone of each dwe- Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
lling must be carried out from the entrance panel of the dwelling. connection bracket/telephone has received the code (device
Check that the J1 jumper of the audio unit of the entrance panel programmed). If the connection bracket/telephone cannot be
of each building is inserted (panel configured as the main programmed: Check the connection between 7 in the audio
panel).. Make sure you have communication with the main unit and the push-buttons, the connection between the push-but-
entrance panel of the dwelling before pressing the push-button tons and the concentrator of calls and the connection between
that you want to associate to the connection brackets/telephone. the concentrator of calls and the audio unit.

ENTRANCE PANELS
BUILDINGS

Nothing works If intermittent tones can be heard on the entrance

Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that panel when a call is made.
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Check The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply is 15 Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
±10% Vdc. Check for the existence of a short circuit and rectify gramming switch of the device is in ON position. Check con-
this. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the power supply nections D1 and D2 from the audio unit to all the devices.
+ and – terminals, and check that the voltage between + and – Check connections D3, D2 of the equipments in the installation.
is 15 ±10%Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- If you cannot find the fault, the connection bracket/telephone,
thing wrong with the power supply. the audio unit or some other equipment in the installation may
The lighting push-button pilot does not light up. have broken down.

Check that the voltage between + and – in the audio unit is 15 No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something entrance panel.
wrong with the audio unit. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
The card holders do not light up. fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.

Check that the voltage between 9 and 10 in the audio unit, One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
with the lighting push-button activated, is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check entrance panel.
whether the lamp is burnt out. Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
You cannot hear any sound on the entrance panel base of telephone. Check the hanging-up button on the base of
when a call is made. the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
be something wrong with the telephone.
Check the connection between 7 in the audio unit and the
push-buttons. Check the connection between the concentrator of You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
calls and the push-buttons and between the concentrator of calls tor/telephone.
and the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be Check the volume control on the devices (on the panel). If
something wrong with the concentrator of calls or the audio unit. you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
When a call is made, the monitors/telephones ring the audio unit.
but confirmation of the call cannot be heard on the You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
entrance panel. tor/telephone.
Check the volume control of the entrance panel audio unit. If Check the cable connections between the receiver ande the
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the base of monitor/telephone. Check the hanging-up button on
audio unit. the base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
If the red indicator light flash continuosly. there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.

Check wether there is a short-circuit in the connections D1, D2 The sound produces feedback.
from the audio unit to all the devices. Check connections D3, D2 Adjust the feedback control of the audio unit. If the feedback
and D5, D4 of the equipments in the installation. If you cannot persists, adjust the volume using the volume controls of the
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. audio unit.

554
 The electric lock doesn’t work. Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
Check that the voltage between 11 and 12 in the audio unit is ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
15 ± 10% Vdc, by making a bridge between terminals 22 and Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
18. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
with the electric lock. monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
Making a call from one of the external entrance nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
panels does not disable the entrance panels of the the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection
building which is being called. brackets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something
Check connections D3 and D2 from the entrance panel to the wrong with the monitor.
estate identifying accessories of the building. If the fault cannot Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
be found, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
the identifying accessory. been defined as the main panel. Check connections D3 and
The video system does not work in any monitor: D2 between different entrance panels. If you cannot find the
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- fault there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
ving a call,.. Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between + flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and bracket or the monitor.
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the + and
Blank screen in all the monitors.
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
be something wrong with the power supply. T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the T2+, T2–
and T4+, T4– connections of the twisted pair between the dif-
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto
ferent video units. Check the connection between the video and
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a
the audio units. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
call,..
check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 15
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. ±10% Vdc. Check the connections of the twisted pair from the
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection video unit to the monitors. If failure is not detected, there may
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the be something wrong with the video unit, any tap-off or any
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15% splitter.
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong
Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
with the monitor.
Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted
to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
been defined as the main panel. building.
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
tage between + and – of the splitters is 15 ±10% Vdc. Check that Check the connection between the connection bracket and
twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the in the connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection from
one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences of 220 ohms the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detec-
are connected in the unused terminals T2+, T2–. Check twisted ted there may be something wrong with the connection brac-
pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the ket, monitor or tap-off of the floor.
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.

555
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)
Nothing works may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make when a call is made.
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect Check connections D4, D5; D3, D2 and D1, D2 between devi-
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check ces. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong with
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, the connection bracket/telephone or the audio unit.
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit.
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc- entrance panel.
tory do not light up.
Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of
One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is
entrance panel.
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with
directory. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been
there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
pressed.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has
tor/telephone.
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key-
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones on the
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
be something wrong with the keypad. thing wrong with the audio unit.

In the display the key which has been pressed does You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni-
not appear. tor/telephone.

Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the audio there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the The sound produces feedback.
keypad and the audio unit. Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio
In the display appear "88888". unit.
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is 15 The electric lock does not work.
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
wrong with the audio unit. electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12
The text “F0” flashes in the display. of the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault,
Check connections D4, D5; D3, D2 and D1, D2 between devi- there may be something wrong with the electric lock.
ces. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong with The video system does not work in any monitor:
the audio unit. auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
The text “F1” flashes in the display. ving a call,..

Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong the monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply bet-
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit. ween + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit
and rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minu-
The text “F2” flashes in the display.
te and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all
Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the entran- the + and – terminals from the power supply unit and check that
ce panel contains a value that is possible for the particular model voltage between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct,
of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find the fault, there there may be something wrong with the power supply.

556
 Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Check the connections of the twisted pair from the video unit to
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a the monitors. If failure is not detected, there may be something
call,.. wrong with the video unit, any tap-off or any splitter.
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15% check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
with the monitor. thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted building.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. Check the connection between the connection bracket and
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
main one. monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol- distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc. Check that in the connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection from
twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detec-
connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed ted there may be something wrong with the connection brac-
from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the ket, monitor or tap-off of the floor.
120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the
one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences of 220 ohms
are connected in the unused terminals T2+, T2–. Check twisted
pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pictu-
re, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection brac-
kets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something wrong
with the monitor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the
main one. Check connections D3 and D2 between different
entrance panels. If you cannot find the fault there may be some-
thing wrong with the audio unit.
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led flash.
Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the connection bracket or
the monitor.
Blank screen in all the monitors.
Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the T2+, T2– and
T4+, T4– connections of the twisted pair between the different
video units. Check the connection between the video and the
audio units. If splitters have been used in the distribution, check
that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc.

557
CONCIERGE PANEL

Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly main panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different wrong with the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the main
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown entrance panel.
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
tent tones when a call is made.
Nothing works The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure the programming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± in ON position (on the left). If necessary, Check connections D1
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. and D2 from the audio unit to the connection brackets/telepho-
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and nes. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and with the telephone, or the audio unit.
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- be heard from the concierge panel.
thing wrong with the power supply unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
pressed. volume control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numeric key- monitor/telephone.
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
something wrong with the numeric keypad. concierge panel.
In the display the key which has been pressed does Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
not appear. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is The concierge unit panel cannot be heard on any
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit monitor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
ric keypad and the audio unit. you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
In the display appear "88888". the audio unit.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something tor/telephone.
wrong with the audio unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
The text “F0” flashes in the display. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections of may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in ge unit.
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS cierge unit has been picked up.
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The text “F3” flashes in the display.
Ensure that the entrance panel of the external point of entry con-
nected to the concierge panel is configured as the main external
panel. Check the BUS connection between the concierge unit
panel and the entrance panel which has been configured as the

558
HOUSING ESTATES OF BUILDINGS WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD.
1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE) WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH KEYPAD

Ensure that the entrance panels of the installation are correctly Before keying the connection bracket/telephone code into
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the diffe- the main entrance panel, check that you have communication
rent positions of the configuration menu are the same as those with the main entrance panel of the building.
shown in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. Remember that the panel emits a confirmation tone once the
Programming the connection brackets/telephones of each connection bracket/telephone has received the code (connec-
dwelling must be carried out from the entrance panel of the dwe- tion bracket/telephone programmed). If the connection brac-
lling. Ensure that the entrance panel of each dwelling is configu- ket/telephone cannot be programmed, check the connection
red as the main panel (value ‘P’ in position 1 of the configuration between the keypad and the audio unit.
menu).

ENTRANCE PANELS
BUILDINGS/ EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

Nothing works ± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that wrong with the audio unit.
the green led of the power supply to the audio unit is lit. Make The text “F0” flashes in the display.
sure that the voltage between – and + of the power supply unit Check if there is a short circuit in the connections D4, D5;
is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, D3, D2 and D1, D2 between devices. If no fault is detected,
fix them. Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
minute and then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
all the – and + terminals from the power supply unit and check
that the voltage between – and + is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
there may be something wrong with the power supply unit. audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something
wrong with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The cardholders of the entrance panel with direc-
tory do not light up. The text “F2” flashes in the display.

Make sure that the voltage between – and + of the power Ensure that position 1 of the configuration menu of the
supply unit is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections of entrance panel contains a value that is possible for the parti-
the entrance panel with directory to the audio unit. If no fault is cular model of entrance panel being used. If you cannot find
detected, there may be something wrong with the panel with the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
directory. If the entrance panel emits intermittent tones
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been when a call is made.
pressed. The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone:
Check the volume control of the beep confirming that a key has Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that the pro-
been pressed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the key- gramming switch of the device is in ON position (on the left).
pad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the Check connections D4, D5; D3, D2 and D1, D2 between devi-
keypad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may ces. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong with
be something wrong with the keypad. the connection bracket/telephone or the audio unit.

In the display the key which has been pressed does No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
not appear. entrance panel.

Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the
sed. Check that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the – and + connections from the audio One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
unit to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the entrance panel.
keypad and the audio unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
In the display appear "88888". base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
Ensure that the voltage between – and + of the audio unit is 15 there may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.

559
 You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni- pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. If you cannot find the
tor/telephone. fault, there may be something wrong with the video unit.
Check the volume control on the monitors/telephones on the Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic-
entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation.
thing wrong with the audio unit. Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
You cannot hear the entrance panel on one moni- Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
tor/telephone. monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
Check the cable connections between the receiver and the nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection
may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone. brackets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something
The sound produces feedback. wrong with the monitor.

Lower the sound level using the volume controls on the audio Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
unit. Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has
The electric lock does not work. been defined as the main panel. Check connections D3 and
D2 between different entrance panels. If you cannot find the
Check the connections of the keypad. Check that when the
fault there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
electric lock button is pressed, the voltage between 11 and 12 of
the keypad is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
may be something wrong with the electric lock. Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
The video system does not work in any monitor: flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei- the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
ving a call,.. bracket or the monitor.

Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds the Blank screen in all the monitors.
monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply between + Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rec- T1+ and T1– terminals of the video unit. Check the T2+, T2–
tify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and and T4+, T4– connections of the twisted pair between the dif-
reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the + and ferent video units. Check the connection between the video and
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that voltage the audio units. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
be something wrong with the power supply. ±15% Vdc. Check the connections of the twisted pair from the
Video system does not work in one monitor: auto video unit to the monitors. If failure is not detected, there may
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a be something wrong with the video unit, any tap-off or any
call,.. splitter.

Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON position. Blank screen on all the monitors of a dwelling.
Check that the red led of the monitor is on. Check the connection Check twisted pair's connection from the connection bracket
between the connection bracket and the monitor. Check that the to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the distribution,
voltage between + and – of the connection bracket is 14 ± 15% check that the voltage between + and – of the splitters is 14
Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may be something wrong Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
with the monitor. thing wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of the
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted building.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Blank screen on one of the monitors of a dwelling.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. Check the connection between the connection bracket and
Make sure that for each building a single entrance panel has the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
been defined as the main panel. monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the vol-
in the connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection from
tage between + and – of the splitters is 14 ±15% Vdc. Check that
the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detec-
twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have been
ted there may be something wrong with the connection brac-
connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be removed
ket, monitor or tap-off of the floor.
from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in series cut the
120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brackets, but from the
one at the end of the line; c) check that resistences of 220 ohms
are connected in the unused terminals T2+, T2–. Check twisted

560
CONCIERGE PANEL

Ensure that the concierge panel of the installation is correctly you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
configured. To do so, check that the values selected in the different the audio unit of the concierge panel or of the main entrance
positions of the configuration menu are the same as those shown panel.
in the corresponding diagram or in chapter 6. If the concierge monitor/telephone emits intermit-
tent tones when a call is made.
Nothing works The call tone cannot be heard on the monitor/telephone of the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply units. Ensure that dwelling: Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check that
the green led of the power supply to the audIo unit is lit. Make sure the programming switch of the connection bracket/telephone is
that the voltage between + and – of the power supply unit is 15 ± in ON position (on the left). If necessary, Check connections D1
10% Vdc. Check if there are any short circuits and, if so, fix them. and D2 from the audio unit to the connection brackets/telepho-
Disconnect the power supply unit from the mains for 1 minute and nes. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
then reconnect it. If the problem persists, disconnect all the + and with the connection bracket/telephone, or the audio unit.
– terminals from the power supply unit and check that the voltage No monitor/telephone and no entrance panel can
between + and – is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it is not, there may be some- be heard from the concierge unit panel.
thing wrong with the power supply unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
There is no audio confirmation that a key has been base of the concierge monitor/telephone. Check the reception
pressed. volume control in the concierge panel. If you cannot find the
Check that the voltage between + and – of the keypad is 15 ± fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit or the
10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the numerical key- monitor/telephone.
pad to the power supply unit. If no fault is detected, there may be One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
something wrong with the numerical keypad. concierge panel.
In the display the key which has been pressed does Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
not appear. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check if there is audio confirmation that a key has been pres- may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
sed. Check that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is The concierge panel cannot be heard on any moni-
15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the + and – connections from the audio unit tor/telephone or on any entrance panel.
to the power supply unit. Check the connection between the nume- Check the emission volume control in the concierge panel. If
rical keypad and the audio unit. you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
In the display appear "88888". the audio unit.
Ensure that the voltage between + and – of the audio unit is 15 Concierge panel cannot be heard from one moni-
± 10% Vdc. If the voltage is correct, there may be something tor/telephone.
wrong with the audio unit. Check the cable connections between the receiver and the
The text “F0” flashes in the display. base of the monitor/telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
Ensure that there is no short circuit in the D5, D4 connections of may be something wrong with the monitor/telephone.
the audio unit and check the connections with the equipment of the It is not possible to call dwellings from the concier-
installation. If necessary, check whether there is a short circuit in ge unit.
the D1, D2 connections of the audio unit to the connection brac- Ensure that the receiver of the monitor/telephone of the con-
kets/telephones. Ensure that the other panels connected to the BUS cierge unit has been picked up.
have the correct power supply. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the audio unit.
The text “F1” flashes in the display.
Check the connection between the numerical keypad and the
audio unit. If no fault is detected, there may be something wrong
with the numerical keypad or the audio unit.
The text “F3” flashes in the display.
Ensure the external entrance panel connected to the concierge
unit panel is configured as the main external panel. Check the BUS
connection between the concierge unit panel and the external
entrance panel which has been configured as the main panel. If

561
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
STANDARD INSTALLATION
There is no image in the - , + connections of the video unit. Check that the volta-
Check that the channel to which the television has been tuned ge between the – and + terminals of the video unit is 15 Vdc
is the same as that selected in the modulator. Make sure that the ±10%. Check the connection of the coaxial cable from the
correct standard has been selected for your country. Check the video unit to the modulator. If you cannot find the fault, there
mains voltage in the modulator. If the LED operating indicator of may be something wrong with the modulator or with the video
the modulator is not lit up, check whether there is a short circuit unit.
O

TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN A STANDARD DIGITAL DOOR ENTRY

INSTALLATION WITH ENTRANCE PANEL WITH PUSHBUTTONS
If any type of problem related to the electronic door entry mains voltage in the modulator. If the LED operating indicator
BS

system is encountered, consult the data sheets of the correspon- of the modulator is not lit up, check whether there is a short cir-
ding audio unit. cuit in the - , + connections of the video unit. Check that the vol-
tage between the – and + terminals of the video unit is 15 Vdc
±10%. Check the connection of the coaxial cable from the
There is no image
video unit to the modulator. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check that the channel to which the television has been tuned may be something wrong with the modulator or with the video
is the same as that selected in the modulator. Make sure that the unit.
O
correct standard has been selected for your country. Check the
LE
TE

562
Especificaciones sujetas a modificación sin previo aviso.

ACCES CONTROL SYSTEM

ALCAD diseña y fabrica sus productos con las mejores características posibles, sin embargo los productos fabricados actualmente
pueden incorporar modificaciones para mejorar sus prestaciones y para adaptarse a nuevos componentes. Las nuevas especificaciones
pueden no aparecer en este manual. ALCAD revisará las especificaciones en próximas ediciones de este manual técnico.
ALCAD mantiene una web dónde se pueden consultar los datos de los productos más recientes y las especificaciones actualizadas
de todos los productos.

S Y S T E M S
ACCES CONTROL SYSTEM
D I G I T A L S Y S T E M S

D I G I T A L
1500-11-07

T E C H N I C A L M A N U A L